earvin “magic” johnson park / phase 1a project design …

COMMUNITY DEVELOPMENT COMMISSION

OF THE COUNTY OF LOS ANGELES

EARVIN “MAGIC” JOHNSON PARK / PHASE 1A

PROJECT DESIGN MANUALSUBMITTED 26 JULY 2018 (BID SET)

61

7 W

ES

T S

EV

EN

TH

ST

, S

UIT

E 3

04

LO

S A

NG

EL

ES

, C

AL

IFO

RN

IA 9

00

17

T:

21

3.6

94

.38

00

F:

21

3.6

94

.38

01

WW

W.A

HB

E.C

OM

VOLUME 4DIVISIONS 27-33

DESIGN TEAM

CLIENT: COMMUNITY DEVELOPMENT COMISSION700 West Main StreetAlhambra, CA 91801T: 626-586-1773

LANDSCAPE ARCHITECT: AHBE LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTS 617 West Seventh Street, Suite 304 Los Angeles, California 90017 T: 213-694-3800 F: 213-694-3801

CIVIL ENGINEER: CWE1561 East Orangethorpe Avenue, Suite 240Fullerton, CA 92831 T: 714-526-7500 x210

WATER FEATURE & LAKE DESIGN:PACE17520 Newhope Street, Suite 200Fountain Valley, CA 92708T: 714-481-7211

SIGNAGE AND GRAPHICS:SELBERT PERKINS DESIGN432 Culver BoulevardPlaya Del Rey, CA T: 310-822-5223 x205

GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEER:GEOTECHNICAL PROFESSIONALS INC. (GPI)5736 Corporate AvenueCypress, CA 90630T: 714-220-2211

ARBORIST:CARLBERG ASSOCIATEST: 310-451-4804

STRUCTURAL ENGINEER: KPFF 6080 Center Drive, Suite 300Los Angeles, CA 90045T: 310-665-1536

IRRIGATION CONSULTANT: SWEENEY AND ASSOCIATES38730 Sky Canyon Drive, Suite CMurrieta, CA 92563T: 951-461-6830 ACOUSTICS:VENEKLASEN ASSOCIATES1711 16th StreetSanta Monica, CA T: 310-450-1733

COST ESTIMATOR:TBD CONSULTANTS7083 Hollywood BoulevardLos Angeles, CAT: 424-343-2652

AGRONOMIST:WALLACE LABORATORIES365 Coral CircleEl Segundo, CA 90245T: 310-615-0116

COMMUNITY OUTREACH:THE ROBERT GROUP3108 Los Feliz BoulevardLos Angeles, CA 90039T: 323-669-9300

ARCHITECT: PAUL MURDOCH ARCHITECTS5510 Lincoln Boulevard, Suite 250Los Angeles, CA 90094T: 310-358-0993

MEP:INTEGRAL GROUP 15760 Ventura Boulevard, Suite 1902Encino, CA 91436T: 323-825-9955

LIGHTING DESIGN:HORTON LEES BROGDEN8580 Washington BoulevardCulver City, CAT: 310-837-0929

FOOD SERVICE:LASCHOBER & SOVICH, INC.20301 Ventura FwyWoodland Hills, CA 91364T: 818-713-9011

SPECIFICATIONS:KM ARCHITECTURAL CONSULTINGT: 213-503-2064

RESTORATION ECOLOGIST:LAND IQ RESTORATION3791 Wade St.Los Angeles, CA 90066T: 310-390-3635

VAPOR MITIGATION:RINCON CONSULTANTS205 East 1st Street, Suite 301Los Angeles, CA 90012T: 760-517-9135

PROJECT MANUAL

EARVIN ‘MAGIC’ JOHNSON PARK

Los Angeles, CA

Bis Set Submittal, Phase 1A Volume 4

July 26, 2018

PREPARED BY

AHBE LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTS

617 West 7th Street, Suite 304 Los Angeles, CA 90017

(213) 694-3800

BID SET SUBMITTAL July 26, 2018

EARVIN MAGIC JOHNSON PARK – PHASE 1A TABLE OF CONTENTS LOS ANGELES, CA 00 1010-1 COUNTY OF LOS ANGELES COMMUNITY DEVELOPMENT COMMISSION AHBE PROJECT NO. 116030.00

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Section Section Title

00 0101 COVER PAGE 00 0102 PROJECT DIRECTORY 00 1010 TABLE OF CONTENTS DIVISION 27 – COMMUNICATIONS 27 0000 BASIC COMMUNICATIONS REQUIREMENTS 27 0526 COMMUNICATIONS BONDING 27 0811 COMMUNICATIONS TWISTED PAIR TESTING 27 1100 COMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT ROOMS 27 1513 COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL PAIR CABLING 27 4116 INTEGRATED AUDIOVISUAL SYSTEMS DIVISION 28 – ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY 28 0000 BASIC SECURITY REQUIREMENTS 28 0513 SECURITY SYSTEM CABLING 28 0528 PATHWAYS FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY 28 0553 SECURITY SYSTEM LABELING 28 0800 SECURITY SYSTEM ACCEPTANCE TESTING 28 1300 ACCESS CONTROL AND MONITORING SYSTEM 28 1600 INTRUSION ALARM SYSTEM 28 2300 VIDEO SURVEILLANCE SYSTEM 28 3111 DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM (DELEGATED DESIGN) DIVISION 31 – EARTHWORK 31 1100 CLEARING AND GRUBBING 31 2000 EARTHWORK 31 2200 GRADING 31 2313 SUBGRADE PREPARATION 31 2333 TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING DIVISION 32 – EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS 32 0130 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE OF LANDSCAPE SITE IMPROVEMENTS 32 1123 AGGREGATE BASE COURSE 32 1216 ASPHALT CONCRETE PAVEMENT 32 1316 DECORATIVE CONCRETE PAVING


EARVIN MAGIC JOHNSON PARK – PHASE 1A TABLE OF CONTENTS LOS ANGELES, CA 00 1010-2 COUNTY OF LOS ANGELES COMMUNITY DEVELOPMENT COMMISSION AHBE PROJECT NO. 116030.00

32 1500 AGGREGATE SURFACING 32 1540 DECOMPOSED GRANITE 32 1613 CURBS AND GUTTERS 32 1623 SIDEWALKS 32 1713 PARKING BUMPERS 32 1723 PAVEMENT MARKINGS 32 1723.33 PLASTIC PAVEMENT MARKINGS 32 1726 TACTILE WARNING SURFACING 32 1816 SYNTHETIC RESILIENT SURFACING 32 3113 CHAIN-LINK FENCES AND GATES 32 1319 DECORATIVE METAL FENCES AND GATES 32 3213 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE RETAINING WALLS 32 3236 GABION RETAINING WALLS 32 3300 SITE FURNISHINGS 32 8400 LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION 32 9113 SOIL PREPARATION 32 9119 LANDSCAPE GRADING 32 9219 SEEDING 32 9222 HYDROSEEDING 32 9223 SODDING 32 9300 LANDSCAPE PLANTING 32 9301 TEMPORARY LANDSCAPE PLANTING 32 9350 PALM PLANTING DIVISION 33 – UTILITIES 33 1100 WATER SYSTEM 33 1219 WATER UTILITY DISTRIBUTION FOR FIRE HYDRANTS 33 3100 SANITARY SEWAGE SYSTEMS 33 4100 STORM DRAINAGE SYSTEMS

END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS VOLUME 4

BID SET SUBMITTALJuly 26, 2018

EARVIN MAGIC JOHNSON PARK – PHASE 1A BASIC COMMUNICATIONS REQUIREMENTSLOS ANGELES, CA 27 0000-1COUNTY OF LOS ANGELES COMMUNITY DEVELOPMENT COMMISSIONAHBE PROJECT NO. 116030.01 INTEGRAL GROUP

SECTION 27 0000BASIC COMMUNICATIONS REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes general administrative and procedural requirements for Division 27, and is intended to supplement, not supersede, the general requirements specified in Division 00.

B. The requirements described herein include the following:

1. References

2. Definitions

3. System Description and Project Conditions

4. Submittals

5. Quality Assurance

6. Delivery, Storage, and Handling

7. Scheduling

8. Warranty

9. Product Substitutions

10. Project Management and Coordination Services

11. Permits and Inspections

12. Field Quality Control

13. Project Closeout and Record Documents

C. Related Items

1. General and Supplementary Conditions: General provisions of the Prime

2. Contract and Divisions 00 and 01 apply to Division 27.

3. Consult other Divisions and Sections, determine the extent and character of related work, and coordinate Work of Division 27 with that specified elsewhere to produce a complete and operable installation.

4. County of Los Angeles Internal Services Department standards

5. Section 27 0526, “Communication Bonding”



6. Section 27 0811, “Communication Twisted Pair Testing”

7. Section 27 1100, “Communication Equipment Rooms”

8. Section 27 1513, “Communication Horizontal Twisted Pair Cabling”

9. Section 27 4116, “Integrated Audio Video Equipment”

1.2 REFERENCES

A. General

1. Codes, standards, and industry manuals/guidelines listed by reference, including revisions by issuing authority, form a part of this specification section to extent indicated. Consider such codes and/or standards a part of this specification as though fully repeated herein.

2. Standards listed are identified by issuing authority, authority abbreviation, designation number, title or other designation established by issuing authority. Standards subsequently referenced herein are referred to by issuing authority abbreviation and standard designation.

3. Reference to codes, standards, specifications and recommendations of technical societies, trade organizations and governmental agencies shall mean that latest edition of such publications adopted and published prior to submittal of the bid unless otherwise specifically stated.

B. Codes: Perform work and furnish materials and equipment under Division 27 in accordance with applicable requirements of the latest edition of governing codes, rules and regulations including but not limited to the following minimum standards, whether statutory or not:

1. California Code of Regulations (CCR):

a. Title 8, “Industrial Relations”

1) Chapter 3.22, “California Occupational Safety and Health Regulations (CAL/OSHA)”

b. Title 24, “California Building Standards Code”

1) Part 1, “California Building Standards Administrative Code”

2) Part 2, “California Building Code” (CBC)

3) Part 3, “California Electrical Code” (CEC)

4) Part 11, “California Green Building Standards Code” (CALGeen)”

2. National Fire Protection Agency (NFPA)

a. NFPA 70, “National Electrical Code” (NEC)

b. NFPA 75, “Protection of Information Technology Equipment”



c. NFPA 262, “Standard Method of Testing Travel and Smoke of Wires and Cables for Use in Air-Handling Spaces”, 2007

3. United States Department of Labor (DOL) Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) Regulations (Standards - 29 CFR)

a. Part 1910, “Occupational Safety and Health Standards”

b. Part 1926, “Safety and Health Regulations for Construction”

4. Code of Federal Regulations (CFR) Title 47 “Telecommunication”, Chapter I “Federal Communications Commission (FCC)”:

a. Part 15, “Radio Frequency Devices and Radiation Limits”

b. Part 24, “Personal Communications Services”

c. Part 27, “Miscellaneous Wireless Communications Services”

d. Part 68, “Connection of Terminal Equipment to the Telephone Network”

5. International Code Council

a. International Building Code (2009)

b. International Fire Code (2009)

c. ICC Performance Code (2009)

6. Other national, state, and local binding building and fire codes

C. Standards: Perform Work and furnish materials and equipment under Division 27 in accordance with the latest editions of the following standards as applicable:

1. 1. Underwriters Laboratories (UL): Applicable listings and ratings, including but not limited to the following standards:

a. UL 444, “Communications Cables”

b. UL 497, “Protectors for Paired-Conductor Communication Circuits”

c. UL 497A, “Secondary Protectors for Communications Circuits”

d. UL 497B, “Protectors for Data Communications and Fire-Alarm Circuits”

e. UL 497C, “Protectors for Coaxial Communications Circuits”

f. UL 1651, “Optical Fiber Cable”

g. UL1655, “Community-Antenna Television Cables”

h. UL 1666, “Test for Flame Propagation Height of Electrical and Optical-Fiber Cable installed Vertically in Shafts”



i. UL 1690, “Data-Processing Cable “

j. UL 1963, “Communications-Circuit Accessories”

2. Telecommunications Industry Association (TIA) 568 Series:

a. ANSI/TIA-568-C.0, “Generic Telecommunications Cabling for Customer

b. Premises”

c. ANSI/TIA-568-C.1, “Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling

d. Standards - Part 1 General Requirements”

e. ANSI/TIA-568-C.2, “Balanced Twisted Pair Telecommunications Cabling and Components”

f. ANSI/TIA-568-C.3, “Optical Fiber Cabling Components”

3. ANSI/TIA-569-B, “Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications

Pathways and Spaces”

4. ANSI/TIA/EIA-598-B, “Optical Fiber Cable Color Coding”

5. ANSI/TIA-606-B, “Administration Standard for Telecommunications

Infrastructure”

6. ANSI-TIA-607-B, “Generic Telecommunications Bonding and Grounding

(Earthing) for Customer Premises”

7. ANSI/TIA-758-A, “Customer-Owned Outside Plant Telecommunications Infrastructure Standard”, including the following addenda”

8. ANSI/TIA-1005, “Telecommunications Infrastructure Standard for Industrial

Premises”

9. EIA testing standards

10. Insulated Cable Engineers Association (ICEA):

a. ANSI/ICEA S-83-596-1994, “Fiber Optic Premises Distribution Cable”

b. ANSI/ICEA S-87-640-1999, “Fiber Optic Outside Plant Communications

c. Cable”

d. ANSI/ICEA S-90-661-2002, “Category 3, 5, and 5e Individually Unshielded Twisted Pair Indoor Cable for Use In General Purpose and LAN Communication Wiring Systems”



e. ICEA S-102-700-2004, “ICEA Standard For Category 6 Individually Unshielded Twisted Pair Indoor Cables (With Or Without An Overall Shield) For Use In Communications Wiring Systems Technical Requirements”

11. Building Industry Consulting Services International (BICSI):

a. Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual (TDMM)

b. Customer-Owned Outside Plant Design Manual Wireless Design Reference Manual (WDRM)

c. Network Design Reference Manual (NDRM)

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. The Definitions of Divisions 00 and 01 shall apply to Division 27 sections.

B. In addition to those Definitions of Divisions 00 and 01, the following list of terms as used in this specification defined as follows:

1. “As directed”: As directed or instructed by the Owner, or their authorized representative

2. “AHJ”: Authority Having Jurisdiction

3. “Cabling”: A system comprised of cables, wire, cords, and connecting hardware (e.g., cables, termination apparatus, patch panels, blocks, connectors, outlets, labeling, etc.)

4. “Connect”: To install required patch cords, equipment cords, crossconnect wire, etc. to complete an electronic or optical signal circuit

5. “Cord”: a length of cordage having connectors at each end. The term “Cord” is synonymous with the term “Jumper” and “Lead”

6. “Cable Highway”: Area under the raised floor reserved for the structured cabling primary pathway. The cables lay on the floor in a two foot wide by 6 inch high area between the raised floor pedestals.

7. “Engineer”: Integral Group

8. “Furnish”: To purchase, procure, acquire, and deliver complete with related accessories

9. “General Contractor”: successful bidder

10. “Identifier”: A unique code assigned to an element of the Telecommunications infrastructure that links it to its corresponding record

11. “Install”: To set in place, join, unite, fasten, link, attach, set up or otherwise connect together and test before turning over to the Owner, parts, items, or equipment supplied by contractor or others. Make installation complete and ready for regular operation

12. “IOR”: Inspector Of Record

13. “ISP”: Inside Plant



14. “NEC”: National Electrical Code (NFPA 70)

15. “NEMA”: National Electrical Manufacturers Association

16. “NFPA”: National Fire Protection Agency

17. “NIC”: Not In Contract (work or equipment)

18. “OFE”: Owner Furnished Equipment

19. “OSP”: Outside Plant

20. “Owner”: LA County Department of Parks and Recreation

21. “Pigtail”: a length of cordage having connectors at one end

22. “Provide”: To furnish, transport, install, erect, connect, test and turn over to the Owner, complete and ready for regular operation

23. “UL”: Underwriters Laboratories

1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION AND PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. In circumstances where the Specifications and Drawings conflict, the Drawings shall govern quantity and the Specifications shall govern quality.

1.5 UNIT PRICING

A. Telecom Devices – During the Bid, Submit the following.

1. Cost to add all outlet types shown in the outlet schedule on drawing T0.01. Unit price should include one entry for each outlet type and include everything that is required to add to the project (jacks, cables, patch panel ports, labeling, grommets, patch cords, ext). Provide a unit price for each outlet type shown in the outlet schedule.

2. Deductive Cost to delete outlet types shown in the outlet schedule on drawing T0.01. Unit price should include one entry for each outlet type and include everything that is required to delete from the project (jacks, cables, patch panel ports, labeling, grommets, patch cords, ext), Provide a deduct unit price for each outlet type shown in the outlet schedule.

1.6 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit required submittals to LA County and Architect in the quantities and formats as required under the general contract. In the absence of requirements, provide as described in the following with reference to quantity and format.

B. Failure to comply with requirements in part or whole shall constitute grounds for rejection.

C. Resubmittals: For resubmittals, provide a cover letter with the resubmittal that lists the action taken and revisions made to each product in response to the Engineer’s submittal review



comments. Lack of this actions-taken cover letter shall constitute grounds for non-review and/or rejection of resubmittal packages.

D. Submittal Description: Product Data

1. Obtain written approval from the Engineer for the product data submittal prior to materials and equipment purchase order and prior to installation.

2. Quantity and Media: Submit product data as described in Division 01. In the absence of requirements given, submit product data submittal as directed in writing either as an electronic submittal (preferred) via approved means (email, e-transmit, FTP upload, CD-ROM, DVD) or as four printed submittals.

3. Format and Organization – Electronic Submittal:

a. File format shall be PDF, either as a single compiled PDF file or as a PDF portfolio. PDF files should be produced from original electronic media, not scans of printed media. If scans from prints are the only option, annotate electronically, not on the prints prior to scanning.

b. Pages should be letter size (8.5” x 11”)

c. Organize the Content in the following order:

1) Cover

2) Table of Contents (TOC)

3) Statement of Compliance

4) Product Information

5) Seismic Calculations (as required)

d. Clearly and precisely indicate the submitted product and accessories by part number using an electronic annotation (arrow, rectangle, oval, etc.). Where the product data presents “part number builds”, list the exact part number of the submitted products and accessories.

e. Add page numbers in numerical order with no gaps to each page that correctly correspond to the TOC.

f. If submitting via CD-ROM, the disc shall contain all the Cover information.

4. Format and Organization – Printed Submittal:

a. Paper shall be letter size (8.5” x 11”).

b. Package printed submittal using a 3-ring binder, clear-front report cover, or similar.

c. Organize the Content in the following order:

d. Include tabbed separators for improved navigation through the submittal.



5. Clearly, precisely, and permanently indicate the submitted product and accessories by part number using an arrow stamp or other permanent indicator. Where the product data presents “part number builds”, indicate the exact part number of the submitted products and accessories.

6. Content:

a. Cover: Include a cover that clearly displays the following information:

1) Owner name

2) Project name and address

3) Submittal name (e.g., “Product Data Submittal for Telecommunications Equipment Rooms”)

4) Project submittal number

5) Contractor’s submittal number (discretionary)

6) Submittal date; format: Month Day, Year (e.g., “January 1, 2014”)

7) Specification section numbers included in the submittal (e.g., “Section 27 1100”)

8) Contractor name and contact information

b. Table of Contents (TOC): Include a TOC that lists materials by section number, article and paragraph number. Add a brief product description (what it is, size or color or other optional features), manufacturer and part number. List the submittal page number per product.

c. Example heading for TOC:Section Article Paragraph Description Manufacturer Part # Page #

7. Statement of Compliance: Include a “Statement of Compliance” letter or memorandum on the submitter’s company letterhead from the highest ranking employee assigned to this project stating the submittal has been reviewed (quality control check) and is in full compliance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, and listing the submittal’s contents. Wet sign (and stamped, if applicable) the letter.

8. Product Information: Include manufacturer's technical data, product literature, "catalog cuts", data sheets, specifications, and block wiring diagrams (if necessary) that clearly describe the product’s characteristics, physical and dimensional information, electrical performance data, materials used in fabrication, material color and finish, and other relevant information such as test data, typical usage examples, independent test agency information, and storage requirements. Include products listed in the specifications, at a minimum. Include relevant products that will be installed, which are not listed in the specifications.

9. Seismic Calculations: Include structural calculations for anchorage and seismic restraint of floor-mounted equipment (such as racks, frames, cabinets), wall-mounted equipment (such as video display equipment, etc.), and overhead-mounted equipment (such as



cable tray, overhead cable support, etc.) in conformance with CCR, Title 24, Part 2 (CBC), Section 1601A. Calculations shall be based on fully loaded equipment and support systems. Calculations shall demonstrate that the equipment and support systems will remain attached to the mounting surface during and after experiencing seismic forces in conformance with the CBC. A Structural Engineer registered in the State of California shall prepare Structural Calculations, and shall wet stamp and sign them. Submit structural calculations to the City of Mountain View for review and approvals.

E. Submittal Description: Shop Drawings

1. Prior to the start of work, submit shop drawings and obtain written approval from the Engineer for the shop drawings submittal.

2. Quantity and Media: Submit shop drawings as described in Division 01. In the absence of requirements given, submit shop drawings as directed in writing either an electronic submittal (preferred) via approved means (email, e- transmit, FTP upload, CD-ROM, DVD) or four printed and bound sets on bond.

3. Format:

a. Produce shop drawings using AutoCAD, or other computer design application that can save files to AutoCAD-compatible files.

b. Use the same sheet size as the contract drawings.

c. Use the same title block as the contract drawings, modified to include contractor information.

d. Text: 3/32” - 1/8” high when plotted at full size.

e. Use identical symbols as those in the contract drawings. Screen background information.

f. Plot system components (symbols, outlet, devices, pathways, cable routes, etc.) and text using a heavier line weight sufficient enough to stand out against background information.

g. Scaling:

4. Content

a. Cover Letter: Accompany each shop drawing submittal with a cover letter stating that the shop drawings have been thoroughly reviewed by the Contractor and are in full compliance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. Have the person who prepared the submittal sign (and stamped, if applicable) the cover letter and include a drawing index. Failure to comply with this requirement shall constitute grounds for rejection of submittal.

b. Drawings: Shop drawing submittals shall consist of symbols list, point-to- point diagrams, block diagrams, riser diagrams, line diagrams, floor plans, reflected ceiling plans, enlarged room plans, wall and rack elevations, installation details, and other aspects of the system. Include detailed labeling examples for cables, outlets, termination apparatus, devices, equipment, etc.



c. Seismic Calculations: Include structural calculations for anchorage and seismic restraint of floor-mounted equipment (such as racks, frames, cabinets), wall-mounted equipment (such as video display equipment, etc.), and overhead-mounted equipment (such as cable tray, overhead cable support, etc.) in conformance with CCR, Title 24, Part 2 (CBC), Section 1601A. Calculations shall be based on fully loaded equipment and support systems. Calculations shall demonstrate that the equipment and support systems will remain attached to the mounting surface during and after experiencing seismic forces in conformance with the CBC. A Structural Engineer registered in the State of California shall prepare Structural Calculations, and shall wet stamp and sign them. Submit structural calculations to the City of Mountain View for review and approvals.

F. Submittal Description: As-Built Drawings

1. Quantity and Media: Submit as-built drawings as described in Division 01. In the absence of requirements given, submit as-built drawings as directed in writing as electronic files via CD-ROM or DVD and four printed and bound sets on bond.

2. Format:

a. Produce as-built drawings using AutoCAD, or other computer design application that can save files to AutoCAD-compatible files.

b. Use the same sheet size as the contract drawings.

c. Use the same title block as the contract drawings, modified to include contractor information.

d. Text: 3/32” - 1/8” high when plotted at full size.

e. Use symbols identical to the symbols shown on the contract drawings. Screen background information.

f. Plot system components (symbols, outlet, devices, pathways, cable routes, etc.) and text using a heavier line weight sufficient enough to stand out against background information.

g. Electronic files shall be native format and plotted PDF files. The file names shall include the sheet number.

3. Content:

a. Submit as-built drawings that fully represent actual installed conditions and that incorporate modifications made during the course of construction.

b. Symbols List

c. Diagrams, such as (but not limited to) point-to-point diagrams, block diagrams, riser diagrams, line diagrams, and other diagrams that conceptually describe the system

d. Floor Plans and Reflected Ceiling Plans: Scale plans at 1/8”=1’-0”. Plans shall show:



1) Locations and identifiers of telecommunications outlets

2) Routes, types, sizes, and quantities of pathways (such as cable trays, basketway, conduits, hangers, and other pathways)

e. Enlarged Rooms Layouts: Applicable rooms: Server Room, Main Point of Entrance Rooms (MPOE), Main Distrubution Frames (MDFs), Intermediate Distribution Frames (IDFs). Room drawings shall show:

1) Floor layouts – scaled at either 1/4”=1’-0” or 1/2”=1’-0”, showing dimensioned placement of equipment cabinets/frames, rack bays, etc.

2) Overhead layouts – scaled at either 1/4”=1’-0” or 1/2”=1’-0”, showing dimensioned placement of overhead cable support (e.g., cable tray, cable runway, conduit sleeves, etc.)

3) Underfloor layouts – scaled at either 1/4”=1’-0” or 1/2”=1’-0”, showing dimensioned placement of underfloor cable support (e.g., cable tray, cable runway, conduit sleeves, etc.)

4) Rack elevations – scaled at 1”=1’-0”, showing placement of termination apparatus and other equipment installed onto rack bays

5) Wall Elevations – scaled at 1”=1’-0”, showing dimensioned placement of termination apparatus (e.g., termination/crossconnect blocks)

G. Submittal Description: Operation and Maintenance (O&M) Manual

1. Quantity and Media: Submit O&M Manual as described in Division 01. In the absence of requirements given, submit one packaged O&M Manual set.

2. Format and Organization:

a. Include contents in a 3-ring binder with front cover and spine clear pockets for insertion of the Cover information.

b. Cover shall include the following information:

1) Owner Name

2) Project Name and Address

3) Manual Name (e.g., “Operation and Maintenance Manual for

4) Telecommunications Cabling System”)

5) Date; format: Month Day, Year (e.g., “January 1, 2014”)

6) Contractor name and contact information

c. Include a Table of Contents at the beginning that lists the contents.

d. Include tabbed separators for improved navigation through the manual.



3. Content:

a. As-built drawings, as described above, printed on tabloid size (17”x11”) paper

b. As-built drawings, as described above, as electronic files – both native files and plotted PDF files, on CD-ROM/DVD

c. Product catalog/technical information sheets for each component provided under applicable Section (typically, this is similar to the accepted product data submittal), printed on letter size (8.5” x 11”) paper

d. Product catalog/technical information sheets for each component provided, as PDF files on CD-ROM/DVD

e. Warranty certificate from the manufacturer and the Contractor, printed on letter size (8.5” x 11”) paper, wet signed as applicable

f. Manufacturer’s instructions for system or component use

g. Instructions and requirements for proper maintenance (according to the manufacturer) and as to maintain warranty

1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Manufacturer Qualifications

1. Five continuous years, minimum, design and manufacture of the materials and equipment specified herein that they have a quality assurance program in place to assure that the specifications are met. Include in the program, at a minimum, provisions for:

a. Incoming inspection of raw materials

b. In-process inspection and final inspection of the cable product

c. Calibration procedures of test equipment to be used in the qualifications of the product

d. Recall procedures in the event that out of calibration equipment is identified

2. Conform to government standards on quality assurance for applications within these specifications.

B. Contractor Qualifications

1. A current, active, and valid and C7 or C10 California State Contractors License

2. Five, minimum, continuous years’ experience

3. Five, minimum, completed projects similar to scope and cost

4. Evidence of technicians qualified for the work

5. IBEW / CWA union affiliation



C. Materials

1. Materials, support hardware, equipment, parts comprising units, etc., shall be new, unused, without defects and of current manufacturer, materials

2. Use specified products and applications, unless otherwise submitted and approved in writing.

D. Regulatory Requirements

1. Work and materials shall conform to the latest rules of National Board of Fire Underwriters wherever such standards have been established and shall conform to the regulations of the State Fire Marshal, OSHA and the codes of the governing local municipalities. Work under Division 27 shall confirm to the most stringent of the applicable codes.

2. Provide the quality identified within these Specifications and Drawings when codes, standards, regulations, etc. allow Work of lesser quality or extent. The Contract Documents address the minimum requirements for construction.

E. Drawings

1. Follow the general layout shown on the drawings except where other work may conflict with the drawings.

2. Drawings for the work within this Division are essentially diagrammatic within the constraints of the symbology applied.

3. The drawings do not fully represent the entire installation. Drawings indicate the general route for pathways and cables, and show general locations of etc., but a complete system is required.

1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Delivery

1. Do not deliver products to the site until protected storage space is available.

2. Coordinate materials delivery with installation schedule to minimize storage time at jobsite.

3. Deliver materials in manufacturer's original, unopened, undamaged packaging and containers with identification labels (name of the manufacturer, product name and number, type, grade, UL classification, etc.) intact.

4. Immediately replace equipment damaged during shipping at no cost to the

5. Owner, so as not to impact the construction schedule.

B. Storage and Protection



1. Store materials in clean, dry, ventilated space free from temperature and humidity conditions (as recommended by manufacturer) and protected from exposure to harmful weather conditions.

2. Comply with manufacturer's storage requirements for each product. Comply with recommended procedures, precautions or remedies as described in the Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) as applicable.

3. Maintain factory wrapping or provide a heavy canvas/plastic cover to protect units from dirt, water, construction debris, and traffic.

4. Storage outdoors covered by rainproof material is not acceptable.

5. Provide heat where required to prevent condensation or temperature related damage.

C. Handling

1. Handle materials and equipment in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. Handle with care to prevent damage, breakage, denting, and scoring.

2. Do not install damaged materials and equipment. Replace damaged equipment at no cost to the Owner.

1.9 SCHEDULING

A. Unless otherwise specified, the construction schedules of the Sections within Division 27 may be combined into a single, overall schedule.

B. Do not proceed without written approval from the Owner or Owner’s Representative for schedule of this Work.

1.10 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION

A. Project Management and Coordination Services

1. Provide a project manager for the duration of the project to coordinate this Work with other trades. Coordination services, procedures and documentation responsibility include, but are not limited to, the items listed in this section.

2. Review of Shop Drawings Prepared by Other Subcontractors:

a. Obtain copies of shop drawings for equipment provided by others that require telecommunication service connections or interface with work.

b. Thoroughly review other trades’ shop drawings to confirm compliance with the service requirements contained in the Division 27 contract documents. Document discrepancies or deviations as follows:

1) Prepare memo summarizing the discrepancy

2) Submit a copy of the specific shop drawing, indicating via cloud, the discrepancy



c. Prepare and maintain a shop drawing review log indicating the following information:

1) Shop drawing number and brief description of the system/material

2) Date of the review

3) Name of the individual performing the review

4) Indication if follow-up coordination is required

3. Should existing conditions prohibit construction progress as submitted and approved, coordinate the adjusted installed locations with the other contractors (AV, electrical, etc).

B. Concurrent Installation

1. The network will be installed concurrent with the work of Division 27. Coordinate your work with the Owner’s/network integrator’s work. For example, coordinate scope and dates for rack and cabling (terminations) readiness to allow the network integrator to plan and schedule installation of the network equipment (for example, access switches).

C. Role of the Engineer

1. The Owner has retained the Engineer’s services through construction. During construction, the Engineer will work with and assist the Contractor as follows (in general):

a. Review product data and shop drawings submittals for general compliance with the contract drawings and specifications.

b. Provide interpretation and clarification of project contract documents

c. Reply to (and ‘process’) relevant Requests for Information (RFIs)

d. Review changes as they arise, and confirm that the proposed solutions maintain the intended functionality of the system.

e. Review the testing procedures to confirm compliance with industry- accepted practices.

f. Observe the work for general compliance with the Contract Documents and to ensure that the installation meets the design intent of the system, and report progress to the Owner.

D. Use of CAD Files

1. Should the Contractor require the Engineer’s CAD files to produce shop drawings and/or as-built drawings, the Engineer requires the Contractor sign a CAD files release agreement.

1.11 WARRANTY

A. Warrant products and labor provided will, under normal use and service, be free from defects and faulty workmanship for period of 15 years from the date of acceptance. During the warranty



period the entire system shall be kept in operating condition at no additional material or labor costs to the Owner. Refer to warranty requirements in individual sections within Division 27 for additional information.

B. Render service within 24 hours of system failure notification. Note deviations or improvements to this service at the time of bid and obtain written acceptance from the Owner, or Owner’s Representative.

C. Manufacturers of the major system components shall maintain a replacement parts department and provide testing equipment when needed. Provide complete replacement parts within 24 hours during the warranty period.

D. Conformance to certain government standards on quality assurance may be required for some applications outlined in these specifications.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL

A. Materials used shall present no environmental or toxicological hazards as defined by current industry standards and shall comply with OSHA and EPA standards, other applicable federal, state, and local laws.

B. Product numbers are subject to change by the manufacturer without notification. In the event a product number is invalid or conflicts with the written description, notify the Engineer in writing prior to ordering the material and performing installation work.

C. Contractor shall provide 25-warranty end-to-end channel link warranty at completion of the work.

2.2 PRODUCT SUBMITTAL AT TIME OF BID

A. At the time of bid, include a list of major products in the Contract documenting the intended cabling system solution, AV equipment, etc.

2.3 SUBSTITUTIONS

A. Only one substitution for each product where specified with “or approved equal” will be considered.

B. Where products are noted as "or approved equal", a product of equivalent design, construction, color , size and performance will be considered. Submit product data (product information, catalog cuts, pertinent test data, etc.) to substantiate that the product is in fact equivalent to that specified. The burden of proof that the substituted product is equivalent to the specified product rests with the Contractor. Whenever material, process or equipment is specified in accordance with an industry specification (ANSI, TIA, etc), UL rating, or other association standard, present an affidavit from the manufacturer certifying that the product complies with the particular standard specification. When requested by the Engineer, submit supporting test data to substantiate compliance.



C. Manufacturers' names and model numbers used in conjunction with materials, processes or equipment included in the Contract Documents are used to establish standards of quality, utility and appearance. Materials, processes or equipment that, in the opinion of the Engineer, are equivalent in quality, utility and appearance will be approved as substitutions to that specified when “or equal” follows the manufacturers' names or model number(s).

D. When the Engineer accepts a substitution in writing, it is with the understanding that the Contractor guarantees the substituted product, component, article, or material to be equivalent to the one specified and dimensioned to fit within the construction according to contract documents. Do not provide substituted material, processes, or equipment without written authorization from the Engineer. Assumptions on the acceptability of a proposed substitution, prior to acceptance by the Engineer, are at the sole risk of the Contractor.

E. Approved substitutions shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibilities for the proper execution of the work, or from provisions of the specifications.

F. Pay expenses, without additional charge to the Owner, in connection with substitution materials, processes and equipment, including

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PERMITS AND INSPECTIONS

A. Obtain and pay for permits and inspections required for the work.

B. Furnish materials and execute workmanship for this work in conformance with applicable legal and code requirements.

C. Perform tests required herein, or as may be reasonably required to demonstrate conformance with the Specifications or with the requirements of legal authority having jurisdiction.

D. Arrange and pay for review/inspection from compliance officials responsible for enforcement of applicable codes and regulations to establish that

3.2 EXAMINATION

A. Verify existing conditions, stated under other sections, are acceptable for installation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Staffing: Provide a qualified foreman to supervise the crew performing the work and who is present at the job site at times work is being performed.

B. Construction Meetings: Participate in construction coordination meetings throughout the course of construction to review the progress and to resolve issues and conflicts. Prepare and distribute meeting agenda for telecommunication issues prior to, and meeting notes after meetings, in a format acceptable to the Owner’s Rep. Publish meeting notes within 3 business days following the meeting.



C. Scheduling: Perform the work within the approved construction schedule. Keep the construction schedule current, based on the results of the construction meetings. At minimum, schedule shall document critical due dates, tasks, and milestones. Submit revised schedules for approval within 3 business days whenever there are modifications.

D. Inspection: Inspect the work after installation. Keep areas of work accessible and notify code authorities, or designated inspectors, of work completion ready for inspection. Document completion and inspection as required.

3.4 INSTALLATION

A. Complete work in a neat, high-quality manner, relative to common industry practices, and in accordance to NECA “Standard of Installation”.

B. Complete work in conformance to applicable federal, state and local codes, and telephone standards.

C. Coordinate the entire installation throughout the construction team (general contractor and subcontractors).

D. Manufacturer's Instructions:

1. Comply with manufacturer's product data, including product technical bulletins, product catalog installation instructions, and product carton instructions for installation.

2. Maintain jobsite file of Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) for each product delivered to jobsite packaged with an MSDS.

E. Adjusting:

1. Make changes and revisions to the system to optimize operation for final use.

2. Make changes to the system such that defects in workmanship are corrected and cables and the associated termination hardware pass the minimum test requirements.

F. Protection

1. Protect installed products and finish surfaces from damage during construction.

G. Repair/Restoration

1. Replace or repair work completed by others that you deface or destroy. Pay the full cost of this repair/replacement.

2. Repair defects prior to system acceptance.

a. Cleaning

H. Remove temporary coverings and protection of adjacent work areas. Remove unused, excess, and left over products, debris, spills, or other excess materials. Remove installation equipment.

I. Leave finished work and adjacent surfaces in neat, clean condition with no evidence of damage.



J. Repair or replace damaged installed products.

K. Legally dispose of debris.

L. Clean installed products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions prior to Owner's, or Owner’s Representative’s, punch walk.

3.5 FINAL INSPECTION AND CERTIFICATION

A. Punch Walks and Punch Lists

1. Punching the Work of individual Sections of Division 27 may be combined when noted so.

2. Execute a punch walk with the Engineer and the Owner or Owner’s

3. Representative to observe Work.

4. Develop a punch list for items needing correction. Issue this punch list to

5. Engineer.

6. Correct the Work as noted on punch list.

7. Schedule, notify, and execute follow up punch walk with the Engineer and the Owner or Owner’s Representative to verify punch list items have been corrected.

B. System Acceptance

1. Complete corrections (punch list items) prior to submitting acceptance certificate.

2. On completion of the acceptance test, submit system acceptance certificate to the Owner or Owner’s Representative requesting their signature and return of the certificate. Issue copies of the signed certificate back to the Owner or Owner’s Representative with copy to the Engineer.

C. Training

1. After acceptance, schedule a time convenient with the Owner, or Owner's Representative, for instruction in the configuration, operation, and maintenance of the system.

2. Refer to individual sections within Division 27 for additional training requirements.

END OF SECTION


EARVIN MAGIC JOHNSON PARK – PHASE 1A COMMUNICATIONS BONDINGLOS ANGELES, CA 27 0526-1COUNTY OF LOS ANGELES COMMUNITY DEVELOPMENT COMMISSIONAHBE PROJECT NO. 116030.01 INTEGRAL GROUP

SECTION 27 0526COMMUNICATIONS BONDING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Bonding of communications infrastructure and equipment to Communications Grounding Backbone.

B. Related Sections

1. Comply with the Related Sections requirements of Section 27 0000.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. Comply with the References requirements of Section 27 0000.

B. In addition or particular to the codes and standards listed in Section 27 0000, comply with the latest edition of the following applicable specifications and standards except as otherwise shown or specified:

1. NFPA 70, “National Electrical Code”, particularly the following Articles:

a. Article 250: Grounding

b. Article 770: Optical Fiber Cables and Raceways

c. Article 800: Communications Systems

d. Article 810: Radio and Television Equipment

e. Article 820: Community Antenna Television and Radio Distribution Systems

2. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) UL 467: Grounding and Bonding Equipment

3. Electronic Industries Association/Telecommunication Industry Association:

a. ANSI-TIA-607-B, “Generic Telecommunications Bonding and Grounding (Earthing) for Customer Premises

4. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (IEEE):

a. IEEE 467, “IEEE Recommended Practice for Grounding of Industrial and Commercial Power Systems”

b. IEEE P1100, “IEEE Recommended Practice for Powering and Grounding Sensitive Electronic Equipment in Industrial and Commercial Power Systems”



1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Definitions as described in Section 27 0000 shall apply to this section.

B. In addition to those Definitions of Section 27 0000, the following list of terms as used in this specification defined as follows:

1. “CM”: Circular Mil.

2. “MBRGB”: Main Building Reference Grounding Busbar

3. “TBB”: Telecommunications Bonding Backbone

4. “TBC”: Telecommunications Bonding Conductor

5. “TGB”: Telecommunication Grounding Busbar

6. "THHN”: Thermoplastic High Heat-resistant Nylon-coated

7. “TMGB”: Telecommunication Main Grounding Busbar

1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Work Provided Under Another Section

1. Refer to Electrical Specification Section 26 0526 for detailed information regarding the Telecommunications Grounding Backbone system.

B. Base Bid Work

1. The Work under this section includes furnishing materials, installation, and coordination through the General Contractor with other trades of the telecommunication backbone and bonding for telecommunications equipment and apparatus to the Telecommunications Grounding Backbone. Furnish necessary materials, accessories, fasteners, etc., and the labor and associated services required to bond telecommunications equipment to ground.

C. The Backbone consists of TBBs, TMGBs, TBGs

1. Resistance from any point of the communication grounding backbone system to the ground electrode and to earth shall not exceed 20 Ohms.

2. Field test resistance and document, both electronically and printed, measured values.

3. Bonding consists of TBCs within MDF and IDF rooms from the TMGB and TGBs to the following components:

a. Rack bay

b. Overhead cable support and vertical cable support

c. Wall-mounted termination equipment

d. Splice cases



e. Conduit ground bushings

f. Exit pathways

4. Bonding jumpers between, cable runway, and joints & splices, and between/cable runway/and equipment racks

D. Performance Criteria for the Grounding Backbone:

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Comply with Submittal procedural, quantity, and format requirements of Section 27 0000.

B. Submittal Requirements at Start Of Construction:

1. Product Data Submittal

C. Substitutions

1. Requests for substitutions shall conform to the general requirements and procedure outlined in Section 27 0000.

D. Closeout Submittals

1. Comply with Section 01 7823 "Operation and Maintenance Data.”


A. Comply with Quality Assurance requirements of Section 27 0000.


A. Comply with Delivery, Storage and Handling requirements of Section 27 0000.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Warrant Work to perform as described within this Section for a period of 1 year. Correct deficiencies within 24 hours of notification.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GROUNDING AND BONDING CONDUCTORS

A. Application: Suitable for indoor installation as a BCT, TBB, and/or TBC.

B. Type: THHN

C. Approvals:



1. UL 83 as Type THHN

2. Federal Specification A-A-59544, NEMA WC-5, UL-758

D. Conductor: soft drawn annealed copper, stranded

E. Gauge: #2/0 AWG

F. Insulation: PVC, high-heat and moisture resistant

G. Jacket: Nylon, abrasion, moisture, gasoline and oil resistant

H. Color: green

I. Flame Resistance: Meet the flame resistance requirements of IEEE 383, CSA FT-4 and

J. UL VW-1.

2.2 CONNECTOR – “PARALLEL” TAP

A. Application: H-type thick wall compression tap, for making conductor–to–conductor (e.g., TBB-to-TBC) permanent connection (pigtailing, tapping, or splicing). Connectors shall be UL Listed

B. Manufacturers:

1. Panduit

a. #HTCT2-2-1; “H-type” compression tap, run = #6-#2, tap = #2-#6.

b. #HTCT250-2-1; “H-type” compression tap, run = #2-250MCM, tap = #6-#2

2. Or Approved equal

2.3 GROUNDING BUSBAR – TINNED

A. General: Busbar shall be UL listed.

B. Standards: Compliant to ANSI-J-607-A

C. Material: Solid copper, tinned cladding

D. Holes: Predrilled, compatible with standard NEMA bolt hole sizing and spacing and with

E. ANSI-J-607-A recommendations for 2-hole lugs.

F. Mounting: Wall-mounted with standoffs. Standoffs shall insulate busbar from the mounting substrate.

G. Provide 2” copper strip bonded to telecommunication ground busbar and antistatic dissipative floor tiles.

H. Manufacturer:



1. Chatsworth

a. # CPI 10622-010

2. Or approved equal

2.4 CONNECTORS

A. General: Connectors shall be UL Listed.

B. Connector / “C” Tap

1. C-type copper thick wall compression tap, for making conductor–to–conductor connection.

2. Manufacturer: Chatsworth C–Type Compression Taps. Use appropriate types of compression fitting according to size and diameter of copper cable being connected. Use hydraulic or mechanical tool designed by C – Tap manufacturer for proper installation.


C. Connector / Lug, Compression Type

1. Type: two-hole (1/4” dia. x 5/8” on center) standard barrel compression lug, for #6 AWG conductor

2. Manufacturer: Chatsworth #40164-001;Two Hole compression lugs suitable for connecting copper bonding cable to Busbars, Equipmnet Racks, Cable Rumway, Termination Fields, and general metallic equipment in MPOE, MDFs, IDFs, and Server Rooms.


2.5 GROUND BUSHING

A. Refer to electrical specifications for ground bushing requirements.

B. Plated malleable iron body with 150 degree Centigrade molded plastic insulating throat and lay-in grounding lug.

C. Manufacturers:

1. OZ/Gedney BLG

2. Thomas & Betts #TIGB series

3. Or approved equal.

2.6 MISCELLANEOUS

A. Wire Clamp



1. Material: nylon, UV stabilized.

2. Color: black

3. Size: 0.25” holding diameter for 6 AWG; or size as required based on conductor size.

4. Manufacturer:

a. Richco Incorporated; #N4B-BLK

b. Or approved equal

B. Labels for TBCs

1. Labels shall be machine-printable via a laser printer, ink jet printer, thermal transfer printer, or hand-held printer

2. Labels shall be adhesive-backed and have a self-laminating feature.

3. Printable Area: 2” x 0.5”, minimum.

4. Color: White.

5. Manufacturer

a. Panduit

1) #LJSL7-Y3-1; laser/ink jet labels for wire diameters 0.16”-0.32”, white

2) #LJSL8-Y3-1; laser/ink jet labels for wire diameters 0.31”-0.69”, white


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

A. Comply with the Execution requirements of Section 27 0000.

3.2 EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION

A. Prior to the start of this Section’s Work, examine Communications Rooms and Communications Grounding Backbone system for completeness, compatibility with the Work of this section, and readiness for connections with the Work of this section.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. TMGB Busbars

1. Mount busbars as noted on Drawings and using insulating standoffs.



B. Panelboard Bonding

1. Where a panelboard is located in the same communications room as a TMGB/TGB and serves that room, provide TBC between busbar and that panelboard’s Alternating Current Equipment Ground (ACEG) bus (where equipped) or the enclosure.

C. Provide TBC and appropriate grounding hardware between the nearest TMGB/TGB and the equipment racks / rack bay, overhead cable support, vertical cable support, telecommunication conduits, primary pathways that enter/exit the room (if applicable), and other metallic telecommunication infrastructure components. Refer to Drawings for additional information.

D. Telecommunication Bonding Conductors / TBCs

1. Refer to Drawings for TBC sizing. If not shown, size TBCs as the greater of 6 AWG or based on length of run using 1000CM/linear foot.

2. Install TBCs in a manner that will protect them from physical and mechanical damage.

3. Routing:

a. Route TBCs in the shortest possible path, using right angles for turns and routed parallel to building lines. Route on outside edges of wall plywood. Do not cut across the middle of the plywood taking space away from other equipment or components.

b. Utilize a minimum 1-foot bend radius.

4. At TMGB/TGBs:

a. Thoroughly clean non electrotin-plated busbar prior to fastening the conductors, bolts, or connectors to the busbar.

b. Attach lugs to busbar with appropriate size bolt, flat washer and Belleville washer.

c. Torque connections.

E. Rack Bay

1. Refer to Drawings for detailed diagrammatic requirements for bonding the rack bay.

2. Bond equipment racks, frames, frame bays, cabinets, server racks, and other similar support systems located within the same room or space as the TMGB/TGB to the busbar.

3. Use approved connectors for TBC-to-rack, -frame, and -cabinet connections.

4. Rack bays may be bonded in series using either of the following configurations:

a. Series: Provide a TBC from the TGB to the rack closest to the busbar, then provide a TBC to the other racks in the rack bay in series using a common lug per rack connection. The rack shall not be used as a conductor in the series connection.

b. String: Provide one ‘main’ TBC from the TGB along the length of the rack bay, and provide a pigtail from the ‘main’ TBC per rack.



F. Overhead and Vertical Cable Support:

1. Bond overhead and vertical cable support (for example, basket tray and/or runway) located within the same room or space as the TMGB/TGB to the busbar.

2. Provide “grounding kit” (straps & connectors) to bond sections of basket tray and runway for ground continuity. This requirement applies to basket tray and runway sections and junctions within a single telecommunication room.

G. Termination Field

1. Refer to Drawings for detailed diagrammatic requirements for bonding the termination blocks.

2. Bond termination blocks to the TMGB/TGB within the same room or space. Termination blocks may be bonded in series, with the block closest to the TMGB/TGB bonded to the busbar.

H. Metallic Raceway Bonding

1. If TBC routes through conduit longer than 1 meter, bond metallic conduit to conductor at both ends.

2. Bond metallic raceways for telecommunications cabling (conduit, cable tray, cable runway, and other metallic telecommunication infrastructure components) located within the same room or space as the TMGB or TGB to the nearest telecommunication grounding busbar.

3.4 LABELING

A. General Requirements

1. Labeling, identifier assignment, and label colors shall conform to TIA/EIA-606- A Administration Standard and as approved by Owner’s Representative before installation.

2. Permanently label TBCs. Affix label as close as practical to each end of the conductor.

B. Label Format

1. Provide permanent labels with machine-generated text; hand written labels will not be accepted.

2. Labels on TBCs shall fully wrap around conductors with a self-laminating feature to provide permanent marking.

C. Identifier Assignment

1. Separate label fields of the identifier with a hyphen.

2. TBC

a. First field: “TBC” (the bonding conductor type).



b. Second field: The room identity where TBC exists; for example: “A1.1”.

c. Third field: A unique sequential number; for example: “01”, “02”, etc.

d. Example: “TBC–A1.1–01”


A. Punch the Work of this Section compliant to the requirements of Section 27 0000. Punching the Work of this Section may be combined with punching the Rooms.

B. Comply with system acceptance and certification requirements of Section 27 0000.

END OF SECTION


EARVIN MAGIC JOHNSON PARK – PHASE 1A COMMUNICATIONS TWISTED PAIR TESTINGLOS ANGELES, CA 27 0811-1COUNTY OF LOS ANGELES COMMUNITY DEVELOPMENT COMMISSIONAHBE PROJECT NO. 116030.01 INTEGRAL GROUP

SECTION 27 0811 COMMUNICATIONS TWISTED PAIR TESTING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Testing of Communications Twisted Pair Cabling (both Backbone and Horizontal Cabling subsystems).

B. Related Sections

1. Comply with the Related Sections paragraph of Section 27 0000.

2. Section 27 1513 - Communication Horizontal Twisted Pair Cabling

1.2 REFERENCES


B. Comply with County of Los Angeles Internal Services Department standards.

C. In addition to the References of Section 27 0000, the following references apply to this specification:

1. ANSI/TIA-1152, “Requirements for Field Test Instruments and Measurements for Balanced Twisted-Pair Cabling”

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Refer to Definitions of Section 27 0000, Section 27 1313, Section 27 1314, and Section 27 1513.


1. “CAT3”: Shall mean Category 3 cabling, per ANSI/TIA-568-B

2. “CAT6”: Shall mean Category 6 cabling, per ANSI/TIA-568-B

3. “Channel”: Shall mean a testing configuration which includes the Permanent Link and the line cord (at the workstation), the equipment cord, and, if a full crossconnection is implemented, a patch cord and the crossconnect termination/connecting apparatus.

4. “Connect”: Shall mean install all required patch cords, equipment cords, crossconnect wire, etc. to complete an electrical or optical circuit.

5. “Cord”: Shall mean a length of cordage having connectors at each end. The term “Cord” is synonymous with the term “Jumper” and “Lead”.



6. “Permanent Link”: Shall mean the ‘permanent’ portion of the Horizontal cabling to each outlet with the test cords de-embedded from the measurements; this includes cable, consolidation point (if used), termination/connecting apparatus in the IDF and the connector at the outlet.

7. “System Cord”: Shall mean the cord used in the operating transmission circuit.

8. “Test Cord”: Shall mean the cord certified for use in testing, as described in this section.


A. Refer to Section 27 0000, Section 27 1313, Section 27 1314, and Section 27 1513 for addition system description information.

B. Work Provided Under Other Sections

1. Horizontal twisted pair cabling

C. Base Bid Work

1. Testing of a completed communication infrastructure cabling system, which includes:

a. Submittals

b. Testing of the twisted pair cabling as follows:

Table 270811-1.1: Tests For UTP CablingSubsystem Type Test Configuration Notes

Horizontal CAT6 Category 6 Permanent Link Per TIA-568-B, 6.3Horizontal CAT6 Category 6 Channel Per TIA-568-B, 6.2

Horizontal CAT3 Category 3 Permanent Link Per TIA-568-B, 6.3

Horizontal CAT3 Category 3 Channel Per TIA-568-B, 6.2

c. Record Documents, including test results.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Comply with the Submittal requirements of Section 27 0000.

B. Submittal Requirements at Start Of Construction:

1. Testing Procedures Submittal, describing step-by-step procedures used by the field technicians.

a. Submit one hard copy and one soft copy of test reports, including all tested parameters. . This may be combined with the reports of Section 27 0821.

b. Submit one hard copy of warranty certificate.



2. Product Submittal, including cut sheets of testing equipment to be used (note all software/ firmware versions as applicable).

3. Schedule Submittal, consisting of proposed schedule of work. This schedule may be combined with the schedule developed for Division 27.

C. Submittal Requirements at Closeout:

1. Record Documents:

2. Format – Hard Copy:

a. Prints of test reports, on 8.5”x 11” paper, color or black & white, one cabling link per page

b. Assemble prints into a 3-ring binder

c. Clearly label the cover of each test reports binder with the following information:

1) Client Name


3) Binder Name (e.g., “Test Reports for Horizontal Cabling System”)

4) Date of Submittal – date format: <month> <day>, <year> (e.g., “January 1, 2014”)

5) Contractor Name

d. Include a Table Of Contents at the beginning that lists the contents

e. Organize the test reports by Backbone Cabling / Horizontal Cabling, by building, by floor, and by IDF.

f. Sort reports in ascending cable ID or

g. Include tabbed separators for improved navigation through the manual

3. Format – Soft Copy:

a. “Burn” onto one CD-ROM test report files as native data format (for example, an *.FLW file from a Fluke tester); if not possible to submit in native format, then issue test results as an exported Microsoft Excel compatible format.

b. Include onto CD-ROM ‘Viewer’ software necessary to view, sort, filter, and print individual and summary test results from test results native format.

c. Clearly label the CD-ROM with the following information:

1) Client Name




3) CD-ROM Name (e.g., “Test Reports for Horizontal Cabling System”)

4) Date of Submittal – date format: month day, year (e.g., “January 1, 2014”)

5) Contractor Name


A. Comply with the Quality Assurance requirements of Section 27 0000.

B. Under no circumstances shall any cable’s and/or conductor’s test results be substituted for another’s. If an instance of falsification is confirmed, the Contractor is liable for a complete retest of the cabling system at no additional cost to the Owner. This includes the retaining the services of a neutral party to observe all retesting.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Warrant the validity of the test results.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 BACKBONE TWISTED PAIR CABLING TESTER

A. Areas of Test Measurement (minimum): Wire Map (continuity, opens, shorts, crossed pairs, split pairs): Siemon #MT-5000 test unit, with 25-pair adapter, or equal.

2.2 CATEGORY 6 HORIZONTAL CABLE TESTER

A. Equipment shall be independently verified to meet ANSI/TIA-1152 requirements, including Level III minimum accuracy. Equipment shall meet ISO/IEC Class C, D, and E.

B. Test Standards (minimum): ANSI/TIA-568-B Category 6; ISO/IEC 11801 Class C and D; ISO/IEC 11801-2000 Class C and D, 1000Base-T, 100Base-TX; IEEE 802.3 10Base-T; ANSI TP-PMD; IEEE 802.5

C. Areas of Test Measurement (minimum): test areas listed under ANSI/TIA568-B, 6.3

D. Equipment:

1. Agilent Technologies

a. #N2600A-100; “WireScope 350” test kit (main unit, remote unit, CAT6 permanent link probe, CAT6 channel probe, accessories), loaded with the latest firmware version

b. “ScopeData Pro” reporting and documentation software latest version.

2. Fluke Networks



a. #DTX-1800; “CableAnalyzer” test kit (main unit, remote unit, CAT6 permanent link adapters, CAT6 channel adapters, accessories), loaded with the latest firmware version

b. #DSP-4300; “CableAnalyzer” test kit (main unit, remote unit, CAT6 permanent link adapters, CAT6 channel adapters, accessories), loaded with latest firmware version

c. “LinkWare” reporting and latest version of documentation software

3. Or equal

2.3 CATEGORY 3 HORIZONTAL CABLE TESTER

A. Test standards (minimum): TIA Category 3 per TIA TIA/EIA-568B; ISO/IEC 11801 Class C; ISO/IEC 11801-2000 Class C, 100Base-TX; IEEE 802.3 10Base-T; IEEE 802.5

B. Equipment shall be independently verified to meet ANSI/TIA-1152 requirements, including Level II minimum accuracy. Equipment shall meet ISO/IEC Class C.

C. Test Standards (minimum): ANSI/TIA-568-B Category 3; ISO/IEC 11801 Class C; ISO/IEC 11801-2000 Class C, 100Base-TX; IEEE 802.3 10Base-T; ANSI TP-PMD; IEEE 802.5

D. Areas of Test Measurement (minimum): test areas listed under ANSI/TIA568-B, 6.3, as applicable to CAT3 cabling

E. Equipment:

1. Agilent Technologies “WireScope 350” test unit, with “ScopeData” reporting and documentation software (version 5.20, or higher)

2. Fluke Networks “DSP-4300 CableAnalyzer” test unit, with “CableManager” reporting and documentation software (version 4.8, or higher

3. Or equal

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SCHEDULING

A. Prepare a construction schedule based on the schedule developed in sections 271513for the testing activities. Update testing schedule when changes in the cabling schedules occur.


A. Calibrate test sets and associated equipment per the manufacturers printed instructions at the beginning of each day’s testing and after each battery charge. Fully charge the test sets prior to each day's testing to ensure proper operation.



B. Ensure test equipment and test cords are clean and undamaged during testing activities. Per the Engineer’s discretion, halt testing activity and clean testing equipment, test cords, and related apparatus.

3.3 BACKBONE TWISTED PAIR CABLING TESTING REQUIREMENTS AND PROCEDURES

A. Precautions:

1. Adhere to the equipment manufacturer’s instructions during all testing.

2. Prior to any testing activity or any measurements taken, ensure the test equipment is at room temperature – approximately 70 degrees F (e.g., if necessary, bring the test equipment in from outdoors and let it set for about 15 minutes or for however long it takes to bring the test equipment to reach room temp).

3. Fully charge power sources before each day’s testing activity

B. Testing Requirements:

1. Test backbone multipair cabling per “Base Bid Requirements” in Part 1 of this Section.

2. The installation will be accepted when testing has indicated availability of 100% terminated pairs.

C. Testing Procedures

1. Test continuity and wire map for all pairs.

2. Test length for 2% of pairs of each cable. Pairs shall be from different 25-pair binder groups.

D. Acceptable Test Result Measurements:

1. Overall:

a. Links which report a Fail, Fail* or Pass* for any of the individual tests shall result in an overall link Fail. All individual test results must result in a Pass to achieve an overall Pass.

b. Any reconfiguration of a link components required as a result of a test Fail, must be re-tested for conformance.

c. Remove and replace any cabling links failing to meet the criteria described in this specification, at no cost to the Owner, with cables that prove, in testing, to meet the minimum requirements.

2. Length

3. Wire Map: Provide continuous cable link and terminate all pairs correctly at both ends. No exceptions accepted.



4. Attenuation: The acceptable attenuation measurements for any CAT3 cabling link is that which is no greater than that listed in ANSI/EIA-568-B, 6.3 and as adjusted to length measurement.

5. Worst Pair-to-Pair Near End CrossTalk (NEXT) Loss: The acceptable worst pair-to-pair NEXT loss no greater than that listed in ANSI/EIA-568-B, 6.3 for CAT3 cabling.

E. Record Documents:

1. Permanently record test results.

2. Cable and pair identifiers of the test reports shall match the identifiers as labeled in the field – i.e., use the same ID on the cable label/termination label as what appears on the test reports.

3. Measurements shall carry a precision through no significant decimal place.

4. Each test report shall contain the following information (not necessarily in this order):

a. Project name

b. Cable identifier, pair number(s)

c. Date measurement were obtained

d. Operator (company and name)

e. Test equipment model and serial number(s)

f. Measurement results

3.4 HORIZONTAL CATEGORY 6 TESTING PROCEDURES

A. Precautions:

1. Adhere to the equipment manufacturer’s instructions during all testing.

2. Prior to any testing activity or any measurements taken, ensure the test equipment is at room temperature – approximately 70 degrees F (e.g., if necessary, bring the test equipment in from outdoors and let it set for about 15 minutes or for however long it takes to bring the test equipment to reach room temp).

3. Fully charge power sources before each day’s testing activity

B. Test Equipment Set Up:

1. Set up the tester to perform a full CAT6 test, as a Permanent configuration.

2. If the tester has the capability, set the cable type as product-specific setting.

3. If not, set as generic CAT6.

4. Set the tester to save the full test results (all test points, graphs, etc.).



5. Save the test results with the associated cable link identifier.

6. Calibrate the test set per the manufacturer’s instructions.

C. Acceptable Test Result Measurements:

1. Overall Test Results:

a. The Owner shall accept only individual test results that result in a Pass.

b. Links which report a Fail, Fail* or Pass* for any of the individual tests shall result in an overall link Fail.

c. Any reconfiguration of link components required as a result of a test Fail, must be re-tested for conformance.

d. Remove and replace any cabling links failing to meet the criteria described in this specification, at no cost to the Owner, with cables that prove, in testing, to meet the minimum requirements.

2. Wire Map: Correctly terminate all pairs of the cabling link at both ends. Provide only continuous pairs. No exceptions.

3. Length: Ninety-four meters is the maximum acceptable electrical length measurements for any cabling link measured under a Permanent Link configuration, including test cords.

4. Insertion Loss: The acceptable insertion loss measurements for any CAT6 cabling link is that which is no greater than that listed in ANSI/EIA-568-B, 6.3.

5. Worst Pair-to-Pair Near End CrossTalk (NEXT) Loss: The acceptable worst pair-to-pair NEXT loss for any Category 6 cable is that which is no greater than that listed in ANSI/EIA-568-B, 6.3.

6. Power Sum NEXT Loss: The acceptable power sum PS-NEXT loss for any CAT6 cable is that which is no greater than that as listed in ANSI/EIA-568-B, 6.3.

7. Worst Pair-to-Pair ELFEXT and FEXT Loss: The acceptable worst pair-to-pair ELFEXT and loss for any CAT6 cable is that which is no greater than that listed in ANSI/EIA-568-B, 6.3.

8. Power Sum ELFEXT and FEXT Loss: The acceptable PS-ELFEXT and loss for any CAT6 cable is that which is no greater than that listed in ANSI/EIA-568- C.2, 6.3.

9. Return Loss: The acceptable return loss measurements for any CAT6 cable is that which is no greater than that listed in ANSI/EIA-568-B, 6.3.

10. Propagation Delay and Delay Skew: The acceptable propagation delay and delay skew measurements for any CAT6 cable is that which is no greater than that listed in ANSI/EIA-568-B, 6.3.

D. Record Documents:

1. Permanently record test results.



2. Export all of the numerical test results to a single spreadsheet in Microsoft Excel® 2003 (*.xls) or 2007 (*.xlsx) file format.

3. Submit test results at the conclusion of the testing to the Engineer for approval. Engineer will check these test reports for a format acceptable to the Owner, or Owner’s Representative.

4. For each Horizontal CAT6 test, record the following information:

a. Project name and address

b. Testing Company’s and Operator’s name

c. Date of measurement

d. Test equipment, including the following:

1) Manufacturer, model, and serial number

2) Date and time of last calibration

e. Identification number of cable

f. Overall test result

END OF SECTION


EARVIN MAGIC JOHNSON PARK – PHASE 1A COMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT ROOMS LOS ANGELES, CA 27 1100-1 COUNTY OF LOS ANGELES COMMUNITY DEVELOPMENT COMMISSION AHBE PROJECT NO. 116030.01 INTEGRAL GROUP

SECTION 27 1100 COMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT ROOMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Buildout / fit-up of communications equipment rooms.

B. Related Divisions and Sections

1. Comply with the Related Sections paragraph of Section 27 0000.

2. Review Seismic Calculation requirements, specifically in Section 27 0000, Article 1.05.

3. Drawings, general provisions of the Agreement, and Division 01 apply to this Section.

4. Consult other Divisions, determine the extent and character of related work, and properly coordinate work specified herein with that specified elsewhere to produce a complete and operable system.

5. Section 27 0526 "Grounding and Bonding for Communications Systems" for grounding conductors and connectors.

6. Section 27 0536 "Cable Trays for Communications Systems" for cable trays and accessories.

7. Section 27 1513 “Communications Horizontal Twisted Pair Cabling" for voice and data cabling associated with system panels and devices.

8. Section 27 4116 “Integrated Audiovisual System” for audio visual associated systems devices.

9. Section 28 0513 "Conductors and Cables for Electronic Safety and Security" for voice and data cabling associated with system panels and devices.

1.2 REFERENCES


B. In additional to those codes, standards, etc., list in Section 27 0000, comply with the latest edition of the following applicable specifications and standards except as otherwise shown or specified:

1. EIA/ECA-310-E, “Cabinets, Racks, Panels, and Associated Equipment”

2. NFPA National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 255 - Standard Method of Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials

3. ASTM E 84-05 Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.



4. American Wood-Preservers' Association (AWPA) Standard C27 Plywood - Fire Retardant Treatment by Pressure Processes.

5. ASTM International

a. ASTM A 123, “Specification for Zinc (Hot Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel”

b. ASTM A 510, “Specification for General Requirements for Wire Rods and Coarse Round Wire, Carbon Steel”

c. ASTM A 525, “General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated Galvanized by the Hot-Dip Process”

d. ASTM A 591, “Specifications for Electrodepositing Coatings of Zinc on steel wire or sheets”

e. ASTM A 641, “Standard Specification for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Carbon Steel Wire”

f. ASTM A 653, “Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot Dip Process”

g. ASTM B 633, “Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings of Zinc on Iron and Steel”

h. ASTM D 769, “Standard Specification for Black Oxide Coatings”

i. ASTM D3451, “Standard Guide for Testing Coating Powders and Powder Coatings”

6. National Electrical Manufacturer Association (NEMA)

a. NEMA VE 1 (also CAN/CSA C22.2 No. 126.1-09), “Metal Cable Tray Systems”

b. NEMA VE 2, “Cable Tray Installation Guidelines”


a. NFPA 70B, “Recommended Practice for Electrical Equipment Maintenance”

b. NFPA 70E, “Standard For Electrical Safety In The Workplace”

8. Underwriters Laboratories (UL)

a. UL 467, “Grounding and Bonding Equipment”

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Definitions as described in Section 27 0000 shall apply to this section.




1. “UPS”: Uninterruptible Power Supply – a system that provides conditioned power with batteries acting as a continuous power source for equipment during a utility power interruption


A. General: Communications rooms shall fall into one of the following space titles:

1. Main Communications Room (MCR) will serve the following functions:

a. House interbuilding twisted pair and fiber optic backbone cabling, from the Server room, and house intrabuilding twisted pair and fiber optic backbone cabling to IDFs within the same building, Building 2 and Garages.

b. House voice backbone crossconnect field and data backbone crossconnect field

c. House network equipment (i.e. distribution switches) serving the same building

d. Houses horizontal termination field, both voice and data, of devices served from this room (refer to floor plans for area served)

e. House network equipment (i.e. access switch) serving users of the room’s service area

f. Houses horizontal termination field – for voice/data/CATV – outlets served from this room (refer to floor plans for area served)

g. House security head-end equipment

h. House Audio Visual head-end equipment

B. Work Covered Under Other Sections

1. Bonding

2. Grounding busbars

3. Power and cooling

4. Conduit, device boxes, and sleeves

C. Base Bid Work

1. The Work under this section includes materials, accessories, fasteners, etc., and the labor and associated services required for the buildout / fit-up of telecommunications equipment rooms, and includes coordination through the General Contractor with other trades

2. In general, the Work includes the following:

a. Submittals

b. Plywood backboards



c. Rack bays (equipment racks, vertical management sections, anchoring)

d. Cable, wire and patch cord management

e. Overhead and vertical cable support

f. UPSs

g. Seismic bracing

h. Identification tags and labeling

i. Record Documents

j. Warranty

D. Coordination Requirements

1. Electrical: Coordinate layout with electrical contractor to ensure proper placement of lighting, sequencing of power service to rack bay, UPS hardwire power, and other issues related to electrical trade.

2. Contractors: Coordinate room-ready requirements and schedule with Owner (to allow Owner to plan and execute installation of OFOI telecommunications/network equipment).

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Comply with the Submittal requirements of Section 27 0000.

B. Quantity: Furnish quantities of each submittal as noted in Section 27 0000.

C. Submittal Requirements at Start of Construction:

1. Product Data Submittal

2. Shop Drawings Submittal: Consisting of any proposed changes to room plans.

3. Sample Submittal: Submit sample of equipment rack label.

4. Seismic Calculations: Rack anchorage into concrete flooring with overall rack bracing, based on maximum rated load capacity.

5. Schedule Submittal: Submit proposed schedule of work (this schedule may be combined with the schedule developed for Division 27.

D. Submittal Requirements at Close Out:

1. As-Built Drawings Submittal

E. Substitutions

1. Requests for substitutions shall conform to the general requirements and procedure outlined in Section 27 0000.






A. Comply with Delivery, Storage and Handling requirements of Section 27 0000.

B. Do not deliver or install equipment frames and cable trays until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and work above ceilings is complete.

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of communications equipment with ISD Project Manager’s telecommunications and LAN equipment and service suppliers, Security contractor and Audio Visual contractor. Coordinate service entrance arrangement with local exchange carrier.

1. Meet jointly with telecommunications and LAN equipment suppliers and ISD Project Manager to exchange information and agree on details of equipment arrangements and installation interfaces.

2. Record agreements reached in meetings and distribute them to other participants. 3. Adjust arrangements and locations of distribution frames, cross-connects, and patch

panels in equipment rooms to accommodate and optimize arrangement and space requirements of telephone switch and LAN equipment.

4. Adjust arrangements and locations of equipment with distribution frames, cross-connects, and patch panels of cabling systems of other communications, electronic safety and security, and related systems that share space in the equipment room.

B. Coordinate location of power raceways and receptacles with locations of communications equipment requiring electrical power to operate.

1.9 WARRANTY

A. Warrant Work to perform as described within this Section for a period of 1 year. Correct deficiencies within 24 hours of notification.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PATHWAYS

A. General Requirements: Comply with TIA/EIA-569-A.

B. Cable Support: NRTL labeled. Cable support brackets shall be designed to prevent degradation of cable performance and pinch points that could damage cable. Cable tie slots fasten cable ties to brackets.

1. Comply with NFPA 70 and UL 2043 for fire-resistant and low-smoke-producing characteristics.

2. Support brackets with cable tie slots for fastening cable ties to brackets.



3. Lacing bars, spools, J-hooks, and D-rings. 4. Straps and other devices.

2.2 CABLE RUNWAY

A. Cable Runway Straight Sections

1. Application: Suitable for the support & management of telecommunications (and other low voltage) cables, mounted overhead or vertically on a wall, as shown on plans.

2. Cable Tray Materials: Metal, suitable for indoors and protected against corrosion by complying with ASTM B 633, Type 1, not less than 0.000472 inch thick. a. Ladder Cable Trays as shown on drawings:

Nominally 18 inches wide, and a rung spacing of 12 inches. - Chatsworth#: 10250-718


B. Cable Runway Installation Accessories

1. Application: Installation accessories for use with cable runway.

2. Manufacturer

a. CPI

1) #11301-001; butt splice kit

2) #10487-001; swivel butt splice kit

3) #11314-001; 90-degree junction kit

4) #11302-001; junction splice (“T”) kit

5) #10488-001; swivel junction splice (“T”) kit

6) #10608-001; vertical wall bracket kit

7) #10642-001; end caps

8) #11421-718; wall angle support kit for 18” wide cable runway, black

9) #11312-718; triangle support kit for 18” wide cable runway, black

10) #11770-718; end closing kit for 18” wide cable runway, black

11) #10595-718; rack-to-runway attachment kit, for 18” wide runway, black




2.3 PLYWOOD (AS BACKBOARD)

A. Install fire-retardant, 3/4 inch x 8 feet plywood backboards covering ALL four (4) walls of the Telecommunications Room with the bottom mounted at 5-6-inches above finished floor. Backboards shall be painted “Off-White” with fire-retardant paint. Backboard shall be anchored on the wall and capable of supporting installation of communications equipment/panels.

B. Comply with requirements for plywood backing panels specified in Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry."

2.4 EQUIPMENT RACK

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements: 1. Chatsworth

B. General Frame Requirements:

1. Distribution Frames: Freestanding and wall-mounting, modular-steel units designed for telecommunications terminal support and coordinated with dimensions of units to be supported.

2. Module Dimension: Width compatible with EIA 310 standard, 19-inch panel mounting. 3. Finish: Manufacturer's standard, baked-polyester powder coat.

C. 2 - Post Racks: 19”, 7’ height, Modular-type, steel construction.

1. Shall include vertical and horizontal cable management channels, as shown on drawings including and grounding lug.

2. Baked-polyester powder coat finish. Chatsworth#: 46753-703 (Qty. 1) Double-Sided Shelf, Chatsworth#: 40751-719 (Qty. 1)

D. 4 - Post Racks: 19”, 7’ height, Modular-type, steel construction.

1. Shall include vertical and horizontal cable management channels, as shown on drawings including and grounding lug.

2. Baked-polyester powder coat finish. Chatsworth #: 50120-703 (Qty. 2)

3. Extra Heavy Duty 4-point sliding shelf , Chatsworth # :12700-719 (Qty. 2)

2.5 FIBER PATCH PANEL

A. Cabling contractor shall confirm with ISD Project Manager if fiber patch panel will be required to support connectivity from other buildings. Currently 1RU fiber patch panel is shown on plans as place holder.

B. Patch panel provided shall be Corning and support at minimum 24-strands of Single mode fiber OS2 and 24-strands of Multimode fiber OM4.

1. Fiber patch panel (1RU)

Panduit part#: FRME1U



2.6 CABLE MANAGEMENT

A. Cable Management for Equipment Racks :

1. Metal, with integral wire retaining fingers. 2. Baked-polyester powder coat finish. 3. Vertical cable management for 2-post racks.

Chatsworth (8" double sided) #: 35522-703

4. 2RU Horizontal cable management panels Chatsworth#: 35441-702

5. Provide horizontal crossover cable manager at the top of each relay rack, with a minimum height of two rack units each.

2.7 COPPER PATCH CORDS

A. Communication cabling contractor shall verify and confirm quantities, lengths and colors with ISD Project Manager prior procurement and installation.

B. Patch cords shall have bend-relief-compliant boots and color-coded icons to ensure Category 6 performance. Patch cords shall have latch guards to protect against snagging.

C. Contractor shall provide one patch cord for every terminated floor and ceiling outlet. Contractor shall patch up to switch per ISD Project Manager’s direction for a complete installation.

D. Contractor shall confirm lengths and color to all patch cords prior to procurement with ISD Project Manager.

1. Panduit #: UTPSP++BUY, “++” for lengths.

- Blue patch cords shall be used for wireless access points and data ports.

- White patch cords shall be used for voice ports.

- Yellow patch cords shall be used for security cameras.

2.8 FLOORING

A. Coordinate with architectural plans and provide anti-static vinyl flooring in the MCR/TR. The anti-static flooring shall be the Armstrong Static Dissipative Tile (SDT) Excelon Resilient Tile Flooring, or approved equivalent.

B. Anti-static vinyl flooring shall be grounded to the TMGB through a flat copper strap (0.012 inch thick x 2 inch width). The copper strip shall be inserted at least 3 feet length (from the TGBB) between the anti-static tile and concrete floor and properly bonded to the TGBB. Conductive type of adhesives shall be used between the anti-static tiles and the concrete flooring.



2.9 GROUNDING

A. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems." for grounding conductors and connectors.

B. Telecommunications Main Bus Bar (TMGB):

C. The Telecom Main Ground Bus Bar (TMGB) in the MCR shall be the Chatsworth busbar (P/N: CPI 10622-010). The TGBB shall be connected to the main electrical ground bus bar with a #6/0 AWG insulated ground cable (stranded) and properly bonded to the bus bars on both ends. Refer to the MCR layout for the location of the TMGB.

D. Equipment Rack Ground Bus Bar 1. One horizontal ground bus bar per Equipment Rack.

E. Comply with ANSI-J-STD-607-A.

2.10 POWER DISTRIBUTION UNITS (PDU)

A. Communication contractor shall verify exact make, model and quantities with ISD Telecom Project manager for approval prior procurement and installation.

B. Vertical power distribution shall be use for 4-post equipment rack

1. Input: L5-30 with a 10’ (minimum) long cord.

2. APC Rack PDU, Basic, Zero U – AP7532 (qty 2), input plug L5-30

3. Manufacturer: APC

C. Horizontal power distribution shall be (for2-post equipment rack)

1. Input: L5-30 with a 6’ (minimum) long cord. Output: (15) NEMA 5-20R outlets.

2. Metered - On-board LED display, voltage, current, power factor.

3. Network monitoring

4. APC Rack PDU, Basic 1U – AP9563 (qty 1), input plug 5-20

5. APC Rack RDU, Basic 1U – AP9560 (qty 1) , input plug L5-30

6. Manufacturer: APC

2.11 UNINTERRUPTABLE POWER SUPPLY (UPS)

A. Application: Installation within an MCR on 2-post 7’ x 19” rack and 4-post equipment rack.

B. Communication contractor shall confirm UPS size and type verify with ISD Telecom Project manager for approval prior procurement and installation.

C. Contractor shall include rack mount kit for clean install.



D. UPS shall be rack mount with a load capacity:

1. 1,500 volt-amperes (1.5 kVA)

2. 3,000 volt-amperes (3.0 kVA)

3. APC Smart-UPS 3000VA Rack mount – SMT3000 (qty 1) , input plug L5-30

4. Contractor shall provide UPS bracket for mounting on equipment rack. Confirm ISD Project Manager which equipment rack the UPS shall be installed.

2.12 LABEL PLATES, FOR EQUIPMENT RACKS

A. Communication Contractor shall submit propose labeling scheme for ISD Project Manager to review and approve prior to installation.

B. Label plate shall be suitable to affix onto top angle of equipment rack or onto the top front of a frame/cabinet.

C. Label plate shall be ‘engrave-able’ stock melamine plastic laminate substrate.

D. Size (minimum): 1/2-inch high by 6 inches long by 1/16-inch thick.

E. Color: Black.

F. Lettering shall be white, engraved, 1/8-inch high.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL



A. Prior to installation, verify equipment rooms are suitable for the construction scope of this section. Schedule work to prevent damage caused by other trades during the course of that other construction.

B. Prepare surfaces, such as floors, for permanent installation of products, such as racks.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Plywood Backboards

1. General

a. Comply with requirements for plywood backing panels specified in Section 06 1000 "Rough Carpentry."



b. Complete installation work in a neat, high quality manner and conform to all applicable federal, state and local codes, and all telephone standards.

c. Replace or repair work completed by others that is defaced or destroyed by Work associated with installation of the plywood backboards. Contractor shall pay for the full cost of this repair/replacement.

2. Preparation

a. Condition wood materials to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas prior to installing.

b. Discard all units of material with defects that impair quality of carpentry and that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement.

3. Plywood

a. Install plywood in accordance with WIC Custom or Premium Quality Standard, as scheduled. Ensure work complies with applicable codes and recognized standards.

b. Install plywood as indicated on Drawings to the dimensions shown. In lieu of no dimensions, install plywood at +5-6” above the finished floor.

c. Install plywood plumb, level, true, and straight with no distortions. Shim as required using concealed shims.

d. Trim plywood around electrical and telecommunications outlets.

e. Install plywood such that the fire rating stamp is visible.

f. Install plywood to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 8 feet for plumb and level; and with 1/16 inch maximum offset in flush adjoining, 1/8 inch maximum offsets in revealed adjoining surfaces.

4. Fasteners

a. Install plywood using bolts, concrete anchors, or other fasteners suitable for the purpose.

b. Provide nails, screws, anchors and other anchoring devices of the type, size, material, and finish required for application/mounting substrate.

c. Do not use aluminum fasteners.

d. Countersink fastener heads on exposed carpentry work and fill holes with wood filler.

5. Painting

a. Paint plywood backboards with a low-gloss, white Fire Retardant paint.



b. Mask the plywood’s fire rated symbol/stamp from the paint such that the symbol/stamp is still visible after painting.

6. Cleaning, Finishing, and Protection

a. Cleaning: Clean finish carpentry work on exposed and semi-exposed surfaces. Touch-up shop-applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas.

b. Protection: Protect and maintain protection to ensure work will be without damage or deteriorating at time of acceptance.

B. Rack Bays

1. Equipment Racks

a. Provide parts and accessories required to complete each rack. Completely assemble racks, according to manufacturer’s instructions.

b. Anchoring/Bracing

1) Use concrete anchors approved by structural engineer.

2) Anchor racks to the structural floor at four points.

3) Brace racks overhead to overhead cable support where shown on the Drawings.

4) If required for seismic bracing, provide bracing devices (e.g., brackets, threaded rod with strut, etc.) attached to the wall or structure above using appropriate fasteners.

2. Vertical Management Sections

a. Provide vertical management sections as shown on Drawings. If not shown, provide a default of one vertical management section between each rack and at either end of the bay.

b. Bolt vertical management sections to the equipment racks at the points designed by the manufacturer and per the manufacturer’s installation instructions.

3. Tolerances:

a. Equipment Rack: Verify dimensions to establish proper clearances as follows:

1) Front: 40” clearance from channel’s front mounting flange.

2) Back: 57” clearance from channel’s back mounting flange.

b. Provide the correct amount of space between each rack for proper installation (according to manufacturer’s written instructions) of the vertical management sections.

4. Horizontal Management Panels



a. Provide horizontal management panels as shown on Drawings. If not shown, provide one management panel above each patch panel and on below the bottom patch panel in each rack bay where patch panels occur.

b. Provide fasteners and parts required to complete the installation.

5. Accessories

a. Provide rack mounting screws – 1 bag of screws per rack, as come packaged with the rack product. Attach the screws directly to the rack (visible for the punch walk). This shall constitute turn-over to the ISD Project Manager .

C. Overhead Cable Support

1. Provide support devices (e.g., brackets and threaded rod with strut) for overhead cable management system; install per the manufacturer’s instructions and fastened to the wall or ceiling using appropriate fasteners.

2. Provide parts required for complete installation (e.g., mounting brackets, splice kits, hardware, etc.).

3. Tolerances

a. Install overhead cable support centered over the equipment rack, or as shown on the Drawings.

4. Interface with Other Work: Coordinate the installation of the overhead cable support with other trades. Trapeze supports and ‘hanger rods’ (“all-thread”), for example, may be shared to lower overall construction cost.

D. Vertical Cable Support

1. Provide cable runway installed vertically at the locations as shown on the Drawings for use to support cables routing vertically within telecommunications rooms.

2. Provide parts required for complete installation (e.g., vertical mounting brackets, bolts, etc.).

3. When using cable runway, install the runway such that the rungs are facing outward (the greater distance from the rung to the stringer edge is facing inward).

4. Route the input cords within designated cable management and provide cord fasteners to prevent movement of the input cord. Plug the input cord into the receptacle designated by the ISD Project Manager / Owner’s Representative.

3.4 UPS UNITS

A. Install 1.5 KVa and 3KVa rack mount UPS units in the locations shown on drawings.

B. Coordinate with the electrical contractor during installation of the UPS units.

C. Install the UPS units in the 4-post equipment rack with associated hardware.



D. Coordinate with the ISD Project Manager for network connections to the UPS communications modules.

3.5 LABELING

A. General Requirements: Labeling and identifier assignment shall conform to ANSI/TIA-606-B and as approved by ISD Project Manager before installation.

B. Equipment Rack Label Requirements: Provide one label plate per rack and IT cabinet.

C. Permanently affix label plate and position as shown on the Drawings; if not shown on the Drawings, center the label plate on the rack’s front top angle or the cabinet’s top front frame.

D. Identifier Assignment

1. Equipment Rack

a. Prefix: “RACK” or “CABINET”

b. First field: the room’s identifier; for example: “TR2.1”.

c. Second field: the rack number (sequential numeral); for example: “01”.

d. Example; “RACK TR2.1-01”

2. IT Cabinets

a. First field: the row identity; for example: “A”.

b. Second field: the cabinet number; for example: “01”.

c. Example; “A.01”


A. Punch the Work of this Section compliant to the requirements of Section 27 0000.

B. Comply with system acceptance and certification requirements of Section 27 0000.

END OF SECTION


EARVIN MAGIC JOHNSON PARK – PHASE 1A COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL LOS ANGELES, CA PAIR CABLINGCOUNTY OF LOS ANGELES COMMUNITY DEVELOPMENT COMMISSION 27 1513-1AHBE PROJECT NO. 116030.01 INTEGRAL GROUP

SECTION 27 1513 COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL PAIR CABLING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Horizontal Twisted Pair Cabling (subsystem of Telecommunications Cabling Infrastructure)

B. Related Sections

1. Comply with the Related Sections requirements of Section 27 0000

2. Comply with County of Los Angeles Internal Services Department standards

3. 270811 Communication Twisted Pair Testing

1.2 REFERENCES


B. In addition to the codes and standards listed in Section 27 0000, comply with the latest edition of the following applicable specifications and standards except as otherwise shown or specified:


a. NFPA 255, “Standard Method of Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials”, 2006

b. NFPA 262, “Standard Method of Test for Flame Travel and Smoke of Wires and Cables for Use in Air-Handling Spaces”, 2007

2. Underwriters Laboratories (UL): Applicable listing and ratings, including but not limited to the following standards:



c. UL 1581, “Reference Standard for Electrical Wires, Cables, and Flexible Cords”

d. UL 1863, “Communications-Circuit Accessories”


a. ANSI/ICEA S-90-661-2008, “Category 3, 5, and 5e Individually Unshielded Twisted Pair Indoor Cable for Use In General Purpose and LAN Communication Wiring Systems”



b. ICEA S-102-700-2004, “ICEA Standard For Category 6 Individually Unshielded Twisted Pair Indoor Cables (With Or Without An Overall Shield) For Use In Communications Wiring Systems Technical Requirements”

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Refer to Section 27 0000 for Definitions.

B. In addition, define the following list of terms as used in this specification as follows:

1. “CAT6”: Category 6 UTP performance grade

2. “Channel”: End to end transmission path; e.g., the entire portion of the horizontal cabling to each outlet consisting of the Permanent Link, line cord (at the workstation), patch cord, and, if a full crossconnection is implemented, the crossconnect termination/connecting apparatus and equipment cord.

3. “CMP”: Communications Media Plenum [NEC plenum rating]

4. “FTP”: Foiled Twisted Pair

5. “PE”: Polyethylene

6. “Permanent Link”: Test configuration for a horizontal cabling link excluding patch cords, equipment cords, and line cords; e.g., the ‘permanent’ portion of the horizontal cabling to each outlet consisting of cable, consolidation point (if used), termination/connecting apparatus in the telecommunications and the connector at the outlet.

7. “PVC”: PolyVinyl Chloride

8. “UTP”: Unshielded Twisted Pair


A. Work Covered Under Other Sections

1. Pathways: The communications pathways (basket tray, conduits, stubs, etc.) work will be covered under another Section. Refer to the contract drawings for size/capacity and route information.

2. Rooms: Build out (e.g., backboards, overhead and vertical cable runway, etc.) of the telecommunications rooms will be covered under another Section. Refer to the contract drawings for build out information.

3. Connecting Media: Patch cords in the MCR between horizontal field and network equipment (e.g., access switch.), patch/line cords at the work areas between outlet and user equipment (e.g., phone, computer, etc.)

B. Base Bid Work

1. Provide engineering, labor, materials, apparatus, tools, equipment, and transportation required to make a complete working communications Horizontal Twisted Pair Cabling



System installation described in this Section and shown on related drawings. Consider Horizontal Cabling as shown on contract drawings as base bid work, unless otherwise noted. This includes terminations at both ends.

2. In general, the base bid work includes:

a. Submittals

b. Horizontal cables, terminations, and outlets

c. Cable management

d. Cross-connections

e. Cable identification tags and system labeling

f. Record Documents

g. Warranty

C. Jack Wiring: T568A

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Comply with the Submittals article of Section 27 0000 for procedural, quantity, content, and format requirements.

B. Substitutions

1. Conform to substitutions requirements and procedure in Section 27 0000.


1. Product Data Submittal, indicating conformance with NEC, UL, TIA/EIA listings, certifications and specifications.

2. Schedule Submittal, consisting of proposed schedule of work. This schedule may be combined with the schedule developed for 27 00 00 series Sections

3. Shop Drawings Submittal, consisting of proposed changes to cable routing, or termination locations/configurations

D. Submittal Requirements at Closeout:

1. As-Built Drawings

2. Cable ID –to– Office Number Key: Submit a “cable ID-to-Office number key” as an electronic file in an MS-Excel spreadsheet file format containing a list of every cable identifier associated with the final office number

3. Cross-connection records/cut sheets

4. O & M Manuals



E. Posted Documentation

1. Post one full size laminated plot of as-built drawings, specifically the floor plans and (as applicable) reflected ceiling plans, within MCRs in picture clear frame. Coordinate location with Owner.




1. In addition to the Contractor Qualifications requirements of Section 27 0000, the Contractor shall be certified by the manufacturer to provide the cabling system (proposed, submitted, and approved) and to provide an extended warranty. Submit satisfactory evidence of certification in the form of a current letter or certificate from the manufacturer as part of the bid.


A. Comply with the Delivery, Storage and Handling requirements of Section 27 0000.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. The horizontal cabling system, as specified in this section, shall carry a 25-year Channel link warranty. This extended warranty shall also cover electrical performance of cabling system to the specific category per ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-C performance criteria for horizontal cabling.

B. Where consolidation points (CP) are used, with final cable assembly from CP to workstation in a plug to jack configuration, provide written warranty statement identifying the following at the time of bid:

1. Minimum and maximum cable lengths from MCR to CP and CP to user outlet that the manufacturer requires to meet the system’s published performance

2. Minimum and maximum patch cord lengths that the manufacturer requires to meet the system’s published performance

3. Warranty statement – stating that the system described above will meet the manufacturers published performance, head room, and application warranties.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Panduit

B. General Cable



2.2 SUBSTITUTIONS

A. Comply with the Substitutions requirements of Section 27 0000.

2.3 HORIZONTAL CABLE – CAT 6 PLENUM (CMP) RATED.

A. Application: Suitable for indoor installation, within ceiling space in primary and secondary pathways, within access/raised floor space.

B. Conductors:

1. Insulated Conductors: 23 AWG solid copper, fully insulated with a flame retardant thermoplastic material.

2. Twisted Pairs: Two insulated conductors “twisted” into a “pair” (twisted pair) with individually color-coded twisted pairs to industry standards (ANSI/ICEA Publication S-80-576-1994, and EIA-230).

C. Cable Sheath:

1. Outer Jacket: seamless outer jacket (material = LS-PVC, or similar) applied to and completely cover the internal components (twisted pairs).

2. Flame Rating: NEC (Article 800) rated as CMP, and UL listed as such.

D. Electrical Performance: Meet or exceed ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 and ISO/IEC 11801 requirements for CAT6 UTP cabling.

E. Manufacturer:

1. Panduit Cable

a. # PUP6004BU-UY Enhanced Category 6 CMP, Blue (Data Cable, Security & WAPs)

b. # PUP6004WH-UY Enhanced Category 6 CMP, White (Voice Cable)

2.4 HORIZONTAL CABLE – CAT6 OSP/UNDERGROUND (GROUND FLOOR BOXES)

A. Application: Suitable for outdoor installation, within underground pathways (conduit, pullboxes).

B. Conductors:

1. Insulated Conductors: 23 AWG solid copper, fully insulated with a thermoplastic material (material = PE, or equivalent).


C. Core & Sheath:



1. Twisted pairs shall lie individually within a polyolefin fluted center member.

2. Filled: Cable core and sheath flooded with filling compound to protect against moisture penetration. Filling compound: “FLEXGEL”, or equivalent.

3. Outer Jacket: seamless outer jacket (material = PE, or similar) applied to and completely cover the internal components (twisted pairs), embedded with UV inhibitors, and black in color.


E. Manufacturer:

1. General Cable

a. # 7136100; CAT6 4 pair UTP cable, OSP Gel Filled, CMP

2.5 FIBER HORIZONTAL CABLE – MULTIMODE OSP (Outdoor security cameras only)

A. Application: For all exterior security cameras

B. Description: Multimode, 2-strands of fiber, nonconductive, tight buffer, optical fiber cable. As noted on telecom construction drawings.

1. Comply with ICEA S-104-696 for mechanical properties.2. Comply with TIA-568-C.3 for performance specifications.3. Comply with TIA-492AAAA-B for detailed specifications.4. RoHS Compliant Directive 2002/95/EC

a. Riser Rated, Nonconductive: Type OFNR, CS4 FT4 complying with UL 1666.

C. Manufacturer:

1. General Cable

a. #BL0021ANR.BK (50mµ multimode, 2 fibers, tight buffer indoor/outdoor riser cable

D. Patch Panels: Modular panels housing multiple-numbered, duplex cable connectors.

1. Number of Connectors per Field: One for each fiber of cable or cables assigned to field, plus spares and blank positions adequate to suit specified expansion criteria.



E. Fiber Adapter Panels

Panduit part#: FAP12WAQDLCZ



F. Fiber patch cords Factory-made, dual-fiber cables in lengths specified in the part numbers. Confirm color and length with ISD Project manager prior procurement.

Panduit part#: FZE10-10M1

2.6 TERMINATION APPARATUS – FLAT MODULAR PATCH PANEL

A. Application: Panels shall be suitable for installation within a MCR, and Consolidation Points (CPs) for the termination of the horizontal cables specified herein. Panels shall be horizontally oriented for a rack-mounted configuration. Panels shall be capable of supporting, organizing, labeling and patching/ cross-connecting between the horizontal termination field and the equipment termination field.

B. Modular patch panel shall accept 6-port cassette type assemblies, and shall be compatible with the specified horizontal cables both electrically and physically.

C. All voice/data cables shall be terminated on separate and dedicated patch panels in the MCR .

D. Mechanical Performance: Each port shall be an 8-position modular jack, compliant to

E. ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 (2 5.7).

F. Electrical Performance: Each port shall meet or exceed TIA/EIA-568-C.2 6.8 and ISO/IEC 11801 requirements for CAT6 UTP cabling through the cable termination and patch cord connection.

G. Manufacturer:

1. Panduit

a. # CP48BLY; 48- Port Flat Modular Patch Panel, excepts min com jacks

2.7 TELCO CROSSCONNECT HARDWARE

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:1. Panduit

B. General Requirements for Cable Connecting Hardware: Comply with TIA/EIA-568-C.2, IDC type, with modules designed for punch-down caps or tools. Cables shall be terminated with connecting hardware of same category or higher.

C. The Communications Contractor shall cross-connect the telephone lines from the Telco panel binding post to the 66 block. Extend from 66-block to dedicated patch panel for voice.

D. Connecting Blocks: Provide 66-block blocks for the number of cables terminated on the block, plus 25 percent spare. Integral with connector bodies, including plugs and jacks where indicated.

E. Cross-Connect: Modular array of connecting blocks arranged to terminate building cables and permit interconnection between cables.



1. Number of Terminals per Field: One for each conductor in assigned cables.

F. Jacks and Jack Assemblies: Modular, color-coded, eight-position modular receptacle units with integral IDC-type terminals. • The jacks for the telephone lines patch panel (with 50 pairs cable to 66 block mounted on the designated location in the backboard shown on plans) shall be GREEN (CJ688TGGR).

G. Cords are generally available in lengths to 20 feet and longer in 24-inch increments.

2.8 MODULAR CONNECTOR / 8-POSITION JACK – CAT6 RATED

A. Application: Modular connectors (jacks) for termination of 4-pair UTP cables; modular connectors shall be compatible with the 4-pair cables specified herein this section both electrically and physically.

B. Mechanical Performance: Modular jacks shall be 8-position, compliant to ANSI/TIA-568-C.2.

C. Electrical Performance: Each jack shall meet or exceed TIA/EIA-568-C.2 and ISO/IEC 11801 requirements for CAT6 UTP cabling.

D. Manufacturer:

1. Panduit

a. # CJ688TGBU; 8-pin, 8-contact Component rated CAT6 blue (Data, Wireless Access point)

b. # CJ688TGIW; 8-pin, 8-contact Component rated CAT6 White (Voice)

c. # CJ688TGYL; 8-pin, 8-contact Component rated CAT6 Yellow (Security)





D. Manufacturer:

1. Panduit

a. Mini-Com CJ688TGBU (Blue for Wireless Access point and data).

b. Mini-Com CJ688TGIW (Off White for voice).



c. Mini-Com CJ688TGYL (Yellow for security).

2.10 PATCH CORDS

A. 24-gauge stranded cable for maximum flexibility.

B. Must have snag less boot design.

C. Must be compliant with horizontal cable plant.

D. Contractor shall provide and install one patch cord for every terminated cable. Confirm lengths, color of all patch cords prior to procurement with ISD Project Manager.





2.11 WORK AREA OUTLETS

A. Faceplates for Standard Flush-Mount Outlets

1. Application: Faceplates shall be suitable for indoor installation for standard 1-gang and 2-gang flush-mount devices.

B. Contractor shall confirm all faceplate colors with Architect and ISD Project Manager prior procurement.

C. Faceplates shall have 2, 3, 4, or 6 ports, and shall include required accessories, such as icons, blank inserts, label windows and labels.

1. Manufacturer:

a. Panduit

1) #CFPL2IWY; Quickport single gang 2-port faceplate,




D. Faceplate for Wall Phone Outlets with Mounting Studs

1. Application: Faceplates shall be suitable for indoor installation for standard 1- gang flush-mount device equipped with 1 position for a modular jack and two mounting studs for standard wall-mount telephones.



2. Faceplates shall include required accessories, such as icons, blank inserts, label windows and labels.

3. Color: Finish shall be stainless steel.

4. Manufacturer:

a. Panduit

1) #KWP6PY; Quickport single gang wall mount stainless steel phone outlet plate

E. Faceplates for Modular Furniture Mount Outlets

1. Four port faceplates for modular furniture that fits into _” x _” opening.

2. Color: Match furniture manufacturer base plate color

3. Manufacturer:

a. Panduit

1) #CFFPL4; 4-port Quickport modular furniture faceplate, “X” denotes faceplate color

F. Wall Plate, Decora, Floor Box and Wall-Mount

1. Wall Plate shall be Decora style.


3. Manufacturer:

a. Panduit

1) #CBIW; Wall Plate, Decora, single gang.

G. Decora Outlet Frame, for Modular Furniture, Floor Box and Wall-Mount

1. Outlet frame shall be duplex Decora style.


3. Manufacturer:

a. Panduit

1) #CFG1IW; Quickport Decora 1-port insert

2) CFG2IW; Quickport Decora 2-port insert





H. Surface mounted outlet boxes

1. Surface mount box will except modular type connector outlets.

2. Surface box will have labeling windows.

3. Manufacturer:

a. Panduit

1) #CBXJ2IW-A; Single 2- port surface mount box – white

2.12 LABELS

A. Cabling Contractor shall submit label scheme for ISD Project Manager for review and approval prior performing the work.

B. Labels shall be machine printable with a laser printer, ink jet printer, thermal transfer printer, or hand-held printer.

C. Labels for Horizontal Cables

1. Adhesive backed labels and self-laminating feature.

2. Fit the horizontal cables listed above (i.e., shall fully wrap around the cable’s jacket).

3. Size: 2”x.05” printable area, minimum

4. Color: white

5. Manufacturer:

a. Panduit

1) #S100X150YAJ; labels for cable diameters 0.16”-0.32”, white, desktop printer (laser or ink jet)


2.13 MISCELLANEOUS COMPONENTS

A. Velcro Cable Ties

1. Width: .75”.

2. Color: Velcro cable ties the same color as the cable to which it is being applied.

3. Manufacturers:



a. Panduit “Tak-Ty” series cable ties

b. Panduit

1) #HLS-15R-0; black, 15’ roll, cut to length.

c. Or approved equal

B. Plenum Cable Ties

1. Application: for use in plenum or air handling spaces

2. Color: maroon or other distinctive non-white color

3. Manufacturer:

a. Panduit

1) #PLT1M-xxxx

2) #PLT2S-xxxx

3) #PLT3S-xxxx

b. Or approved equal.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL



A. Rooms: Prior to installation, verify equipment rooms are suitable to accept the horizontal cables and terminations.

B. Pathways: Prior to installation verify that pathways and supporting devices, provided under other sections, are properly installed, and that temporary supports, devices, etc., have been removed. Verify dimensions of pathways, including length (for example, “True Tape” the conduits).

C. Cable Integrity: Prior to installation, verify the cable’s integrity – both sheath and conductors. Documentation of pre-installation testing is not a close out requirement, and is the responsibility of the Contractor.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Cable Installation and Routing



1. Cable runs shall have continuous sheath continuity, homogenous in nature. Splices are not permitted anywhere.

2. Place cables within designated pathways, such as cable tray, basket tray, cable hangers, etc. Do no fasten (such as with cable ties) or attach cables to other building infrastructure (such as ducts, pipes, conduits, etc), other systems (such as ceiling support wires, wall studs, etc), or to the outside of conduits, cable trays, or other non-approved pathway systems.

3. Place and suspend cables and conductors during installation and termination in a manner to protect them from physical interference or damage. Place cables with no kinks, twists, or impact damage to the sheath. Replace cables damaged during installation or termination at no additional cost.

4. Maintain minimum cable length of 30 feet from the termination in the MCR to the consolidation point enclosure.

5. Maintain maximum cable length of 90 meters from the termination in the MCR to the consolidation point enclosure and to termination at the user’s faceplate (permanent link).

6. No cable length shall exceed 90 meters from the termination point in the MCR to the termination point at the work area (permanent link).

7. Route cables at 90-degree angles, allowing for bending radius, along corridors for ease of access.

8. Do not exceed manufacturer's limits for pulling tension.

9. Do not use cable-pulling compounds for indoor installations.

10. Maintain a minimum bend radius of 6 times the cable diameter during and after installation.

11. Route cables under building infrastructure (such as ducts, pipes, conduits, etc); Do not route cables over building infrastructure. The installation shall result in easy accessibility to the cables in the future.

12. Place cables 6", minimum, away from power sources to reduce interference from EMI.

13. Place a pull string along with cables where run in pathways and spare capacity in the pathway remains. Tie off ends of the pull string (to prevent the string from falling into the conduit).

14. Neatly dress and organize cables using designated cable routing facilities, and fasten to support devices via Velcro-type straps.

15. When exiting the primary pathway (such as tray) to the work area, exit via the top of the pathway. Secure the cables to the pathway using an approved cable tie.

B. Cable Routing and Dressing within MCR room



1. Place cables within the overhead cable support or under the raised floor, when routing vertically, fasten the cables onto wall-mounted vertical cable support every 24 inches on-center using cable ties.

2. At the rack bay, route cables into the back of the vertical management sections (do not route cables into the front as this space is reserved for patch cords only). Divide the cables equally between both sides of an equipment rack such that a cable does not travel past the midpoint of the rack prior to termination. Dress and cut cables to length required to reach the designated termination point with no excess cable and slack left in the horizontal cable manager, vertical cable manager, and overhead cable support.

3. For cables run under the raised floor, provide 10’ of slack in the MCR by neatly coiling the cable under the raised floor.

C. Termination in the MCR.

1. Provide termination apparatus and accessories required for a complete installation. Install and assemble termination apparatus, accessories and associated management apparatus according to the manufacturer’s instructions.

2. Properly strain relieve cables to and at termination points per manufacturer’s instructions.

3. For OSP cables, apply sealant (such as B-sealant) to the end of the cable where the pairs exit the jacket – this step to seal the end of the cable and prevent water-blocking gel from leaking of the cable’s sheath.

4. Terminate cables and twisted pairs in accordance with manufacturer's latest installation requirements and ANSI/TIA-568-C.0 standard installation practices. Terminate cable pairs onto the termination apparatus. Terminate twisted pairs compliant to ANSI/TIA-568-C.0 and wired per 1.04 System Description.

5. Modular Patch Panels and Horizontal Management Panels

a. Provide quantity of modular patch panels to support termination of cables served from respective MCR.

b. Install and assemble modular patch panels and horizontal management panels according to the manufacturer’s instructions.

c. Install the patch panels and the horizontal management panels as shown on the contract drawings. If configuration is not shown, install the patch panels in association with the horizontal management panels such that a management panel is mounted above and below given patch panel.

d. It is the responsibility of the contractor to determine the exact quantity of patch panels required in the MCR room.

e. Terminate the all the following cables on distinct patch panlels.

1) Homerun cabling

2) Security CCTV camera cabling



3) Wireless access point cabling

6. Termination Sequence

a. Terminate the cables in sequential order using the link’s identifier starting at the top left and completing a panel before moving to the next panel below.

D. Cable Routing and Dressing at the Work Areas

1. Provide 20 feet, minimum, sheathed cable slack for cables run from MCRs to consolidation points. Neatly coil slack at the consolidation point under the raised floor.

2. Provide 5 feet, minimum, sheathed cable slack for cables run from the consolidation point to the outlet. Neatly coil slack at the outlet under the raised floor.

3. For outlets on the first floor, provide 10 feet, minimum, sheathed cable slack – length not to exceed permanent link maximum length requirement. Place the slack within ceiling space neatly on a cable hanger.

4. For homerun outlets on floors 2-6, provide 10 feet, minimum, sheathed cable slack – length not to exceed permanent link maximum length requirement. Place the slack at the outlet under the raised floor or at the location where the outlet conduit enters the raised floor.

5. Routing to Furniture-Mount Faceplates

a. Route cables from primary or secondary pathway from the raised floor grommet into opening at bottom of furniture. Exercise caution to prevent scraping, cutting, or other damage to cable’s jacket.

b. Provide spiral wrap around cables from furniture-feed pathway to point where cables enter furniture.

c. Route cables from under-floor through pre-cut access floor panel into opening at bottom of furniture. Exercise caution to prevent scraping, cutting, or other damage to cable’s jacket.

d. Provide a foam backer rod or similar into the floor panel hole around the cable as to seal the penetration.

E. Termination at the Work Areas

1. Provide device components, connectors, and accessories required for a complete installation. Install and assemble connectors, jacks, adapters, termination apparatus, accessories and associated management apparatus according to the manufacturer’s instructions.

2. Provide six inches, minimum, sheathed cable slack behind each workstation outlet faceplate. Coil the slack cable inside the raceway, within the wall, or in the junction box (if used), per the cabling manufacturer's installation standards.

3. Wall-Mount Faceplates



a. Install devices at heights shown on the contract drawings. If no heights are shown, install at 24” AFF on center (+/- 3”).

b. Mount faceplates plumb, square, and at the same level as adjacent device faceplates.

c. Patch gaps around faceplates so that faceplate covers the entire opening.

4. Furniture-Mount Faceplates

a. Coordinate installation of faceplate adapters with the furniture contractor, including color.

b. Mount faceplate adapters into the designated opening for telecommunications cabling.

5. Terminate cables and twisted pairs in accordance with manufacturer's latest installation requirements and ANSI/TIA-568-C.0 standard installation practices. Terminate twisted pairs compliant to ANSI/TIA-568-C.0 and wired per 1.04 System Description.

F. Entrance Protector (for OSP/Underground Installation)

G. Perform post-installation testing as described in the Telecommunication Testing specification (refer to Section 27 0811). Replace terminations and connectors not passing the required media test.

3.4 LABELING


1. Labeling, identifier assignment, and label colors shall conform to ANSI/TIA/EIA-606-A Administration Standard and as approved by the Owner’s Representative before installation.

2. Permanent labels with machine-generated text (hand written labels will not be accepted).

B. Label Formats

1. Horizontal Cable Labels

a. Text Attributes: Black, 1/8” high, minimum, or #12 font size.

b. Install labels on both ends of cables no more than 4" from the edge of the cable jacket. Install labels such that they are visible by a technician from a normal stance.

2. Patch Panel Labels

a. Use modular patch panel labels included in the product packaging. Request approval by the Engineer for other labels.

b. Use a label color for the respective field type, per TIA/EIA-606.



c. Text Attributes: Black, 3/32” high, minimum, or #10 font size.

3. Outlet Labels

a. Use outlet labels included in the product packaging. Any deviation from this requirement must be approved in writing by the Owner’s Representative.

b. Label Background: White.


d. Install label in the top label window. Leave the bottom label window blank.


1. General: Separate label fields of the identifier with a hyphen.

2. Horizontal Cables

a. See Drawings

3. Outlets

a. See Drawings

4. Individual Ports at Patch Panels

a. See Drawings



B. Remove cables and replace with new those failing to meet the indicated standards and not passing the testing requirements of Section 27 0811 with no impact to cost and schedule. The Owner’s Representative, will not accept the installation until testing has indicated a 100% availability of all cables and conductors. Any deviation from this requirement must be approved in writing by the Owner’s Representative.

C. Comply with system acceptance and certification requirements of Section 27 0000.

END OF SECTION


EARVIN MAGIC JOHNSON PARK – PHASE 1A COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL LOS ANGELES, CA TWISTED PAIR CABLINGCOUNTY OF LOS ANGELES COMMUNITY DEVELOPMENT COMMISSION 27 1513-1AHBE PROJECT NO. 116030.01 INTEGRAL GROUP

SECTION 27 1513 COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL TWISTED PAIR CABLING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Horizontal Twisted Pair Cabling (subsystem of Telecommunications Cabling Infrastructure)

B. Related Sections

1. Comply with the Related Sections requirements of Section 27 0000

2. Comply with County of Los Angeles Internal Services Department standards

3. 270811 Communication Twisted Pair Testing

1.2 REFERENCES


B. In addition to the codes and standards listed in Section 27 0000, comply with the latest edition of the following applicable specifications and standards except as otherwise shown or specified:


a. NFPA 255, “Standard Method of Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials”, 2006

b. NFPA 262, “Standard Method of Test for Flame Travel and Smoke of Wires and Cables for Use in Air-Handling Spaces”, 2007

2. Underwriters Laboratories (UL): Applicable listing and ratings, including but not limited to the following standards:



c. UL 1581, “Reference Standard for Electrical Wires, Cables, and Flexible Cords”

d. UL 1863, “Communications-Circuit Accessories”


a. ANSI/ICEA S-90-661-2008, “Category 3, 5, and 5e Individually Unshielded Twisted Pair Indoor Cable for Use In General Purpose and LAN Communication Wiring Systems”



b. ICEA S-102-700-2004, “ICEA Standard For Category 6 Individually Unshielded Twisted Pair Indoor Cables (With Or Without An Overall Shield) For Use In Communications Wiring Systems Technical Requirements”

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Refer to Section 27 0000 for Definitions.

B. In addition, define the following list of terms as used in this specification as follows:

1. “CAT6”: Category 6 UTP performance grade

2. “Channel”: End to end transmission path; e.g., the entire portion of the horizontal cabling to each outlet consisting of the Permanent Link, line cord (at the workstation), patch cord, and, if a full crossconnection is implemented, the crossconnect termination/connecting apparatus and equipment cord.

3. “CMP”: Communications Media Plenum [NEC plenum rating]

4. “FTP”: Foiled Twisted Pair

5. “PE”: Polyethylene

6. “Permanent Link”: Test configuration for a horizontal cabling link excluding patch cords, equipment cords, and line cords; e.g., the ‘permanent’ portion of the horizontal cabling to each outlet consisting of cable, consolidation point (if used), termination/connecting apparatus in the telecommunications and the connector at the outlet.

7. “PVC”: PolyVinyl Chloride

8. “UTP”: Unshielded Twisted Pair


A. Work Covered Under Other Sections

1. Pathways: The communications pathways (basket tray, conduits, stubs, etc.) work will be covered under another Section. Refer to the contract drawings for size/capacity and route information.

2. Rooms: Build out (e.g., backboards, overhead and vertical cable runway, etc.) of the telecommunications rooms will be covered under another Section. Refer to the contract drawings for build out information.

3. Connecting Media: Patch cords in the MCR between horizontal field and network equipment (e.g., access switch.), patch/line cords at the work areas between outlet and user equipment (e.g., phone, computer, etc.)

B. Base Bid Work

1. Provide engineering, labor, materials, apparatus, tools, equipment, and transportation required to make a complete working communications Horizontal Twisted Pair Cabling



System installation described in this Section and shown on related drawings. Consider Horizontal Cabling as shown on contract drawings as base bid work, unless otherwise noted. This includes terminations at both ends.

2. In general, the base bid work includes:

a. Submittals

b. Horizontal cables, terminations, and outlets

c. Cable management

d. Cross-connections

e. Cable identification tags and system labeling

f. Record Documents

g. Warranty

C. Jack Wiring: T568A

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Comply with the Submittals article of Section 27 0000 for procedural, quantity, content, and format requirements.

B. Substitutions

1. Conform to substitutions requirements and procedure in Section 27 0000.


1. Product Data Submittal, indicating conformance with NEC, UL, TIA/EIA listings, certifications and specifications.

2. Schedule Submittal, consisting of proposed schedule of work. This schedule may be combined with the schedule developed for 27 00 00 series Sections

3. Shop Drawings Submittal, consisting of proposed changes to cable routing, or termination locations/configurations

D. Submittal Requirements at Closeout:

1. As-Built Drawings

2. Cable ID –to– Office Number Key: Submit a “cable ID-to-Office number key” as an electronic file in an MS-Excel spreadsheet file format containing a list of every cable identifier associated with the final office number

3. Cross-connection records/cut sheets

4. O & M Manuals



E. Posted Documentation

1. Post one full size laminated plot of as-built drawings, specifically the floor plans and (as applicable) reflected ceiling plans, within MCRs in picture clear frame. Coordinate location with Owner.




1. In addition to the Contractor Qualifications requirements of Section 27 0000, the Contractor shall be certified by the manufacturer to provide the cabling system (proposed, submitted, and approved) and to provide an extended warranty. Submit satisfactory evidence of certification in the form of a current letter or certificate from the manufacturer as part of the bid.


A. Comply with the Delivery, Storage and Handling requirements of Section 27 0000.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. The horizontal cabling system, as specified in this section, shall carry a 15-year (minimum) extended system warranty. This extended warranty shall cover parts and labor for the duration of the extended warranty. This extended warranty shall also cover electrical performance of cabling system to the specific category per ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-C performance criteria for horizontal cabling.

B. Where consolidation points (CP) are used, with final cable assembly from CP to workstation in a plug to jack configuration, provide written warranty statement identifying the following at the time of bid:

1. Minimum and maximum cable lengths from MCR to CP and CP to user outlet that the manufacturer requires to meet the system’s published performance

2. Minimum and maximum patch cord lengths that the manufacturer requires to meet the system’s published performance

3. Warranty statement – stating that the system described above will meet the manufacturers published performance, head room, and application warranties.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Panduit

B. General Cable



2.2 SUBSTITUTIONS

A. Comply with the Substitutions requirements of Section 27 0000.

2.3 HORIZONTAL CABLE – CAT 6 PLENUM (CMP) RATED.

A. Application: Suitable for indoor installation, within ceiling space in primary and secondary pathways, within access/raised floor space.

B. Conductors:

1. Insulated Conductors: 23 AWG solid copper, fully insulated with a flame retardant thermoplastic material.


C. Cable Sheath:

1. Outer Jacket: seamless outer jacket (material = LS-PVC, or similar) applied to and completely cover the internal components (twisted pairs).

2. Flame Rating: NEC (Article 800) rated as CMP, and UL listed as such.


E. Manufacturer:

1. Panduit Cable

a. # PUP6004BU-UY Enhanced Category 6 CMP, Blue (Data Cable & WAPs)

b. # PUP6004WH-UY Enhanced Category 6 CMP, White (Voice Cable)

c. # PUP6004YL-UY Enhanced Category 6 CMP, Yellow (Security Cable)

2.4 HORIZONTAL CABLE – CAT6 OSP/UNDERGROUND (GROUND FLOOR BOXES)

A. Application: Suitable for outdoor installation, within underground pathways (conduit, pullboxes).

B. Conductors:

1. Insulated Conductors: 23 AWG solid copper, fully insulated with a thermoplastic material (material = PE, or equivalent).


C. Core & Sheath:



1. Twisted pairs shall lie individually within a polyolefin fluted center member.

2. Filled: Cable core and sheath flooded with filling compound to protect against moisture penetration. Filling compound: “FLEXGEL”, or equivalent.

3. Outer Jacket: seamless outer jacket (material = PE, or similar) applied to and completely cover the internal components (twisted pairs), embedded with UV inhibitors, and black in color.


E. Manufacturer:

1. General Cable

a. # 7136100; CAT6 4 pair UTP cable, OSP Gel Filled, CMP

2.5 FIBER HORIZONTAL CABLE – MULTIMODE OSP (Outdoor security cameras only)

A. Application: For all exterior security cameras

B. Description: Multimode, singlemode 2-strands of fiber, nonconductive, tight buffer, optical fiber cable. As noted on telecom construction drawings.

1. Comply with ICEA S-104-696 for mechanical properties.2. Comply with TIA-568-C.3 for performance specifications.3. Comply with TIA-492AAAA-B for detailed specifications.4. RoHS Compliant Directive 2002/95/EC

a. Riser Rated, Nonconductive: Type OFNR, CS4 FT4 complying with UL 1666.

C. Manufacturer:

1. General Cable

a. #BL0021ANR.BK (50mµ multimode, 2 fibers, tight buffer indoor/outdoor riser cable

D. Patch Panels: Modular panels housing multiple-numbered, duplex cable connectors.

1. Number of Connectors per Field: One for each fiber of cable or cables assigned to field, plus spares and blank positions adequate to suit specified expansion criteria.



E. Fiber Adapter Panels

Panduit part#: FAP12WAQDLCZ



F. Fiber patch cords Factory-made, dual-fiber cables in lengths specified in the part numbers. Confirm color and length with ISD Project manager prior procurement.

Panduit part#: FZE10-10M1

2.6 TERMINATION APPARATUS – FLAT MODULAR PATCH PANEL

A. Application: Panels shall be suitable for installation within a MCR, and Consolidation Points (CPs) for the termination of the horizontal cables specified herein. Panels shall be horizontally oriented for a rack-mounted configuration. Panels shall be capable of supporting, organizing, labeling and patching/ cross-connecting between the horizontal termination field and the equipment termination field.

B. Modular patch panel shall accept 6-port cassette type assemblies, and shall be compatible with the specified horizontal cables both electrically and physically.

C. Mechanical Performance: Each port shall be an 8-position modular jack, compliant to

D. ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 (2 5.7).

E. Electrical Performance: Each port shall meet or exceed TIA/EIA-568-C.2 6.8 and ISO/IEC 11801 requirements for CAT6 UTP cabling through the cable termination and patch cord connection.

F. Manufacturer:

1. Panduit

a. # CP48BLY; 48- Port Flat Modular Patch Panel, excepts min com jacks





D. Manufacturer:

1. Panduit

a. # CJ688TGBU; 8-pin, 8-contact Component rated CAT6 blue (Data, Wireless Access point)

b. # CJ688TGWH; 8-pin, 8-contact Component rated CAT6 White (Voice)

c. # CJ688TGYL; 8-pin, 8-contact Component rated CAT6 White (Voice)







D. Manufacturer:

1. Panduit

a. # CJ688TGOR; 8-pin, 8-contact Component rated CAT6 Orange (WAPs)

2.9 PATCH CORDS

A. 24-gauge stranded cable for maximum flexibility.

B. Must have snag less boot design.

C. Must be compliant with horizontal cable plant.

D. Contractor shall provide and install one patch cord for every terminated cable. Confirm lengths, color of all patch cords prior to procurement with ISD Project Manager.





2.10 WORK AREA OUTLETS

A. Faceplates for Standard Flush-Mount Outlets

1. Application: Faceplates shall be suitable for indoor installation for standard 1-gang and 2-gang flush-mount devices.

B. Contractor shall confirm all faceplate colors with Architect and ISD Project Manager prior procurement.

C. Faceplates shall have 2, 3, 4, or 6 ports, and shall include required accessories, such as icons, blank inserts, label windows and labels.

1. Manufacturer:



a. Panduit





D. Faceplate for Wall Phone Outlets with Mounting Studs

1. Application: Faceplates shall be suitable for indoor installation for standard 1- gang flush-mount device equipped with 1 position for a modular jack and two mounting studs for standard wall-mount telephones.

2. Faceplates shall include required accessories, such as icons, blank inserts, label windows and labels.

3. Color: Finish shall be stainless steel.

4. Manufacturer:

a. Panduit

1) #KWP6PY; Quickport single gang wall mount stainless steel phone outlet plate

E. Faceplates for Modular Furniture Mount Outlets

1. Four port faceplates for modular furniture that fits into _” x _” opening.


3. Manufacturer:

a. Panduit

1) #CFFPL4; 4-port Quickport modular furniture faceplate, “X” denotes faceplate color

F. Wall Plate, Decora, Floor Box and Wall-Mount

1. Wall Plate shall be Decora style.


3. Manufacturer:

a. Panduit

1) #CBIW; Wall Plate, Decora, single gang.



G. Decora Outlet Frame, for Modular Furniture, Floor Box and Wall-Mount

1. Outlet frame shall be duplex Decora style.


3. Manufacturer:

a. Panduit

1) #CFG1IW; Quickport Decora 1-port insert




H. Surface mounted outlet boxes

1. Surface mount box will except modular type connector outlets.

2. Surface box will have labeling windows.

3. Manufacturer:

a. Panduit

1) #CBXJ2IW-A; Single 2- port surface mount box – white

2.11 LABELS

A. Cabling Contractor shall submit label scheme for ISD Project Manager for review and approval prior performing the work.

B. Labels shall be machine printable with a laser printer, ink jet printer, thermal transfer printer, or hand-held printer.

C. Labels for Horizontal Cables

1. Adhesive backed labels and self-laminating feature.

2. Fit the horizontal cables listed above (i.e., shall fully wrap around the cable’s jacket).

3. Size: 2”x.05” printable area, minimum

4. Color: white

5. Manufacturer:

a. Panduit



1) #S100X150YAJ; labels for cable diameters 0.16”-0.32”, white, desktop printer (laser or ink jet)



A. Velcro Cable Ties

1. Width: .75”.

2. Color: Velcro cable ties the same color as the cable to which it is being applied.

3. Manufacturers:

a. Panduit “Tak-Ty” series cable ties

b. Panduit

1) #HLS-15R-0; black, 15’ roll, cut to length.

c. Or approved equal

B. Plenum Cable Ties

1. Application: for use in plenum or air handling spaces

2. Color: maroon or other distinctive non-white color

3. Manufacturer:

a. Panduit

1) #PLT1M-xxxx

2) #PLT2S-xxxx

3) #PLT3S-xxxx

b. Or approved equal.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL





A. Rooms: Prior to installation, verify equipment rooms are suitable to accept the horizontal cables and terminations.

B. Pathways: Prior to installation verify that pathways and supporting devices, provided under other sections, are properly installed, and that temporary supports, devices, etc., have been removed. Verify dimensions of pathways, including length (for example, “True Tape” the conduits).

C. Cable Integrity: Prior to installation, verify the cable’s integrity – both sheath and conductors. Documentation of pre-installation testing is not a close out requirement, and is the responsibility of the Contractor.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Cable Installation and Routing

1. Cable runs shall have continuous sheath continuity, homogenous in nature. Splices are not permitted anywhere.

2. Place cables within designated pathways, such as cable tray, basket tray, cable hangers, etc. Do no fasten (such as with cable ties) or attach cables to other building infrastructure (such as ducts, pipes, conduits, etc), other systems (such as ceiling support wires, wall studs, etc), or to the outside of conduits, cable trays, or other non-approved pathway systems.


4. Maintain minimum cable length of 30 feet from the termination in the MCR to the consolidation point enclosure.

5. Maintain maximum cable length of 90 meters from the termination in the MCR to the consolidation point enclosure and to termination at the user’s faceplate (permanent link).

6. No cable length shall exceed 90 meters from the termination point in the MCR to the termination point at the work area (permanent link).

7. Route cables at 90-degree angles, allowing for bending radius, along corridors for ease of access.



10. Maintain a minimum bend radius of 6 times the cable diameter during and after installation.



11. Route cables under building infrastructure (such as ducts, pipes, conduits, etc); Do not route cables over building infrastructure. The installation shall result in easy accessibility to the cables in the future.


13. Place a pull string along with cables where run in pathways and spare capacity in the pathway remains. Tie off ends of the pull string (to prevent the string from falling into the conduit).

14. Neatly dress and organize cables using designated cable routing facilities, and fasten to support devices via Velcro-type straps.

15. When exiting the primary pathway (such as tray) to the work area, exit via the top of the pathway. Secure the cables to the pathway using an approved cable tie.

B. Cable Routing and Dressing within MCR room

1. Place cables within the overhead cable support or under the raised floor, when routing vertically, fasten the cables onto wall-mounted vertical cable support every 24 inches on-center using cable ties.

2. At the rack bay, route cables into the back of the vertical management sections (do not route cables into the front as this space is reserved for patch cords only). Divide the cables equally between both sides of an equipment rack such that a cable does not travel past the midpoint of the rack prior to termination. Dress and cut cables to length required to reach the designated termination point with no excess cable and slack left in the horizontal cable manager, vertical cable manager, and overhead cable support.

3. For cables run under the raised floor, provide 10’ of slack in the MCR by neatly coiling the cable under the raised floor.

C. Termination in the MCR.

1. Provide termination apparatus and accessories required for a complete installation. Install and assemble termination apparatus, accessories and associated management apparatus according to the manufacturer’s instructions.

2. Properly strain relieve cables to and at termination points per manufacturer’s instructions.

3. For OSP cables, apply sealant (such as B-sealant) to the end of the cable where the pairs exit the jacket – this step to seal the end of the cable and prevent water-blocking gel from leaking of the cable’s sheath.

4. Terminate cables and twisted pairs in accordance with manufacturer's latest installation requirements and ANSI/TIA-568-C.0 standard installation practices. Terminate cable pairs onto the termination apparatus. Terminate twisted pairs compliant to ANSI/TIA-568-C.0 and wired per 1.04 System Description.

5. Modular Patch Panels and Horizontal Management Panels

a. Provide quantity of modular patch panels to support termination of cables served from respective MCR.



b. Install and assemble modular patch panels and horizontal management panels according to the manufacturer’s instructions.

c. Install the patch panels and the horizontal management panels as shown on the contract drawings. If configuration is not shown, install the patch panels in association with the horizontal management panels such that a management panel is mounted above and below given patch panel.

d. It is the responsibility of the contractor to determine the exact quantity of patch panels required in the MCR room.

e. Terminate the all the following cables on distinct patch panlels.

1) Homerun cabling

2) Security CCTV camera cabling

3) Wireless access point cabling

6. Termination Sequence

a. Terminate the cables in sequential order using the link’s identifier starting at the top left and completing a panel before moving to the next panel below.

D. Cable Routing and Dressing at the Work Areas

1. Provide 20 feet, minimum, sheathed cable slack for cables run from MCRs to consolidation points. Neatly coil slack at the consolidation point under the raised floor.

2. Provide 5 feet, minimum, sheathed cable slack for cables run from the consolidation point to the outlet. Neatly coil slack at the outlet under the raised floor.

3. For outlets on the first floor, provide 10 feet, minimum, sheathed cable slack – length not to exceed permanent link maximum length requirement. Place the slack within ceiling space neatly on a cable hanger.

4. For homerun outlets on floors 2-6, provide 10 feet, minimum, sheathed cable slack – length not to exceed permanent link maximum length requirement. Place the slack at the outlet under the raised floor or at the location where the outlet conduit enters the raised floor.

5. Routing to Furniture-Mount Faceplates

a. Route cables from primary or secondary pathway from the raised floor grommet into opening at bottom of furniture. Exercise caution to prevent scraping, cutting, or other damage to cable’s jacket.

b. Provide spiral wrap around cables from furniture-feed pathway to point where cables enter furniture.

c. Route cables from under-floor through pre-cut access floor panel into opening at bottom of furniture. Exercise caution to prevent scraping, cutting, or other damage to cable’s jacket.



d. Provide a foam backer rod or similar into the floor panel hole around the cable as to seal the penetration.

E. Termination at the Work Areas

1. Provide device components, connectors, and accessories required for a complete installation. Install and assemble connectors, jacks, adapters, termination apparatus, accessories and associated management apparatus according to the manufacturer’s instructions.

2. Provide six inches, minimum, sheathed cable slack behind each workstation outlet faceplate. Coil the slack cable inside the raceway, within the wall, or in the junction box (if used), per the cabling manufacturer's installation standards.

3. Wall-Mount Faceplates

a. Install devices at heights shown on the contract drawings. If no heights are shown, install at 24” AFF on center (+/- 3”).

b. Mount faceplates plumb, square, and at the same level as adjacent device faceplates.

c. Patch gaps around faceplates so that faceplate covers the entire opening.

4. Furniture-Mount Faceplates

a. Coordinate installation of faceplate adapters with the furniture contractor, including color.

b. Mount faceplate adapters into the designated opening for telecommunications cabling.

5. Terminate cables and twisted pairs in accordance with manufacturer's latest installation requirements and ANSI/TIA-568-C.0 standard installation practices. Terminate twisted pairs compliant to ANSI/TIA-568-C.0 and wired per 1.04 System Description.

F. Entrance Protector (for OSP/Underground Installation)

G. Perform post-installation testing as described in the Telecommunication Testing specification (refer to Section 27 0811). Replace terminations and connectors not passing the required media test.

3.4 LABELING


1. Labeling, identifier assignment, and label colors shall conform to ANSI/TIA/EIA-606-A Administration Standard and as approved by the Owner’s Representative before installation.

2. Permanent labels with machine-generated text (hand written labels will not be accepted).

B. Label Formats



1. Horizontal Cable Labels

a. Text Attributes: Black, 1/8” high, minimum, or #12 font size.

b. Install labels on both ends of cables no more than 4" from the edge of the cable jacket. Install labels such that they are visible by a technician from a normal stance.

2. Patch Panel Labels

a. Use modular patch panel labels included in the product packaging. Request approval by the Engineer for other labels.

b. Use a label color for the respective field type, per TIA/EIA-606.


3. Outlet Labels

a. Use outlet labels included in the product packaging. Any deviation from this requirement must be approved in writing by the Owner’s Representative.

b. Label Background: White.


d. Install label in the top label window. Leave the bottom label window blank.


1. General: Separate label fields of the identifier with a hyphen.

2. Horizontal Cables

a. See Drawings

3. Outlets

a. See Drawings

4. Individual Ports at Patch Panels

a. See Drawings



B. Remove cables and replace with new those failing to meet the indicated standards and not passing the testing requirements of Section 27 0811 with no impact to cost and schedule. The Owner’s Representative, will not accept the installation until testing has indicated a 100% availability of all cables and conductors. Any deviation from this requirement must be approved in writing by the Owner’s Representative.



C. Comply with system acceptance and certification requirements of Section 27 0000.

END OF SECTION

Integrated Audio Visual Systems - 27 41 16

1 of 4

APPENDIX AAUDIO VISUAL BILL OF MATERIALS 1, 2

Room Name and Number Manufacturer Part # Qty. Description

Main Control Room (MCR) 116 Netgear GS724TPv2 1 PoE network switchMain Control Room (MCR) 116 Shure QLX-D124/85 3 Shure Wireless Microphone SystemMain Control Room (MCR) 116 Shure UA844+ SWB 3 Antenna Distribution SystemMain Control Room (MCR) 116 Crestron PRO3 1 3-Series Control System®Main Control Room (MCR) 116 Crestron TSD-2220-B 1 21.5” HD Touch Screen Display, BlackMain Control Room (MCR) 116 Crestron DM-DGE-200-C 1 Digital Graphics Engine 200 w/PinPoint™ UX & 4K DM 8G+® InputMain Control Room (MCR) 116 Crestron DM-MD16X16 1 16x16 DigitalMedia Switcher

Main Control Room (MCR) 116 Crestron DMC-4KZ-C 7DigitalMedia 8G+® 4K60 4:4:4 HDR Input Card for DM® Switchers, HDBaseT®

CompatibleMain Control Room (MCR) 116 Crestron DMC-4KZ-HD-DSP 5 HDMI® 4K60 4:4:4 HDR Input Card w/Downmixing for DM® SwitchersMain Control Room (MCR) 116 Crestron DMC-4KZ-CO-HD 5 2-Channel DigitalMedia 8G+® 4K60 4:4:4 HDR Output Card for DM® SwitchersMain Control Room (MCR) 116 Crestron DMC-4K-HDO 1 2-Channel 4K Scaling HDMI® Output Card for DM® SwitchersMain Control Room (MCR) 117 Crestron DSP-1281 2 Crestron Avia™ 12x8 Digital Signal Processor w/Dante®

Main Control Room (MCR) 116 Crestron AMP-8150 2Avia™ 8-Channel Power Amplifier, 150W/Ch., 4/8 Ohm or 70V North America & Japan,

100-120VMain Control Room (MCR) 116 Crestron DM-CBL-8G-P-SP1 000 1 DigitalMedia 8G Cable, plenum, 1000 ft spool

Main Control Room (MCR) 116 Crestron DM-8G-CONN-100 1Connectors for DM-CBL-8G DigitalMedia 8G

Cable, 100-Pack

Multipurspose Room A Crestron TST-902 1 8.7" Wireless Touch ScreenMultipurspose Room A Crestron TST-902-DSW 1 Wall Dock for TST-902Multipurspose Room A Crestron GLS-PART-CN 1 Cresnet® Partition SensorMultipurspose Room A Crestron CEN-GWEXER 1 infiNET EX® & ER Wireless GatewayMultipurspose Room A Crestron DM-RMC-4K-SCALER-C 2 4K DigitalMedia 8G+® Receiver & Room Controller with ScalerMultipurspose Room A Crestron DM-TX-200-C-2G-B-T 2 Wall Plate DigitalMedia 8G+® Transmitter 200, Black TextureMultipurspose Room A Crestron Saros PD8T-W-T-EACH 4 Saros® 8” 2-Way Pendant Speaker, White Textured . SingleMultipurspose Room A Crestron PDS8T-W-T-EACH 1 Saros® 8” Pendant Subwoofer, White Textured, SingleMultipurspose Room A Crestron DM-CBL-8G-P-SP1 1 DigitalMedia 8G Cable, plenum, 1000 ft spoolMultipurspose Room A Da-Lite 82433 1 LOW Voltage Screen ControllerMultipurspose Room A Da-Lite 84403BL 1 Electrified drop down screen (78" x 139" )Multipurspose Room A SamSung QM-75F 1 75" Edge-Lit 4K UHD LED Display for BusinessMultipurspose Room A Premier AM300-B 1 Flat Panel display mountMultipurspose Room A Premier INW-AM325 1 In-Wall box for Swingout MountsMultipurspose Room A Atlas MS-12CE 1 Microphone standMultipurspose Room A Sennhneiser SI 1015 /NT1015-120 1 Assitive Listening Moulator/Emitter with power supplyMultipurspose Room A Sennhneiser SZI 1015 1 Assitive Listening RadiatorMultipurspose Room A Sennhneiser HDI 830 10 Assitive Listening HeadsetMultipurspose Room A Sennhneiser L300 10-10 1 ALS baterry Charger for 10 headsetMultipurspose Room A Sennhneiser BA 300 1 Spare BateriesMultipurspose Room A Sennhneiser GZG 1029 1 Emitter mounting swivelMultipurspose Room A Sennhneiser GZP 10 1 Emitter Mounting PlateMultipurspose Room A Sennhneiser IZK 20 1 Emitter Mounting ClampMultipurspose Room A By architect By architect 1 Podium specified by ArchitectMultipurspose Room A By architect By architect 1 Video projector specified by ArchitectMultipurspose Room A Epson PowerLite 2250U/V11H871020 1 Portable PojectorMultipurspose Room B Crestron TST-902 1 8.7" Wireless Touch ScreenMultipurspose Room B Crestron TST-902-DSW 1 Wall Dock for TST-902Multipurspose Room B Crestron GLS-PART-CN 1 Cresnet® Partition SensorMultipurspose Room B Crestron CEN-GWEXER 1 infiNET EX® & ER Wireless GatewayMultipurspose Room B Crestron DM-RMC-4K-SCALER-C 2 4K DigitalMedia 8G+® Receiver & Room Controller with ScalerMultipurspose Room B Crestron DM-TX-200-C-2G-B-T 2 Wall Plate DigitalMedia 8G+® Transmitter 200, Black TextureMultipurspose Room B Crestron Saros PD8T-W-T-EACH 4 Saros® 8” 2-Way Pendant Speaker, White Textured . SingleMultipurspose Room B Crestron PDS8T-W-T-EACH 1 Saros® 8” Pendant Subwoofer, White Textured, SingleMultipurspose Room B Crestron DM-CBL-8G-P-SP1 1 DigitalMedia 8G Cable, plenum, 1000 ft spoolMultipurspose Room B Da-Lite 82433 1 LOW Voltage Screen ControllerMultipurspose Room B Da-Lite 84403BL 1 Electrified drop down screen (78" x 139" )Multipurspose Room B SamSung QM-75F 1 75" Edge-Lit 4K UHD LED Display for BusinessMultipurspose Room B Premier AM300-B 1 Flat Panel display mountMultipurspose Room B Premier INW-AM325 1 In-Wall box for Swingout MountsMultipurspose Room B Atlas MS-12CE 1 Microphone standMultipurspose Room B Sennhneiser SI 1015 /NT1015-120 1 Assitive Listening Moulator/Emitter with power supplyMultipurspose Room B Sennhneiser SZI 1015 1 Assitive Listening RadiatorMultipurspose Room B Sennhneiser HDI 830 10 Assitive Listening HeadsetMultipurspose Room B Sennhneiser L300 10-10 1 ALS baterry Charger for 10 headsetMultipurspose Room B Sennhneiser BA 300 1 Spare BateriesMultipurspose Room B Sennhneiser GZG 1029 1 Emitter mounting swivelMultipurspose Room B Sennhneiser GZP 10 1 Emitter Mounting PlateMultipurspose Room B Sennhneiser IZK 20 1 Emitter Mounting ClampMultipurspose Room B By architect By architect 1 Podium specified by ArchitectMultipurspose Room B By architect By architect 1 Video projector cart specified by ArchitectMultipurspose Room B Epson PowerLite 2250U/V11H871020 1 Portable PojectorMultipurspose Room C Crestron TST-902 1 8.7" Wireless Touch ScreenMultipurspose Room C Crestron TST-902-DSW 1 Wall Dock for TST-902Multipurspose Room C Crestron GLS-PART-CN 1 Cresnet® Partition SensorMultipurspose Room C Crestron CEN-GWEXER 1 infiNET EX® & ER Wireless GatewayMultipurspose Room C Crestron DM-TX-200-C-2G-B-T 1 Wall Plate DigitalMedia 8G+® Transmitter 200, Black TextureMultipurspose Room C Crestron DM-RMC-4K-SCALER-C 1 4K DigitalMedia 8G+® Receiver & Room Controller with Scaler


2 of 4

Multipurspose Room C Crestron Saros PD8T-W-T-EACH 8 Saros® 8” 2-Way Pendant Speaker, White Textured . SingleMultipurspose Room C Crestron PDS8T-W-T-EACH 2 Saros® 8” Pendant Subwoofer, White Textured, SingleMultipurspose Room C Da-Lite 82433 1 Low Voltage Screen Controller

Multipurspose Room C Da-LiteProfessional Electrol (106" x 188")

HDTV (16:9) format1 Recessed Electrified drop down screen (106" x 188")

Multipurspose Room C Draper Aeolift 100 AeroLift 100 1 Projector LiftMultipurspose Room C Premier PDS-Plus 1 Projector BracketMultipurspose Room C Epson Pro L1300UNL/V11H733920 1 Fixed ProjectorMultipurspose Room C Epson ELPM10/ V12H004M0A 1 Projector LensesMultipurspose Room C APC AP9562 1 Power distribution unitMultipurspose Room C Atlas MS-12CE 1 Microphone standMultipurspose Room C Sennhneiser SI 1015 /NT1015-120 1 Assitive Listening Moulator/Emitter with power supplyMultipurspose Room C Sennhneiser SZI 1015 1 Assitive Listening RadiatorMultipurspose Room C Sennhneiser HDI 830 25 Assitive Listening HeadsetMultipurspose Room C Sennhneiser L300 10-10 2 ALS baterry Charger for 10 headsetMultipurspose Room C Sennhneiser BA 300 1 Spare BateriesMultipurspose Room C Sennhneiser GZG 1029 1 Emitter mounting swivelMultipurspose Room C Sennhneiser GZP 10 1 Emitter Mounting PlateMultipurspose Room C Sennhneiser IZK 20 1 Emitter Mounting ClampMultipurspose Room C By architect By architect 1 Podium specified by ArchitectMultipurspose Room C By architect By architect 1 Video projector cart specified by ArchitectArts & Craft Room 110 Crestron MP-B10-W 1 Media Presentation Button Panel B10, White

Arts & Craft Room 110 Crestron MP/MPC/IPAC_FRONT_LABEL_ENGR

AVE D-W1 Series, or IPAC; black characters on white background,includes custom engraving

Arts & Craft Room 110 Crestron DM-TX-200-C-2G-B-T 1 Wall Plate DigitalMedia 8G+® Transmitter 200, Black Texture

Arts & Craft Room 110 Crestron DM-RMC-4K-SCALE R-C 1 DigitalMedia 8G+® 4K60 4:4:4 HDR Receiver & Room Controller 100 with scaler

Arts & Craft Room 110 Crestron SAROS SR8T-W-T-EACH 2Saros® 8” 2-Way Surface Mount Indoor/Outdoor Speaker,White Textured, Single (must

be ordered in multiples of 2)Arts & Craft Room 110 Crestron DM-CBL-8G-P-SP1000 1 DigitalMedia 8G Cable, plenum, 1000 ft spoolArts & Craft Room 110 Epson Power Lite 685W 1 Short Throw ProjectorComputer Room 111 Crestron MP-B10-W 1 Media Presentation Button Panel B10, White

Computer Room 111 Crestron MP/MPC/IPAC_FRONT_LABEL_ENGR


Computer Room 111 Crestron DM-TX-200-C-2G-B-T 1 Wall Plate DigitalMedia 8G+® Transmitter 200, Black Texture

Computer Room 111 Crestron DM-RMC-4K-SCALE R-C 1 DigitalMedia 8G+® 4K60 4:4:4 HDR Receiver & Room Controller 100 with scaler

Computer Room 111 Crestron SAROS SR8T-W-T-EACH 2Saros® 8” 2-Way Surface Mount Indoor/Outdoor Speaker,White Textured, Single (must

be ordered in multiples of 2)Computer Room 111 Crestron DM-CBL-8G-P-SP1000 1 DigitalMedia 8G Cable, plenum, 1000 ft spoolComputer Room 111 Epson Power Lite 685W 1 Short Throw Projector

Flexible/ Game Room 112 Crestron MP-B10-W 1 Media Presentation Button Panel B10, White

Flexible/ Game Room 112 Crestron MP/MPC/IPAC_FRONT_LABEL_ENGR


Flexible/ Game Room 112 Crestron DM-TX-200-C-2G-B-T 1 Wall Plate DigitalMedia 8G+® Transmitter 200, Black Texture

Flexible/ Game Room 112 Crestron DM-RMC-4K-SCALE R-C 1 DigitalMedia 8G+® 4K60 4:4:4 HDR Receiver & Room Controller 100 with scaler

Flexible/ Game Room 112 Crestron SAROS SR8T-W-T-EACH 2Saros® 8” 2-Way Surface Mount Indoor/Outdoor Speaker,White Textured, Single (must

be ordered in multiples of 2)Flexible/ Game Room 112 Crestron DM-CBL-8G-P-SP1000 1 DigitalMedia 8G Cable, plenum, 1000 ft spoolFlexible/ Game Room 112 SamSung QM85F 1 85" Flat planel displayFlexible/ Game Room 113 Premier P4263F 1 MountFlexible/ Game Room 114 Chief PAC 526 1 In wall box

Lobby Crestron DM-TX-200-C-2G-W-T 1 Wall Plate DigitalMedia 8G+® Transmitter 200, White TextureLobby Crestron AM-300 1 AirMedia® Presentation System 300Lobby Crestron MP-B10-W 1 Media Presentation Button Panel B10, White

Lobby Crestron MP/MPC/IPAC_FRONT_LABEL_ENGR


Lobby Crestron DM-CBL-8G-P-SP500 1 DigitalMedia 8G Cable, plenum, 500 ft spoolLobby SamSung QH65H 1 65" Ultra thin LCDLobby Premier P4263F 1 MountLobby Chief PAC 526 1 In wall box

Miscellaneous

N/A FSR Floor box adpter backet 9 MMS-FL500/540-4N/A Crestron CRESNET-P-TL-SP1000 1 Cresnet® Control Cable, Plenum-Rated, Teal, 1000 ft (304m) spoolN/A Crestron C2N-SPWS300 1 Cresnet Power Supply, 300 WattsN/A Crestron CNTBLOCK 1 Cresnet® Distribution BlockN/A Crestron HD-TX-101-C-1G-E-W-T TBD DM Lite – HDMI® over CATx Transmitter, Wall Plate, White Textured

1 THE CONTRACTOR IS REPONSIBLE VERIFYING AND LISTING ALL NECESSARY COMPONENTS TO PERFORM A COMPLETE WORK REGARDELESS IF LISTED OR NOT IN THE SPECIFCATIONS OR DRAWINGS.ANY ADDITIONAL COMPONENTS SHALL BE CLEARLY LISTED AT THE BOTTOM OF QUOTE UNDER SECTION UNDER “OTHER”. IF NOTHING IS LISTED UNDER "OTHER", IT WILL BE ASSUMED THAT ALLREQUIRED COMPONENTS ARE INCLUDED IN THE QUOTE.

2 IT IS THE CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSABILITY TO DETERMINE AND PROVIDE THE REQUIRED QUANTITIES OF CABLE RUNS TO PERFORM A COMPLETE SCOPE WORK THAT MEETS DESIGN INTENT SHOWNON DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS.

APPENDIX AAUDIO VISUAL BILL OF MATERIALS 1, 2

MCR Controlled Devices:Qty. Interface Functions Description

1 IR Navigation, Pause, Play, Power, Setup, Stop Blu-ray Player1 RS-232 Channels, Navigation, Power, Settings Tuner7 IR Channels, Navigation, Power, Settings Cable Box2 RS-232 Input Select, Power, Settings, Status Video Projector1 RS-232 Audio Controls (Routing, Mixing, Volume etc.) Audio DSP(s)

LumensShort Throw Projection area3' - 6" H x 5'-8" W 3,500

24

Lumens/Sq.ft145.8333333


EARVIN MAGIC JOHNSON PARK – PHASE 1A INTEGRATED AUDIOVISUAL SYSTEMSLOS ANGELES, CA 27 4116-1COUNTY OF LOS ANGELES COMMUNITY DEVELOPMENT COMMISSIONAHBE PROJECT NO. 116030.01 INTEGRAL GROUP

SECTION 27 4116INTEGRATED AUDIOVISUAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Provide turnkey audiovisual systems, to include equipment and materials, whether specifically mentioned herein or not, to ensure complete and operating systems.

B. Omissions in the documents of any provision herein described shall not be construed as to relieve the AV Contractor of any responsibility or obligation requisite to the complete and satisfactory delivery, installation, operation and support of any and all systems, equipment or services. Correction of any omission on the part of the AV Contractor, either due to misinterpretation of this specifications or any other conditions of the project, shall be the responsibility of the AV Contractor or shall not result in any contract modification or additional costs to Owner.

C. Bidder shall certify that is has been a Manufacturer-Authorized Channel Partner for all bid systems/equipment for at least twelve (12) consecutive months prior to the RFP Release Date, and that it has the certification/specialization level required by bid Manufacturer(s) to support product sale, product pricing, product installation and ongoing product support in the Los Angeles County California geographic area in accordance with the applicable Manufacturer certification/specialization requirements. The contractor selected for this project must adhere to manufacturer specified engineering, installation and testing procedures and utilize the authorized manufacturer components and distribution channels in provisioning this project.

D. Where conflicts and/or irregularities occur between specification sections or drawings, and/or applicable codes, rules, regulations, ordinances, standards, guidelines and practices, the more stringent requirement shall apply as reasonably determined by Owner or government agency inspector. Generate submittal information for the complete fabrication, installation, and wiring of the systems. Provide (or sub-contract for) on-site installation and wiring, and provide on-going supervision and coordination during implementation.

E. Upon completion of the Project, the AV Contractor shall submit a complete set of system software, software programming code, and documentation to Owner as follows:

1. Final Software Programming Code, Program Source Code including any pre-compiled module code and documentation

2. Control System As-built Schematic Connection Diagrams

3. In the case of non-commercial or custom software, a complete set of software and related documentation and information is required, including license (if applicable) and documentation for all devices, utilities, and tools used in the operation and maintenance of the AV systems. Documentation shall be presented in such a way as to allow Owner the ability to perform unassisted operation, maintenance, troubleshooting and programming.

4. In the case of any other commercial software, a complete set of software including the license and documentation for all devices, utilities, current firmware version, and tools used in the operation and maintenance of the AV systems. Provide list of manufacturer



or publisher, version, product name or model, technical and warranty support contact, purchase date, and reseller (if not AV Contractor).

F. Provide equipment as specified in the Equipment Schedule.

G. Supply and configure all software (including custom software as required) needed to operate the system with the specified functionality.

H. Provide on-the-job training in the operation and maintenance of the systems for personnel designated by the Owner.

I. Provide one-year warranty for systems installed.

J. Coordinate with the electrical contractor for electrical power provisions for audiovisual equipment.

K. Provide for removal, relocation and testing prior to installation. Provide required mounting hardware, rack panels, cable, connectors, etc. to ensure proper operation of the OFE systems as specified

L. The requirements described in this section include the following:

1. References

2. Definitions

3. System Descriptions

4. Submittals


6. Coordination

7. Project Management and Coordination

8. Delivery, Storage, and Handling

9. Scheduling

10. Warranty

11. Maintenance

12. Project Closeout and Record Documents

M. Refer to Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, Conditions of Contract, and Division 1, General Requirements. Provisions listed or specified therein apply to work under this section.

N. Related Divisions and Sections: Coordinate the work of this section including, but not limited to, the following other divisions, sections, and trades:

1. Division 01: General requirements



2. Division 23: Heating, ventilating, and air conditioning systems

3. Division 26: Electrical systems

4. Division 27: Communications systems

O. Alternates: Submit a written request for modification to an installation practice desired or required which is contrary to these specifications or drawings. Obtain written approval from the Consultant and County of Los Angeles Internal Service Department prior to performing modifications.

1.2 REFERENCES


B. In additional to the references (codes, standards, etc.) listed in Section 27 0000, comply with the latest edition of the following applicable specifications and standards except as otherwise shown or specified:

C. Perform work in accordance with applicable requirements of governing codes, rules and regulations including the following minimum standards, whether statutory or not:

1. FCC Federal Communications Commission

2. City, and other local codes and requirements

3. UL Underwriters Laboratories

4. ASTM American Society for Testing Materials

5. NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association

6. ANSI American National Standards Institute

7. ETL Electrical Testing Laboratories

8. SMPTE Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers

9. EIA Electronic Industries Association

10. ISO International Standards Organization

11. Sound Systems Engineering, 2nd Ed., Davis and Davis, Howard W. Sams Co., 1987

D. Install products and systems that comply with the following standards:

1. ANSI/InfoComm 1M-2011: Audio Coverage Uniformity in Enclosed Listener Areas

2. ANSI/InfoComm 3M-2011: Projected Image System Contrast Ratio

3. NFPA 262: Standard Method of Test for Flame Travel and Smoke of Wires and Cables for Use in Air-Handling Spaces



4. UL 813: Commercial Audio Equipment

5. UL 1419: Professional use Video and Audio Equipment

6. UL 1480: Speakers for Fire Alarm, Emergency, and Commercial and Professional Use

7. UL 1492: Audio-Video Products and Accessories

8. UL 60065-1: Audio, Video and Similar Electronic Apparatus

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Definitions in Section 27 0000 apply to this section.

B. In addition to those Definitions of Division 01, the following list of terms as used in this specification defined as follows:

1. “A/R”: Indicates that the quantity of an item is as required to meet the design criteria indicated in the audiovisual drawings.

2. “Cabling”: A system comprised of cables, wire, cords, and connecting hardware (e.g., cables, termination apparatus, patch panels, blocks, connectors, outlets, labeling, etc.)

3. “Connect”: To install required patch cords, equipment cords, cross-connect wire, etc. to complete an electronic or optical signal circuit

4. “Custom” indicates systems or components the Contractor shall fabricate based on these specifications and drawings

5. “Furnish”: To purchase, procure, acquire, and deliver complete with related accessories

6. “Install”: To set in place, join, unite, fasten, link, attach, set up or otherwise connect together and test before turning over to the Owner, parts, items, or equipment supplied by contractor or others. Make installation complete and ready for regular operation

7. “OFE”: Owner Furnished Equipment

8. “OFCI” :Owner Furnished Contractor Install

9. “Provide”: To furnish, transport, install, erect, connect, test and turn over to the Owner, complete and ready for regular operation

10. “Or equal” indicates an item that is equal in function, size, color and performance to the specified device or system.

11. “Shall” denotes a mandatory requirement

12. “Should” denotes an advisory statement

13. “Will” indicates an informative statement



PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. General

1. This project’s audiovisual systems are based on a number of standard room types. Each room shown on the plans is designated with a type. Each room of a certain type is similar to others of its type, with minor layout differences to accommodate project architecture.

2. Refer to the plans for the quantities of each type of room.

3. Refer to the project drawings for specific audiovisual interface information.

4. In circumstances where the specifications and drawings conflict, the drawings shall govern quantity and the specifications shall govern quality.

5. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to ensure that all quantities, materials, labor, licenses, permits, sales taxes and any and all other costs to provide a turnkey project are included in their bid.

6. All equipment, products and materials shall be new, of the latest design and engineering level, free of operational or cosmetic defects, and are delivered in their original packaging.

B. Main Connection Room – MCR

1. General

a. MCR room is a centralized room for connecting Audio Visual (AV) equipment throughout the building. All AV headend equipment shall reside inside the MCR room and distribute signals (audio and visual) through space as shown on drawings. Equipment shall be installed in AV rack provided by communication contractor.

2. Refer to Technology AV Riser Diagram (sheet T1.02) for equipment connection.

3. Equipment refer to Appendix A – Audio Visual Bill of Material attached.

a. Provide a rack mounted DM-MD16X16 Digital Media Switcher Chassis. Rack mount chassis and insert input and output cards in appropriate positions.

b. Connect Audio Visual Input floor boxes to input modules as shown on plans.

c. Connect Audio Visual Projector (wall, ceiling and floor) boxes as shown on plans to output modules as shown on AV Riser Diagram.

d. Provide a rack mounted AV Pro3, series 3 control system. Connect equipment as shown in the Technology AV Riser Diagram (sheet T1.02) to the AV Pro3 control unit.



e. Mount 21.5” touch screen in Rack for configuring AV Video Switcher.

f. Mount amplifiers in AV rack and provide connection to DSP outputs on input / output cards. Segregate speakers in Multi-Purpose rooms into zones as shown on drawings. Provide Beam Detectors at folding walls so zones can be segregated or combined as walls are configured. Provide all page function so announcements can be made on in all areas.

g. Provide a PoE 48-port network switch to facilitate connections between equipment and provide PoE power to ancillary equipment.

h. Provide a 48-port modular rack mounted patch panel (with grounding capabilities) for cross-connecting to various AV equipment.

i. Provide 8G 4-pair digital media cable for connecting AV equipment. Ensure bonding throughout the AV connection. Provide an 8G digital media connector for terminating the 8G 4-pair cable.

j. Provide (3) Shure digital wireless microphone systems.

C. Multi-Purpose Room A – 114A

1. General

a. The Multi-Purpose room A is part of the entire Multi-Purpose room 114 (A, B and C) can be segregated as standalone or combined room via folding walls partitions. This room will have AV input floor box for sending audio and visual signals to the projector floor box and ceiling. There will be video cart for displaying with images on an electrified roll down screen. When the wall are close position the speakers in the room shall automatically be segregated from the rest of the system.

b. Control panel shall be capable to control video input such as laptop, blue ray and +/- volume control on speakers etc, change channels and control audio inputs.

c. Audio Visual contractor shall provide and install a complete Assistive Listening in accordance to ADA requirements and Appendix A – Audio Visual Bill of Material attached.

d. Refer to Technology AV Riser Diagram (sheet T1.02) for equipment connection.


a. Provide a DM-TX-200-C-2G-B-T input plate in the AV floor box. Power input plate via PoE connection on Video Switcher.

b. Provide a DM-RMC-4K-SCALER-C place behind or near displays. Power output plate via PoE connection on Video Switcher.

c. Provide Cresnet Partion Sensor to detected when the wall are open and/or close position and default audio system configuration automatically.



d. Provide a wireless Control Panel docking station for housing the TST-902 control panel.

e. Provide a wireless Control Panel TST-902 for controlling the source input and output functions.

f. Provide infiNET EX® & ER Wireless Gateway.

g. Provide an electrified drop down screen that will be controlled via the touch screen and a wall mounted switch. Provide seismic bracing for the drop down screen. Mount screen in soffit as shown on drawings. Connect screen to low voltage controller as shown on Technology AV Riser Diagram (Sheet T1.02).

h. Mount amplifiers in equipment rack in MCR room and provide connection to DSP outputs on input / output cards. Segregate speakers in Multi-Purpose rooms into zones as shown on drawings. Provide Beam Detectors at folding walls so zones can be segregated or combined as walls are configured. Provide all page function so announcements can be made on areas with spekers.

i. Provide Crestron SAROS speaker and subwoofer and connect to amplifier in MCR.

j. Provide a portable projector PowerLite 2250U/V11H871020

k. Provide a 75” 4K Ultra HD commercial rated LCD flat panel display in location shown on drawings. Coordinate with structural engineer.

l. Provide 8G 4-pair digital media cable for connecting AV equipment. Ensure bonding throughout the AV connection. Provide an 8G digital media connector for terminating the 8G 4-pair cable.

m. Provide installation of Assistive Listening.

D. Multi-Purpose Room B – 114B

1. General

a. The Multi-Purpose room B is part of the entire Multi-Purpose room 114 (A, B and C) can be segregated as standalone or combined room via folding walls partitions. This room will have AV input floor box for sending audio and visual signals to the projector on floor box and ceiling devices. There will be video cart for displaying with images on an electrified roll down screen. When the wall are close position the speakers in the room shall automatically be segregated from the rest of the system.




c. Audio Visual contractor shall provide and install a complete Assistive Listening in accordance to ADA requirements and Appendix A – Audio Visual Bill of Material attached.



a. Provide a DM-TX-200-C-2G-B-T input plate in the AV floor box. Power input plate via PoE connection on Video Switcher.

b. Provide a DM-RMC-4K-SCALER-C place behind or near displays. Power output plate via PoE connection on Video Switcher.

c. Provide Cresnet Partion Sensor to detected when the wall are open and/or close position and default audio system configuration automatically.

d. Provide a wireless Control Panel docking station for housing the TST-902 control panel.


f. Provide infiNET EX® & ER Wireless Gateway.

g. Provide an electrified drop down screen that will be controlled via the touch screen and a wall mounted switch. Provide seismic bracing for the drop down screen. Mount screen in soffit as shown on drawings. Connect screen to low voltage controller as shown on Technology AV Riser Diagram (Sheet T1.02).

h. Mount amplifiers in equipment rack in MCR room and provide connection to DSP outputs on input / output cards. Segregate speakers in Multi-Purpose rooms into zones as shown on drawings. Provide Beam Detectors at folding walls so zones can be segregated or combined as walls are configured. Provide all page function so announcements can be made on areas with spekers.

i. Provide Crestron SAROS speaker and subwoofer and connect to amplifier in MCR.

j. Provide a portable projector PowerLite 2250U/V11H871020

k. Provide a 75” 4K Ultra HD commercial rated LCD flat panel display in location shown on drawings. Coordinate with structural engineer.

l. Provide 8G 4-pair digital media cable for connecting AV equipment. Ensure bonding throughout the AV connection. Provide an 8G digital media connector for terminating the 8G 4-pair cable.

m. Provide installation of Assistive Listening.

E. Multi-Purpose Room C – 114C



1. General

a. The Multi-Purpose room C is part of the entire Multi-Purpose room 114 (A, B and C) can be used as standalone room or combine all rooms via folding walls. This room will have an AVI input floor box for sending audio and visual signals to the AVP ceiling box for displaying images on an electrified roll down screen. When wall are closed the speakers in this room will automatically be segregated from the rest of the system.


c. Refer to Technology AV Riser Diagram (sheet T1.02) for equipment connection.


a. Provide a DM-TX-200-C-2G input plate in AVI floor box (located on Stage). Power input plate via PoE connection on 16X16 Video Switcher.

b. Provide a DM-RMC-4K-SCALER-C output plate in projector ceiling box. Power output plate via PoE connection on 16 x 16 Video Switcher.

c. Provide a wireless Control Panel docking station for housing the TST-902 control panel.

d. Provide infiNET EX® & ER Wireless Gateway.


f. Provide Cresnet Partion Sensor to detected when the wall are open and/or close position and default audio system configuration automatically.

g. Provide Da-Lite recessed electrified drop down screen that will be controlled via the touch screen and a wall mounted switch. Provide seismic bracing for the drop down screen. Mount screen in soffit as shown on drawings. Connect screen to low voltage controller as shown on Technology AV Riser Diagram (Sheet T1.02).

h. Provide Draper Aerolift 100 projector lift and Premier PDS-Plus projector bracket in the locations shown on the drawings. Coordinate power for the projector and lift assembly.

i. Provide Epson Pro L1300UNL/V11H733920 projector with ELPM10/ V12H004M0A lenses. Coordinate mounting with projector lift.

j. Mount amplifiers in rack in MCR room and provide connection to DSP outputs on input / output cards. Segregate speakers in Multi-Purpose

k. Provide Beam Detectors at folding walls so zones can be segregated or combined as walls are configured. Provide all page function so announcements can be made on in all areas.



l. Provide SAROS 8” pendant speaker and subwoofer and connect to amplifier in MCR.

m. Provide 8G 4-pair digital media cable for connecting AV equipment. Ensure bonding throughout the AV connection. Provide an 8G digital media connector for terminating the 8G 4-pair cable.

n. Provide installation of Assistive Listening.

F. Arts & Crafts Classroom – 110

1. General

a. The Arts and Craft classroom is intended to have the capability to do a variety of arts and crafts projects.

b. This room will have an AV input floor box to send audio and visual signals to the AV projector and overhead speakers. The images shall be projected on high finished wall (wall finishes specified by architect).

c. Control panel shall be capable to control video input such as laptop, blue ray and +/- volume control on speakers etc, change channels and control audio inputs.



a. Provide a DM-TX-200-C-2G-B-T input plate in AV floor box. Power input plate via PoE connection on 8X8 Video Switcher.

b. Provide a DM-RMC-4K-SCALE R-C output plate in AV projector in wall box. Power output plate via PoE connection on 16x16 Video Switcher.

c. Provide a Control Panel MP-B10-W for controlling the source input and output functions.

d. Provide Epson Powerlite 685W, short throw projector.

e. Provide SAROS SR8T-W-T-EACH speaker and connect to amplifier in MCR room.

f. Provide 8G 4-pair digital media cable for connecting AV equipment. Ensure bonding throughout the AV connection. Provide an 8G digital media connector for terminating the 8G 4-pair cable.

G. Computer Classroom – 111

1. General

a. The Computer classroom is intended to have the capability to do community computer training. This room will have an AVI input floor box for sending audio and visual signals to the AVP wall box to short throw projector , imagine projected on high wall finish (wall finishes by architect).



b. Refer to Technology AV Riser Diagram (sheet T1.02) for equipment connection.

2. Equipment Appendix A – Audio Visual Bill of Material attached.

a. Provide a DM-TX-200-C-2G-B-T input plate in AV floor box.Power input plate via PoE connection on 8X8 Video Switcher.

b. Provide a DM-RMC-4K-SCALE R-C output plate in AV projector in wall box. Power output plate via PoE connection on 16x16 Video Switcher.


d. Provide Epson Powerlite 685W, short throw projector.

e. Provide SAROS SR8T-W-T-EACH speaker and connect to amplifier in MCR room.

f. Provide 8G 4 pair digital media cable for connecting AV equipment. Ensure bonding throughout the AV connection. Provide an 8G digital media connector for terminating the 8G 4 pair cable.

H. Flex / Gaming Room – 112

1. General

a. The Flex / Gaming room is intended to have the capability to do a variety of gamming type activities. This room will have an AVI input floor box for sending audio and visual signals to the AVP wall box. It is intended that there will be an 85” LCD flat screen for displaying gamming content.

b. Refer Equipment Appendix A – Audio Visual Bill of Material attached and AV Riser Diagram (sheet T1.02) for equipment connection.

c. Control panel shall be capable to control video input such as laptop, blue ray and +/- volume control on speakers etc, change channels and control audio inputs.


a. Provide a DM-TX-200-C-2G-B-T input plate in AV floor box.Power input plate via PoE connection on 8X8 Video Switcher.

b. Provide a DM-RMC-4K-SCALE R-C output plate in wall box behind the display. Power output plate via PoE connection on 16x16 Video Switcher.


d. Provide SAROS SR8T-W-T-EACH speaker and connect to amplifier in MCR room.

e. Provide 8G 4 pair digital media cable for connecting AV equipment. Ensure bonding throughout the AV connection. Provide an 8G digital media connector for terminating the 8G 4 pair cable.



I. Lobby Area Room – 100

1. General

a. The lobby area is intended to be an area where people gather before events happen. This area will have an overhead announcement system and a digital signage board in the lobby.

b. Refer to Technology AV Riser Diagram (sheet T1.02) for equipment connection.

c. Audio visual contractor shall coordinate with owner the integration of the content for digital signage.


a. Samsung 65” inch flat panel screen.

b. Mount amplifiers in rack and provide connection to DSP outputs on input / output cards.

c. Segregate speakers in Lobby area into a zone as shown on drawings. Provide all page function so announcements can be made on in all areas.

d. Provide 8G 4-pair digital media cable for connecting AV equipment. Ensure bonding throughout the AV connection. Provide an 8G digital media connector for terminating the 8G 4-pair cable.

2.2 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION

A. Provide a project manager for the duration of the project to coordinate this Work with other trades. Coordination services, procedures and documentation responsibility include, but are not limited to, the items listed in this section.

B. Prepare and maintain a shop drawing review log indicating the following information:

1. The shop drawing number and a brief description of the system/material

2. Indicate date of review

3. The name of the individual performing the review

4. An indication whether follow-up coordination is required

C. Drawings

1. Layout: Follow the general layout shown on the AV/Technology Drawings except where other Work may conflict with these drawings.

2. Accuracy: The Drawings do not fully represent the entire installation for the audiovisual systems. In particular, the functional/single-line drawings indicate the design intent.



3. Complete the details necessary for detailed system design and document this work in shop drawings.

D. Coordination:

1. Contractor to coordinate with Electrical contractor on raceway / junction box locations for audio visual equipment and routing of audio, video, control, and power cables/raceway from equipment, terminal and pull boxes to system equipment racks.

2. Coordinate with related trades to schedule the work and ensure a complete installation in accordance with the schedule outlined by the Owner.

3. Coordinate all IP device requirements with the low-voltage cabling contractor and the Owner.

4. Coordinate all network connectivity requirements with the low-voltage cabling contractor and the Owner.

5. Coordinate all control connectivity and protocol requirements for all devices connected to the control system with owner IT department. This includes but is not limited to device protocol settings and control signal cables and connectors.

6. Coordinate all mounting and structural requirements for ceiling and wall mounted AV equipment and support devices with the structural engineer / architect and general contractor. This includes the coordination of mounts for the video displays and loudspeakers for the spaces included in the scope of work.

2.3 PERFORMANCE STANDARDS

A. Meet the following performance standards with each system, unless restricted by the published specifications of a particular piece of equipment. Notify the Design Consultant of any restrictions.

B. ADA Compliance:

1. Display systems must meet ADA requirements for the display of closed captioning content.

2. Control systems must meet ADA requirements for accessibility.

3. Audio systems must meet ADA assistive listening system requirements.

C. Audio System:

1. Program Audio System:

a. Frequency Response: ± 3 dB per octave band, 100 Hz to 12,000 Hz. 3dB per octave roll off below 100Hz and above 12 kHz.

b. Total Acoustical Harmonic Distortion: Less than 2% at 90 dBC (1 kHz reference) at four feet (1,220mm) above finished floor in the middle of the room.

2. Distributed Audio System:



a. Frequency Response: ± 3 dB per octave band, 125 Hz to 10,000 Hz. 3dB per octave roll off below 125 Hz and above 10 kHz.

b. Total Acoustical Harmonic Distortion: Less than 2% at 85 dBC (1 kHz reference) at four feet (1,220mm) above finished floor in the middle of the room.

3. The gain structure for all audio system components (mixer input to amplifier output) shall be adjusted to achieve the highest signal-to-noise ratio, 75 dB from 50 Hz to 15 kHz minimum.

4. The audio frequency response of the electronics system with equalizers bypassed shall vary less than ±1 dB from 50 Hz to 12 kHz.

5. The electronic system audio distortion shall be less than 0.5% at 1 kHz at the equipment’s rated input signal level.

6. Sound Output Capability: Provide program levels of not less than 95 dB and speech reinforcement levels of not less than 85dB in the seating area without objectionable distortion, rattles, or buzzes, employing as test signals several different samples of recorded music and microphones applied at each system input.

7. Hum and Noise: Hum and noise shall be inaudible (below the background noise level of the space) under normal operation and as observed in normal seat locations.

D. Video System:

1. Composite analog video systems shall conform to RS-170A standards, as applicable.

2. Signal-to-Noise Ratio (peak to RMS) Unweighted DC to 4.2 MHz: 55 dB minimum

3. Crosstalk: Crosstalk (unweighted DC to 4.2 MHz): 45 dB minimum

4. Frequency Response: Within ± 0.5 dB to 4.2 MHz

5. Line and Field Tilt: 2% minimum

6. Differential Gain: 3% maximum

7. Differential Phase: 2° maximum

8. Video Timing:

a. System Timing: Sync coincidence within 50 nanoseconds

b. Color Timing: Within 2° at 3.58 MHz

9. Radio Frequency (RF):

a. Visual Carrier Level: +6 dBmV minimum and +16 dBmV maximum at system outlets for utilized channels

b. Adjacent Channel Visual Carrier: 3 dB maximum differential at systems outlets



c. Non-Adjacent Channel Visual Carrier: 10 dB maximum differential at systems

d. outlets

e. Carrier-to-Noise Ratio: 43 dB minimum

f. Amplitude Response: Flat ± 1.0 dB

g. Signal-to-Noise Ratio: 50 dB minimum for the maximum level of the signal and the interference resulting from cross modulation from other signals on the system, after demodulation

h. Outlet-to-Outlet Isolation: 25 dB minimum

i. Audio carrier: Suppress 15dB below visual carrier for same channel

j. Splitter/combiners: Slope of 0.8dB, Return loss of 15dB

k. At no point in the system shall signal drop below 0dB.

E. Projection Systems:

1. Image size and clarity: Mount the video projector as indicated on the drawings and project the image onto the projection screen. Projected images shall be of maximum width and maximum height, centered on screen. Image tests shall utilize standard AMI test slides and similar video media to establish any image sizes on the screen.

2. Geometric Distortion: Corrected geometric distortion using physical and/or optical adjustments only. Only use electronic or digital correction when these are called for by the design intent.

3. The total averaged light output from a projector, in lumens, shall be ± 15% of that specified by the projector manufacturer.

4. The light falloff from the center of the projected image to four corners, as measured at the projected image plane, shall not exceed 50% for video projector images or 35% for slide projector images.

5. Securely mount and brace projectors, lenses, and mirrors so there will be no observable movement in the image induced by motor vibration or other mechanical operations.

F. Control:

1. Provide IP-controlled power control interfaces to devices not provided with these, whether power control accessories are listed in this Section or not. Verify functional operation for specified control operations.

2. Illuminated feedback of the active function via illuminated or shaded pushbutton at operator and wired remote control stations.

3. Wireless systems shall neither be the source of, nor be affected by, radio frequency interference to/from external signal devices.



4. Ensure that ergonomic parameters are taken into account when designing the human interface to the control system. Be aware that the level of technical inclination will vary between users. The following guidelines should be followed:

5. Graphics:

a. Avoid abbreviations

b. Size lettering at 1/8” minimum

c. Maintain background to lettering contrast

6. Positive logic: Avoid conditions which may cause command synchronization conflicts (i.e., alternate action (toggling) on/off without power reset of feedback. Provide power sensors or other devices where necessary to ensure that positive logic conditions are maintained.

7. Timing: Avoid the possibility for two or more serial macros or actions being sent simultaneously to the same piece of equipment through flag checking/setting routines.

8. Linking: Provide linking of functions to require the fewest number of user actions to effectively control the equipment.

9. Clearing: Ensure that each media selection clears the previous audio and visual selection (i.e. Selecting COMPUTER clears the audio as well as video section of the previous Blu-ray disk selection.

10. Defaults: Establish default power-up conditions for the system including device audio levels, warm-up routine, power conditions, switcher status and other default conditions as required by the Owner or Owner’s representative.

11. Volume Memory: Provide easy-to-use memory for volume settings associated with each particular source device. These settings shall be maintained between alternate selections during each use – from power on to power off.

12. Status Indication: Buttons (hard and soft) which incorporate indicator light or inverted illumination capabilities shall be addressed through the software and programming.

13. Failsafe: No operation or sequence of operations shall cause the control system to become inoperable or interfere with further processing, correct operations or execution of commands.

G. EDID Management

1. All sources to be set to 1080p60htz wherever available. Video sources not providing this resolution shall be transcoded or scaled to meet this specification.

2. Color space to be set to component at the input or upon transcoding and throughout the system thereafter.



3. Audio to be embedded onto HDMI/DisplayPort as two-channel stereo wherever available. Where embedded audio is not available the system shall seek two- channel balanced audio on the auxiliary input.


A. Comply with Delivery, Storage and Handling requirements of Section 27 0000. In addition, comply with the following requirements.

2.5 WARRANTY

A. Warrant the system for a minimum of one year from the date of system acceptance by the Owner. Honor component warranties per manufacturers’ terms if greater than one year. Provide quarterly site visits to check and adjust equipment and restore systems to original performance.

B. Activate manufacturers’ equipment warranties in Owner’s name to commence on the date of acceptance. In the case of Contractor-modified equipment, the manufacturer’s warranty is normally voided. In such cases, provide the Owner with a warranty equivalent to that of the original manufacturer.

2.6 SOFTWARE LICENSE

A. Nondisclosure

1. In consideration of the disclosure to the Owner of information relating to all technical aspects of the Deliverables and other proprietary products, technology and/or processes of the AV Contractor, including, but not limited to, drawings, models, photographs, sketches and microfiche, the Owner agrees:

a. To maintain such information (including all portions or copies thereof) confidential in the same manner as its own Owner proprietary information is maintained,

b. Not to disclose the information (or any portion or copy thereof) to any third party,

c. Not to use such information (or any portion or copy thereof) for any purpose except maintenance and support of its in-house systems.

d. The obligations of this Agreement shall not apply to any information which is or which becomes generally known to the public due to publication or by means other than a breach of duty by the Owner or which becomes otherwise available to the Owner through legal sources.

B. Obligations Governing the Software

1. Title to and exclusive ownership of the Software as licensed hereunder shall at all times remain with the AV Contractor or third party suppliers but the AV Contractor hereby grants to the Owner, or has obtained for the Owner from third party suppliers, successive irrevocable, royalty-free, non-transferable and non-exclusive licenses to use the Software as licensed hereunder from the date of this Agreement in perpetuity.



2. The Owner shall have no right to sublicense or part with possession of such Software as licensed hereunder or any part thereof to third parties.

3. The original and all copies of the Software as well as any updates which may be purchased by subsequent agreement shall be and remain the property of the AV Contractor. Title to all applicable rights in patents, copyrights, and trade secrets in the Software will remain with the AV Contractor.

4. The foregoing licenses shall extend to all equipment purchased or utilized by the Owner.

5. Notwithstanding anything to the contrary elsewhere herein, at no time shall the AV Contractor or third party suppliers be precluded or restricted from selling or licensing Software as licensed hereunder identical to the Software as licensed hereunder or any part thereof to other customers.

6. Software as licensed hereunder which is the property of any third party will be assumed to have been licensed by its proprietor to the AV Contractor and such Software as licensed hereunder shall be directly licensed by its proprietor or sublicensed to the Owner with the consent of the proprietor at no cost to the Owner on the same terms and Clauses as are contained in this Agreement in respect to the AV Contractor’s own Software as licensed hereunder.

7. The AV contractor shall provide the software required for the system to function as indicated in the contract documents.

8. At the time of submitting the System to the Acceptance Tests, the AV Contractor will supply where applicable and having used its best efforts in the case of third party suppliers (best efforts will be demonstrated to the Owner by copies of correspondence between the AV Contractor and the third party stating the AV Contractor’s request and giving the third party statement of compliance or otherwise) to the Owner media which will contain:

a. All source code pertaining to the System

b. Instructions and full description of equipment required which will enable the Owner to create executable programs from source code

c. All executable programs

d. Instructions and full description of equipment required which will enable the Owner to prepare operating systems and other third party Software as licensed hereunder for use

9. For any Software as licensed hereunder not developed by the AV Contractor all information, data, codes and documentation distributed to the AV Contractor and otherwise available to the audiovisual system.

10. The above so submitted Software as licensed hereunder shall be in a form suitable for immediate access by the System.

11. In the event that the AV Contractor is unable to supply the source code pertaining to the System the AV Contractor warrants, and the Owner accepts, that at all times the latest version of the source code from the AV Contractor or any third party supplier has been



deposited, at even date of this Agreement, and is available for inspection by the Owner during normal business hours at any time. The AV Contractor further warrants that the Independent Source Code Depository has been instructed and has acknowledged that the deposited source code will be released to the Owner upon insolvency of the AV Contractor.

12. If the Owner discovers an error in the coding or the logic of the Software as licensed hereunder and as supplied under the terms of this Agreement to the Owner, which prevents the System from performing in accordance with the performance requirements of this Agreement, the Owner shall notify the AV Contractor of the error and upon request by the AV Contractor will deliver to the AV Contractor its analysis thereof accompanied by complete program, module, data listings and sample runs exhibiting and rectifying the error.

13. The AV Contractor shall from time to time notify the Owner of the availability of newer versions of the supplied Software as licensed hereunder which the AV Contractor or any third party supplier has released for use by its customers generally and shall, within sixty (60) days of receipt of written request by the Owner, supply such newer version to the Owner. Any such Software as licensed hereunder provided must be documented as to:

a. The fault being corrected (if any)

b. The enhancement it represents

c. The restrictions imposed or removed

d. The details of modifications to and differences from the version to be replaced

14. The Owner shall assist the AV Contractor in its performance under the terms of this Agreement by allowing the AV Contractor to use the Owner’s System, data listings and sample runs to reproduce and/or correct the reported error and to install and check updated versions of the delivered Software licensed hereunder.

15. The AV Contractor represents and warrants that it is the owner or Licensee of the supplied Software as licensed hereunder and has the right to permit the Owner to use the same. The AV Contractor shall not be liable for any incidental or consequential damages, whether foreseeable or not, even if the AV Contractor has been advised of the possibility of such damages, resulting from or in any way connected with the use of the supplied Software as licensed hereunder.

16. The AV Contractor shall defend any suit or proceeding brought against the Owner and shall pay any adverse judgment entered therein so far as such suit or proceeding is based upon a claim that the use of the Software as licensed hereunder furnished by the AV Contractor under this Agreement constitutes infringement of any copyright or patent, provided the AV Contractor is promptly notified in writing and given authority, information and assistance (at the AV Contractor’s expense) for the defense of same; and the AV Contractor shall, at its own expense and at its option, procure for the Owner the right to continue to use the said Software as licensed hereunder, or to replace the same with a non- infringing release. The foregoing shall not be construed to include any agreement by the AV Contractor to accept any liability whatsoever in respect to copyrights or patents for inventions including more than the Software as licensed and furnished hereunder, or in respect of copyrights or patents for methods and processes to be carried out with the aid of said Software as licensed hereunder, except those which are inherent in said System



as furnished. The foregoing states the entire liability of the AV Contractor with regard to copyright and patent infringement as related to the delivered Software as licensed hereunder.

17. The Owner acknowledges the rights of the AV Contractor and third party suppliers in and to the Software as licensed hereunder, including, but not limited to, computer programs, user manuals, other supporting material and data, identifying symbols, passwords, user numbers and security symbols, and further acknowledges that such are properly considered to be trade secrets in that they involve processes and compilation of the information which are secret, confidential and not generally known to the public, and which are the product of the AV Contractor’s own expenditure of time, effort, money and creative skills. The Owner also acknowledges and agrees that the use of the Software as licensed hereunder is on a confidential basis for the sole and exclusive use by the Owner and not for resale, and agrees that it will not use, publish disclose or otherwise divulge to any person, except necessary employees of the Owner, at any time, either during or after the termination of this Agreement, nor permit its employees to so divulge any such information regarding the software as licensed hereunder, without the prior written consent of an officer of the AV Contractor, except that the Owner is authorized hereby to reproduce information derived from the software as licensed hereunder for its own internal use by authorized employees. Notwithstanding the foregoing, the proprietary and secret information covered hereby may be disclosed by the Owner to a third party, person, firm or corporation if such disclosure is unavoidable because of its or their access to or control of the Owner’s computers, provided that this sentence shall not be deemed to permit any use of the Software as licensed hereunder which would otherwise be prohibited. Nothing herein shall be deemed to limit any rights of the AV Contractor under copyright, patent or other law.

18. The Owner shall use the Software as licensed hereunder solely and exclusively for its own purposes and shall not, without the prior written approval of the AV Contractor, allow any third party to use the Software as licensed hereunder for purposes of any such third party whether or not the Owner is compensated therefore.

19. The AV Contractor warrants that a copy of the current and previous version of Software as licensed hereunder submitted to the Owner is available from the AV Contractor.

20. The Owner warrants that all Software used for the duration of the warranty period is the Software as licensed hereunder and released from time to time by the AV Contractor to the Owner. Failure by the Owner to use the Software as licensed hereunder and released by the AV Contractor will constitute the conclusion of the warranty period as defined under the terms of this Agreement.

21. Any new version of Software as licensed hereunder and delivered to the Owner by the AV Contractor during the warranty period, under the terms of this Agreement which is deemed, and advised so by the AV Contractor, to rectify a failure which occurred during the operations of an event, will cause the warranty period for the Software as licensed hereunder to restart.

22. The AV Contractor hereby warrants the right by the Owner to any corrective Software updates for the next ten (10) years.

23. The AV Contractor restricts any enhancements to Software as licensed hereunder to the latest release of Software as licensed hereunder only.



24. The AV Contractor warrants that all contracts, contacts and arrangements between the AV Contractor and all third party Software suppliers providing Software as licensed hereunder will transfer to the Owner with the successful completion of the Final Acceptance.

25. The Owner warrants to inform the AV Contractor of all its dealings with third party Software suppliers supplying software as licensed hereunder for the duration of the warranty period.

26. The AV Contractor warrants that at no charge to the Owner it will reply to queries from the Owner, provided that:

a. The queries relate to the System provided by the AV Contractor pursuant to this Purchase Agreement

b. The query is raised by Owner staff or an authorized agent of the Owner

c. The query is during the AV Contractor’s normal business hours

d. The Owner’s representative or employee has attended standard basic training in the use of the System as provided by the AV Contractor

e. The Owner warrants that the use of this service is not intended as a vehicle for design consultation.

27. The Owner may make copies of the Software in any machine-readable form for backup purpose only. Any such copies made by the Owner will include the AV Contractor’s copyright notice, together with any other proprietary notices. The Owner will take all reasonable steps to ensure that the whole or any part of the Software is not reproduced or copied (save as aforesaid) by any employee, licensee, invitee or agent of the Owner or any other person under the control of the Owner and shall observe all reasonable security in relation to the storage, filing and use of the Software and basic materials. The Owner shall not sell, lease, rent, assign, transfer, deliver or otherwise part with possession of the licensed Software or permit any other person, firm or company to inspect or use the Software in any way provided that the external auditors formally appointed by the Owner shall have the power to inspect and have access to the Software held on Owner premises at any time.

28. The Owner acknowledges that in acquiring the right to use the Software it has relied upon its own skill and judgment in the selection thereof and in the use and result it intends to obtain therefore.

C. Software License Terms

1. The AV Contractor warrants that it has the right to grant this Software License(s) for the use of the Software and that the Licenses for Software supplied pursuant to this Purchase Agreement authorize the Owner to use the licensed Software in machine readable form on the processing devices which form part of the Owner’s computer processing facilities so designated by make and model in respect of which this License is granted. If the designated processor is inoperative for any reason, any License granted under this Agreement shall be extended to authorize the use of the licensed Software on a backup processing unit until the designated processor is available again. If a designated processor is to be permanently phased-out of operation and replaced by



another processor, this License may be transferred to a replacement processor at no costs or liability to the AV Contractor upon written notification to the AV Contractor of the new processor make and model. For the purpose of this Agreement, use is defined as copying for processing any portion of the instructions or data in any licensed software from storage units or media into the designated processor, to the extent authorized above, into another processing unit in the event of malfunction.

2. Any additional licenses for Software and/or modifications, alterations and amendments to the licensed Software granted to the Owner by the AV Contractor shall be subject to:

a. The terms of any supplemental agreement between the parties, and the conditions of this Agreement insofar as they do not conflict with the terms of the supplemental agreement.

2.7 CABLE TIES AND SUPPORTS

A. Use plenum-rated cable in plenum-rated spaces. Where plenum-rated cable is used, provide plenum-rated and approved cable ties and supports.

B. Manufacturer:

1. Thomas and Betts #TYV525M

a. Or approved equal

2.8 RECEPTACLES AND CONNECTORS

A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Canare, Switchcraft, Neutrik, Amphenol, Pomona, Extron, or Liberty.

2.9 LABELS

A. Manufacturer:

1. Brady

2. Thomas and Betts

B. Wire and Cable Labels:

1. Self-laminating adhesive laser labels

2. Machine printable with a laser printer

3. Cable size: as required

4. Color: white label with black lettering

5. Manufacturer: Brady wire marking labels WML–211-295 and WML-311-292

C. Device Labels:



1. Self-laminating, type-on tape, adhesive labels. Use Helvetica 12-pt text

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that electrical requirements including junction boxes, floor boxes, ceiling loudspeaker enclosures, empty conduit and power circuits and receptacles are in place as shown on the drawings.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General: Include the delivery, unloading, setting in place, fastening to walls, floors, ceilings, counters, or other structures where required, interconnecting wiring of the system components, equipment alignment and adjustment, and other work, whether or not expressly required, which is necessary to result in complete operational systems.

B. Physical Installation:

1. Firmly secure equipment in place unless requirements of portability dictate otherwise.

2. Provide adequate for fastenings and supports with a safety load factor of at least three.

3. Secure plumb and square boxes, equipment, etc.

4. Install every item so that it not only functions correctly and is serviceable and replaceable, but looks neat and professional.

C. Cable Installation:

1. Mark cables, regardless of length, with permanent, non-handwritten number or letter cable markers per the instructions below in Labeling. There shall be no unmarked cables in the system.

2. Furnish screw-type terminal blocks, boards, strips, or connectors, for cables which interface with racks, cabinets, consoles, or equipment modules. Terminate wires terminating at screw-type terminals with crimp-on lugs. “Telephone-style” punch-down blocks are not acceptable for signal and data wiring.

3. Group cables according to the signals being carried. In order to reduce signal contamination, form separate groups for the following cables:

a. Power cables

b. Control cables

c. Analog video cables

d. Digital audio and video cables



e. Analog microphone audio cables

f. Analog line audio cables

g. Loudspeaker audio cables

h. RF cables

4. As a general practice, run power cables, control cables, and high level cables on the left side of an equipment rack as viewed from the rear. Run other cables on the right side of an equipment rack, as viewed from the rear. Where wiring issues preclude this orientation, it is acceptable to deviate from the directions above, as long as separation is maintained between signal and electrical power cables.

5. Provide a service loop of appropriate length within racks and at boxes or points of termination to allow each piece of equipment to be removed from the front of the rack for servicing. Provide service loops at boxes or points of termination to allow the equipment to be removed and laid flat on a surface for servicing,

6. Install no cable with a bend radius less than that recommended by the cable manufacturer.

7. Clearly identify cable terminated in a floor pocket with permanent, indelible, computer or label printer labels within 6” of the cable connector. Provide strain relief for cables. Provide a minimum of 3’ of free cable coiled in the floor pocket. Use nylon cable ties to group similar cable types.

D. Jacks and Connectors:

1. Panel-mounted jacks must be recessed and have isolated grounds.

2. Contacts must be silver- or gold-plated over brass.

3. Unless otherwise called for in these specifications and drawings, use the following types of jacks:

a. Microphones without mute controls: XLR-3 female

b. Microphones with mute controls: XLR-5 female

c. Line level audio: Combination XLR-3 or ¼” TRS

d. Loudspeaker: Neutrik Speakon or Switchcraft equivalent

e. Video: HDMI

f. RF: F

g. Camera: Triax or multi-pin bulkhead

h. Wired Remote Control (multiplex signal): XLR-5 female



i. Wired Remote Control (relay contacts): Neutrik Neutricon

E. Interface Plate Designation: Clearly engrave wall mounted interface plates with alphanumeric identification of input type (i.e., mic, line, speaker, video etc.) and corresponding patch field designation.

F. Patch Panels:

1. Assignments: Wire patch panels so that signal “sources” (outputs from) appear on the upper row of a row pair; and “loads” (inputs to) appear on the lower row of a row pair.

2. Designation Strips: Utilize alphanumeric identifications and descriptive information on audio and video patch panel designation strips. Number the jack positions in each horizontal row sequentially from left to right. Letter the horizontal jack rows sequentially from top to bottom. Include the alphanumeric identification of each jack on the functional block drawings, as well as on reproductions of these drawings which shall be mounted in an appropriate location near the patch bays.

G. Grounding Procedures: In order to minimize problems resulting from improper grounding, and to achieve maximum signal-to-noise ratios, adhere to the following grounding procedures:

1. General: Because of the great number of possible variations in grounding systems, follow good engineering practice, as outlined above, and deviate from these practices only when necessary to minimize crosstalk and to maximize signal-to-noise ratios in the audio, video, and control systems.

2. System Grounds: Establish a single primary “system ground” for the systems in each particular area. Connect grounding conductors in that area to this primary system ground. Provide the system ground in the audio equipment rack for the area. The ground shall consist of a copper bar of sufficient size to accommodate secondary ground conductors.

3. Rack Ground:

a. Connect the No.6 insulated copper wire connected to the earth ground to the primary system ground busbar in the Equipment Rack.

b. Bond a No.12 TW stranded wire from the Equipment Rack frame to the primary system ground bus bar.

4. Equipment Grounds: Grounding methods used will be dependent upon individual equipment interconnection of chassis ground, circuit common, and power supply common within the units. Provide ground method for equipment types as follows:

a. Equipment having a three-wire power cord with green wire of the power cord connected to chassis (Signal common is not internally connected to chassis): Make no connection from chassis ground to primary systems ground bus bar in Equipment Rack.

b. Equipment having a three-wire power cord with green wire of the power cord connected to chassis: Make no connection from chassis ground to primary system bus bar, but do make connection with 14AWG insulated wire from circuit common to primary system ground busbar in Equipment Rack. Separate circuit common from chassis ground.



c. Equipment having a two-wire power cord, no green wire, neutral is not tied to chassis, and circuit common is tied to chassis: Make connection from chassis to primary system ground bus bar using 14 gauge insulated wire.

d. Audio Cable Shields: Ground audio cable shields at one point only. There are no exceptions. For inter- and intra-rack wiring connect the shield at one end only. For ungrounded portable equipment, such as microphones, connect the shield at both ends but grounded at only one end.

3.3 LABELING AND IDENTIFICATION

A. Labeling: The Contractor shall be responsible for printed labels for all cables and cords, distribution frames, and outlet locations, according to the specifications. No labels are to be written by hand.

B. All voice/data jacks and patch panels shall be labeled according to Los Angeles County Standard 902. Labels are to be typed or printed with a labeling device and permanently affixed. No hand written lettering is acceptable. The labels shall be printed on white tape with black lettering for jacks. Patch panels shall be labeled both front and back. The patch panel labels shall be black tape with white lettering, four (4) labels per strip. Consult with the Owner’s Representative if further clarification is needed.

C. Station Faceplate Labeling. The communications cabling contractor shall coordinate actual labeling scheme, compliant with ISD LA County Standard 902, prior to pulling cables.

D. Workstation Jack Labeling:

1. Example: DXYYYZZZ (Data jack) – D1001MCR, D1002MCR…

E. D stands for data, V stands for Voice, X stands for floor level, YYY is jack number starting from 001, and ZZZ is the telecommunications room serving patch panel. Alpha (A&B) lettering of data jacks in not allowed.

1. Data designation “D” and MCR shall not be required for the Patch Panel labeling.

a. Example: XYYY - 1001, 1002… 2. VXYYYZZZ (Voice jack) - V1001MCR, V1002MCR…

3.4 PROGRAMMING

A. Touch Panel / Control System

1. Initial menu screen (splash screen) shall use a version of the Owner’s logo generated without visible scaling artifacts for the size of the screen.

2. Red shall only be used for alarm indicators and other buttons and indicators of special significance.

3. Avoid all use of technical terms; use clear, everyday language. Instead of “System On”, for example, use “Turn System On”; instead of “Power Down”, use “Turn Power Off”, etc.



4. Ensure items with similar functions appear consistently in all menus.

5. Ensure all buttons are sized similarly and spaced evenly.

6. Ensure spelling is 100% correct.

7. Menus throughout the project should appear and function consistently, across all touch panels and control system web pages.

8. Provide audible feedback for button presses; provide a volume control for this feedback in a tech menu.

9. Provide a tech menu for each touch panel. The tech menu shall offer control of button feedback volume, screen brightness, and other technician-specific functions required for each system.

a. Provide in the tech screen a means to change the tech screen password.

b. Obtain from the Owner’s Representative a default password for all touch panel tech menus.

10. Provide web access for all IP-enabled control systems. Via IP, users and/or technicians shall be able to operate all functions provided via touch and pushbutton panels. Coordinate with the Owner’s Representative to ensure a successful implementation of this requirement.

B. Projectors and other devices with frequent need for the replacement of consumables shall use the computer network for preventative maintenance.

1. Coordinate with the Owner’s Representative to obtain the default email address for maintenance messages.

2. Ensure Owner’s Representative can revise the maintenance email address via a simple method – using a single address for all networked AV devices. Contractor shall document this procedure in the Operations Manual.

C. Power Control and Sequencing

1. Provide power control interfaces for devices not provided with these, whether these accessories are listed in this Section or not. Specify accessories compatible with the specified control products.

2. Ensure that all non-essential items are turned off or placed in a low power consumption operation mode when system is turned off. At minimum, program the AV system to turn off the following types of devices when it is not in use.

a. Audio amplifiers

b. Audio processors

c. Video switchers and processors



d. Displays

e. Projectors

3. Sequence power on and power off cycles to ensure these take place with no audible and only minimally visible artifacts, pops, etc. When turning systems on, use the following sequence:

a. Turn on source devices.

b. Turn on processing and routing devices.

c. Turn on amplifiers, displays and projectors.

4. When turning systems off, use the following sequence:

a. Turn off amplifiers, displays and projectors.

b. Turn off processing and routing devices.

c. Turn off source devices.

D. Coordinate with Owner’s Representative regarding interfacing between AV power control devices and building management systems.

E. Using the rooms’ partition sensors, automate audiovisual system combine/divide functions in AV-equipped rooms with operable partitions.

F. Coordination with Lighting and Window Coverings:

1. The control system shall control the room’s lighting and window covering systems:

a. When a user pushes a button to set the audiovisual system in presentation mode, mesh shades shall be lowered.

b. When a user pushes a button to set the audiovisual system in video conference mode, the blackout shades shall be lowered.

c. When a user pushes a button to set the audiovisual system in video conference mode, the lights shall be set to a videoconference scene/preset.

G. Lighting System Programming and Interface Coordination

1. Lighting Designer Responsibilities

a. Determine lighting scenes for each area with a low voltage-controlled lighting system

b. For rooms with projection systems, provide a presentation-type scene that turns off any lights illuminating projection screens



c. Assign a short name for each lighting scene. Coordinate with the AV control system programmer to determine maximum scene name length.

d. Provide these names to the design team

2. Lighting System Installer and Programmer Responsibilities

a. Program lighting scenes per the lighting designer’s list into the rooms’ lighting systems

b. Provide appropriate control protocol/preset information to AV control system programmer

c. Coordinate with the AV control system programmer for hardware interface requirements between AV control systems and lighting systems

d. Coordinate with GC to determine where lighting control cabling will run and who runs it

e. Coordinate with the AV control system programmer for lighting system testing and fine-tuning

3. AV Control System Programmer Responsibilities

a. Program lighting scenes provided by the lighting designer into the appropriate control system menus. Use the provided scene names.

b. Coordinate with the lighting system designer and GC for control cabling and termination, etc.

c. Coordinate with the lighting system designer for testing and fine-tuning

3.5 COMPUTER INTERFACE/EXTENDER/TRANSMITTER CONFIGURATION

A. For computer interfaces, signal extenders and transmitters with integral input switching (VGA/HDMI, for example) program each device and any other system components involved so that the analog audio input is active regardless of which video input is selected.

3.6 EQUIPMENT CONFIGURATION

A. Blu-ray disk players: Set color space to RGB


A. Initial Tests and Measurements: Before final adjustment and acceptance tests are scheduled, perform system checkout. Furnish required test equipment and perform work necessary to determine and/or modify performance of the system to meet the requirements of this specification. Include the following:

1. Adjust, balance, and align equipment for optimum quality and to meet the manufacturers’ published specifications.



2. Perform the test procedure provided with this specification and return the completed form no less than one week prior to the initial punch walk.

3. Install 1/8” diameter vinyl “map dots” as indicators for nominal operating positions of rotary, slider, or switch controls available for operator adjustment. Provide multiple indicators, adequately distinguished, for controls having more than one nominal operating position.

B. UTP Infrastructure: Follow the following procedure to test a twisted pair cabling infrastructure if one is provided as a component of the audiovisual system.

1. Required Equipment:

a. Fluke DTX-1800 or equivalent

2. Test Procedure:

a. Test each cable using the CAT5e Channel test

b. Ensure that each cable passes the test. Re-terminate or replace all cables that do not pass.

C. Multimode Fiber Optic Infrastructure: Follow the following procedure to test a fiber optic infrastructure if one is provided as a component of the audiovisual system.

1. Required Equipment and Supplies:

a. SPCfiber DI-200 Fiber Optic Inspection Scope or equivalent

b. MicroCare Fiber Wipes or equivalent

c. Noyes CKM-2 Multimode Fiber Optic Loss Test Kit or equivalent

2. Test Procedure:

a. Using the scope, inspect each cable before testing and clean each end if necessary.

b. Test each cable using either the IEC 61280-4-1 Single Reference Cable Method or the TIA 526-14 OFSTP-14 Method B.

c. Ensure that each cable provides an end-to-end insertion loss of less than 3dB at both 850 nm and 1,300 nm. Re-terminate or replace cables that do not pass.

D. Digital Video Cabling: Follow the following procedure to test each provided digital video cable.

1. HDMI:

a. Required Equipment:

1) Quantum Data 780



2) Or approved substitute tester

2. DVI/SDI/HD-SDI:


1) Quantum Data 882D

2) Or approved substitute tester

3. DisplayPort:


1) Quantum Data 882E-DP

4. Test Procedure:

a. Test each cable

1) Discard all cables that fail

E. Audio System:

1. Loudspeaker-Line Impedance: Measure the impedance at 63 Hz, 250 Hz, and 1 kHz and the resistance of each loudspeaker line leaving the sound equipment rack with the line disconnected from its normal driving source. For lines to full-range distributed loudspeaker systems, measure the magnitude of impedance at 1 kHz.

2. Hum and Noise Level:

a. Measure the hum and noise levels of the overall system for each microphone input channel and line-level input channel.

b. Adjust gain controls for optimum signal-to-noise ratio so that full amplifier output will be achieved with 0 dBm at a line-level input.

c. Terminate line-level inputs with shielded resistors of 150 and 600 ohms, respectively, for these measurements.

d. Disconnect the loudspeaker lines and terminate the power-amplifier outputs with power resistors for these measurements. The value of the load resistor shall be within 5% of the nominal load impedance of the amplifier under test. The power rating of the resistor shall equal the power rating of the amplifier.

3. System Frequency Response:

a. Measure the frequency response using the audio systems as described in Part 1. Adjust gain controls and equalizers to provide the octave-band sound levels as specified.



b. Programmable Equalizers: Provide necessary controller with full audio spectrum display for the adjustment of programmable equalizers during system checkout. Do not provide equalizer programmers with the systems.

4. Uniformity of Coverage:

a. Measure octave band of pink noise test signal, centered at 4 kHz, played through loudspeaker system.

5. Power-Output and Signal-Level Adjustment within System:

a. Measure the electrical distortion of the overall system for each line-level input channel.

b. Adjust gain control as for the tests specified herein.

c. Apply a 1-kHz sine wave signal from an oscillator having less than 0.5% total harmonic distortion at the input tested, at a level required to produce full amplifier output. Note that a pad with 150-ohm output impedance is required for driving the microphone-level input in accordance with the EIA standard.

d. Use a distortion analyzer to measure the output level and the total harmonic distortion of the amplification and control equipment. In the absence of a distortion analyzer, a high input impedance measuring device such as a DMM may be used to measure the output level. Lack of clipping or apparent deformation of a sine-wave input signal at the power amplifier output, as seen on the oscilloscope, may serve as evidence that distortion of amplification and control equipment is within acceptable limits.

e. Make measurements with loads actually incurred in the system operation. Power-amplifier loads shall be power resistors equal to the nominal load impedance of the output terminals used in the system.

6. Loudspeaker Polarity

a. Perform polarity checks of loudspeaker lines by means of a polarity tester or use DC source at one end of each line and a voltmeter at the other end. Loudspeaker lines shall be identically polarized with respect to color coding.

b. Test polarity of the loudspeakers using a sine-wave test signal warbled about 500 Hz. The listener shall be located on axis of the loudspeaker. Switch the loudspeakers from nominally in polarity to nominally out of polarity with respect to the selected loudspeaker. With the loudspeakers in proper polarity, the quality and clarity of the music or speech should be greater, and the warble test signal should clearly come to the surrounding space from the loudspeaker.

7. Freedom from Parasitic Oscillation and Radio-Frequency Pickup:

a. With systems set up for each mode of operation specified in the functional requirements, check to ensure that systems are free from spurious oscillation and radio-frequency pickup, in the absence of audio input signal and when the system is driven to full output at 100 Hz.



b. Employ an oscilloscope having at least 5 MHZ bandwidth for these checks.

c. Apply slow sine-wave sweep from 50 Hz to 5 kHz at a level of 6 dB below rated power-amplifier output voltage to each system. Listen carefully for buzzes, rattles and objectionable distortion.

d. Correct causes of these defects unless the cause is clearly from other than the sound amplification system’s equipment and installation, in which case bring the cause to the attention of the Owner and Architect.

8. Audio Test Signal Paths: Verify operation from source inputs through system components to signal destinations.

F. Analog Composite Video System:

1. Input Signal Level: Measure standard composite signal level with an oscilloscope across standard input impedance. Signal level shall be 1.0 volt peak-to-peak. Make system adjustments to attain required signal level.

2. Signal-to-Noise: Operate system at standard input and output levels. Terminate with standard load impedance. Measure noise level using oscilloscope for signals from 10 kHz to 4.2 MHZ and an RMS volt-meter for signals from 0 to 10 kHz, and calculate signal-to-noise ratio.

3. Differential Gain: Using a step generator and waveform monitor measure chrominance, luminance, and normal synchronizing and blanking signals. Measure variation in amplitude of the chroma sub-carrier at 10%, 50%, and 90% luminance.

4. Differential Phase: Operate system as defined above and measure variation in phase of the chroma sub-carrier at 10%, 50%, and 90% luminance.

G. Optical System:

1. The light intensity shall be measured at five positions of the projected image (center and four corners) after the projector has been adjusted to provide the light output as specified above.

2. The “corner” locations shall be defined as the four points determined by intersecting lines drawn 5% of the distance in from the focused edges of the image.

3. The light meter used for the above measurements shall be a properly calibrated footcandle (or lux) meter and shall be cosine-corrected.

H. Control System:

1. Verify operational functions at each control interface position.

2. Verify operational functions of wireless control device.

3. Verify operational functions of the control system and interfaced devices.

I. Radio Frequency (RF) System:



1. Use a standard television receiver connected to each system outlet. Make a subjective evaluation of picture quality and verify that no visible components of cross modulation, ghosting, or beat interference appear when the receiver is tuned to each of the desired channels.

2. Using an RF signal strength meter, record the signal levels in dBmV of modulated carriers transmitted through the system at representative outlets.

3. RF Test Signal Paths: Verify proper operation of the system from source inputs to the head end, including antennas, CATV feeds, and modulators, through line amplifiers, splitters, and directional couplers, to system outlets.

3.8 LABELING REQUIREMENTS


1. Label the audiovisual system components. The components include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Equipment Enclosures

b. Rack-mounted AV Devices

c. Portable AV Devices

d. Batteries

e. Wires and Cables

f. Equipment Racks

g. Terminal Blocks

h. Relays

i. Patch panels, and the termination positions within the patch panels

2. Provide labels that are consistent with the AV documentation.

3. Prior to installation, degrease and clean surfaces to receive nameplates and labels

B. Equipment Enclosures

1. Label each rack and cabinet with a designation corresponding to the system documentation.

2. Mount the label on the top of the rack or cabinet, centered horizontally.

3. Color: Black background with white lettering.

a. Example: Line 1: “AV-01” (1/2-inch high letters)



4. Audiovisual Devices

5. Label rack mounted devices associated with AV systems with a permanent, machine-generated, laminated label. Use 12-point black Helvetica text with a white background.

C. Batteries

1. Label batteries with the month and year they were installed.

2. Example: “April 2004”

D. Wireless Transmitters and Receivers

1. Label wireless transmitters and receivers, including, but not limited to wireless microphone systems clearly so users can identify the transmitter associated with each receiver.

2. Use an identifier that associates each transmitter with the room it is associated with, such as a room number.

3. Example: Rm. 230-Mic 1

E. Wire and Cable

1. Identify wire and cable clearly with permanent machine-generated labels wrapped about the full circumference within one-inch (25mm) of each connection.

2. Indicate the cable ID designated on the associated field or shop drawings and run list.

3. Assign wire or cable designations consistently throughout a given system; i.e., each wire or cable must carry the same number at both ends.

4. Position labels so they are clearly visible without the need to remove wire management devices or other obstructions.

5. At each end of the cable, indicate the device and connector the cable connects to.

6. Example: AV 3101 Mtrx Swx In-1

F. Terminal Blocks

1. Label consistently with each block’s designation in the AV documentation.

G. Relays and Transformers

1. Label consistently with each relay’s and transformer’s designation in the AV documentation.

H. Patch Panels

1. Using two-line designations, indicate groups of inputs and outputs on the upper row of top ports and the lower row of bottom ports.



2. Example: Mixer Mic Inputs In-1 | In-2 | In-3 | In-4, etc.

3.9 COOLING PROVISIONS

A. Utilize thermostatically-controlled active cooling devices if necessary to keep device temperatures below manufacturer-specified maximums. Systems including devices operating above manufacturer-specified limits shall be rejected. Cooling systems utilizing fans running continuously, without thermostatic controls, will be rejected.

3.10 OWNER TRAINING

A. Provide training on the installed systems at the project site by a suitably qualified instructor, to designated personnel, to instruct them in the operation and maintenance of the systems.

B. Arrange with the equipment manufacturer for such instruction, at no additional cost, in the event qualified instructors are not available on staff for certain sophisticated equipment.

C. Schedule the first training after the systems are operational. Provide a minimum of 4 hours of training (total) on the systems included in this specification.

3.11 SYSTEM ACCEPTANCE TESTS

A. System acceptance tests shall be performed when initial system checkout has taken place and the Initial Testing and Tuning Report has been completed and submitted by the Contractor. The system acceptance tests consist of the following:

1. Take a physical inventory of equipment on site and compare to equipment lists in the contract documents.

2. Demonstrate the operation of system equipment.

3. Both subjective and objective tests will be required to determine compliance with the specifications. Provide test equipment specified for these tests.

4. Provide final, “as-built” drawings, run sheets, manuals, and other required documents, as detailed in Part 1.

5. Provide complete testing reports generated by subsystems that provide self- testing.

B. Initial Testing and Tuning Report

1. Use additional pages as necessary to allow complete comments.Test Description Re

sultComment1 Record all equipment that was specified but is not present. Provide a

reason why this equipment is not present.

2 Confirm that no equipment accessible to users provides greater than 500mA leakage current.

3 Confirm no sharp or jagged surfaces are accessible to a user.



Test Description Result

Comment4 Confirm that each active device’s external temperature, measured

externally using a non-contact thermometer, is within manufacturer’s guidelines.

5 Perform and log cable inspection. Confirm each cable is labeled, dressed, included in a bundle with cables with like signals, not under stress, is serviceable, is correctly strain- relieved, is not bent beyond manufacturer’s recommended bend radius, does not have tie wraps tensioned excessively or used inappropriately. Confirm labels are positioned and oriented in a consistent manner and are legible and unambiguous.

6 Demonstrate that the full inventory is new equipment, in full compliance with the specification, or as modified by approved submission. Record test results as pass/fail, and list exceptions.

7 Confirm rack elevation and flow drawings, cable and other labels and engravings are an accurate model of the furnished system, and are in compliance with latest revised specifications. Record test results as pass/fail.

8 Confirm all inputs and outputs of switchers are labeled (wherever possible), so that users can easily make manual routes quickly without having to refer to the system drawings.

9 Confirm all channels on amplifiers are properly labeled, so technicians can make quick adjustments without having to refer to the system drawings.

10 Confirm all rack mounted equipment is labeled and that the labels match those on the drawings (equipment symbols and/or description), control system, field plates, patch panels, and any labels associated with the system.

11 Confirm RJ terminations are solid in their connectors. 12 Confirm each coax cable respects a bend radius of at least 5x the

cable’s radius or as recommended by the manufacturer.

13 Record ambient noise, A-weighted, slow. 14 Confirm all power amplifiers are working within rated load. Record the

impedance (and at what frequency) of each loudspeaker line on each power amplifier at 63, 250, and 1,000 Hz.

15 Using appropriate test signals, have the sound system produce a nominal operating level of (65) dB SPL (Sound Pressure Level) for conference speech, (60) dB SPL for program material, “A” weighted at all listeners’ ears ±__ (2) dB (“Uniformity of Coverage”) (or at least (15) dB above the ambient noise, A-weighted, whichever is greater), with the control system volume control indicating “normal” or default setting. Record results for each channel and source.

16 Confirm system is capable of producing an additional (15) dB above this level ((80) dB SPL) for each audio source, with less than 0.5% THD (Total Harmonic Distortion) plus noise. Measure THD plus noise when source is at (15) dB above nominal operating level at each “destination”, for all sources selected.




Comment17 Confirm system develops a noise level that is electrically (55) dB below

the normal operating level for all audio sources. “Noise” refers to hum, electrostatic noise, RF interference, etc. Measure and record Signal to Noise (“signal” measured electrically at nominal operating level at each destination, for all sources selected.

18 Confirm program loudspeakers are connected in the same polarity, and speech reinforcement systems are polarized such that a positive acoustic pressure on a microphone results in a positive acoustic pressure at the loudspeaker (“Polarity Test”).

19 Confirm system produces no more than a (1) dB variance in program source levels when each program source is playing audio from a calibrated medium (CD, test signal generator, etc.)

20 Confirm there is no audible vibration caused by improper mechanical installation. Use a continuous sweep signal at headroom level (from generator or test CD.) Provide a pass/ fail result and document which device fails and the frequency of these artifacts. (“Buzzes and Rattles Test”).

21 Confirm speech reinforcement systems are stable, with no ringing nor feedback.

22 For audio conference systems, adjust microphone input gain to demonstrate that a “standard talker” (60 dB SPL at 1 m), positioned at each talker position in the room, produces a 0 dB level at the input of the mixer bus of the audio conference DSP device. If there is local voice reinforcement (“mix- minus”), AGC and ALC may need to be restricted. Record test results as pass/fail. Record level across analog telephone line, if one is used. Inspect DSP mixer telephone line levels, both transmit and receive, when normal speech is encountered in the room.

23 For conferencing mode, at the __ (65) dB SPL listening level, confirm full duplex operation, with no reports of echo or “speech trails” (as detected from the far end).

24 Confirm equalizers, whether hardware or virtual, are adjusted for best intelligibility, and in accordance with the preferred acoustic level response curves. Record the “house curve” before equalization, as well as after the equalizers have been tuned, with and without microphone input filters. If requested by the Consultant, produce this documentation for systems without equalizers, as this test may apply to the preamp filter settings in cases where intelligibility can be improved.

25 If required, confirm system intelligibility, with a RSTI (Rapid Speech Transmission Index) greater than 0.85.

26 For wireless microphone systems, with all wireless microphones turned on, confirm that throughout the specified operating area for the transmitter, there are no dropouts, intermodulation interaction between wireless systems, or RF caused artifacts.




Comment27 If required, for NTSC sources, placing a test generator at each source

shall produce 1 volt peak-to-peak to each destination ± 10% (or 1dB). Record results at each destination using NTSC bars, peak white, and 5-step multiburst (0.5, 1.0, 2.0, 3.0, 3.58, and 4.2 MHz).

28 Also for NTSC sources, confirm optimum brightness, contrast, and color in displays using SMPTE source with PLUGE (Picture Line Up Generation Equipment) display.

29 Where several displays are visible in the same space, confirm picture tonal consistency across all of them. For composite video signals use a NTSC bars with PLUGE signal to all. For RGB and digital video signals use a colorimeter and test color signal software to confirm consistent images

30 For RGB sources, demonstrate 700 mV ± 10% (or 1 dB) from each source to each destination. (If requested only) record results using a flat-field pattern signal at the highest resolution specified, or at least 1,600 by 1,200 resolution. For RGB sources, measure and record peak-to-peak voltage for peak white signal, and record “peak” and “Level” control settings on any interface at the positions whereby the 700 mV voltages were attained.

31 Confirm projectors are focused, centered, and evenly illuminated. If requested, confirm using the calibrated light meter that the brightest measurement locations shall be no more than +10% above average, and the dimmest locations no less than –5% below average measurement. Also if requested, document that geometric distortion is within 2% tolerance. Take actual measurements if necessary (top, bottom, left, right dimensions of white portion of screen) and photograph if necessary.

32 Confirm system displays with stability, with no scaling-related visual artifacts when switching between, at a minimum, 1,600 x 1,200, 1,024 x 768, 1,280 x 1,024, 1,920 x 1,080, 1,920 x 1,200 and 1,280 x 720 sources, and/or all those specified in the performance criteria for this system. Record test results.

33 Where HDMI, DVI, or DisplayPort signals are included in the system, confirm that an acceptable signal is being displayed on the monitor from each source position. Use the Alt Pixel test image (pixel-on, pixel-off) for each resolution included in the design intent: 1,920x1,200@60, 1,920x1,080@60, 1,280x720@60, 1,366x768@60, 1,024x768@60, 800x600@60, 1,600x1,200@60 as required. Inspect each, leaving the signal on for three minutes. No artifacts shall be visible. Note: If the signal is going to a codec, HDCP should be turned off. If the signal is going to a display, HDCP should be turned on for a complete HDMI test to verify cables and display input.

34 Confirm HDCP is maintained from sources to destinations except as excluded above. Confirm EDID is managed correctly and that devices output at resolutions supported by the system.




Comment35 Confirm the control system controls all of the required equipment as

specified. Confirm system performs with stability and in sync with the equipment being controlled without the need to reset any item of equipment. Confirm that user interface requirements dictated in Part 3 of the audiovisual specifications have been met.

36 Confirm system is serviceable: all devices must be easily removable for repair by one person; all cables must be dressed neatly and be provided with adequate services loops and bundled in forms there is no excessive pressure on cables at termination points and connectors, and each cable number must agree with the shop drawings and cabling run list.

37 Confirm all switches and receptacles are be logically and permanently labeled.

38 Confirm all nomenclature for consistency: drawings, touch screen, wall plates, floor boxes, patch panels, equipment, etc.

39 Confirm all patch cables have cable numbers. 40 Where cameras are included in system, confirm each operates correctly

and provides correct image quality.

41 Confirm camera presets are programmed as specified by the user. 42 Confirm TV reception from all sources (OTA, CATV, etc.) and that all

channel presets are accurate.

43 Confirm that all codec options specified by the customer have been installed.

44 Confirm and document IP addresses and configuration information provided by the client and loaded into system, including IP addresses, subnet masks, gateways, time server, gatekeeper, etc. Confirm that all network functions specified by the customer function properly on the customer’s LAN.

45 Confirm all web-based system control and monitoring features, and other IP functionality of system (time servers, system-generated e-mail, etc.) are completely functional.

46 Confirm that display devices have On-Screen Displays/Menus disabled. If the customer has directed otherwise, indicate from which person this direction came.

47 Confirm that video projectors have blue screens or other images or colors displayed in the absence of an input signal disabled. If the customer has directed otherwise, indicate from which person this direction came.

48 Log all test conference calls (audio and video). Log shall include time, line used, number called, success of connection, who was spoken with at the far end, success of full duplex, success of auto-disconnect, dBSPL in the room. Note static, jitter/packet loss, or any other artifacts, distortion, etc. Note if auto-disconnect functions as specified.

49 Confirm no display device has lost pixels when a Full White Test signal is displayed (7 pixels maximum per quadrant, or per manufacturer’s spec). Note number and location of lost pixels, if any. Provide photos.




Comment50 Check for excessive vibration on VC camera(s) at full telephoto position.

51 Provide video recording of all non-conformances and anomalies. 52 Confirm all visible devices are installed square and plumb. 53 Confirm no dust, grease, scratches, or any other signs of handling are

visible on any devices

54 Confirm assistive systems work throughout intended listening areas 55 Confirm closed captioning is functional on all displays 56 Confirm control system user interfaces provide a means to enable and

disable display of closed captions

C. In the event further adjustment is required, or defective equipment must be repaired or replaced, tests may be suspended or continued at the option of the Owner or Owner’s representative.

1. If the need for further adjustments becomes evident during the demonstration and testing, continue work until the installation operates properly. Included in the continued work shall include, but not be limited to, changes to or installation of resistive pads, adjustment of loudspeaker aiming, adjustment of system processing, programming changes to the control system, convergence and/or alignment of the video projector, if these adjustments are required.

2. If acceptance of the system is delayed because of defective equipment or because the equipment does not fulfill this specification, reimburse the Owner for time and expenses for these tests during extensions of the acceptance-testing period.

3.12 CLEANUP AND REPAIR

A. Upon completion of the work, remove refuse and rubbish from and about the premises, and shall leave the relevant areas and equipment clean and in an operational state. Repair damage caused to the premises by the installation activities, at no cost to the Owner.

3.13 PROTECTION OF WORK

A. During the installation, and up to the date of final acceptance, protect finished and unfinished work against damage and loss. In the event of such damage or loss, replace or repair such work at no cost to the Owner.

3.14 SERVICE AND MAINTENANCE

A. Provide cost for additional service levels beyond the one-year warranty period and maintenance calls as listed

1. One year, two-year, and three-year service with quarterly pre-emptive maintenance calls and same-day issue response

2. One year, two-year, and three-year service with quarterly pre-emptive maintenance calls and 24-hour issue response



3. One year, two-year, and three-year service with quarterly pre-emptive maintenance calls and 48-hour issue response

B. Pre-emptive maintenance minimum requirements:

1. Cleaning of filters, lenses and general dusting of all equipment

2. Verification and adjustment of focus and projector position

3. Verification that all controlled devices are functioning

4. Note any conditions that may affect the continued function and well-being of the audiovisual system and report to owner

5. Report projector lamp life to owner and replace lamp as directed

END OF SECTION


Room Name and Number Manufacturer Part # Qty. Description

Main Control Room (MCR) 116 Netgear FS7502T2 1 PoE network switch

Main Control Room (MCR) 116 Biamp Teresa DSP FORTE AVB CI 1 Fixed Audio DSP

Main Control Room (MCR) 116 Shure QLX-D124/85 3 Shure Wireless Microphone System

Main Control Room (MCR) 116 Shure UA844+ SWB 3 Antenna Distribution System

Main Control Room (MCR) 116 Crestron PRO3 1 3-Series Control System®

Main Control Room (MCR) 116 Crestron TSD-2220-B 1 21.5” HD Touch Screen Display, Black

Main Control Room (MCR) 116 Crestron DM-DGE-200-C 1 Digital Graphics Engine 200 w/PinPoint™ UX & 4K DM 8G+® Input

Main Control Room (MCR) 116 Crestron DM-MD16X16 1 16x16 DigitalMedia Switcher

Main Control Room (MCR) 116 Crestron DMC-4KZ-C 7DigitalMedia 8G+® 4K60 4:4:4 HDR Input Card for DM® Switchers, HDBaseT®

Compatible

Main Control Room (MCR) 116 Crestron DMC-4KZ-HD-DSP 5 HDMI® 4K60 4:4:4 HDR Input Card w/Downmixing for DM® Switchers

Main Control Room (MCR) 116 Crestron DMC-4KZ-CO-HD 5 2-Channel DigitalMedia 8G+® 4K60 4:4:4 HDR Output Card for DM® Switchers

Main Control Room (MCR) 116 Crestron DMC-4K-HDO 1 2-Channel 4K Scaling HDMI® Output Card for DM® Switchers

Main Control Room (MCR) 117 Crestron DSP-1281 2 Crestron Avia™ 12x8 Digital Signal Processor w/Dante®

Main Control Room (MCR) 116 Crestron AMP-8150 2Avia™ 8-Channel Power Amplifier, 150W/Ch., 4/8 Ohm or 70V North America &

Japan, 100-120V

Main Control Room (MCR) 116 Crestron DM-CBL-8G-P-SP1 000 1 DigitalMedia 8G Cable, plenum, 1000 ft spool

Main Control Room (MCR) 116 Crestron DM-8G-CONN-100 1

Connectors for DM-CBL-8G DigitalMedia 8G

Cable, 100-Pack

Multipurspose Room A Crestron TST-902 1 8.7" Wireless Touch Screen

Multipurspose Room A Crestron TST-902-DSW 1 Wall Dock for TST-902

Multipurspose Room A Crestron GLS-PART-CN 1 Cresnet® Partition Sensor

Multipurspose Room A Crestron CEN-GWEXER 1 infiNET EX® & ER Wireless Gateway

Multipurspose Room A Crestron DM-RMC-4K-SCALER-C 2 4K DigitalMedia 8G+® Receiver & Room Controller with Scaler

Multipurspose Room A Crestron DM-TX-200-C-2G-B-T 2 Wall Plate DigitalMedia 8G+® Transmitter 200, Black Texture

Multipurspose Room A Crestron Saros PD8T-W-T-EACH 4 Saros® 8” 2-Way Pendant Speaker, White Textured . Single

Multipurspose Room A Crestron PDS8T-W-T-EACH 1 Saros® 8” Pendant Subwoofer, White Textured, Single

Multipurspose Room A Crestron DM-CBL-8G-P-SP1 1 DigitalMedia 8G Cable, plenum, 1000 ft spool

Multipurspose Room A Da-Lite 82433 1 LOW Voltage Screen Controller

Multipurspose Room A Da-Lite 84403BL 1 Electrified drop down screen (78" x 139" )

Multipurspose Room A SamSung QM-75F 1 75" Edge-Lit 4K UHD LED Display for Business

Multipurspose Room A Premier AM300-B 1 Flat Panel display mount

Multipurspose Room A Premier INW-AM325 1 In-Wall box for Swingout Mounts

Multipurspose Room A Atlas MS-12CE 1 Microphone stand

Multipurspose Room A Sennhneiser SI 1015 /NT1015-120 1 Assitive Listening Moulator/Emitter with power supply

Multipurspose Room A Sennhneiser SZI 1015 1 Assitive Listening Radiator

Multipurspose Room A Sennhneiser HDI 830 10 Assitive Listening Headset

Multipurspose Room A Sennhneiser L300 10-10 1 ALS baterry Charger for 10 headset

Multipurspose Room A Sennhneiser BA 300 1 Spare Bateries

Multipurspose Room A Sennhneiser GZG 1029 1 Emitter mounting swivel

Multipurspose Room A Sennhneiser GZP 10 1 Emitter Mounting Plate

Multipurspose Room A Sennhneiser IZK 20 1 Emitter Mounting Clamp

Multipurspose Room A By architect By architect 1 Podium specified by Architect

Multipurspose Room A By architect By architect 1 Video projector specified by Architect

Multipurspose Room A Epson PowerLite 2250U/V11H871020 1 Portable Pojector

Multipurspose Room B Crestron TST-902 1 8.7" Wireless Touch Screen

Multipurspose Room B Crestron TST-902-DSW 1 Wall Dock for TST-902

Multipurspose Room B Crestron GLS-PART-CN 1 Cresnet® Partition Sensor

Multipurspose Room B Crestron CEN-GWEXER 1 infiNET EX® & ER Wireless Gateway

Multipurspose Room B Crestron DM-RMC-4K-SCALER-C 2 4K DigitalMedia 8G+® Receiver & Room Controller with Scaler

Multipurspose Room B Crestron DM-TX-200-C-2G-B-T 2 Wall Plate DigitalMedia 8G+® Transmitter 200, Black Texture

Multipurspose Room B Crestron Saros PD8T-W-T-EACH 4 Saros® 8” 2-Way Pendant Speaker, White Textured . Single

Multipurspose Room B Crestron PDS8T-W-T-EACH 1 Saros® 8” Pendant Subwoofer, White Textured, Single

Multipurspose Room B Crestron DM-CBL-8G-P-SP1 1 DigitalMedia 8G Cable, plenum, 1000 ft spool

Multipurspose Room B Da-Lite 82433 1 LOW Voltage Screen Controller

Multipurspose Room B Da-Lite 84403BL 1 Electrified drop down screen (78" x 139" )

Multipurspose Room B SamSung QM-75F 1 75" Edge-Lit 4K UHD LED Display for Business

Multipurspose Room B Premier AM300-B 1 Flat Panel display mount

Multipurspose Room B Premier INW-AM325 1 In-Wall box for Swingout Mounts

Multipurspose Room B Atlas MS-12CE 1 Microphone stand

Multipurspose Room B Sennhneiser SI 1015 /NT1015-120 1 Assitive Listening Moulator/Emitter with power supply

Multipurspose Room B Sennhneiser SZI 1015 1 Assitive Listening Radiator

Multipurspose Room B Sennhneiser HDI 830 10 Assitive Listening Headset

Multipurspose Room B Sennhneiser L300 10-10 1 ALS baterry Charger for 10 headset

Multipurspose Room B Sennhneiser BA 300 1 Spare Bateries

Multipurspose Room B Sennhneiser GZG 1029 1 Emitter mounting swivel

Multipurspose Room B Sennhneiser GZP 10 1 Emitter Mounting Plate

Multipurspose Room B Sennhneiser IZK 20 1 Emitter Mounting Clamp

Multipurspose Room B By architect By architect 1 Podium specified by Architect

Multipurspose Room B By architect By architect 1 Video projector cart specified by Architect

Multipurspose Room B Epson PowerLite 2250U/V11H871020 1 Portable Pojector

Multipurspose Room C Crestron TST-902 1 8.7" Wireless Touch Screen

Multipurspose Room C Crestron TST-902-DSW 1 Wall Dock for TST-902

Multipurspose Room C Crestron GLS-PART-CN 1 Cresnet® Partition Sensor

Multipurspose Room C Crestron CEN-GWEXER 1 infiNET EX® & ER Wireless Gateway

Multipurspose Room C Crestron DM-TX-200-C-2G-B-T 1 Wall Plate DigitalMedia 8G+® Transmitter 200, Black Texture

AUDIO VISUAL BILL OF MATERIALS 1, 2

APPENDIX A

1 of 2


AUDIO VISUAL BILL OF MATERIALS 1, 2

APPENDIX A

Multipurspose Room C Crestron DM-RMC-4K-SCALER-C 1 4K DigitalMedia 8G+® Receiver & Room Controller with Scaler

Multipurspose Room C Crestron Saros PD8T-W-T-EACH 8 Saros® 8” 2-Way Pendant Speaker, White Textured . SingleMultipurspose Room C Crestron PDS8T-W-T-EACH 2 Saros® 8” Pendant Subwoofer, White Textured, Single

Multipurspose Room C Da-Lite 82433 1 Low Voltage Screen Controller

Multipurspose Room C Da-LiteProfessional Electrol (106" x 188")

HDTV (16:9) format1 Recessed Electrified drop down screen (106" x 188")

Multipurspose Room C Draper Aeolift 100 AeroLift 100 1 Projector Lift

Multipurspose Room C Premier PDS-Plus 1 Projector Bracket

Multipurspose Room C Epson Pro L1300UNL/V11H733920 1 Fixed Projector

Multipurspose Room C Epson ELPM10/ V12H004M0A 1 Projector Lenses

Multipurspose Room C APC AP9562 1 Power distribution unit

Multipurspose Room C Atlas MS-12CE 1 Microphone stand

Multipurspose Room C Sennhneiser SI 1015 /NT1015-120 1 Assitive Listening Moulator/Emitter with power supply

Multipurspose Room C Sennhneiser SZI 1015 1 Assitive Listening Radiator

Multipurspose Room C Sennhneiser HDI 830 25 Assitive Listening Headset

Multipurspose Room C Sennhneiser L300 10-10 2 ALS baterry Charger for 10 headset

Multipurspose Room C Sennhneiser BA 300 1 Spare Bateries

Multipurspose Room C Sennhneiser GZG 1029 1 Emitter mounting swivel

Multipurspose Room C Sennhneiser GZP 10 1 Emitter Mounting Plate

Multipurspose Room C Sennhneiser IZK 20 1 Emitter Mounting Clamp

Multipurspose Room C By architect By architect 1 Podium specified by Architect

Multipurspose Room C By architect By architect 1 Video projector cart specified by Architect

Arts & Craft Room 110 Crestron MP-B10-W 1 Media Presentation Button Panel B10, White

Arts & Craft Room 110 Crestron MP/MPC/IPAC_FRONT_LABEL_ENGR


Arts & Craft Room 110 Crestron DM-TX-200-C-2G-B-T 1 Wall Plate DigitalMedia 8G+® Transmitter 200, Black Texture

Arts & Craft Room 110 Crestron DM-RMC-4K-SCALE R-C 1 DigitalMedia 8G+® 4K60 4:4:4 HDR Receiver & Room Controller 100 with scaler

Arts & Craft Room 110 Crestron SAROS SR8T-W-T-EACH 2Saros® 8” 2-Way Surface Mount Indoor/Outdoor Speaker,White Textured, Single

(must be ordered in multiples of 2)

Arts & Craft Room 110 Crestron DM-CBL-8G-P-SP1000 1 DigitalMedia 8G Cable, plenum, 1000 ft spool

Arts & Craft Room 110 Epson Power Lite 685W 1 Short Throw Projector

Computer Room 111 Crestron MP-B10-W 1 Media Presentation Button Panel B10, White

Computer Room 111 Crestron MP/MPC/IPAC_FRONT_LABEL_ENGR


Computer Room 111 Crestron DM-TX-200-C-2G-B-T 1 Wall Plate DigitalMedia 8G+® Transmitter 200, Black Texture

Computer Room 111 Crestron DM-RMC-4K-SCALE R-C 1 DigitalMedia 8G+® 4K60 4:4:4 HDR Receiver & Room Controller 100 with scaler

Computer Room 111 Crestron SAROS SR8T-W-T-EACH 2Saros® 8” 2-Way Surface Mount Indoor/Outdoor Speaker,White Textured, Single


Computer Room 111 Crestron DM-CBL-8G-P-SP1000 1 DigitalMedia 8G Cable, plenum, 1000 ft spool

Computer Room 111 Epson Power Lite 685W 1 Short Throw Projector

Flexible/ Game Room 112 Crestron MP-B10-W 1 Media Presentation Button Panel B10, White

Flexible/ Game Room 112 Crestron MP/MPC/IPAC_FRONT_LABEL_ENGR


Flexible/ Game Room 112 Crestron DM-TX-200-C-2G-B-T 1 Wall Plate DigitalMedia 8G+® Transmitter 200, Black Texture

Flexible/ Game Room 112 Crestron DM-RMC-4K-SCALE R-C 1 DigitalMedia 8G+® 4K60 4:4:4 HDR Receiver & Room Controller 100 with scaler

Flexible/ Game Room 112 Crestron SAROS SR8T-W-T-EACH 2Saros® 8” 2-Way Surface Mount Indoor/Outdoor Speaker,White Textured, Single


Flexible/ Game Room 112 Crestron DM-CBL-8G-P-SP1000 1 DigitalMedia 8G Cable, plenum, 1000 ft spool

Flexible/ Game Room 112 SamSung QM85F 1 85" Flat planel display

Flexible/ Game Room 113 Premier P4263F 1 Mount

Flexible/ Game Room 114 Chief PAC 526 1 In wall box

Lobby Crestron DM-TX-200-C-2G-W-T 1 Wall Plate DigitalMedia 8G+® Transmitter 200, White Texture

Lobby Crestron AM-300 1 AirMedia® Presentation System 300

Lobby Crestron MP-B10-W 1 Media Presentation Button Panel B10, White

Lobby Crestron MP/MPC/IPAC_FRONT_LABEL_ENGR


Lobby Crestron DM-CBL-8G-P-SP500 1 DigitalMedia 8G Cable, plenum, 500 ft spool

Lobby SamSung QH65H 1 65" Ultra thin LCD

Lobby Premier P4263F 1 Mount

Lobby Chief PAC 526 1 In wall box

N/A FSR Floor box adpter backet 9 MMS-FL500/540-4

N/A Crestron CRESNET-P-TL-SP1000 1 Cresnet® Control Cable, Plenum-Rated, Teal, 1000 ft (304m) spool

N/A Crestron C2N-SPWS300 1 Cresnet Power Supply, 300 Watts

N/A Crestron CNTBLOCK 1 Cresnet® Distribution Block

N/A Crestron HD-TX-101-C-1G-E-W-T TBD DM Lite – HDMI® over CATx Transmitter, Wall Plate, White Textured

2 IT IS THE CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSABILITY TO DETERMINE AND PROVIDE THE REQUIRED QUANTITIES OF CABLE RUNS TO PERFORM A COMPLETE SCOPE WORK THAT MEETS DESIGN INTENT

SHOWN ON DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS.

Miscellaneous

1 THE CONTRACTOR IS REPONSIBLE VERIFYING AND LISTING ALL NECESSARY COMPONENTS TO PERFORM A COMPLETE WORK REGARDELESS IF LISTED OR NOT IN THE SPECIFCATIONS OR

DRAWINGS. ANY ADDITIONAL COMPONENTS SHALL BE CLEARLY LISTED AT THE BOTTOM OF QUOTE UNDER SECTION UNDER “OTHER”. IF NOTHING IS LISTED UNDER "OTHER", IT WILL BE

ASSUMED THAT ALL REQUIRED COMPONENTS ARE INCLUDED IN THE QUOTE.

2 of 2


EARVIN MAGIC JOHNSON PARK – PHASE 1A BASIC SECURITY REQUIREMENTSLOS ANGELES, CA 28 0000-1COUNTY OF LOS ANGELES COMMUNITY DEVELOPMENT COMMISSIONAHBE PROJECT NO. 116030.01 INTEGRAL GROUP

SECTION 28 0000BASIC SECURITY REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes general administrative and procedural requirements for Division 28 and is intended to supplement, not supersede, the requirements specified in Division 1.

B. The Contractor shall be responsible for providing a fully, turn-key Access Control & Monitoring System, Intrusion Detection System and Video Surveillance System as described in the specifications and shown on drawings. Documents may not show or list every item to be provided. When an item not shown or listed is clearly necessary for proper installation and operation of the equipment and systems, the Security Contractor must provide, install, test, and certify the item at no increase to the contract price. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to ensure that all quantities, materials, labor, licenses, permits, sales taxes and any and all other costs to provide a turnkey project are included in their bid.

C. Prices quoted shall be all-inclusive and represent a complete fully-engineered system installation at the site as contemplated by and detailed in the drawings and specifications included herein.

D. Omissions in the proposal of any provision herein described shall not be construed as to relieve the Contractor of any responsibility or obligation requisite to the complete and satisfactory delivery, installation, operation and support of any and all systems, equipment or services. Correction of any omission on the part of the Contractor, either due to misinterpretation of this documents or any other conditions of the project, shall be the responsibility of the Contractor or not result in any contract modification or additional costs to Owner.

E. Contractor shall coordinate specific programming requirements, including CCTV device and software monitoring configuration with County of Los Angeles Internal Services Department Information Technology Services.

F. The scope of this project includes the complete system engineering, procurement, fabrication, installation, programming, testing, training and warranty of a Physical Security System, including, but not necessarily limited to:

1. Access Control System hardware, software and materials

2. Intrusion Detection System hardware, software and materials

3. CCTV Systems, Network Video Management Systems (NVMS), Cameras, Server/Storage hardware, software and materials

G. Important Note: All network-related fiber and Cat-6 UTP copper cabling between end-point device locations and termination patch panels in MCR room will be provided by others.

H. The requirements described herein include the following:

1. References



2. Definitions

3. System Description

4. Submittals


6. Product Delivery, Storage, and Handling

7. Project Management and Coordination Services

8. Warranty

9. Maintenance

I. Products furnished and installed under another section:

1. 120V power

2. Conduit and junction boxes

3. Door hardware

J. Related Sections:

1. Consult other Sections, determine the extent and character of related work, and properly coordinate work specified herein with that specified elsewhere to produce a complete and operable installation.

2. Section 28 0513 – Security System Cabling

3. Section 28 0553 – Security System Labeling

4. Section 28 0800 – Security System Acceptance Testing

5. Section 28 1300 – Access Control and Monitoring System

6. Section 28 2300 – Video Surveillance System

7. Earthwork: Include trenching, backfilling, boring and soil compaction as required for the installation of underground conduit, in-grade pull boxes, vaults, and bollard foundations. Refer to Division 2, Earthwork.

8. Selective Demolition: Nondestructive removal of materials and equipment for reuse or salvage as indicated. Also dismantling electrical materials and equipment made obsolete by these installations. Refer to Division 2, Selective Demolition.

9. Concrete Work: Include forming, steel bar reinforcing, cast-in- place concrete, finishing and grouting as required for underground conduit encasement, pedestal foundations, and curbs (also includes saw-cutting of existing slabs and grouting of conduits in saw-cut).



10. Miscellaneous Metal Work: Include fittings, brackets, backing, supports, rods, welding and pipe as required for support and bracing of raceways, equipment enclosures, cameras, and similar devices. Refer to Division 5, Miscellaneous Metals.

11. Miscellaneous Lumber and Framing Work: Include wood grounds, nailers, blocking, fasteners, and anchorage for support of security materials and equipment. Refer to Division 6, Rough Carpentry.

12. Moisture Protection and Smoke Barrier Penetrations: Include membrane clamps, sheet metal flashing, counter flashing, caulking and sealant as required for waterproofing of conduit penetrations and sealing penetrations in or through fire walls, floors, ceiling slabs and foundation walls. Tape and make vapor tight penetrations through vapor barriers at slabs on grade. Refer to Division 7, Thermal and Moisture Protection.

13. Locking Hardware: Include interface to electronic hardware and door controllers on security related doors. Refer to Division 8, Doors and Frames.

14. Access Panels and Doors: Required in walls, ceilings, and floors to provide access to security devices and equipment.

15. Painting: Include surface preparation, priming and finish coating as required for security cabinets, exposed conduit, pull and junction boxes, and devices where indicated as field painted in this Division. Refer to Division 9, Painting.

16. Elevators: Include interface to elevator floor and hall call on security related elevators. Refer to Division 14, Conveying Systems.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. General

1. Codes, standards, and industry manuals/guidelines listed by reference, including revisions by issuing authority, form a part of this specification section to extent indicated. Consider such codes and/or standards a part of this Specification as though fully repeated herein.

2. Standards listed are identified by issuing authority, authority abbreviation, designation number, title or other designation established by issuing authority. Standards subsequently referenced herein are referred to by issuing authority abbreviation and standard designation.

3. Reference to codes, standards, specifications and recommendations of technical societies, trade organizations and governmental agencies shall mean that latest edition of such publications adopted and published prior to submittal of the bid unless otherwise specifically stated.

B. Codes: Perform Work executed under this Section in accordance with applicable requirements of the latest edition of governing codes, rules and regulations including but not limited to the following minimum standards, whether statutory or not:

1. United States Department of Labor (DOL) Regulations (Standards - 29 CFR)

2. Part 1910, “Occupational Safety and Health Standards”




4. NFPA 70, “National Electrical Code” (NEC)

5. NFPA 75, “Protection of Information Technology Equipment”

6. California Code of Regulations (CCR) Title 24, California Building Standards Code Part 2, Basic Building Regulations and Part 3, California Electrical Code (CEC)

7. California Building Code (CBC)

8. California Fire Code (CFC)

9. California Mechanical Code (CMC)

10. National, State, Local and other binding building and fire codes

11. FCC Regulations:

12. Part 15 – Radio Frequency Devices & Radiation Limits

13. Part 68 – Connection of Terminal Equipment to the Telephone Network

C. Standards: Perform Work and furnish materials and equipment under Division 28 in accordance with the latest editions of the following standards as applicable:

1. Underwriter's Laboratories (UL): Applicable listing and ratings.

2. UL 294:Access Control System Units

3. UL 2044: Commercial Closed-Circuit Television Equipment

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. The Definitions of Division 1 apply to the 28xxxx sections

B. In addition to those Definitions of Division 1, the following list of terms as used in this specification defined as follows:

1. “Owner” : EMJ (EARVING MAGIC JOHNSON) COMMUNITY/EVENT CENTER

2. “Engineer”: INTEGRAL GROUP

3. “Furnish”: To purchase, procure, acquire, and deliver complete with related accessories.

4. “Install”: To set in place, join, unite, fasten, link, attach, set up or otherwise connect together and test before turning over to the Owner, parts, items, or equipment supplied by contractor or others. Complete installation and make ready for regular operation.

5. “Provide”: To furnish, transport, install, erect, connect, test and turn over to the Owner, complete and ready for regular operation.



6. “Connect”: To install required patch cords, equipment cords, cross-connect wire, etc. to complete an electrical or optical circuit.

7. “As directed”: As directed or instructed by the Owner, or their authorized representative.

8. “Cabling”: A combination of cables, wire, cords, and connecting hardware (e.g., cables, conductor terminations, connectors, outlets, patch panels, blocks, and labeling).

9. “System”: The access control, video surveillance, intrusion detection, and entry telephone systems

10. “SEC”: Security Equipment Cabinet

11. “SJB”: Security Junction Box

12. “ACMS”: Access Control & Monitoring System

13. “VSS”: Video Surveillance System

14. “IDS”: Intrusion Detection System


A. Overview

1. The Owner intends to construct a single-story, community/event center in Los Angeles, CA

2. Security systems at the new facility will consist of:

a. Video surveillance

b. Electronic access control

c. Intrusion detection system

3. The System will connect to the Owner’s local/wide area network.

4. Provide a high level of coordination services to ensure the proper installation and functioning of the security system.

5. Coordinate the installation of the security system with other trades. This may include: review of other’s subcontractor’s shop drawings, attendance at meetings, providing samples for mockup, and preparation & distribution of written documentation.

6. Refer to Division 1 for detail building description.

B. Base Bid Work

1. Access Control and Monitoring System (ACMS)



a. The Owner requires an access control system to automate opening and closing of the building, restrict access after-hours by cardholder privileges, and monitor specific spaces for intrusion.

b. The ACMS consists of card readers, control panels, power supplies, workstations, alarm monitoring devices, and interfaces to other security equipment.

c. Refer to Section 28 1300 for detailed description of system.

2. Video Surveillance System (VSS)

a. The Owner requires a video surveillance to provide real-time monitoring of the facility, a photographic record of access control transactions and alarm events.

b. The VSS consists of IP cameras, power supplies, encoders, and network video recorders.

c. Refer to Section 28 2300 for detailed description of system.

3. Intrusion Detection System (IDS)

a. The IDS consists of control panels, duress buttons and interfaces to other security equipment.

b. The IDS will communicate with the Owner’s central station for alarm monitoring and law enforcement dispatch.

c. Refer to Section 28 1600 for detail description of system.

4. The System includes integration with the Fire/Life-Safety system to provide the following:

a. Automatically release locks upon fire alarm activation for doors within the path of egress

b. Disconnect power to magnetic door holders to automatically close doors after business hours

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit required submittals to the General Contractor in the quantities and formats as required under the general contract. In the absence of requirements, provide as described in the following with reference to quantity and format.


1. Resumes of the Project Manager, General Foreman, and Lead Technician(s) indicating role, years of experience, product certifications and training, listing of similar projects the individual performed the role proposed for this project along with client contact information for each.

2. Certification letters stating the Contractor is an authorized reseller, installer, and extended warranty provider for the following systems:



C. Product Data

1. Obtain written approval from the Engineer for the product data submittal prior to the release of materials and equipment purchase order and prior to installation.

2. Quantity: Submit product data submittals as described in Division 1.

3. Format:

a. Minimum Format: Submit each product data submittal in an 8-1/2 x 11 inch folder. Product data submittal shall be in a 3-ring binder (or similar). If in a 3- ring binder, insert the submittal information the transparent front cover and spine pockets.

b. Clearly label the cover and spine of each submittal with the following information:

1) Client Name


3) Project Submittal Number

4) Submittal Name (e.g., “Product Data Submittal for Video Surveillance System”)

5) Specification Section Number (e.g., “Section 28 2300”)

6) Date of Submittal Format: <month> <day>, <year> (e.g., “January 1, 2010”)

7) Contractor Name

c. Include a Table of Contents at the beginning of the submittal that lists materials by article and paragraph number (e.g., “2.02-A Network Video Recorders”).

d. Include tabbed separators for improved navigation through the submittal.

4. Content:

a. Cover Letter: Product data submittals shall include a cover letter stating that the submittal is in full compliance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. Sign (and stamped, if applicable) cover letter and list items and data submitted. Have the person who prepared the submittal sign the document as well. Failure to comply with this requirement shall constitute grounds for rejection of submittal.

b. Product Information: Product Data submittal shall consist of manufacturer's technical data, product literature, "catalog cuts", data sheets, specifications, and block wiring diagrams (if necessary). This data shall clearly describe the product’s characteristics, physical and dimensional information, electrical performance data, materials used in fabrication, material color & finish, and other relevant information such as test data, typical usage examples, independent test agency information, and storage requirements. Clearly indicate by arrows or brackets precisely what is being submitted on and those optional accessories, which are included and those which are excluded. At a minimum, include products listed in the Division 28



specifications. Include relevant products that will be installed, which are not listed in the specifications.

c. Re-submittals: Provide a cover letter with the re-submittal that lists the action taken and revisions made to each product submittal in response to Submittal Review Comments. No review shall take place for any re-submittal packages that is not accompanied by this cover letter. Failure to include this cover letter will constitute rejection of the re-submittal package.

D. Shop Drawings

1. Obtain written approval from the Engineer for the shop-drawings submittal prior to the release of materials and equipment purchase order and prior to installation.

2. Quantity and Media: Submit shop-drawings as described in Division 1.

3. Format:

a. Produce shop drawings using AutoCAD, or other computer design application that can save files to AutoCAD-compatible files.

b. Use the same size drawing sheet as the drawings of the Contract Documents.

c. Text: minimum of 3/32” high when plotted at full size.

d. Screen background information.

e. Plot system components (devices, cable routes, etc.) and text at a sufficient line weight to stand out against background information.

f. Scaling:

1) Scale floor plans at 1/8”=1’-0”

2) Scale enlarged room plans at 1/4”=1’-0”

3) Scale wall elevations at 1”=1’-0”

4. Content:

a. Submit shop drawings that represent proposed installation of security system.

b. Floor Plans: Scale floor plans at 1/8”=1’-0”. Floor plans shall show:

1) Locations and identifiers of security devices.

2) Size, quantity, location and proposed routes of security cabling.

3) Size, quantity, location, and routes of pathways (such as cable trays, cable basket, conduits, cable hangers, and other cable support devices).

c. Point-to-PointDiagrams: Include wiring, points of connection and interconnecting devices.



d. Schedules: Provide schedules for devices and control panels that show each point ID with a description of the connected devices.

e. Block Diagram/Riser Diagram: Show the devices, conduit, wire types, and sizes between them, including cabling interties between termination hardware.

f. Proposed mounting details

E. As-Built Drawings

1. Quantity and Media: Submit as-built drawings as described in Division 1.

2. Format:

a. Produce as-built drawings using AutoCAD, or other computer design application that can save files to AutoCAD-compatible files.

b. Use the sheet size as the drawings of the Contract Documents, and use the project title block.

c. Text: minimum of 3/32” high when plotted at full size.

d. Use symbols identical to the symbols shown on the Drawings.

e. Screen background information.

f. Plot system components (devices, cable routes, etc.) and text at a sufficient line weight to stand out against background information.

3. Content:

a. Submit as-built drawings that fully represent actual installed conditions and that incorporate modifications made during the course of construction.

b. Floor Plans: Scale floor plans at 1/8”=1’-0”. Floor plans shall show:

1) Locations and identifiers of security devices.

2) Size, quantity, location and proposed routes of security cabling.

3) Size, quantity, location, and routes of pathways (such as cable trays, cable basket, conduits, cable hangers, and other cable support devices).

c. Point-to-PointDiagrams: Include wiring, points of connection and interconnecting devices.

d. Schedules: Provide schedules for devices and control panels that show each point ID with a description of the connected devices.

e. Block Diagram/Riser Diagram: Show the devices, conduit, wire types, and sizes between them, including cabling interties between termination hardware.

f. Custom mounting details



F. Operation and Maintenance (O&M) Manuals

1. Quantity: Submit quantity of O&M Manuals as described in Division 1.

2. Format:

a. Submit each O & M Manual in a white, 3-ring binder with front cover and spine clear pockets for insertion of the project information.

b. Clearly label the cover of each O&M Manual with the following information:

1) Client Name


3) Manual Name (e.g., “Operation and Maintenance Manual for Telecommunications Cabling System”)

4) Date of Submittal Format: <month> <day>, <year> (e.g., “January 1, 2010”)

5) Contractor Name

c. Include a Table of Contents at the beginning that lists the contents.

d. Include tabbed separators for improved navigation through the manual.

3. Content:

a. 11”x17” prints of as-built drawings, as described above

b. Manufacturer's original catalog information sheets for each component provided under applicable Section (typically, this is similar to the accepted product data submittal)

c. Warranty certificate from the manufacturer and the Contractor

d. Manufacturer’s instructions for system or component use

e. Instructions and requirements for maintenance and warranty issues

4. Contents shall include requirements and methods for maintaining installed products.


A. Contractor Qualifications

1. A current, active, and valid and C7 or C10 California State Contractors License

2. Minimum five years of experience in installation and service of access control, video surveillance, and intrusion detection systems.

3. Minimum five completed projects similar to scope and cost.



4. Evidence of technicians qualified for the work in the form of current manufacturer’s training certification

B. Materials

1. Materials, support hardware, equipment, parts comprising units, etc., shall be new, unused, without defects and of current manufacturer, materials

2. Use specified products and applications, unless otherwise submitted and approved in writing.

C. Regulatory Requirements

1. Work and materials shall conform to the latest rules of National Board of Fire Underwriters wherever such standards have been established and shall conform to the regulations of the State Fire Marshal, OSHA and the codes of the governing local municipalities. Work under Division 28 shall confirm to the most stringent of the applicable codes.

2. Provide the quality identified within these Specifications and Drawings when codes, standards, regulations, etc. allow Work of lesser quality or extent. The Contract Documents address the minimum requirements for construction.

D. Drawings

1. Follow the general layout shown on the Drawings except where other Work may conflict with the Drawings.

2. Drawings for the Work within this Division are essentially diagrammatic within the constraints of the symbology applied.

E. The Drawings do not fully represent the entire installation for the security system. Drawings indicate the general route for the cables and the location of outlets. The Drawings might not expressly show every conduit, sleeve, hanger, etc., but a complete system is required.

1.7 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION SERVICES

A. Project Management and Coordination Services

1. Provide a project manager for the duration of the project to coordinate this Work with other trades. Coordination services, procedures and documentation responsibility include, but are not limited to, the items listed in this section.

2. Review of Shop Drawings Prepared by Other Subcontractors:

a. Obtain copies of shop drawings for equipment provided by others that require telecommunication service connections or interface with Work.

b. Perform a thorough review of the shop drawings to confirm compliance with the service requirements contained in the Division 28 contract documents. Document discrepancies or deviations as follows:

1) Prepare memo summarizing the discrepancy



2) Submit a copy of the specific shop drawing, indicating via cloud, the discrepancy

c. Prepare and maintain a shop drawing review log indicating the following information:

1) Shop drawing number and brief description of the system/material

2) Date of the review

3) Name of the individual performing the review

4) Indication if follow-up coordination is required

B. Role of the Engineer

1. During the construction phase of the project, the Engineer will work with the Contractor to provide interpretation and clarification of project contract documents, reply to (and ‘process’) relevant Requests for Information (RFIs), and act as an interface between the Contractor and the Owner.

2. The Owner has retained the Engineer’s services to observe the Work for general compliance with the Contract Documents and to ensure that the installation meets the design intent of the system.

3. In general, the Engineer will participate during the construction phase as follows:

a. Review product data and shop drawings submittals for general compliance with the contract drawings and specifications.

b. Review changes as they arise, and confirm that the proposed solutions maintain the intended functionality of the system.

c. Interpret field problems for Owner, and translate between Owner and Construction Team.

d. Review the testing procedures to confirm compliance with industry-accepted practices.

C. Use of CAD Files

1. Should the Contractor need the Engineer’s CAD files to produce shop drawings and/or as-built drawings, the Engineer requires the Contractor sign a CAD files release agreement.

1.8 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Delivery

1. Do not deliver security system components to the site until protected storage space is available. Storage outdoors covered by rainproof material is not acceptable.



2. Replace equipment damaged during shipping and return to manufacturer at no cost to the Owner.

B. Storage

1. Store materials in a clean, dry, ventilated space free from temperature extremes.

2. Maintain factory wrapping or provide a heavy canvas/plastic cover to protect units from dirt, water, construction debris, and traffic.

3. Provide heat where required to prevent condensation or temperature related damage.

C. Handling

1. Handle in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.

2. Prevent internal component damage, breakage, denting and scoring. Do not install damaged equipment. Replace damaged equipment and return equipment to manufacturer.

1.9 WARRANTY

A. Provide the Security System as described in this specification with a one-year parts and service warranty at no additional cost to the Owner.

B. Include in the warranty package, at a minimum, the following:

1. Software support agreement for the ACMS and VSS

2. Software upgrades and patches

3. Labor to install software upgrades and patches necessary to maintain the latest version

4. Emergency service on regular working hour basis

5. Service by factory trained and employed service representatives of system manufacturer

C. Maintain regular service facilities and provide a qualified technician familiar with this work at the site within four (4) hours of receipt of a notice of malfunction including weekends and holidays. Provide material, devices equipment and personnel necessary for repairs. Install approved temporary, alternate equipment if required by the Owner, complete and operational within twenty four (24) hours after notification of a malfunction, at no additional cost.

D. Conduct warranty repairs and service at the job site unless in violation of manufacturer's warranty; in the latter event, provide substitute systems, equipment and/or devices, acceptable to the Owner, for the duration of such off-site repairs. Transport warranty substitute and/or test systems, equipment, devices, material, parts and personnel to and from the job site at no additional cost.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS



2.1 GENERAL

A. Material and equipment specified herein have been selected as the basis of acceptable quality and performance and have been coordinated to function as components of the included systems. Where a particular material, device, equipment or system is specified directly, the current manufacturer's specification for same is a part of these specifications, as if completely elaborated herein.

B. Use standard, regularly manufactured, materials and equipment for this and/or other similar systems, and not custom designed especially for this project. Provide systems and components thoroughly tested and proven in actual use. Provide subsystems of one manufacturer.

2.2 SUBSTITUTIONS

A. Conform to the general requirements and procedure outlined in Division 1 in the Request for Substitution.

B. Only one substitution allowed for each product specified.

C. Where products are noted as "or equal", a product of equivalent design, construction, and performance will be considered. Submit product data – catalog cuts, product information, and pertinent test data –required to substantiate that the product is in fact equivalent to that specified. The burden of proof rest with the Contractor that the substituted product is equivalent to the specified product.

D. Manufacturers' names and model numbers used in conjunction with materials, processes or equipment included in the Contract Documents are used to establish standards of quality, utility and appearance. Materials, processes or equipment that, in the opinion of the Engineer, are equivalent in quality, utility and appearance will be approved as substitutions to that specified when “or equal” follows the manufacturers' names or model number(s).

E. When the Engineer accepts a substitution in writing, it is with the understanding that the Contractor guarantees the substituted product, component, article, or material to be equivalent to the one specified and dimensioned to fit within the construction according to contract documents. Do not provide substituted material, processes, or equipment without written authorization from the Engineer. Assumptions on the acceptability of a proposed substitution, prior to acceptance by the Engineer, are at the sole risk of the Contractor.

F. Approved substitutions shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibilities for the proper execution of the Work, or from provisions of the Specifications.

G. Pay expenses, without additional charge to the Owner, in connection with substitution materials, processes and equipment, including the effect of substitution on self, subcontractor's or other Contractor's work.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Conditions: Verify existing conditions, which have been previously provided under other sections, are acceptable for product installation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.



B. Pathways: Verify that pathways and supporting devices, which have been previously provided under other sections, are properly installed, and that temporary supports and devices have been removed.

C. Field Measurements: Verify dimensions of pathways, including length of pathways. For example, “True Tape” the conduits to verify cable distances.


A. Staffing: Provide a qualified foreman who is in charge of the Work and who is present at the job site at times Work is being performed. Perform the Work using skilled technicians under the direction of the foreman. Supervise the work force executing the Work. Perform the installation within the restraints of the construction schedule. Do not change the supervisor during the project without prior written approval from the Owner.

B. Inspection: Perform inspection after installation. Keep areas of work accessible and notify code authorities, or designated inspectors, of work completion released for inspection. Document completion, and inspection as required.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Perform this work in accordance with acknowledged industry and professional standards and practices and the procedures specified herein.

B. Provide a complete, operating system. Include devices specified including basic components and accessories, interconnecting wiring and other equipment and installation devices necessary for a complete system as specified.

C. Manufacturer's Instructions:

1. Comply with manufacturer's product data, including product technical bulletins, product catalog installation instructions, and product carton instructions for installation.

2. Maintain jobsite file of Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) for each product delivered to jobsite.

D. Boxes, Panels, and Enclosures

1. Install boxes, panels, and enclosures square and plumb.

2. Set "flush mounted" units with the face of the cover, bezel or escutcheon in the same plane as the surrounding finished surface.

3. Mount boxes, panels and trim so that there are no gaps, cracks or obvious lines between the trim and the adjacent finished surface and ready them to receive final finish, as applicable.

4. Install insulating terminations in signal circuit boxes, panels, wireways or enclosures.

E. Painting

1. Custom paint devices as indicated on the drawings.



3.4 REPAIR/RESTORATION

A. Replace or repair work completed by others that you deface or destroy, at not cost to the Owner.

B. Punch List:

1. Inspect installed work in conjunction with the General Contractor and develop a punch list for items needing correction.

2. Provide punch list to Engineer for review prior to performing punch walk with the Engineer.

C. Re-Installation:

1. Make changes to the system such that defects in workmanship are correct and cables and the associated termination hardware passes the minimum test requirements.

2. Repair defects prior to system acceptance.

D. Painting: Repaint surfaces altered during installation of the security system to match previous conditions.

3.5 CLEANING

A. Remove temporary coverings and protection of adjacent work areas. Remove unused products, debris, spills, or other excess materials. Remove installation equipment.

B. Leave finished work and adjacent surfaces in neat, clean condition with no evidence of damage.

C. Repair or replace damaged installed products.

D. Legally dispose of debris.

E. Clean installed products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions prior to Owner's acceptance.

END OF SECTION


EARVIN MAGIC JOHNSON PARK – PHASE 1A SECURITY SYSTEM CABLINGLOS ANGELES, CA 28 0513-1COUNTY OF LOS ANGELES COMMUNITY DEVELOPMENT COMMISSIONAHBE PROJECT NO. 116030.01 INTEGRAL GROUP

SECTION 28 0513SECURITY SYSTEM CABLING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. General: Furnish engineering, labor, materials, apparatus, tools, equipment, transportation, temporary construction and special or occasional services as required to make a complete working security system installation, as described in these specifications.

B. Section Includes:

1. Wire and cable

2. Compression Seal BNC Connectors

C. Related Sections:

1. Consult other Sections, determine the extent and character of related work and properly coordinate work specified herein with that specified elsewhere to produce a complete and operable system.

2. Section 28 00 00 – Basic Security Requirements: includes general project requirements, submittal formats, installation, and warranty requirements.

3. Section 28 05 53 – Security System Labeling: includes label types and formats.

4. Section 26 05 33 – Conduit: includes pathway types in different areas of the project.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit product information, including:

1. Cable Description and Use

2. Jacket Rating

3. Outside Diameter (of the overall wire or cable)

4. Manufacturer and Part Number

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 WIRE AND CABLE



A. General

1. Provide required wire and cable sized to allow for voltage drop on long runs and effectively shielded as required to allow the routing of 12 and 24V power and video signal cable in the same conduit without interference or signal noise.

2. Cable installed outdoors or in underground conduit must contain a PVC or Polyethylene jacket to prevent water intrusion and compliant with the TIA-455-82B water infiltration test.

3. Cables installed indoors to contain a plenum rated jacket (type CMP).

B. Manufacturers:

1. West Penn

2. Or Approved Equal

C. Access Control and Monitoring System

1. Plenum Jacketed Cable

2.

a. #18/4 AWG unshielded: West Penn #25244B, request to exit, motion sensors, glass breaks, keypad and door contacts

b. #18/6 AWG shielded (overall): West Penn #253186B, card reader cable

c. #14/2 AWG unshielded: West Penn #25226B, electrified hinge,

d. #18/2 AWG unshielded: West Penn #25224B, electronic siren

e. #14/2 AWG unshielded: West Penn #25226B, door release switch , door release button, pushbutton switch and bell or buzzer

f. #16/2 AWG unshielded: West Penn #25225B, lock power cable

g. #14/2 AWG unshielded: West Penn #25226B, lock power cable from local power booster to exit device

h. #24/4 AWG shielded (overall): West Penn #D4854, RS-485 communications cable

D. Intrusion Detection System

1. Plenum Jacketed Cable

a. #22/4 AWG unshielded: West Penn #25241B, keypad and alarm device cable

b. #18/2 AWG unshielded: West Penn #25224B, control panel power cable



E. Video Surveillance System

1. Cabling for IP cameras (indoor) to be Panduit # PUP6004YL-UY Enhanced Category 6 CMP, Yellow (Security Cable)

2. Cabling for IP cameras (outdoor) to be General cable #BL0021ANR.BK (50mµ multimode, 2 fibers, tight buffer indoor/outdoor riser cable).

3. CAT6 data plugs – Panduit. Miscellaneous materials – All materials necessary to furnish and install a complete and fully functional system.

4. UPS – APC sized to accommodate CCTV system for 2 hours. 4-post rack mount.

5. Data switch – Cisco PoE (County to provide information at the start of the project)


A. Cable Ties

1. General

a. Provide Velco-style cable ties on security cabling within telecommunications spaces and covered wireways.

b. Dress and bind cabling with cable ties every 24” minimum.

c. Width: 0.75 inches

d. Color: Black

2. Manufacturer:

a. Panduit #HLS-15-R-0 Black, 15 feet roll, cut to length

b. Or Equal

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION



A. Label cables in accordance with Section 28 05 53 – Security System Labeling.

B. Horizontal Cable Installation and Routing

1. Provide wire and cable with a continuous, splice-free sheath for the entire length of run between designated connections or terminations. Splices not permitted.

2. Place cables within designated pathways, such as cable hangers, etc. Do not fasten (such as with cable ties) or attach cables to other building infrastructure (such as ducts, pipes, conduits, etc), other systems (such as ceiling support wires, wall studs, etc), or to the outside of conduits, cable trays, or other non-approved pathway systems.


4. Route cables at 90° angles, allowing for bending radius, along corridors for ease of access.



7. Route cables under building infrastructure (such as ducts, pipes, conduits, etc) so the installation results in easy accessibility to the cables in the future. Do not route cables over building infrastructure.

8. Dress and secure cables to preclude stress and/or deformation.

9. Install shielded wiring or route in separate raceways as recommended by the manufacturer's current requirements.


11. Do not run signal wire and cable in parallel to power (120VAC).

12. Make connections to screw-type barrier blocks with insulated crimp-type spade lugs. Size lugs properly to assure high electrical integrity, i.e., low resistance connections.

13. Follow manufacturers recommended guidelines for installation.

14. When exiting the primary pathway (such as basketway or cable tray) to the work area, exit via the top of the pathway. Secure the cables to the pathway using an approved cable tie.

C. Cable Routing and Dressing within Telecommunication Rooms (MCR room)



1. Place cables within the overhead cable support and, when routing vertically, fasten the cables onto wall-mounted vertical cable support every 24 inches on-center using cable ties.

2. Only use Velcro type cable ties within the telecom room.

3. Neatly bundle (dress cable longitudinally) and support security cables within overhead cable runways.

4. Dress and bind cabling with cable ties every 12” minimum.

5. Provide 4 feet, minimum, sheathed cable slack – length not to exceed permanent link maximum length requirement. Place the slack within the screw cover gutter wireways.

3.2 CABLE SUPPORTHORIZONTAL SUPPORT

1. Concrete and Metal construction (Above Ceiling)

a. Provide separate and dedicated cable support system for security cable runs. Anchor cable support system to structural ceiling. Support and tie cables at a maximum of 5-foot intervals.

2. Wood Construction (above ceiling and no ceiling)

a. Support cable utilizing appropriately sized drive rings or "D" rings.

b. Fasten rings to structural ceiling.

c. Install drive rings at approximately 5 foot intervals.

d. Route cable through drive rings and cable tie at 10 foot intervals, or every other drive.

B. Vertical Support

1. Riser Systems

a. Route cable through conduit in vertical riser systems.

b. Terminate conduit at each stacked closet in a lockable junction box. Refer to Section 28 00 00 – Basic Security Requirements for minimum sizing of junction boxes and equipment enclosures.

c. Fastened entire cable group to the inside of junction box at every other floor or approximately every 24 feet.

d. Fasten cable in Junction box utilizing cable ties equipped with eyelets designed to accept screws for fastening or approved equivalent method.

2. Vertical cable on floor space not in riser system



a. Route cable from below suspended ceiling devices to above ceiling when possible.

1) Provide conduit and firestoppping for cable routed in fire rated wall assemblies.

2) Provide conduit for cable routed from below ceiling devices to above ceiling on concrete tilt up style walls.

b. Cable routed vertically from devices with no suspended ceiling.

1) Provide conduit stub from device junction box to 14 feet above finished floor minimum.

END OF SECTION 28 05 13


EARVIN MAGIC JOHNSON PARK – PHASE 1A PATHWAYS FOR ELECTRONIC LOS ANGELES, CA SAFETY & SECURITYCOUNTY OF LOS ANGELES COMMUNITY DEVELOPMENT COMMISSION 28 0528-1AHBE PROJECT NO. 116030.01 INTEGRAL GROUP

PATHWAYS FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Metal conduits, tubing, and fittings.

2. Nonmetallic conduits, tubing, and fittings.

3. Optical-fiber-cable pathways and fittings.

4. Metal wireways and auxiliary gutters.

5. Nonmetallic wireways and auxiliary gutters.

6. Surface pathways.

7. Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets.

8. Handholes and boxes for exterior underground cabling.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 28 0000 – Basic Security Requirements



4. Section 28 0800 – Security System Acceptance Testing



1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. ARC: Aluminum rigid conduit.

B. GRC: Galvanized rigid steel conduit.

C. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit.



1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Samples: For wireways and surface pathways and for each color and texture specified, 12 inches long.

1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Coordination Drawings: Pathway routing plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of items involved:

1. Structural members in paths of pathway groups with common supports.

2. HVAC and plumbing items and architectural features in paths of conduit groups with common supports.

3. Where raceways are crossing exposed ceiling spaces visible to the building occupants[ and where indicated on plans].

B. Qualification Data: For professional engineer.


A. Installer Qualifications: Cabling Installer must have personnel certified by BICSI on staff.

1. Layout Responsibility: Preparation of Shop Drawings shall be under the direct supervision of Technician.

2. Installation Supervision: Installation shall be under the direct supervision of Technicianwho shall be present at all times when Work of this Section is performed at Project site.

3. Field Inspector: Currently registered by BICSI as Technician to perform the on-site inspection.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 METAL CONDUITS AND FITTINGS

A. General Requirements for Metal Conduits and Fittings:

1. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

2. Comply with TIA-569-D.

3. GRC: Comply with ANSI C80.1 and UL 6.

B. IMC: Comply with ANSI C80.6 and UL 1242.

C. PVC-Coated Steel Conduit: PVC-coated rigid steel conduit.



1. Comply with NEMA RN 1.

2. Coating Thickness: 0.040 inch, minimum.

D. EMT: Comply with ANSI C80.3 and UL 797.

E. FMC: Comply with UL 1; zinc-coated steel.

F. LFMC: Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket and complying with UL 360.

G. Fittings for Metal Conduit: Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 514B.

1. Conduit Fittings for Hazardous (Classified) Locations: Comply with UL 886 and NFPA 70.

2. Fittings for EMT:

a. Material: Steel.

b. Type: Setscrew or compression.

3. Expansion Fittings: PVC or steel to match conduit type, complying with UL 467, rated for environmental conditions where installed, and including flexible external bonding jumper.

4. Coating for Fittings for PVC-Coated Conduit: Minimum thickness of 0.040 inch, with overlapping sleeves protecting threaded joints.

H. Joint Compound for IMC, GRC, or ARC: Approved, as defined in NFPA 70, by authorities having jurisdiction for use in conduit assemblies, and compounded for use to lubricate and protect threaded conduit joints from corrosion and to enhance their conductivity.

2.2 NONMETALLIC CONDUITS AND FITTINGS

A. General Requirements for Nonmetallic Conduits and Fittings:



B. ENT: Comply with NEMA TC 13 and UL 1653.

C. RNC: Type EPC-40-PVC, complying with NEMA TC 2 and UL 651 unless otherwise indicated.

D. LFNC: Comply with UL 1660.

E. Rigid HDPE: Comply with UL 651A.

F. Continuous HDPE: Comply with UL 651B.

G. RTRC: Comply with UL 1684A and NEMA TC 14.

H. Fittings for ENT and RNC: Comply with NEMA TC 3; match to conduit or tubing type and material.



I. Fittings for LFNC: Comply with UL 514B.

J. Solvents and Adhesives: As recommended by conduit manufacturer.

2.3 OPTICAL-FIBER-CABLE PATHWAYS AND FITTINGS

A. Description: Comply with UL 2024; flexible-type pathway, approved for plenum (for indoors) and general use (for outdoor) installation unless otherwise indicated.



2.4 METAL WIREWAYS AND AUXILIARY GUTTERS

A. Description: Sheet metal, complying with UL 870 and NEMA 250, Type 3R unless otherwise indicated, and sized according to NFPA 70.

1. Metal wireways installed outdoors shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.


B. Fittings and Accessories: Include couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold-down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for complete system.

C. Wireway Covers: Hinged type unless otherwise indicated.

D. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish.

2.5 SURFACE PATHWAYS

A. General Requirements for Surface Pathways:



B. Surface Metal Pathways: Galvanized steel with snap-on covers complying with UL 5. Manufacturer's standard enamel finish in color selected by Architect.

C. Surface Aluminum Raceways: Alloy 6063-T5 extruded aluminum, minimum thickness 0.050 inches. Satin, No. 204 clear anodized, 0.004 inch thick, Class R1 Mil-Spec finish. Device cover plates suitable to mount commercially available duplex devices, single 1.40 inch and 1.59 inch diameter receptacles, GFCI, surge receptacles and other rectangular faced devices, and voice and data jacks. Devices shall be mounted to cover plates held in place by extruded protrusions. Cover plates shall be removable using standard screwdriver without marring the finish.



2.6 BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS

A. General Requirements for Boxes, Enclosures, and Cabinets:


2. Boxes, enclosures and cabinets installed in wet locations shall be listed for use in wet locations.

B. Sheet-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 1 and UL 514A.

C. Cast-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1, ferrous alloy, Type FD, with gasketed cover.

D. Box extensions used to accommodate new building finishes shall be of same material as recessed box.

E. Metal Floor Boxes:

1. Material: Cast metal.

2. Type: Fully adjustable.

3. Shape: Rectangular.

4. Listing and Labeling: Metal floor boxes shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

F. Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1.

G. Cast-Metal Access, Pull, and Junction Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 1773, galvanized, cast iron with gasketed cover.

H. Device Box Dimensions: 4-inches square by 2-1/8 inches deep <Insert other dimension>.

I. Gangable boxes are prohibited.

J. Hinged-Cover Enclosures: Comply with UL 50 and NEMA 250, Type 3R with continuous-hinge cover with flush latch unless otherwise indicated.

1. Metal Enclosures: Steel, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel.

2. Interior Panels: Steel; all sides finished with manufacturer's standard enamel.

K. Cabinets:

1. NEMA 250, Type 1 galvanized-steel box with removable interior panel and removable front, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel.

2. Hinged door in front cover with flush latch and concealed hinge.

3. Key latch to match panelboards.



4. Metal barriers to separate wiring of different systems and voltage.

5. Accessory feet where required for freestanding equipment.

2.7 HANDHOLES AND BOXES FOR EXTERIOR UNDERGROUND CABLING

A. General Requirements for Handholes and Boxes:

1. Boxes and handholes for use in underground systems shall be designed and identified as defined in NFPA 70, for intended location and application.

2. Boxes installed in wet areas shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.


B. Polymer-Concrete Handholes and Boxes with Polymer-Concrete Cover: Molded of sand and aggregate, bound together with polymer resin, and reinforced with steel, fiberglass or a combination of the two.

1. Standard: Comply with SCTE 77.

2. Configuration: Designed for flush burial with integral closed bottom unless otherwise indicated.

3. Cover: Weatherproof, secured by tamper-resistant locking devices and having structural load rating consistent with enclosure and handhole location.

4. Cover Finish: Nonskid finish shall have a minimum coefficient of friction of 0.50.

5. Cover Legend: Molded lettering, as indicated for each service.

6. Conduit Entrance Provisions: Conduit-terminating fittings shall mate with entering ducts for secure, fixed installation in enclosure wall.

7. Handholes 12 Inches Wide by 24 Inches Long and Larger: Have inserts for cable racks and pulling-in irons installed before concrete is poured.

2.8 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL FOR UNDERGROUND ENCLOSURES

A. Handhole and Pull-Box Prototype Test: Test prototypes of handholes and boxes for compliance with SCTE 77. Strength tests shall be for specified tier ratings of products supplied.

1. Tests of materials shall be performed by an independent testing agency.

2. Strength tests of complete boxes and covers shall be by either an independent testing agency or manufacturer. A qualified registered professional engineer shall certify tests by manufacturer.

3. Testing machine pressure gages shall have current calibration certification complying with ISO 9000 and ISO 10012, and traceable to NIST standards.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PATHWAY APPLICATION

A. Outdoors: Apply pathway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated:

1. Exposed Conduit: GRC.

2. Concealed Conduit, Aboveground: GRC IMC EMT.

3. Underground Branch Conduit: RNC, Type EPC-40-PVC direct buried.

4. Underground Feeder Conduit: Type EPC-40-PVC concrete encased.

5. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic, Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): LFMC.

6. Boxes and Enclosures, Aboveground: NEMA 250, Type 3R.

B. Indoors: Apply pathway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated:

1. Exposed, Not Subject to Physical Damage: EMT.

2. Exposed, Not Subject to Severe Physical Damage: EMT.

3. Exposed and Subject to Severe Physical Damage: GRC. Pathway locations include the following:

a. Loading dock.

b. Corridors used for traffic of mechanized carts, forklifts, and pallet-handling units.

c. Mechanical rooms.

4. Concealed in Ceilings and Interior Walls and Partitions: EMT.

5. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic, Electric-Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): FMC, except use LFMC in damp or wet locations.

6. Damp or Wet Locations: IMC.

7. Pathways for Optical-Fiber or Communications Cable in Spaces Used for Environmental Air: [Plenum-type, optical-fiber-cable pathway] [Plenum-type, communications-cable pathway] [EMT] <Insert pathway type>.

8. Pathways for Optical-Fiber or Communications-Cable Risers in Vertical Shafts: EMT.

9. Pathways for Concealed General Purpose Distribution of Optical-Fiber or Communications Cable: EMT.

10. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, except use NEMA 250, Type 4 stainless steel nonmetallic in institutional and commercial kitchens and damp or wet locations.



C. Minimum Interior Pathway Size: 3/4-inch trade size. Minimum size for optical-fiber cables is 1 inch.

D. Minimum Exterior Pathway Size: 1-1/4”inch 2 inch

E. Pathway Fittings: Compatible with pathways and suitable for use and location.

1. Rigid and Intermediate Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings unless otherwise indicated. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10.

2. PVC Externally Coated, Rigid Steel Conduits: Use only fittings listed for use with this type of conduit. Patch and seal all joints, nicks, and scrapes in PVC coating after installing conduits and fittings. Use sealant recommended by fitting manufacturer and apply in thickness and number of coats recommended by manufacturer.

3. EMT: Use setscrew or compression, steel fittings. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10.

4. Flexible Conduit: Use only fittings listed for use with flexible conduit. Comply with NEMA FB 2.20.

F. Do not install aluminum conduits, boxes, or fittings in contact with concrete or earth.

G. Install surface pathways only where indicated on Drawings.

H. Do not install nonmetallic conduit where ambient temperature exceeds 120 deg F.

3.2 PATHWAY SEPARATION OF SYSTEM WIRING

A. Provide minimum separations between power and wiring and signal system wiring as indicated in table below. Where minimum separation cannot be maintained due to existing conditions obtain written permission for closer spacing.

Power Raceways (70 Volts or More)

Transformers, Motors and Motor Starters

Power Raceways with Dimming Circuits

Lighting Fixtures

Telephone 5” 12” 24” 12”DATA 5” 12” 24” 12”Paging / Sound

5” 12” 24” 5”

Security 5” 12” 24” 5”CCTV 5” 12” 24” 5”Monitoring and Control

5” 12” 24” 5”

Fire Alarm 5” 12” 24” 5”Cable Tray

12” 24” 24” 12”

3.3 RACEWAY APPLICATIONS

ENVIRONMENT RACEWAYS BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS

Dry locations, concealedRMC, IMC, EMT, FMC, LFMC, WW

SM, FS/FD; NEMA 1

Dry locations, exposed, subject to RMC, IMC SM, FS/FD; NEMA 1



ENVIRONMENT RACEWAYS BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS

damage*

Dry locations, exposed, not subject to damage*

RMC, IMC, EMT, FMC, LFMC, WW

SM, FS/FD; NEMA 1

Wet locations, subject to damage9* RMC3, IMC3 FS/FD; NEMA 4, 4X

Wet locations, not subject to damage9

RMC3, IMC3, EMT3, LFMC, WW7 FS/FD; NEMA 4, 4X

Outdoor locations, exposed to rain, sleet, windblown dust, and external icing

RMC3, IMC3, WW7, LFMC12 FS/FD; NEMA 3, 3R, 3S

Outdoor locations, underground9 RMC, IMC, PVC, LFMC SCTE 77

Outdoor locations, submerged9 RMC3, IMC3, PVC NEMA 6, 6P

Outdoor locations, embedded in concrete9 RMC, IMC, EMT4, PVC FS/FD

Under concrete slab9 RMC, IMC, PVC N/A

Underground, direct burial9 RMC3, IMC3, PVC, LFMC SCTE 77

Embedded burial9 RMC, IMC, PVC N/A

Industrial location, generalRMC, IMC, EMT, FMC, LFMC, WW

FS/FD, SM; NEMA 12, 12K

Industrial location, subject to corrosion9 RMC3, IMC3, LFMC NEMA 4X, 11

Industrial location, subject to oil and vapors

RMC, IMC, LFMC FS/FD; NEMA 13

Hazardous Class I, Division 1 RMC, IMC NEMA 7, 8

Hazardous Class I, Division 28 RMC, IMC, LFMC, FMC11, WW5 FS/FD; NEMA 1, 7, 8, 12

Hazardous Class II, Division 1 RMC, IMC, LFMC NEMA 9

Hazardous Class II, Division 28 RMC, IMC, LFMC, WW6 FS/FD; NEMA 1, 9, 12

Hazardous Class III8 RMC, IMC, LFMC, WW6 FS/FD; NEMA 12

Legend:EMT Electrical metallic tubingENT Electrical nonmetallic tubingFMC Flexible metal conduitFS/FD Cast-metal boxHDPE High-density polyethylene conduitIMC Intermediate metal conduitLFMC Liquidtight flexible metal conduitLFNC Liquidtight flexible nonmetallic conduitN/A Not applicableNEMA Refers to NEMA 250, type classificationNM Nonmetallic boxPVC Rigid polyvinyl chloride conduitRMC Rigid metal conduitRTRC Reinforced thermosetting resin conduitSM Sheet-metal boxWW Wireway

Notes:1. Building finishes must provide a barrier with a 15-minute fire rating.2. For buildings not more than three stories above grade.3. Corrosion protection is required.4. With fittings for purpose.5. Enclosed and gasketed.6. Dust-tight wireway only.7. Raintight wireway only.8. Nonincendive and intrinsically safe wiring are allowed in any wiring method permitted for unclassified locations.9. Aluminum materials are permitted only with approved supplementary corrosion protection.10. Schedule 80.11. Only as specifically permitted under the environmental condition.12. Subject to temperature limitations where exposed to sunlight.* "Subject to damage" denotes environments where exposed raceways may be impacted by traffic, by cleaning or maintenance operations, or by similar influences.

3.4 INSTALLATION



A. Comply with NECA 1, NECA 101, and TIA-569-D for installation requirements except where requirements on Drawings or in this article are stricter. Comply with NECA 102 for aluminum pathways. Comply with NFPA 70 limitations for types of pathways allowed in specific occupancies and number of floors.

B. Keep pathways at least 6 inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-water pipes. Install horizontal pathway runs above water and steam piping.

C. Complete pathway installation before starting conductor installation.

D. Comply with requirements in Section 270528.29 "Hangers and Supports for Communications Systems" for hangers and supports.

E. Arrange stub-ups so curved portions of bends are not visible above finished slab.

F. Install no more than the equivalent of three 90-degree bends in any conduit run except for communications wiring conduits for which only two 90-degree bends are allowed. Support within 12 inches of changes in direction.

G. Conceal conduit and EMT within finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise indicated. Install conduits parallel or perpendicular to building lines.

H. Support conduit within 12 inches of enclosures to which attached.

I. Pathways Embedded in Slabs:

1. Run conduit larger than 1-inch trade size, parallel or at right angles to main reinforcement. Where at right angles to reinforcement, place conduit close to slab support. Secure pathways to reinforcement at maximum 10-foot intervals.

2. Arrange pathways to cross building expansion joints at right angles with expansion fittings.

3. Arrange pathways to keep a minimum of 2 inches of concrete cover in all directions.

4. Do not embed threadless fittings in concrete unless specifically approved by Architect for each specific location.

5. Change from Type EPC-40-PVC to GRC before rising above floor.

J. Stub-ups to Above Recessed Ceilings:

1. Use EMT, IMC, or RMC for pathways.

2. Use a conduit bushing or insulated fitting to terminate stub-ups not terminated in hubs or in an enclosure.

K. Threaded Conduit Joints, Exposed to Wet, Damp, Corrosive, or Outdoor Conditions: Apply listed compound to threads of pathway and fittings before making up joints. Follow compound manufacturer's written instructions.

L. Coat field-cut threads on PVC-coated pathway with a corrosion-preventing conductive compound prior to assembly.



M. Install pathways square to the enclosure and terminate at enclosures with locknuts. Install locknuts hand tight plus 1/4 turn more.

N. Do not rely on locknuts to penetrate nonconductive coatings on enclosures. Remove coatings in the locknut area prior to conduit assembly to assure a continuous ground path.

O. Cut conduit perpendicular to the length. For conduits of 2-inch trade size and larger, use roll cutter or a guide to ensure cut is straight and perpendicular to the length.

P. Install pull wires in empty pathways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not less than 200-lb tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches of slack at each end of pull wire. Cap underground pathways designated as spare above grade alongside pathways in use.

Q. Surface Pathways:

1. Install surface pathway for surface electrical outlet boxes only where indicated on Drawings.

2. Install surface pathway with a minimum 2-inch radius control at bend points.

3. Secure surface pathway with screws or other anchor-type devices at intervals not exceeding 48 inches and with no less than two supports per straight pathway section. Support surface pathway according to manufacturer's written instructions. Tape and glue are not acceptable support methods.

R. Pathways for Optical-Fiber and Communications Cable: Install pathways, metal and nonmetallic, rigid and flexible, as follows:

1. 3/4-Inch Trade Size and Smaller: Install pathways in maximum lengths of 50 feet.

2. 1-Inch Trade Size and Larger: Install pathways in maximum lengths of 75 feet.

3. Install with a maximum of two 90-degree bends or equivalent for each length of pathway unless Drawings show stricter requirements. Separate lengths with pull or junction boxes or terminations at distribution frames or cabinets where necessary to comply with these requirements.

S. Install pathway sealing fittings at accessible locations according to NFPA 70 and fill them with listed sealing compound. For concealed pathways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with a blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces. Install pathway sealing fittings according to NFPA 70.

T. Install devices to seal pathway interiors at accessible locations. Locate seals so no fittings or boxes are between the seal and the following changes of environments. Seal the interior of all pathways at the following points:

1. Where conduits pass from warm to cold locations, such as boundaries of refrigerated spaces.

2. Where an underground service pathway enters a building or structure.

3. Where otherwise required by NFPA 70.



U. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for solvent welding PVC conduit and fittings.

V. Expansion-Joint Fittings:

1. Install in each run of aboveground RNC that is located where environmental temperature change may exceed 30 deg F, and that has straight-run length that exceeds 25 feet. Install in each run of aboveground RMC conduit that is located where environmental temperature change may exceed 100 deg F and that has straight-run length that exceeds 100 feet.

2. Install type and quantity of fittings that accommodate temperature change listed for each of the following locations:

a. Outdoor Locations Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 155 deg F temperature change.

b. Indoor Spaces Connected with Outdoors without Physical Separation: 125 deg F temperature change.

c. Attics: 135 deg F temperature change.

3. Install fitting(s) that provide expansion and contraction for at least 0.00041 inch per foot of length of straight run per deg F of temperature change for PVC conduits. Install fitting(s) that provide expansion and contraction for at least 0.000078 inch per foot of length of straight run per deg F of temperature change for metal conduits.

4. Install expansion fittings at all locations where conduits cross building or structure expansion joints.

5. Install each expansion-joint fitting with position, mounting, and piston setting selected according to manufacturer's written instructions for conditions at specific location at time of installation. Install conduit supports to allow for expansion movement.

W. Flexible Conduit Connections: Comply with NEMA RV 3. Use maximum of 72 inches of flexible conduit forequipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or movement; and for transformers and motors.

1. Use LFMC in damp or wet locations subject to severe physical damage.

2. Use LFMC in damp or wet locations not subject to severe physical damage.

X. Mount boxes at heights indicated on Drawings. If mounting heights of boxes are not individually indicated, give priority to ADA requirements. Install boxes with height measured to center of box unless otherwise indicated.

Y. Recessed Boxes in Masonry Walls: Saw-cut opening for box in center of cell of masonry block, and install box flush with surface of wall. Prepare block surface to provide a flat surface for a raintight connection between box and cover plate or supported equipment and box.

Z. Horizontally separate boxes mounted on opposite sides of walls so they are not in the same vertical channel.

AA. Support boxes of three gangs or more from more than one side by spanning two framing members or mounting on brackets specifically designed for the purpose.



BB. Fasten junction and pull boxes to or support from building structure. Do not support boxes by conduits.

CC. Set metal floor boxes level and flush with finished floor surface.

DD. Set nonmetallic floor boxes level. Trim after installation to fit flush with finished floor surface.

3.5 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND CONDUIT

A. Direct-Buried Conduit:

1. Excavate trench bottom to provide firm and uniform support for conduit. Prepare trench bottom as specified in Section 312000 "Earth Moving" for pipe less than 6 inches in nominal diameter.

2. Install backfill as specified in Section 312000 "Earth Moving."

3. After installing conduit, backfill and compact. Start at tie-in point, and work toward end of conduit run, leaving conduit at end of run free to move with expansion and contraction as temperature changes during this process. Firmly hand tamp backfill around conduit to provide maximum supporting strength. After placing controlled backfill to within 12 inches of finished grade, make final conduit connection at end of run and complete backfilling with normal compaction as specified in Section 312000 "Earth Moving."

4. Install manufactured rigid steel conduit elbows for stub-ups at poles and equipment and at building entrances through floor.

a. Couple steel conduits to ducts with adapters designed for this purpose, and encase coupling with 3 inches of concrete for a minimum of 12 inches on each side of the coupling.

b. For stub-ups at equipment mounted on outdoor concrete bases and where conduits penetrate building foundations, extend steel conduit horizontally a minimum of 60 inches from edge of foundation or equipment base. Install insulated grounding bushings on terminations at equipment.

5. Underground Warning Tape: Comply with requirements in Section 270553 "Identification for Communications Systems."

3.6 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND HANDHOLES AND BOXES

A. Install handholes and boxes level and plumb and with orientation and depth coordinated with connecting conduits to minimize bends and deflections required for proper entrances.

B. Unless otherwise indicated, support units on a level bed of crushed stone or gravel, graded from 1/2-inch sieve to No. 4 sieve and compacted to same density as adjacent undisturbed earth.

C. Elevation: In paved areas, set so cover surface will be flush with finished grade. Set covers of other enclosures 1 inch above finished grade.

D. Install removable hardware, including pulling eyes, cable stanchions, cable arms, and insulators, as required for installation and support of cables and conductors and as indicated.



Select arm lengths to be long enough to provide spare space for future cables, but short enough to preserve adequate working clearances in enclosure.

E. Field cut openings for conduits according to enclosure manufacturer's written instructions. Cut wall of enclosure with a tool designed for material to be cut. Size holes for terminating fittings to be used, and seal around penetrations after fittings are installed.

3.7 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY PENETRATIONS

A. Install sleeves and sleeve seals at penetrations of exterior floor and wall assemblies. Comply with requirements in Section 280544 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electronic Safety and Security Pathways and Cabling."

3.8 FIRESTOPPING

A. Install firestopping at penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies. Comply with requirements in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping."

3.9 PROTECTION

A. Protect coatings, finishes, and cabinets from damage and deterioration.

1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by manufacturer.

2. Repair damage to PVC coatings or paint finishes with matching touchup coating recommended by manufacturer.

END OF SECTION


EARVIN MAGIC JOHNSON PARK – PHASE 1A SECURITY SYSTEM LABELINGLOS ANGELES, CA 28 0553-1COUNTY OF LOS ANGELES COMMUNITY DEVELOPMENT COMMISSIONAHBE PROJECT NO. 116030.01 INTEGRAL GROUP

SECTION 28 0553SECURITY SYSTEM LABELING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. General: Furnish engineering, labor, materials, apparatus, tools, equipment, transportation, temporary construction and special or occasional services as required to make a complete working security system installation, as described in these specifications.


1. Labeling of wire, cable, security devices, enclosures, and raceways.


1. Consult other Sections, determine the extent and character of related work and properly coordinate work specified herein with that specified elsewhere to produce a complete and operable system.

2. Section 28 0000 – Basic Security Requirements: includes general project requirements, submittal formats, warranty, and installation requirements.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit the following:

1. Product information for components specified herein.

2. List of equipment (wire, cable, devices, enclosures, and raceways) and the corresponding text for the label.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 NAMEPLATES

A. Engraved, plastic laminated nameplates, signs, and instruction plates. Engrave stock melamine plastic laminate 1/16 inch minimum thickness for signs up to 20 square inches, or 8 inches in length; 1/8 inch thick for larger sizes. Use white letters for engraved nameplates and punch for mechanical fasteners.

2.2 LABELS

A. Wire and Cable Labels:

1. General

a. Self-laminating adhesive laser labels.



b. Machine printable with a laser printer.

c. Cable size: 0.16 – 0.32” OD

d. Color: white with black lettering

2. Manufacturer:

a. Panduit #R050X125X1J and #R100X225X1J wire marking labels

b. Or Equal

B. Device Labels:

C. Self-laminating, type on tape, adhesive labels. Use Helvetica 12 pt text

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION


1. Label the security system components. The components include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Equipment Enclosures

b. Conduits

c. Security Devices

d. Batteries

e. Wires and Cables

f. Equipment Racks

g. Terminal Blocks

h. Relays

i. Patch panels, and the termination positions within the patch panels.

2. Labels shall coincide with device IDs used on the record drawings.

3. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive nameplates and labels

4. Install nameplates parallel to equipment lines. Secure nameplates to equipment fronts using machine screws.

5. Security contractor shall provide label scheme for owner approval prior starting labeling devices.



B. Equipment Cabinets

1. Label SEC enclosures associated with the security system with a nameplate.

2. Mount label on exterior of door, centered horizontally, and positioned one-third of the door height vertically from the top.

3. Example: Line 1: “SEC-01” (1/2 inch high letters) Line 2: “Security Equipment Cabinet” (1/4 inch high letters)

C. Conduits

1. Write the destination for every conduit entering a junction box, SEC, and CEC enclosure, or wireway using a black permanent ink marker next to the conduit inside the box.

2. Example: “To SEC-01”

D. Security Devices

1. Label devices associated with the security system with a permanent machine generated, laminated, label. Use 12 point Helvetica text with a clear background. Use white or black lettering depending upon the color of the device.

2. Label each device in a concealed location with the system point number and address.

E. Batteries

1. Label power supply batteries with the month and year they were installed.

2. Example: “April 2017”

F. Wire and Cable

1. Identify wire and cable clearly with permanent machine-generated labels wrapped about the full circumference within one (1) inch of each connection.

2. Indicate the cable ID designated on the associated field or shop drawings or run sheet, as applies.

3. Assign wire or cable designations consistently throughout a given system; i.e., each wire or cable to carry the same labeled designation over its entire run, regardless of intermediate terminations.

4. Provide labels where wire and cable first enter and exit from conduit, junction or distribution boxes; locate labels within six (6) inches of the point of exit.

5. Positional labels so they are clearly visible without the need to remove wire management or other obstructions.

6. Label cables at both ends of a run and within pull and junction boxes using machine generated wrap-around labels.

3.2 CABLE LABEL FORMAT



A. From Panel to Field Device

1. Line 1: Device Type and Device Number

2. Line 2: Panel ID – Port Number

3. Example: CR 001 PANEL 2 – CR5

4. Standard Device Types

a. CR = Card Reader

b. K = Camera

c. ET = Entry Telephone

d. R = Relay Output

e. A = Alarm Point

5. Standard Port #s

a. CR = Reader

b. M = Monitored Input

c. R = Relay Output

6. From Door Junction Box to Card Reader

a. Line 1: Device Type and Device Number

b. Line 2: Panel ID – Port Number

c. Example: CR 001PANEL 4 – CR3

B. Miscellaneous Examples:

1. From Door Junction Box to Door Contact

a. CR001

b. DC

2. From Door Junction Box to Rex Alarm

a. CR001

b. REX ALM

3. From Panel to Rex



a. CR001

b. REX PWR

c. 12 VDC

4. From Panel to Lock

a. CR001

b. LCK PWR

c. 24 VDC

C. Communications Cable

1. Line 1: Communication Type and Direction

2. Line 2: Panel ID

3. Example: RS-485 TO PANEL 2

4. Typical Communication Types

a. RS-485

b. RS-232

c. RS-422

END OF SECTION


EARVIN MAGIC JOHNSON PARK – PHASE 1A SECURITY SYSTEM ACCEPTANCELOS ANGELES, CA 28 0800-1COUNTY OF LOS ANGELES COMMUNITY DEVELOPMENT COMMISSIONAHBE PROJECT NO. 116030.01 INTEGRAL GROUP

SECTION 28 0800SECURITY SYSTEM ACCEPTANCE TESTING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE OF WORK

A. General: Furnish engineering, labor, materials, apparatus, tools, equipment, and transportation required to thoroughly test the completed security system installation as described in these specifications.

B. Base Bid Work

1. Full testing of a completed security system which includes:

a. Develop, submit, and obtain Engineer’s approval of security system Pre- functional and Functional testing forms.

b. Complete 100% Pre-functional test of the security system. Submit Pre- functional testing documentation reflecting that all security devices, cabling, locking hardware, power, interfaces to other systems, IT switches, computer/servers and other components required for a completely functional security system are provided per project documents.

c. Complete 100% Functional test of the security system. Submit Functional testing documentation reflecting that all security equipment, components, interfaces, and programming are functioning correctly per project documents. Upon receiving approval of functional testing documentation, schedule final acceptance testing activities to be witnessed by Engineer and/or Owner.

d. Demonstrate 100% security system functionality to the Engineer and/or Owner. Document testing activities and submit with final As-Built drawing.


1. Section 28 0000 - Basic Security Requirements




5. Section 28 1600 – Intrusion Detection System


1.2 SUMMARY OF SYSTEM ACCEPTANCE TESTING ACTIVITIES

A. Overview



1. The purpose of system acceptance testing is to ensure the security system operates properly when it is needed most. Security systems are very complex from both an equipment and programming standpoint, and thorough testing is necessary to ensure correct operation.

2. Perform testing activities after-hours or on weekends when the system is “quiet” and the building is generally unoccupied. This will minimize the amount of irrelevant activity in the system activity reports that will be used as a record of the pre and final test results.

B. Pre-Functional Test

1. Perform a 100% pre-functional test of system aspects to verify correct operation prior to scheduling the final test. The pre-test will help to make the final test run smoothly when demonstrating the system’s operation to the Owner and Engineer.

2. Document the results of the pre-test using the approved test forms and submit a copy to the Engineer along with the system activity reports

C. Functional Test

1. Perform a 100% functional test of system aspects to verify correct operation prior to scheduling the final test. The pre-test will help to make the final test run smoothly when demonstrating the system’s operation to the Owner and Engineer.

2. Document the results of the test using the approved test forms and submit a copy to the Engineer along with the system activity reports

D. Final Acceptance Test

1. Perform a final test of the system in the presence of the Engineer and/or Owner to demonstrate correct operation of the security system.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Submit the following for review and comment at the completion of the project:

1. Functional Design Manual: Includes a detailed explanation of the operation of the system.

2. Hardware Manual which includes:

a. Pictorial parts list and part numbers

b. Pictorial and schematic electrical drawings of wiring systems, including devices, control panels, instrumentation and annunciators

c. Telephone numbers for the authorized parts and service distributors

d. Include service bulletins

3. Software Manual which includes:

a. Use of system and applications software



b. Initialization, start-up, and shut down procedures

c. Alarm Reports

4. Operator’s Manual which fully explains procedures and instructions for the operation of the system and includes:

a. Computers and peripherals

b. System start up and shut down procedures

c. Use of system, command, and applications software

d. Recovery and restart procedures

e. Graphic alarm presentation

f. Use of report generator and generation of reports

g. Data entry operator commands

h. Alarm messages and reprinting formats

i. System access requirements

5. Maintenance Manual which includes:

a. Instructions for routine maintenance listed for each component, and a multi- page summary of component’s routine maintenance requirements.

b. Detailed instructions for repair of the security system.

c. A summary of the software licenses, including license numbers, quantity of clients, summary of the software options provided and database capabilities.

d. A summary of the TCP/IP address used and which system component they are associated with. Include the gateway address, subnet mask, DNS server, and host name information.

6. Test Results Manual, which includes the document results of tests, required under this Specification, organized by System, Floor, and Door.

7. Record Drawings Manual which includes 11”x17” prints of record drawings as described below.

B. Record Drawings: Submit the following for review and comment at the completion of the project:

1. Drawings to fully represent installed conditions including actual locations of devices, actual cable and terminal block numbering, and correct wire sizing as well as routing. Record changes in the work during the course of construction on blue or black line prints.

2. Include drawings submitted as part of the Shop Drawing package, plus additional information required to accurately document installed conditions.



3. Include the following additional information:

a. Device addresses and IP address information.

b. Settings for each camera (lens specs, mm setting, auto shutter setting, and other available camera settings, etc.)

4. Final acceptance will not be made until the Engineer approves the record drawings.


A. Provide a project manager to coordinate the security system commissioning work with other trades.

PART 2 - PRODUCTSNOT USED

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SCHEDULING

A. Coordinate security commissioning with the General Contractor, and provide specific information on pre-test and final-testing activities to be entered into the overall project construction schedule.

3.2 TESTING REQUIREMENTS

A. Site Tests

1. Perform a 100% pretest of the system prior to final testing by the Engineer. Provide the Engineer with a minimum of a 5 day notice prior to scheduling testing.

2. At the conclusion of the work on a floor, test the system on that floor to verify proper operation and reporting of devices.

3. Work with the door hardware supplier to resolve electric hardware failures and door alignment/closure problems.

4. At the completion of the work, test the entire system to verify proper operation. At a minimum, include these tests:

a. Building Perimeter Test: Test doors, cameras, and devices related to securing the perimeter of the building.

b. Telecom Room Test: Test devices related to securing the MCR room,. Inspect system panels, power supplies, and other related security equipment located in these areas.

c. Access Control System Test: Test the software for correct programming and setup.



d. CCTV Recording System Test: Test the recording system for correct programming, alarm recording, and event retrieval. Verify CCTV system viewable from workstations.

e. Intrusion Detection Test: Test the alarm dialer and duress stations for correct programming and operation. Verify correct arming/disarming functions from each keypad.

f. CCTV Camera Test: Review cameras for proper coverage, quality of video, etc.

g. Other Readers/Door Test:Test remaining card readers and doors not included in the above tests. Battery and UPS Load Test: Disconnect AC power to security system equipment to verify battery operation functions and system remains fully operational.

B. Test Preparation

1. Provide device identification numbers that differ from or were not included on the original contract drawing set.

2. Provide a complete systems point list.

3. Provide paper and toner for the printer so that an event log can be printed out and attached to the test reports as verification of test sequence and systems response.

4. During testing, provide a minimum of three technicians familiar with the installation to assist with the test. Stage the technicians as follows: one at the host, one at the device being tested, and one runner responsible to furnishing tools, step ladders, etc.

5. Provide radios for use by the Engineer and Owner during testing.

6. Provide pre-programmed access cards for use during testing. Provide one card for each access level.

3.3 TEST PROCEDURES

A. Refer to the test forms for testing procedures for each type of device/system.

3.4 DOCUMENTATION

A. Provide a full-sized blueline drawing containing a detailed wiring diagram (layout of equipment/elevation, complete parts list, and a complete wiring diagram for each ACU and I/O Board) for each SEC. Fold the diagram and place it inside a clear plastic pocket affixed to the inside door of the SEC.

B. Provide a service log on the inside door of each SEC. Include columns for the following information: date of service, description of work performed, service technician(s) and service company in the service log. Place the service log inside a separate clear plastic pocket affixed to the inside door of the SEC.

3.5 DEMONSTRATION



A. On completion of the acceptance test, instruct the owner's representatives, at a time convenient to them, in the operation and testing of the system.

B. Utilize the database for the project during training to give the users a project specific example to learn from.

END OF SECTION


EARVIN MAGIC JOHNSON PARK – PHASE 1A ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEMLOS ANGELES, CA 28 1300-1COUNTY OF LOS ANGELES COMMUNITY DEVELOPMENT COMMISSIONAHBE PROJECT NO. 116030.01 INTEGRAL GROUP

SECTION 28 1300ACCESS CONTROL AND MONITORING SYSTEM

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. General: Furnish engineering, labor, materials, apparatus, tools, equipment, transportation, temporary construction and special or occasional services as required to make a complete working Access Control and Alarm Monitoring system installation, as described in these specifications.

B. The Contractor is responsible for providing a fully, turn-key Access Control & Monitoring System as described in the specifications and shown on drawings. Documents may not show or list every item to be provided. When an item not shown or listed is clearly necessary for proper installation and operation of the equipment and systems, the Security Contractor must provide, install, test, and certify the item at no increase to the contract price. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to ensure that all quantities, materials, labor, licenses, permits, sales taxes and any and all other costs to provide a turnkey project are included in their bid.

C. The Access Control System (ACAMS) and the CCTV system shall interface together allowing a visual of a perimeter breach where cameras are placed. An example would be a “door forced open” alarm where the associated camera would show a visual image of the door in alarm condition. This added information will allow the responding party to respond appropriately. Camera call up shall be integrated and programmed for all camera locations. Triggers to include: Duress alarm, Door forced, door held open, invalid card read.

D. The Contractor shall be responsible for fully implementing all required functions described in the specifications and shown on the drawings. Contractor shall coordinate specific programming requirements, including ACAMS device and software monitoring configuration with County of Los Angeles Internal Services Department Information Technology Services.

E. Section Includes:

1. ACAMS control panels, input/output modules, and card readers

2. ACAMS power supplies

3. Alarm initiating devices, including: magnetic switch contacts, and request-to-exit sensors.

4. Interface to electric door hardware and ADA door operators

5. Interface to fire/life-safety system

F. Products Installed But Not Supplied Under This Section:

1. Electric feed-through power transfer hinges

2. Electrified locking hardware cable and termination to transfer hinge and security system

G. Products Specified but Not Installed Under this Section:



1. None.

H. Products Furnished and Installed Under another Section:

1. 120V power

2. Conduit, junction boxes, and telecom cable trays

3. ADA door operators and push buttons

4. Fire/life-safety system interface relays

5. Electromagnetic door holders

6. Network connectivity for ACAMS devices via Owner’s local/wide area network

I. Related Sections:

1. Consult other Divisions, determine the extent and character of related work and properly coordinate work specified herein with that specified elsewhere to produce a complete and operable system.

2. Section 28 0000 – Basic Security Requirements: for submittal formats, warranty, general product requirements, and installation requirements.

3. Section 28 0513 – Security System Cabling: for cable requirements related to the ACAMS.

4. Section 28 0528 - Pathways For Electronic Safety And Security


6. Section 28 0800 – Security System Acceptance Testing: for testing requirements.

7. Section 28 1600 – Intrusion Detection: for interface requirement to the ACAMS.

8. Section 28 2300 – Video Surveillance System: for interface requirement with the ACAMS.


A. Overview

1. The ACAMS is a distributed network of control panels connected to and programmed from a host server and client workstations.

2. The ACAMS is utilized for electronically controlling access to visitors, delivery personnel, members, and employee entrances to the building.

3. The ACAMS consists of control panels, card readers, and alarm initiating devices. The host server communicates with the field panels via the Owner’s local/wide area network.

B. Access Control and Alarm Monitoring System



1. Provide ACAMS control panels located in the MCR Room as indicated on project drawings. Panels support up to 18 card readers with locking control outputs and multiple general purpose input/output modules for automation.

2. Provide multi-technology card readers.

3. Provide alarm contacts and request-to-exit motion detectors for card reader controlled doors.

4. Provide alarm contacts for non-card reader controller perimeter doors as indicated on project drawings.

5. Provide 12/24VDC ACAMS device and lock power supplies as indicated on project drawings.

6. Provide battery backup of system components and power supplies.

C. Fire/Life-Safety System Interface

1. Coordinate with Fire/Life-Safety system contractor to automatically drop power from stairwell, elevator vestibule lobby, and other doors within the path of egress upon alarm activation of the Fire/Life-Safety system.

2. Coordinate with Fire/Life-Safety system contractor for scheduled release of electromagnetic door holders on designated card reader doors as indicated on project drawings. Provide ACAMS output modules as necessary to interface with Fire/Life-Safety system.

3. Provide emergency door release pull stations with double pole, double throw contacts located in balconies as indicated on project drawings. First set of contacts to break power to electrified door hardware on adjacent card reader door. Second set of contacts to connect with ACAMS. Provide ACAMS input modules as necessary to monitor status of emergency door release pull stations.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Contractor Qualifications: Submit certification letters for the manufacturer of the ACAMS.

B. Product Data: Submit product information for components specified herein.

C. Shop Drawings:

1. Device placement on floor plans

2. Point-to-Point Diagrams: Include wiring, points of connection and interconnecting devices between the following:

a. ACAMS control panel

b. ACAMS card reader and input/output modules

c. ACAMS power supplies



d. Card Readers

e. Alarm contacts and request-to-exit sensors

f. Local audible alarms

g. Interface to electrified door hardware

h. Interface to fire/life-safety system

i. Cable conductors (identify conductors on the point-to-point diagrams with the same tag as the installed conductor)

3. Schedules: Provide schedules for ACAMS control panels that show each point ID with a description of the connected devices.

4. Block Diagram/Riser Diagram: Show the ACAMS components, conduit, wire types, and sizes between them, including cabling interties between termination hardware.

5. Custom mounting details

1.4 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Provide 10% spare parts of total installed the following: (Round up to the next complete device)

1. Card Readers

2. Fuses (Place five (5) of each type of fuse inside each SEC and power supply housing).

3. Relays

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Access Control and Alarm Monitoring System

1. Sielox Pinnacle Access Software

2.2 ACAMS CONTROLLERS

A. General

1. An intelligent controller with integrated battery backup, database, and communication ports that supports 18 card readers.

2. Supports multiple communication channels to which a variety of devices can connect.

3. Supports hardware modules used for additional memory and/or for future feature enhancements.



4. Functions provided include:

a. Central control for attached devices and addressable modules

b. Makes decisions for access

c. Responds to monitor activity

d. Receives input to control its decision making

e. Reports activity to other devices

B. Features

1. Supports HID proximity, Weigand

2. Supports flash upgrades for firmware updates

3. Utilizes an onboard Ethernet NIC

4. Global input/output and anti-passback functionality

5. Capable of utilizing keypad commands to activate/deactivate events

C. Supports RS-485 connectivity to addressable modules:

1. Input Module: Supports 8 Class A supervised input points

2. Output Module: Supports 8 Form C dry contact relays

3. Reader Interface Module: Supports 2 card readers with associated alarm contacts, request-to-exit devices, and lock outputs

D. Manufacturer

1. Seilox Pinnacle Software

2.3 EQUIPMENT ENCLOSURES

A. General

1. Provide enclosures with butt hinged and lockable door containing a lock kit (keyed alike with other security enclosures on the project).

2. Provide perforated back panel for mounting control boards, relays, and terminal strips with enclosure.

3. Provide slotted wiring duct for routing security cabling within enclosure.

B. Security Equipment Cabinets

1. Type: NEMA type 1 enclosure



2. Size: 24” x 24” x 6” minimum

3. Finish: ANSI 61 gray polyester powder paint finish inside and out

4. Manufacturer:

a. Cooper B-Line #24246-1PP enclosure with back panel and lock kit

b. Hoffman #A24N24M enclosure with #A24N24MPP back panel and #A612AR lock kit

c. Or Equal

2.4 TERMINAL BLOCKS

A. General

1. Provide terminal blocks inside SEC for demarcation of elevator traveler and security cabling.

2. Provide DIN rails and other mounting accessories for a complete installation.

B. Modular Terminal Strips

1. Push-in style bridging system that utilizes the IDC termination method

2. Feed through style, single level

3. Modular design

4. Capable of mounting on standard 35mm DIN rails

5. Manufacturer:

a. Phoenix Contact # QTC-1, 5 terminal block

b. Weidmuller

c. Or Equal

6. Accessories:

a. Phoenix Contact # NS-35/7, 5 DIN rail

b. Weidmuller

c. Or Equal

2.5 WIREWAYS

A. General:



1. Provide screw cover wireway sections with open top assembly as shown on Security drawings.

2. Provide closure plates to secure end of wireway sections.

B. Screw Cover Gutter Wireways




4. Manufacturer:

a. Copper B-Line # 4448-G-NK lay-in painted wireway without knockouts

b. Hoffman # F44T148GVP lay-in painted wireway without knockouts

c. Or Equal

5. Accessories:

a. Cooper B-Line # 44-E-NK closure plate without knockouts

b. Hoffman # A44GCPNK closure plate without knockouts

c. Or Equal

2.6 CARD READERS

A. General

1. Presenting an access card to the reader initiates a single transmission to the ACAMS controller.

2. Rugged, weatherized polycarbonate enclosure, designed to withstand an operating temperatures of -22 to 120 degrees Fahrenheit (-30 to 65 degrees Celsius) and operating humidity of 5-95% non-condensing.

3. Utilizes a Wiegand protocol for communication for compatibility with standard access control systems.

4. Utilizes a multi-color LED and an audible sounder to indicate the status of the door.

5. Utilizes an internal tamper switch that will indicate an alarm condition if an unauthorized attempt is made to disassemble the unit.

6. FCC and CE certified, and conform to the following ISO standards:

a. 15693 (CSN read-only)

b. 14443A (CSN read-only)



c. 14443B (CSN read-only)

7. Capable of reading the following frequencies and card formats:

a. 125kHz – HID, Indala, or AWID proximity

b. 13.56MHz – MyD, ISO 15693 CSN (MyD, ICODE, Tag-it), ISO 14443A CSN (MIFARE, DESFire), ISO 14443B CSN, and U.S. Government PIV

B. Manufacturer

1. HID #Thinline II series (card reader) HID #Prox II to match campus standard

a. Wall mount: HID#RP40 multi-technology card reader

2.7 MAGNETIC CONTACT SWITCHES

A. Wood, Steel, and Hallow Metal Doors

1. General

a. Mounting: Flush

b. Contacts: Double Pole, Double Throw

c. Gap Distance: 0.5” maximum

2. Manufacturer

a. GE Security #1076D-N 1” alarm contact switch

b. Or Equal

2.8 REQUEST-TO-EXIT MOTION SENSORS

A. General

1. Power: 12 or 24VDC, 35mA

2. Relay Output: 2 form “C” contacts

3. Adjustable relay latch time

4. Programmable retrigger or non-retrigger mode

5. Fail Secure Mode

6. Radio Frequency Interference (RFI) Immunity range from 26 to 1,000 MHz at 50 v/m

B. Manufacturer

1. Kantech T REX Or Equal



2.9 DOOR CONTACTS

A. General

1. Magnetic door contact switch, floor/surface mount, exposed & non-exposed wiring

B. Manufacturer

1. Magnetic door contact switch, surface mount, non-exposed wiring – Sentrol 1042 TW Series or equivalent

2. Magnetic door contact switch, surface mount, exposed wiring – Sentrol 2505 Series or equivalent

3. Magnetic door contact switch, floor mount (high security) – Sentrol model 2707A or equivalent

2.10 POWER SUPPLIES

A. General

1. Provides a 120VAC to 12 and 24VDC output, fully supervised power supply to power ACAMS field devices.

2. Utilizes 16 PTC Class 2 rated power limited outputs.

3. Short circuit and thermal overload protection.

4. Integrated charger for sealed lead acid or gel type batteries.

5. Capable of providing a 10 amp supply current.

6. Supports a fire alarm disconnect to relay that individually selects any or all of the 16 outputs.

B. Manufacturer

1. LifeSafety # FPO250/250-4DE2 power supply

2.11 RESTROOM DOOR RELEASE

A. General

1. The intent of this system is to provide hard-wired door releases from the Circulation/Customer Service Desk and Info Desk as required for the restroom doors

B. Materials

1. Power supply – LifeSafety FPO75-E1

2. Electrified Door Strike – Von Duprin (To be supplied by General Contractor)



3. Door button – Rutherford surface button (RCI 909S-MO)

4. Cable – 18-2C, CMP (twisted pair).

5. Wireless Receiver – Inovonics EN4126MR

6. Wireless Transmitter – Inovonics EN1210

2.12 BATTERIES

A. General:

1. Voltage: 12.00 2. Amps: 12.00

2. Bosch D126.12V, 7AH batteries – two (2) for each panel as required for four (4) hours

3. Bosch D122 Battery Harness

B. Manufacturer:

1. Bosch D126 sealed lead acid 12V 12Ah battery

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. ACAMS Control Panels

1. Place power supply and associated hardware in same location.

2. Install supervisory and end-of–line (EOL) resistors as required. Refer to Section 28 0000 – Basic Security Requirements for EOL supervision requirements.

B. Four-State End-of-Line (EOL) Supervision

1. Provide designated resistors at device end of line per manufacturer’s EOL recommendation to provide four-state supervision of security device and cabling.

2. Provide EOL supervision for alarm contacts, local alarm sounders, motion detectors, glass break detectors, help/duress buttons, and other designated security devices connected to the ACAMS and IDS.

3. Provide the following states of supervision:

a. Contact closed = Secure

b. Contact open = Alarm

c. Short circuit = Line fault

d. Open circuit = Line fault



C. Card Readers

1. Wire the card reader‘s multi-color LED to indicate the following status of the door.

a. Red status indicates the door is secure (locked).

b. Green status indicates the door is unsecured (unlocked).

c. Yellow status indicates the card reader is not functioning (off-line/trouble), is processing a read request, or has denied access.

2. Utilize configuration card to enable optical tamper.

3. Wire the card reader’s optical tamper to spare input on the ACAMS reader module and jumper ground wire from door contact to provide a Normally Closed circuit.

4. The card reader to produce an audible beep tone to indicate to the user:

a. The card was read and/or access was denied.

b. Door is being held open and needs to be closed.

D. Door Hardware

1. Route power to electrically controlled locks on life-safety doors through fire alarm output to automatically unlock the door upon activation of Fire/Life-Safety system. Connect fire alarm output to the disconnect relay on the associated 24VDC lock power supply.

2. Setup and conduct a door hardware coordination meeting.

3. Coordinate the installation and termination of the security cable with the installation of the electric door hardware and transfer hinge.

4. Provide cable and terminate wires to delayed egress devices for monitoring activation of delayed egress by the ACAMS system.

E. Door Contacts

1. Install on protected (secured) side of door.

2. Install 6” from leading edge at top of door.

F. Request-To Exit Motion Detectors

1. Mount motion detector on the secured (protected) side of door.

2. Install motion detector so that detection pattern is not obstructed by Exit Signs, light fixtures and other objects that would interfere with proper operation.

3. Adjust relay hold time and pattern to properly detect valid exit and allow shunting of door contact.

4. Adjust detection sensitivity to pulse.



5. Mask detector lens to provide a confined detection area limited to the door handle or pushbar.

6. Run wire inside structural tube steel frame into back of condulet for cage locations.

3.2 PROGRAMMING

A. Prior to the completion of construction, schedule a meeting with the Owner to determine the programming criteria. Discuss the following:

1. Access card levels and door groupings

2. Alarm priority levels

3. Schedules and time codes

4. Holidays and holiday types (priorities)

5. Action/responses from individual input points

6. Standard and custom (expanded) reports

7. Defining alarm messages and standard response messages applicable to site

8. Routing of alarm points to selected pagers

9. Routing of alarm points to operator’s workstations, printers, and history files

10. Coordinate implementation of graphics with Owner. Develop sample graphic complete with icons and text. Alarms to appear on building floor plans depicting the nature and location of alarms. Review and revise graphic layout as required by Owner.

B. Document the results of the meeting and perform necessary programming to achieve the Owner’s requests.

C. System Operation, Alarm and Reporting Function: Program door control panel tamper switches to immediately report as a separate “tamper” point to the system resulting in an alarm condition displayed in both text and graphic form on the applicable workstation(s) and an alarm message transmitted to the appropriate pager(s).

D. Receive CAD drawing files of floor plans and perform the following relative to system graphics:

1. Delete non-applicable drawing layers and details to arrive at simple floor plans of the building as built.

2. Convert drawings to a graphic file format compatible with the Owner’s access control and alarm monitoring system.

3. Load drawing files into the system.

4. Apply new and predefined icons and other points on each graphic to indicate point and control status.



5. Link graphic images to reader, monitor and control points.

E. Program routing of monitor and control points. Route activations and restore messages to one or more of the following locations as directed by the Owner’s Representative:

1. One or more system workstations;

2. One or more system printers;

3. One or more alphanumeric pagers;

4. History files in addition to the above;

5. History files only.

F. Program the system such that reliance on a remote host for routine building operations, such as scheduled door commands and conditional events, are minimized to the greatest extent possible and decisions are made at the local building controller.

G. Program the system in a manner that minimizes the amount of time required for the users to make updates and maintain the system on a daily basis especially updates that impact card holder record updates. Nested programs, such as reader groupings used in access codes shall be used to the greatest extent possible such that single actions are required to update an entire card data population. If there is a question regarding the appropriate approach to programming, given the flexibility of most systems, contact the Engineer prior to any initial programming

H. Complete other programming as required for system operation.

I. Program and setup the system such that no additional programming other than entering new access cards is required. Include setup of available features of the software.

J. Use the point names provided on the system point schedule.

K. Perform 2 full system back-ups at completion of initial programming and deliver one copy to owner with letter of Transmittal explaining information included in back-up and brief description of recovery procedures. Label the second CD-ROM and store onsite. Perform back-ups on a regular bases through the remainder of the project.

L. Customize menus with the assistance of the factory to “gray-out” features not used on project (such as elevator control).

M. Perform field software changes after the initial programming session to "fine tune" operating parameters and sequence of operations based on revised operating requirements.

3.3 TESTING

A. Commission ACAMS in accordance with Section 28 0800.

END OF SECTION


EARVIN MAGIC JOHNSON PARK – PHASE 1A INTRUSION ALARM SYSTEMLOS ANGELES, CA 28 1600-1COUNTY OF LOS ANGELES COMMUNITY DEVELOPMENT COMMISSIONAHBE PROJECT NO. 116030.01 INTEGRAL GROUP

SECTION 28 1600INTRUSION ALARM SYSTEM

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. General: Furnish engineering, labor, materials, apparatus, tools, equipment, transportation, temporary construction and special or occasional services as required to make a complete working Access Control and Alarm Monitoring system installation, as described in these specifications.


1. ICP control panels, input/output modules, and card readers

2. ICP power supplies

3. Alarm initiating devices, including: magnetic switch contacts, and request-to-exit sensors.

4. Interface to electric door hardware and ADA door operators

5. Interface to fire/life-safety system

C. Products Installed But Not Supplied Under This Section:

1. Electric feed-through power transfer hinges

2. Electrified locking hardware cable and termination to transfer hinge and security system

D. Products Specified but Not Installed Under this Section:

1. None.

E. Products Furnished and Installed Under another Section:

1. 120V power

2. Conduit, junction boxes, and telecom cable trays

3. ADA door operators and push buttons

4. Fire/life-safety system interface relays

5. Electromagnetic door holders

6. Network connectivity for ICP devices via Owner’s local/wide area network

F. Related Sections:




2. Section 28 0000 – Basic Security Requirements: for submittal formats, warranty, general product requirements, and installation requirements.

3. Section 28 0513 – Security System Cabling: for cable requirements related to the ACAMS.

4. Section 28 0553 – Security System Labeling: for device labeling requirements.

5. Section 28 0800 – Security System Acceptance Testing: for testing requirements.

6. Section 28 2300 – Video Surveillance System: for interface requirement with the ACAMS.


A. Overview

1. The ICP is a distributed network of control panels connected to and programmed from a host server and client workstations.

2. The ICP is utilized for electronically controlling access to visitors, delivery personnel, members, and employee entrances to the building.

3. The ICP consists of control panels, door contacts, glass break detectors, and keypad devices. The host server communicates with the field panels via the Owner’s local/wide area network.

B. Intrusion Alarm System

1. Provide ICP control panel located in the MCR Room as indicated on project drawings. Panels support door contacts, glass break devices, and keypads with locking control outputs and multiple general purpose input/output modules for automation.

2. Provide alarm contacts and request-to-exit motion detectors for card reader controlled doors.

3. Provide interface to ADA automatic/power assist door operator and corresponding actuator push plates.

4. Provide 12/24VDC ACAMS device and lock power supplies as indicated on project drawings.

5. Provide battery backup of system components and power supplies.

C. Fire/Life-Safety System Interface

1. Coordinate with Fire/Life-Safety system contractor to automatically drop power from stairwell, elevator vestibule lobby, and other doors within the path of egress upon alarm activation of the Fire/Life-Safety system.



2. Coordinate with Fire/Life-Safety system contractor for scheduled release of electromagnetic door holders on designated card reader doors as indicated on project drawings. Provide ACAMS output modules as necessary to interface with Fire/Life-Safety system.

3. Provide emergency door release pull stations with double pole, double throw contacts located in balconies as indicated on project drawings. First set of contacts to break power to electrified door hardware on adjacent card reader door. Second set of contacts to connect with ACAMS. Provide ACAMS input modules as necessary to monitor status of emergency door release pull stations.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Contractor Qualifications: Submit certification letters for the manufacturer of the ACAMS.

B. Product Data: Submit product information for components specified herein.

C. Shop Drawings:

1. Device placement on floor plans


a. ICP control panel

b. ICP card reader and input/output modules

c. ICP power supplies

d. Door Contacts

e. Alarm contacts and request-to-exit sensors

f. Interface to electrified door hardware

g. Interface to fire/life-safety system

h. Cable conductors (identify conductors on the point-to-point diagrams with the same tag as the installed conductor)

3. Schedules: Provide schedules for ICP control panels that show each point ID with a description of the connected devices.

4. Block Diagram/Riser Diagram: Show the ICP components, conduit, wire types, and sizes between them, including cabling interties between termination hardware.


1.4 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Provide 10% spare parts of total installed the following: (Round up to the next complete device)



1. Door Contacts, Glass Breaks, Keypads

2. Fuses (Place five (5) of each type of fuse inside each SEC and power supply housing).

3. Relays

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Intrusion and Alarm Monitoring System

1. Bosch Software

2.2 INTRUSION CONTROLLERS

A. General

1. An intelligent controller with integrated battery backup, database, and communication ports.

2. Supports multiple communication channels to which a variety of devices can connect.

3. Supports hardware modules used for additional memory and/or for future feature enhancements.

4. Functions provided include:

a. Central control for attached devices and addressable modules

b. Makes decisions for access

c. Responds to monitor activity

d. Receives input to control its decision making

e. Reports activity to other devices

B. Features

1. Capable of utilizing keypad commands to activate/deactivate events

C. MANUFACTURER

1. Digital keypad – Bosch model D1255

2. Alarm panel – Bosch model D7412GV4 or D9412 GV4, with latest version of RPS software.

2.3 EQUIPMENT ENCLOSURES



A. General

1. Provide enclosures with butt hinged and lockable door containing a lock kit (keyed alike with other security enclosures on the project).

2. Provide perforated back panel for mounting control boards, relays, and terminal strips with enclosure.

3. Provide slotted wiring duct for routing security cabling within enclosure.

B. Security Equipment Cabinets



3. Finish: Black

4. Manufacturer:

a. Bosch

2.4 TERMINAL BLOCKS

A. General

1. Provide terminal blocks inside SEC for demarcation of elevator traveler and security cabling.

2. Provide DIN rails and other mounting accessories for a complete installation.

B. Modular Terminal Strips

1. Push-in style bridging system that utilizes the IDC termination method

2. Feed through style, single level

3. Modular design

4. Capable of mounting on standard 35mm DIN rails

5. Manufacturer:

a. Phoenix Contact # QTC-1, 5 terminal block

b. Weidmuller

c. Or Equal

6. Accessories:

a. Phoenix Contact # NS-35/7, 5 DIN rail



b. Weidmuller

c. Or Equal

2.5 WIREWAYS

A. General:

1. Provide screw cover wireway sections with open top assembly as shown on Security drawings.

2. Provide closure plates to secure end of wireway sections.

B. Screw Cover Gutter Wireways




4. Manufacturer:

a. Copper B-Line # 4448-G-NK lay-in painted wireway without knockouts

b. Hoffman # F44T148GVP lay-in painted wireway without knockouts

c. Or Equal

5. Accessories:

a. Cooper B-Line # 44-E-NK closure plate without knockouts

b. Hoffman # A44GCPNK closure plate without knockouts

c. Or Equal

2.6 MAGNETIC CONTACT SWITCHES

A. Wood, Steel, and Hallow Metal Doors

1. General

a. Mounting: Flush

b. Contacts: Double Pole, Double Throw

c. Gap Distance: 0.5” maximum

2. Manufacturer

a. GE Security #1076D-N 1” alarm contact switch



b. Or Equal

2.7 REQUEST-TO-EXIT MOTION SENSORS

A. General

1. Power: 12 or 24VDC, 35mA

2. Relay Output: 2 form “C” contacts

3. Adjustable relay latch time

4. Programmable retrigger or non-retrigger mode

5. Fail Secure Mode

6. Radio Frequency Interference (RFI) Immunity range from 26 to 1,000 MHz at 50 v/m

B. Manufacturer

1. Kantech T REX Or Equal

2.8 DOOR CONTACTS

A. General

1. Magnetic door contact switch, floor/surface mount, exposed & non-exposed wiring

B. Manufacturer

1. Magnetic door contact switch, surface mount, non-exposed wiring – Sentrol 1042 TW Series or equivalent

2. Magnetic door contact switch, surface mount, exposed wiring – Sentrol 2505 Series or equivalent

3. Magnetic door contact switch, floor mount (high security) – Sentrol model 2707A or equivalent

2.9 GLASS BREAKS

A. General

1. Glass break detectors

B. Manufacturer

1. Passive infrared/microwave 60-degree long range detector - Bosch ISC-PDL1- WA18G or equivalent.

2. Passive infrared/microwave 50’x50’ wide angle detector - Bosch ISC-CDL1- WA15G or equivalent.



3. Passive infrared/microwave 360 degree detector - Bosch DS936, DS 937, DS9370, DS9371, DS939 or equivalent.

4. Passive infrared/microwave detector (flush-mounted) – Honeywell 995 (Long or Wide range)

5. Passive infrared/microwave detector (surface or flush-mounted) - Honeywell IS-280CM (360).

6. Passive infrared/microwave detector (surface or flush-mounted) – Honeywell DT636OSTC (360) – For high ceiling 8 – 16 feet high.

7. Glass break sensor – Honeywell FG1625F or equivalent

2.10 POWER SUPPLIES

A. General

1. Provides a 120VAC to 12 and 24VDC output, fully supervised power supply to power ACAMS field devices.

2. Utilizes 16 PTC Class 2 rated power limited outputs.

3. Short circuit and thermal overload protection.

4. Integrated charger for sealed lead acid or gel type batteries.

5. Capable of providing a 10 amp supply current.

6. Supports a fire alarm disconnect to relay that individually selects any or all of the 16 outputs.

B. Manufacturer

1. LifeSafety # FPO250/250-4DE2 power supply

2.11 BATTERIES

A. General:

1. Voltage: 12.00 2. Amps: 12.00

2. Bosch D126.12V, 7AH batteries – two (2) for each panel as required for four (4) hours

3. Bosch D122 Battery Harness

B. Manufacturer:

1. Bosch D126 sealed lead acid 12V 12Ah battery



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. ACAMS Control Panels

1. Place power supply and associated hardware in same location.

2. Install supervisory and end-of–line (EOL) resistors as required. Refer to Section 28 0000 – Basic Security Requirements for EOL supervision requirements.

B. Four-State End-of-Line (EOL) Supervision

1. Provide designated resistors at device end of line per manufacturer’s EOL recommendation to provide four-state supervision of security device and cabling.

2. Provide EOL supervision for alarm contacts, local alarm sounders, motion detectors, glass break detectors, help/duress buttons, and other designated security devices connected to the ACAMS and IDS.

3. Provide the following states of supervision:

a. Contact closed = Secure

b. Contact open = Alarm

c. Short circuit = Line fault

d. Open circuit = Line fault

C. Door Contacts

1. Install on protected (secured) side of door.

2. Install 6” from leading edge at top of door.

D. Request-To Exit Motion Detectors

1. Mount motion detector on the secured (protected) side of door.

2. Install motion detector so that detection pattern is not obstructed by Exit Signs, light fixtures and other objects that would interfere with proper operation.

3. Adjust relay hold time and pattern to properly detect valid exit and allow shunting of door contact.

4. Adjust detection sensitivity to pulse.

5. Mask detector lens to provide a confined detection area limited to the door handle or pushbar.

6. Run wire inside structural tube steel frame into back of condulet for cage locations.



3.2 PROGRAMMING

A. Prior to the completion of construction, schedule a meeting with the Owner to determine the programming criteria. Discuss the following:

1. Access card levels and door groupings

2. Alarm priority levels

3. Schedules and time codes

4. Holidays and holiday types (priorities)

5. Action/responses from individual input points

6. Standard and custom (expanded) reports

7. Defining alarm messages and standard response messages applicable to site

8. Routing of alarm points to selected pagers

9. Routing of alarm points to operator’s workstations, printers, and history files

10. Coordinate implementation of graphics with Owner. Develop sample graphic complete with icons and text. Alarms to appear on building floor plans depicting the nature and location of alarms. Review and revise graphic layout as required by Owner.

B. Document the results of the meeting and perform necessary programming to achieve the Owner’s requests.

C. System Operation, Alarm and Reporting Function: Program door control panel tamper switches to immediately report as a separate “tamper” point to the system resulting in an alarm condition displayed in both text and graphic form on the applicable workstation(s) and an alarm message transmitted to the appropriate pager(s).

D. Receive CAD drawing files of floor plans and perform the following relative to system graphics:

1. Delete non-applicable drawing layers and details to arrive at simple floor plans of the building as built.

2. Convert drawings to a graphic file format compatible with the Owner’s access control and alarm monitoring system.

3. Load drawing files into the system.

4. Apply new and predefined icons and other points on each graphic to indicate point and control status.

5. Link graphic images to reader, monitor and control points.

E. Program routing of monitor and control points. Route activations and restore messages to one or more of the following locations as directed by the Owner’s Representative:



1. One or more system workstations;

2. One or more system printers;

3. One or more alphanumeric pagers;

4. History files in addition to the above;

5. History files only.

F. Program the system such that reliance on a remote host for routine building operations, such as scheduled door commands and conditional events, are minimized to the greatest extent possible and decisions are made at the local building controller.

G. Program the system in a manner that minimizes the amount of time required for the users to make updates and maintain the system on a daily basis especially updates that impact card holder record updates. Nested programs, such as reader groupings used in access codes shall be used to the greatest extent possible such that single actions are required to update an entire card data population. If there is a question regarding the appropriate approach to programming, given the flexibility of most systems, contact the Engineer prior to any initial programming

H. Complete other programming as required for system operation.

I. Program and setup the system such that no additional programming other than entering new access cards is required. Include setup of available features of the software.

J. Use the point names provided on the system point schedule.

K. Perform 2 full system back-ups at completion of initial programming and deliver one copy to owner with letter of Transmittal explaining information included in back-up and brief description of recovery procedures. Label the second CD-ROM and store onsite. Perform back-ups on a regular bases through the remainder of the project.

L. Customize menus with the assistance of the factory to “gray-out” features not used on project (such as elevator control).

M. Perform field software changes after the initial programming session to "fine tune" operating parameters and sequence of operations based on revised operating requirements.

3.3 TESTING

A. Commission ICP in accordance with Section 28 0800.

END OF SECTION


EARVIN MAGIC JOHNSON PARK – PHASE 1A VIDEO SURVEILLANCE SYSTEMLOS ANGELES, CA 28 2300-1COUNTY OF LOS ANGELES COMMUNITY DEVELOPMENT COMMISSIONAHBE PROJECT NO. 116030.01 INTEGRAL GROUP

SECTION 28 2300VIDEO SURVEILLANCE SYSTEM

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Materials, equipment fabrication, installation, and tests in conformity with applicable Codes and authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Complete system is defined as cameras, PoE switches, Power Supplies, NVMS Servers, Racks, Storage Servers, Software Licenses, Integration Licenses, etc., needed to achieve a complete and functional system. Documents do not show or list every item to be provided. When an item not shown or listed is clearly necessary for proper installation and operation of the equipment and systems, the Security Contractor must provide, install, test, and certify the item at no increase to the contract price.

C. The Security Contractor shall provide all software/camera licenses for all new cameras added to the Video Management System.

D. The Security Contractor is responsible for providing all patch cables necessary to tie into the network infrastructure. (See Technology package for acceptable product.)

E. Indoor cameras shall be powered via the Category 6 cable connection from the POE network switch. Network cabling shall be provided by others, network switch and camera shall be and installed provided by security contractor.

F. Outdoor cameras shall be powered via local fiber-copper media converter installed at camera location. , network switch and camera shall be provided and installed by security contractor.

G. The Access Control System (ACS) and the CCTV system shall interface together allowing a visual of a perimeter breach where cameras are placed. An example would be a “door forced open” alarm where the associated camera would show a visual image of the door in alarm condition. This added information will allow the responding party to respond appropriately. Camera call up shall be integrated and programmed for all camera locations. Triggers to include: Duress alarm, Door forced, door held open, invalid card read.

H. All cameras shall be recorded on an new “Network Video Management System” (NVMS) in the MCR room.

I. Provide installation, testing, adjustment, and initial programming for all equipment.

J. The Contractor shall be responsible for fully implementing the functions described in the specifications and shown on the drawings. Contractor shall coordinate specific programming requirements, including CCTV device and software monitoring configuration with County of Los Angeles Internal Services Department Information Technology Services.

K. The Contractor shall possess all applicable Contractor licenses.

L. Provide (6 hours) of training to County of Los Angeles Internal Services Department Information Technology Services, adjustment, servicing, and repair of this system.



M. Section Includes:

1. CCTV video management software

2. CCTV network video recording system

3. CCTV fixed IP interior and exterior cameras

N. Products Furnished and Installed Under another Section:

1. 120V power

2. Ethernet cable for IP cameras

3. Network ports in the IDF for CCTV connectivity to local/wide area network

O. Related Sections:


2. Section 28 0000 – Basic Security Requirements: includes general project requirements, submittal formats, installation, and warranty requirements.

3. Section 28 0513 – Security System Cabling: includes product information for wire and cable needed to support the video surveillance system.

4. Section 28 0553 – Security System Labeling: includes label types and formats for security devices.

5. Section 28 0880 – Security System Acceptance Testing: includes the integrating testing/commissioning requirements for the video surveillance system.


A. Overview

1. A comprehensive and feature rich IP video surveillance system to monitor the flow of students, employees, and visitors throughout the building.

2. The VSS consists of host servers, NVR software, fixed IP cameras, and Pan-Tilt- Zoom Cameras.

3. The NVR software will reside on commercial-off-the-shelf (COTS) servers to provide a non-proprietary software based video solution.

B. CCTV Camera System

1. Provide rack-mount NVR servers and RAID-6 storage devices at MCR as indicated on project drawings. Include the following components:



a. NVR servers

b. Storage appliance server and RAID-6 controller

2. Provide Flir (formely DVTel) software on NVR servers with sufficient software licenses to support CCTV cameras indicated on project drawings.

3. Provide storage to store 30 days minimum, 15 FPS (frame per second) of continuous recording in high resolution.

4. Provide 4 megapixel (2688 x 1520) IP-cameras as shown on the project drawings.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit product information for components specified herein.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Floor Plans: 1/8 inch scale floor and site plans showing the locations of devices and cable routing paths with cable types and quantity called out.


a. Video surveillance system, monitors, and recording equipment

b. Devices connected to the system

c. Conductors (identify conductors on the point-to-point diagrams with the same tag as the installed conductor)

3. Block Diagram/Riser Diagram: Show the video surveillance system components, conduit, wire types, and sizes between them, including cabling interties between termination hardware.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 NETWORK VIDEO RECORDING SYSTEM

A. NVR Server

1. Processor: Enterprise Six-core Intel® Xeon® processor E5-2600 product family

2. Memory: 16 GB RDIMM RAM (2X8GB)

3. Hard Drive Configuration: RAID-5

4. Hard Drives: Enterprise class, Hot-swap HDDS Max Internal Storage: 96TB



5. OS: Microsoft Windows Server 2012 R2 Embedded

6. Power Supply: Dual, Hot-plug, Redundant Power Supply, 495W, 100~240VAC 50/60Hz (auto)

B. NVR Hardware Manufacturer

1. FLIR (formerly DVTel)

a. FLIR USS ENTERPRISE-CLASS Series Servers with hot spare drive

C. NVR Software Manufacturer

1. Latitude Software

D. WORK STATION

1. Dell Optiplex 5040 small form factor

2. Windows 7 Pro- 64 bit

3. INTEL Core i5 Processor, Quad Core, 8GB DDR3 1600MHz

4. 2TB @7200RPM, 8x DVD+/- RW Optical Disk Drive, Support for Triple Display Display port or HDMI (for systems up to 2 cameras)

5. Dell S2240M- 22” Monitor

2.2 NETWORK IP CAMERAS

A. Complete prepackaged unit containing:

1. Flir 3304 series

2. Resolution: 15 FPS 2560 x 1440.

3. Video compression format: H.264 and M-JPEG

4. Power over Ethernet (IEEE 802.1x)

5. Connectors:

a. Ethernet RJ45

b. Terminal block for alarm input and output

c. Power – 3-pin terminal block

B. Features

1. 2D/3D/color noise reduction

2. Programmable back light compensation



3. Onboard intelligent motion detection

4. Automatic exposure and gain control functionality

C. Manufacturer

1. FLIR (formerly DVTel)

2. FLIR 3304 series

3. Accessories

Mounting OptionsCM-CAPX-31 Pendant Cap for CM-31xx Series and CM-33xx SeriesWall

Mount CM-ARMX-31 Threaded Wall Arm for use with CM-31xx, CM-33xx andCM-62xx Series Minidome Pendant Caps

CM-4S-31 4S Mounting Adapter for CM-31xx and CM-33 SeriesSurface Mount CM-BKBX-31 Back Box for CM-31xx and CM-33xx Series

CX-POLE-0 Pole Mount Adapter Bracket includes CX-ARMX-1

CM-CAPX-31 Pendant Cap for CM-31xx Series and CM-33xx Series

Pole

CM-F150-62 1.5” NPT Inner Thread (f) to 1/4 turn (m)

Recessed

CM-RCSD-G2 Recessed Kit for CM-31xx, CM-33xx, and CM-62XX Series Mini-dome Cameras

Pendant Mount

CM-CAPX-31 Pendant Cap for CM-31xx Series and CM-33xx Series

D. LICENSE

1. FLIR (formerly DVTel) DVTel LAT-C-CHAN

E. MEDIA CONVERTERS with PoE

F. Manufacturer : Omnitron Systems

G. Part number: OminCoverter 9479-0-11W including the power supply.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. NVR Servers and RAID Storage Device

1. Rack mount servers in the telecommunications equipment rack located at MCR Room.

2. Install MS Windows Server 2008 and necessary client access licenses.

3. Install NVR software.



4. Coordinate with the UCPD to configure NVR software to the University’s existing standards.

5. Program record rate for network cameras at 15 frames per second at full resolution using MEG compression format continuous recording.

B. CCTV Cameras

1. Install camera dome body above ceiling line so only dome exposed. For installations within a non-accessible ceiling, coordinate with electrical contractor to terminate conduit directly to housing for a complete plenum rated installation.

2. Adjust the wide dynamic range, gain control, and noise reduction settings on each camera as required to provide clear and crisp video images.

3. Confirm electrical rough-in locations, field of view and lens required for each camera with Engineer and parks prior to installation.

3.2 TESTING

A. Commission the VSS in accordance with Section 28 0880.

END OF SECTION


EARVIN MAGIC JOHNSON PARK – PHASE 1A DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM LOS ANGELES, CA (DELEGATED DESIGN) COUNTY OF LOS ANGELES COMMUNITY DEVELOPMENT COMMISSION 28 3111-1 AHBE PROJECT NO. 116030.01 INTEGRAL GROUP

SECTION 28 3111 DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM (DELEGATED DESIGN)

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Work under this section consists of all engineering, installation labor, materials, equipment, programming, services, permits, fees and transportation necessary for, and/or reasonably incidental to, the construction and completion in working order of the work specified herein.

B. Work includes, but is not limited to the following:

1. Complete system design, engineering, testing and final acceptance by Owner and Authority having jurisdiction.

2. Life safety fire alarm detection and signaling system.

3. Plan check approval.

4. Furnishing and installation of equipment and devices.

5. Wiring in Conduit and connections.

6. Programming, testing per NFPA 72, cleaning, adjusting of completed work.

7. Wiring diagrams, shop drawings, equipment data.

8. Complete warranty for five years. Proposal for subsequent maintenance contract including service, testing and repair or replacement.

9. All work and material for complete and operable systems as indicated or specified.

10. As constructed record drawings.

11. Permits, inspections, fees.

12. Identification and instruction in writing.

13. Coordination with existing conditions and work of other trades.

14. Furnishing of special back boxes for installation under electrical section.

15. Extending 120 or 240 volt power from electrical panelboard, coordinating and updating load schedules with Owner.



C. Section Includes:

1. Fire-alarm control unit.

2. Manual fire-alarm boxes.

3. System smoke detectors.

4. Air-sampling smoke detectors.

5. Non-system smoke detectors.

6. Heat detectors.

7. Notification appliances.

8. Device guards.

9. Firefighters' two-way telephone communication service.

10. Firefighters' smoke-control station.

11. Magnetic door holders.

12. Remote annunciator.

13. Addressable interface device.

14. Digital alarm communicator transmitter.

15. Radio alarm transmitter.

16. Network communications.

17. System printer.

D. Related Requirements:

1. Section 280513 "Conductors and Cables for Electronic Safety and Security" for cables and conductors for fire-alarm systems.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. EMT: Electrical Metallic Tubing.

B. FACP: Fire Alarm Control Panel.

C. HLI: High Level Interface.

D. NICET: National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies.

E. PC: Personal computer.



F. VESDA: Very Early Smoke-Detection Apparatus.


A. Product Data: For each type of product, including furnished options and accessories.

1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions, profiles, and finishes.

2. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, and electrical characteristics.

B. Product Samples: For each device provide product sample for color and product review.

C. Shop Drawings: For fire-alarm system.

1. Comply with recommendations and requirements in the "Documentation" section of the "Fundamentals" chapter in NFPA 72.

2. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

3. Include details of equipment assemblies. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and locations. Indicate conductor sizes, indicate termination locations and requirements, and distinguish between factory and field wiring.

4. Detail assembly and support requirements.

5. Include voltage drop calculations for notification-appliance circuits.

6. Include battery-size calculations.

7. Include input/output matrix.

8. Include statement from manufacturer that all equipment and components have been tested as a system and meet all requirements in this Specification and in NFPA 72.

9. Include performance parameters and installation details for each detector.

10. Verify that each duct detector is listed for complete range of air velocity, temperature, and humidity possible when air-handling system is operating.

11. Provide program report showing that air-sampling detector pipe layout balances pneumatically within the airflow range of the air-sampling detector.

12. Include plans, sections, and elevations of heating, ventilating, and air-conditioning ducts, drawn to scale; coordinate location of duct smoke detectors and access to them.

a. Show critical dimensions that relate to placement and support of sampling tubes, detector housing, and remote status and alarm indicators.

b. Show field wiring required for HVAC unit shutdown on alarm.

c. Locate detectors according to manufacturer's written recommendations.



d. Show air-sampling detector pipe routing.

13. Include voice/alarm signaling-service equipment rack or console layout, grounding schematic, amplifier power calculation, and single-line connection diagram.

14. Extend 120 volt power from electrical panelboard, coordinating and updating load schedules with Owner.

D. General Submittal Requirements:

1. Submittals shall be approved by authorities having jurisdiction prior to submitting them to Architect.

2. Shop Drawings shall be prepared by persons with the following qualifications:

a. Trained and certified by manufacturer in fire-alarm system design.

b. NICET-certified, fire-alarm technician; Level III minimum.

c. Licensed or certified by authorities having jurisdiction.

E. Delegated-Design Submittal: For notification appliances and smoke and heat detectors, in addition to submittals listed above, indicate compliance with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

1. Drawings showing the location of each notification appliance and smoke and heat detector, ratings of each, and installation details as needed to comply with listing conditions of the device.

2. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting the spacing and sensitivity of detection, complying with NFPA 72. Calculate spacing and intensities for strobe signals and sound-pressure levels for audible appliances.

3. Indicate audible appliances required to produce square wave signal per NFPA 72.

4. Prepare complete plans, risers, wiring diagrams, and installation drawings, coordinated with the work of other trades, for the fire alarm system stamped by a registered engineer where required by the inspecting agencies.

5. Plans shall be prepared under the supervision of a qualified technician who is experienced with the type of work specified herein and is currently certified by the National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies (NICET) as an engineering technician with minimum level III certification.

6. Obtain governing agency approval for fire alarm system after submitting shop drawings and before installing any portion of the system.

7. Obtain and incorporate Architectural and Owners review comments and submit modifications to authority having jurisdiction for final approval, bring any conflicts to the Architects and Owners attention. Install system per reviewed shop drawings.

F. Administrative



1. Permit application

2. Pay all plan review and inspection fees

3. Include the following installing contractors information:

a. Installing contractors name, address phone number.

b. Contractors license number.

c. Local business license number.

d. Include a copy of workers compensation insurance certificate.

e. Evidence of Contractor personnel NICET Certification.

f. List of contractor personal who will be working on the installation.

4. Include the following Project information:

a. Site address.

b. Basis for installation / Building code occupancy classification.

G. Fire alarm equipment

1. Include manufacturers specification sheets for all components

2. Identify equipment application per listing and approvals

3. Include CSFM listing sheets for all required systems and components numbers

H. General information

1. Indicate appropriate codes and standards, including reference edition.

2. Indicate type of system or service involved.

3. Include written sequence of operation or matrix table.

4. Indicate HVAC equipment locations and CFM.

5. Indicate any special system features or operations.

6. Indicate all required identification and labeling. Include locations for each item and proposed nomenclature.

I. Plans and details

1. Include the following information:

a. Scaled reflected ceiling and floor plans, including north reference.



b. Completed title block indicating project site address and installing contractors address.

c. Identify each room and its proposed use.

d. Locate all devices, cabinets and components including end of line devices.

e. Accurate legend of symbols for all fire alarm devices being installed, conforming with construction documents.

f. Identify circuit styles, designations and methods.

g. Include building cross sections, include attic, soffit or ceiling details.

h. Indicate location of sprinkler system test valve.

i. Include voltage drop calculations.

j. Include description of zone assignments / device addresses.

k. Indicate through penetration fire stopping details and specifications.

l. Include reflected ceiling plans showing duct diffusers, lighting fixtures, sprinklers, speakers, ceiling types and changes in elevations. Locate all fire alarm ceiling mounted devices in relation to work of other trades and other ceiling components.

m. Elevation detail of manual pull station installation and visual alarm signaling devices. Note that existing device mounting heights and locations may not comply with current codes.

n. Indicate device mounting heights coordinated with architectural elevations for wall mounted initiation and notification devices.

o. Include power supply source and details.

J. Riser diagram

1. Indicate conductor information:

a. Size.

b. Stranding.

c. Insulation type.

2. Identification of wire quantities and conduit or raceway sizes.

3. Include conduit fill calculations.

4. Indicate locations for end of line devices

K. Additional requirements



1. Point-to-point wiring diagrams for overall system and components, including 120 volt power distribution and interface with the HVAC and fire protection systems.

2. Typical device wiring diagrams.

3. Battery calculations to meet AHJ minimum hour requirements.

4. Details for support and anchorage of all fire alarm equipment weighing over 20 pounds.

5. Include physical and electrical characteristics of equipment to indicate conformance with the specifications.

6. Annunciator configuration and designations.

7. Revised panel schedules showing 120 volt circuit loads.

8. System Operation Description: Detailed description for this Project, including method of operation and supervision of each type of circuit and sequence of operations for manually and automatically initiated system inputs and outputs. Manufacturer's standard descriptions for generic systems are not acceptable.

9. Device Address List: Coordinate with final system programming.

10. Duct Smoke Detectors: Performance parameters and installation details for each detector, verifying that each detector is listed for the complete range of air velocity, temperature, and humidity possible when air-handling system is operating.

11. Ductwork Coordination Drawings: Plans, sections, and elevations of ducts, drawn to scale and coordinating the installation of duct smoke detectors and access to them. Show critical dimensions that relate to placement and support of sampling tubes, the detector housing, and remote status and alarm indicators. Locate detectors according to manufacturer's written recommendations.

12. Audible/visual/Alarm Signaling Service: Equipment rack or console layout, grounding schematic, amplifier power calculation, and single-line connection diagram.


A. Qualification Data: For Installer.

B. Seismic Qualification Data: Certificates, for fire-alarm control unit, accessories, and components, from manufacturer.

1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation.

2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.

3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their installation requirements.

C. Field quality-control reports.



1.6 SAMPLE WARRANTY: FOR SPECIAL WARRANTY.

1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fire-alarm systems and components to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

1. In addition to items specified in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following and deliver copies to authorities having jurisdiction:

a. Comply with the "Records" section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" chapter in NFPA 72.

b. Provide "Fire Alarm and Emergency Communications System Record of Completion Documents" according to the "Completion Documents" Article in the "Documentation" section of the "Fundamentals" chapter in NFPA 72.

c. Complete wiring diagrams showing connections between all devices and equipment. Each conductor shall be numbered at every junction point with indication of origination and termination points.

d. Riser diagram.

e. Device addresses.

f. Air-sampling system sample port locations and modeling program report showing layout meets performance criteria.

g. Record copy of site-specific software.

h. Provide "Inspection and Testing Form" according to the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" chapter in NFPA 72, and include the following:

1) Equipment tested.

2) Frequency of testing of installed components.

3) Frequency of inspection of installed components.

4) Requirements and recommendations related to results of maintenance.

5) Manufacturer's user training manuals.

i. Manufacturer's required maintenance related to system warranty requirements.

j. Abbreviated operating instructions for mounting at fire-alarm control unit and each annunciator unit.

B. Software and Firmware Operational Documentation:

1. Software operating and upgrade manuals.

2. Program Software Backup: On magnetic media or compact disk, complete with data files.



3. Device address list.

4. Printout of software application and graphic screens.

1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS

A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Lamps for Remote Indicating Lamp Units: Quantity equal to 10 percent of amount installed, but no fewer than one unit.

2. Lamps for Strobe Units: Quantity equal to 10 percent of amount installed, but no fewer than one unit.

3. Smoke Detectors, Fire Detectors: Quantity equal to 10 percent of amount of each type installed, but no fewer than one unit of each type.

4. Detector Bases: Quantity equal to two percent of amount of each type installed, but no fewer than one unit of each type.

5. Keys and Tools: One extra set for access to locked or tamper-proofed components.

6. Audible and Visual Notification Appliances: One of each type installed.

7. Fuses: Two of each type installed in the system. Provide in a box or cabinet with compartments marked with fuse types and sizes.

8. Filters for Air-Sampling Detectors: Quantity equal to two percent of amount of each type installed, but no fewer than one unit of each type.

9. Air-Sampling Fan: Quantity equal to one for every five detectors, but no fewer than one unit of each type.


A. Installer Qualifications: Installation shall be by personnel certified by NICET as fire-alarm Level IV technician.

B. NFPA Certification: Obtain certification according to NFPA 72 by an NRTL (nationally recognized testing laboratory).

1.10 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Perform a full test of the existing system prior to starting work. Document any equipment or components not functioning as designed.

B. Interruption of Existing Fire-Alarm Service: Do not interrupt fire-alarm service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary guard service according to requirements indicated:



1. Notify Construction Manager no fewer than seven days in advance of proposed interruption of fire-alarm service.

2. Do not proceed with interruption of fire-alarm service without Owner's written permission.

C. Use of Devices during Construction: Protect devices during construction unless devices are placed in service to protect the facility during construction.

1.11 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace fire-alarm system equipment and components that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Extent: All equipment and components not covered in the Maintenance Service Agreement.

2. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Source Limitations for Fire-Alarm System and Components: Components shall be compatible with, and operate as an extension of, existing system. Provide system manufacturer's certification that all components provided have been tested as, and will operate as, a system.

B. Noncoded, UL-certified addressable system, with multiplexed signal transmission strobe evacuation.

C. Automatic sensitivity control of certain smoke detectors.

D. All components provided shall be listed for use with the selected system.

E. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

2.2 SYSTEMS OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTION

A. Fire-alarm signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices and systems:

1. Manual stations.

2. Heat detectors.

3. Smoke detectors.

4. Duct smoke detectors.

5. Carbon monoxide detectors.

6. Combustible gas detectors.



7. Automatic sprinkler system water flow.

8. Preaction system.

9. Fire-extinguishing system operation.

10. Fire standpipe system.

11. Dry system pressure flow switch.

12. Fire pump running.

B. Fire-alarm signal shall initiate the following actions:

1. Continuously operate alarm notification appliances.

2. Identify alarm and specific initiating device at fire-alarm control unit, connected network control panels, off-premises network control panels.

3. Transmit an alarm signal to the remote alarm receiving station.

4. Unlock electric door locks in designated egress paths.

5. Release fire and smoke doors held open by magnetic door holders.

6. Activate voice/alarm communication system.

7. Switch heating, ventilating, and air-conditioning equipment controls to fire-alarm mode.

8. Activate smoke-control system (smoke management) at firefighters' smoke-control system panel.

9. Close smoke dampers in air ducts of designated air-conditioning duct systems.

10. Activate preaction system.

11. Activate emergency lighting control.

12. Activate emergency shutoffs for gas and fuel supplies.

13. Record events in the system memory.

14. Record events by the system printer.

15. Indicate device in alarm on the graphic annunciator.

C. Supervisory signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices and actions:

1. Valve supervisory switch.

2. High- or low-air-pressure switch of a dry-pipe or preaction sprinkler system.

3. Alert and Action signals of air-sampling detector system.



4. Independent fire-detection and -suppression systems.

5. User disabling of zones or individual devices.

6. Loss of communication with any panel on the network.

D. System trouble signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices and actions:

1. Open circuits, shorts, and grounds in designated circuits.

2. Opening, tampering with, or removing alarm-initiating and supervisory signal-initiating devices.

3. Loss of communication with any addressable sensor, input module, relay, control module, remote annunciator, printer interface, or Ethernet module.

4. Loss of primary power at fire-alarm control unit.

5. Ground or a single break in internal circuits of fire-alarm control unit.

6. Abnormal ac voltage at fire-alarm control unit.

7. Break in standby battery circuitry.

8. Failure of battery charging.

9. Abnormal position of any switch at fire-alarm control unit or annunciator.

10. Voice signal amplifier failure.

11. Hose cabinet door open.

E. System Supervisory Signal Actions:

1. Initiate notification appliances.

2. Identify specific device initiating the event at fire-alarm control unit, connected network control panels, off-premises network control panels.

3. Record the event on system printer.

4. After a time delay of 200 seconds, transmit a trouble or supervisory signal to the remote alarm receiving station.

5. Transmit system status to building management system.

6. Display system status on graphic annunciator.

2.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Seismic Performance: Fire-alarm control unit and raceways shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.



1. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit will be fully operational after the seismic event."

2.4 FIRE-ALARM CONTROL UNIT

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Faraday.

2. Fike Corporation.

3. Gamewell - FCI by Honeywell.

4. Notifier.

5. Silent Knight.

B. General Requirements for Fire-Alarm Control Unit:

1. Field-programmable, microprocessor-based, modular, power-limited design with electronic modules, complying with UL 864.

a. System software and programs shall be held in nonvolatile flash, electrically erasable, programmable, read-only memory, retaining the information through failure of primary and secondary power supplies.

b. Include a real-time clock for time annotation of events on the event recorder and printer.

c. Provide communication between the FACP and remote circuit interface panels, annunciators, and displays.

d. The FACP shall be listed for connection to a central-station signaling system service.

e. Provide nonvolatile memory for system database, logic, and operating system and event history. The system shall require no manual input to initialize in the event of a complete power down condition. The FACP shall provide a minimum 500-event history log.

2. Addressable Initiation Device Circuits: The FACP shall indicate which communication zones have been silenced and shall provide selective silencing of alarm notification appliance by building communication zone.

3. Addressable Control Circuits for Operation of Notification Appliances and Mechanical Equipment: The FACP shall be listed for releasing service.

C. Alphanumeric Display and System Controls: Arranged for interface between human operator at fire-alarm control unit and addressable system components including annunciation and supervision. Display alarm, supervisory, and component status messages and the programming and control menu.



1. Annunciator and Display: Liquid-crystal type, two line(s) of 80 characters, minimum.

2. Keypad: Arranged to permit entry and execution of programming, display, and control commands and to indicate control commands to be entered into the system for control of smoke-detector sensitivity and other parameters.

D. Initiating-Device, Notification-Appliance, and Signaling-Line Circuits:

1. Pathway Class Designations: NFPA 72, Class B.

2. Pathway Survivability: Level 0.

3. Install no more than 50 addressable devices on each signaling-line circuit.

4. Serial Interfaces:

a. One dedicated RS 485 port for remote station operation using point ID DACT.

b. One RS 485 port for remote annunciators, Ethernet module, or multi-interface module (printer port).

c. One USB port for PC configuration.

d. One RS 232 port for voice evacuation interface.

5. Alarm signals from smoke detectors at pressurization air supplies have a higher priority than other alarm signals that start the system.

E. Smoke-Alarm Verification:

1. Initiate audible and visible indication of an "alarm-verification" signal at fire-alarm control unit.

2. Activate an approved "alarm-verification" sequence at fire-alarm control unit and detector.

3. Record events by the system printer.

4. Sound general alarm if the alarm is verified.

5. Cancel fire-alarm control unit indication and system reset if the alarm is not verified.

F. Notification-Appliance Circuit:

1. Audible appliances shall sound in a three-pulse temporal pattern, as defined in NFPA 72.

2. Where notification appliances provide signals to sleeping areas, the alarm signal shall be a 520-Hz square wave with an intensity 15 dB above the average ambient sound level or 5 dB above the maximum sound level, or at least 75 dBA, whichever is greater, measured at the pillow.

3. Visual alarm appliances shall flash in synchronization where multiple appliances are in the same field of view, as defined in NFPA 72.



G. Door Controls: Door hold-open devices that are controlled by smoke detectors at doors in smoke-barrier walls shall be connected to fire-alarm system.

H. Remote Smoke-Detector Sensitivity Adjustment: Controls shall select specific addressable smoke detectors for adjustment, display their current status and sensitivity settings, and change those settings. Allow controls to be used to program repetitive, time-scheduled, and automated changes in sensitivity of specific detector groups. Record sensitivity adjustments and sensitivity-adjustment schedule changes in system memory and print out the final adjusted values on system printer.

I. Transmission to Remote Alarm Receiving Station: Automatically transmit alarm, supervisory, and trouble signals to a remote alarm station.

J. Voice/Alarm Signaling Service: Central emergency communication system with redundant microphones, preamplifiers, amplifiers, and tone generators provided in a separate cabinet located in the fire command center.

1. Indicate number of alarm channels for automatic, simultaneous transmission of different announcements to different zones or for manual transmission of announcements by use of the central-control microphone. Amplifiers shall comply with UL 1711.

a. Allow the application of, and evacuation signal to, indicated number of zones and, at the same time, allow voice paging to the other zones selectively or in any combination.

b. Programmable tone and message sequence selection.

c. Standard digitally recorded messages for "Evacuation" and "All Clear."

d. Generate tones to be sequenced with audio messages of type recommended by NFPA 72 and that are compatible with tone patterns of notification-appliance circuits of fire-alarm control unit.

2. Status Annunciator: Indicate the status of various voice/alarm speaker zones and the status of firefighters' two-way telephone communication zones.

3. Preamplifiers, amplifiers, and tone generators shall automatically transfer to backup units, on primary equipment failure.

K. Printout of Events: On receipt of signal, print alarm, supervisory, and trouble events. Identify zone, device, and function. Include type of signal (alarm, supervisory, or trouble) and date and time of occurrence. Differentiate alarm signals from all other printed indications. Also print system reset event, including same information for device, location, date, and time. Commands initiate the printing of a list of existing alarm, supervisory, and trouble conditions in the system and a historical log of events.

L. Primary Power: 24-V dc obtained from 120-V ac service and a power-supply module. Initiating devices, notification appliances, signaling lines, trouble signals, supervisory and digital alarm communicator transmitters and digital alarm radio transmitters shall be powered by 24-V dc source.

1. Alarm current draw of entire fire-alarm system shall not exceed 80 percent of the power-supply module rating.



M. Secondary Power: 24-V dc supply system with batteries, automatic battery charger, and automatic transfer switch.

1. Batteries: Sealed lead calcium.

N. Instructions: Computer printout or typewritten instruction card mounted behind a plastic or glass cover in a stainless-steel or aluminum frame. Include interpretation and describe appropriate response for displays and signals. Briefly describe the functional operation of the system under normal, alarm, and trouble conditions.

2.5 MANUAL FIRE-ALARM BOXES


1. Faraday.

2. Fike Corporation.


4. Notifier.

5. Silent Knight.

B. General Requirements for Manual Fire-Alarm Boxes: Comply with UL 38. Boxes shall be finished in red with molded, raised-letter operating instructions in contrasting color; shall show visible indication of operation; and shall be mounted on recessed outlet box. If indicated as surface mounted, provide manufacturer's surface back box.

1. Single-action mechanism, pull-lever type; with integral addressable module arranged to communicate manual-station status (normal, alarm, or trouble) to fire-alarm control unit.

2. Station Reset: Key- or wrench-operated switch.

3. Weatherproof Protective Shield: Factory-fabricated, clear plastic enclosure hinged at the top to permit lifting for access to initiate an alarm.

2.6 SYSTEM SMOKE DETECTORS


1. Faraday.


3. Notifier.

4. Silent Knight.

B. General Requirements for System Smoke Detectors:



1. Comply with UL 268; operating at 24-V dc, nominal.

2. Detectors shall be four-wire type.

3. Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status (normal, alarm, or trouble) to fire-alarm control unit.

4. Base Mounting: Detector and associated electronic components shall be mounted in a twist-lock module that connects to a fixed base. Provide terminals in the fixed base for connection to building wiring.

5. Self-Restoring: Detectors do not require resetting or readjustment after actuation to restore them to normal operation.

6. Integral Visual-Indicating Light: LED type, indicating detector has operated and power-on status.

7. Remote Control: Unless otherwise indicated, detectors shall be digital-addressable type, individually monitored at fire-alarm control unit for calibration, sensitivity, and alarm condition and individually adjustable for sensitivity by fire-alarm control unit.

a. Rate-of-rise temperature characteristic of combination smoke- and heat-detection units shall be selectable at fire-alarm control unit for 15 or 20 deg F per minute.

b. Fixed-temperature sensing characteristic of combination smoke- and heat-detection units shall be independent of rate-of-rise sensing and shall be settable at fire-alarm control unit to operate at 135 or 155 deg F.

c. Multiple levels of detection sensitivity for each sensor.

d. Sensitivity levels based on time of day.

C. Photoelectric Smoke Detectors:

1. Detector address shall be accessible from fire-alarm control unit and shall be able to identify the detector's location within the system and its sensitivity setting.

2. An operator at fire-alarm control unit, having the designated access level, shall be able to manually access the following for each detector:

a. Primary status.

b. Device type.

c. Present average value.

d. Present sensitivity selected.

e. Sensor range (normal, dirty, etc.).

D. Ionization Smoke Detector:





a. Primary status.

b. Device type.




E. Duct Smoke Detectors: Photoelectric type complying with UL 268A.



a. Primary status.

b. Device type.




3. Weatherproof Duct Housing Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 4X; NRTL listed for use with the supplied detector for smoke detection in HVAC system ducts.

4. Each sensor shall have multiple levels of detection sensitivity.

5. Sampling Tubes: Design and dimensions as recommended by manufacturer for specific duct size, air velocity, and installation conditions where applied.

6. Relay Fan Shutdown: Fully programmable relay rated to interrupt fan motor-control circuit.

2.7 CARBON MONOXIDE DETECTORS

A. General: Carbon monoxide detector listed for connection to fire-alarm system.

1. Mounting: Adapter plate for outlet box mounting.

2. Testable by introducing test carbon monoxide into the sensing cell.



3. Detector shall provide alarm contacts and trouble contacts.

4. Detector shall send trouble alarm when nearing end-of-life, power supply problems, or internal faults.

5. Comply with UL 2075.

6. Locate, mount, and wire according to manufacturer's written instructions.

7. Provide means for addressable connection to fire-alarm system.

8. Test button simulates an alarm condition.

2.8 HEAT DETECTORS


1. Faraday.


3. Notifier.

4. Silent Knight.

B. General Requirements for Heat Detectors: Comply with UL 521.

1. Temperature sensors shall test for and communicate the sensitivity range of the device.

C. Heat Detector, Combination Type: Actuated by either a fixed temperature of 135 deg F or a rate of rise that exceeds 15 deg F per minute unless otherwise indicated.

1. Mounting: Twist-lock base interchangeable with smoke-detector bases.


D. Heat Detector, Fixed-Temperature Type: Actuated by temperature that exceeds a fixed temperature of 190 deg F.

1. Mounting: Twist-lock base interchangeable with smoke-detector bases.


E. Continuous Linear Heat-Detector System:

1. Detector Cable: Rated detection temperature 155 deg F. Listed for "regular" service and a standard environment. Cable includes two steel actuator wires twisted together with spring pressure, wrapped with protective tape, and finished with PVC outer sheath. Each actuator wire is insulated with heat-sensitive material that reacts with heat to allow the cable twist pressure to short circuit wires at the location of elevated temperature.



2. Control Unit: Two-zone or multizone unit as indicated. Provide same system power supply, supervision, and alarm features as specified for fire-alarm control unit.

3. Signals to Fire-Alarm Control Unit: Any type of local system trouble shall be reported to fire-alarm control unit as a composite "trouble" signal. Alarms on each detection zone shall be individually reported to central fire-alarm control unit as separately identified zones.


2.9 NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES

A. General Requirements for Notification Appliances: Individually addressed, connected to a signaling-line circuit, equipped for mounting as indicated, and with screw terminals for system connections.

B. General Requirements for Notification Appliances: Connected to notification-appliance signal circuits, zoned as indicated, equipped for mounting as indicated, and with screw terminals for system connections.

1. Combination Devices: Factory-integrated audible and visible devices in a single-mounting assembly, equipped for mounting as indicated, and with screw terminals for system connections.

C. Chimes, Low-Level Output: Vibrating type, 75-dBA minimum rated output.

D. Chimes, High-Level Output: Vibrating type, 81-dBA minimum rated output.

E. Horns: Electric-vibrating-polarized type, 24-V dc; with provision for housing the operating mechanism behind a grille. Comply with UL 464. Horns shall produce a sound-pressure level of 90 dBA, measured 10 feet from the horn, using the coded signal prescribed in UL 464 test protocol.

F. Visible Notification Appliances: Xenon strobe lights complying with UL 1971, with clear or nominal white polycarbonate lens mounted on an aluminum faceplate. The word "FIRE" is engraved in minimum 1-inch-high letters on the lens.

G. Voice/Tone Notification Appliances:

1. Comply with UL 1480.

2. Speakers for Voice Notification: Locate speakers for voice notification to provide the intelligibility requirements of the "Notification Appliances" and "Emergency Communications Systems" chapters in NFPA 72.

3. High-Range Units: Rated 2 to 15 W.

4. Low-Range Units: Rated 1 to 2 W.

5. Matching Transformers: Tap range matched to acoustical environment of speaker location.



H. Exit Marking Audible Notification Appliance:

1. Exit marking audible notification appliances shall meet the audibility requirements in NFPA 72.

2. Provide exit marking audible notification appliances at the entrance to all building exits.

3. Provide exit marking audible notification appliances at the entrance to areas of refuge with audible signals distinct from those used for building exit marking.

2.10 FIREFIGHTERS' TWO-WAY TELEPHONE COMMUNICATION SERVICE

A. Dedicated, two-way, supervised, telephone voice communication links between fire-alarm control unit and remote firefighters' telephone stations. Supervised telephone lines shall be connected to talk circuits by controls in a control module. Provide the following:

1. Common-talk type for firefighter use only.

2. Controls to disconnect phones from talk circuits if too many phones are in use simultaneously. An indicator lamp shall flash if a phone is disconnected from the talk circuits.

3. Addressable firefighters' phone modules to monitor and control a loop of firefighter phones. Module shall be capable of differentiating between normal, off-hook, and trouble conditions.

4. Audible Pulse and Tone Generator, and High-Intensity Lamp: When a remote telephone is taken off the hook, it causes an audible signal to sound and a high-intensity lamp to flash at the fire-alarm control unit.

5. Selector panel controls to provide for simultaneous operation of up to six telephones in selected zones. Indicate ground faults and open or shorted telephone lines on the panel front by individual LEDs.

6. Remote Telephone Cabinet: Flush- or surface-mounted cabinet as indicated, factory-standard red finish, with handset.

a. Install one-piece handset to cabinet with vandal-resistant armored cord. Silk-screened or engraved label on cabinet door, designating "Fire Emergency Phone."

b. With "break-glass" type door access lock.

7. Remote Telephone Jack Stations: Single-gang, stainless-steel-plate mounted plug, engraved "Fire Emergency Phone."

2.11 MAGNETIC DOOR HOLDERS

A. Description: Units are equipped for wall or floor mounting as indicated and are complete with matching doorplate.

1. Electromagnets: Require no more than 3 W to develop 25-lbf holding force.



2. Wall-Mounted Units: Flush mounted unless otherwise indicated.

3. Rating: 24-V ac or dc.

4. Rating: 120-V ac.

B. Material and Finish: Match door hardware.

2.12 REMOTE ANNUNCIATOR

A. Description: Annunciator functions shall match those of fire-alarm control unit for alarm, supervisory, and trouble indications. Manual switching functions shall match those of fire-alarm control unit, including acknowledging, silencing, resetting, and testing.

B. Display Type and Functional Performance: Alphanumeric display and LED indicating lights shall match those of fire-alarm control unit. Provide controls to acknowledge, silence, reset, and test functions for alarm, supervisory, and trouble signals.

2.13 ADDRESSABLE INTERFACE DEVICE

A. General:

1. Include address-setting means on the module.

2. Store an internal identifying code for control panel use to identify the module type.

3. Listed for controlling HVAC fan motor controllers.

B. Monitor Module: Microelectronic module providing a system address for alarm-initiating devices for wired applications with normally open contacts.

C. Control Module:

1. Operate notification devices.

2. Operate solenoids for use in sprinkler service.

2.14 DIGITAL ALARM COMMUNICATOR TRANSMITTER

A. Digital alarm communicator transmitter shall be acceptable to the remote central station and shall comply with UL 632. Fire Alarm Communicator panel shall be BOSCH 7412GV4/9412GV4 which should be provided with one (1) analog phone line and one (1) wireless (cellular) dialer.

B. Functional Performance: Unit shall receive an alarm, supervisory, or trouble signal from fire-alarm control unit and automatically capture one telephone line(s) and dial a preset number for a remote central station. When contact is made with central station(s), signals shall be transmitted. If service on either line is interrupted for longer than 45 seconds, transmitter shall initiate a local trouble signal and transmit the signal indicating loss of telephone line to the remote alarm receiving station over the remaining line. Transmitter shall automatically report telephone service restoration to the central station. If service is lost on both telephone lines, transmitter shall initiate the local trouble signal.



C. Local functions and display at the digital alarm communicator transmitter shall include the following:

1. Verification that both telephone lines are available.

2. Programming device.

3. LED display.

4. Manual test report function and manual transmission clear indication.

5. Communications failure with the central station or fire-alarm control unit.

D. Digital data transmission shall include the following:

1. Address of the alarm-initiating device.

2. Address of the supervisory signal.

3. Address of the trouble-initiating device.

4. Loss of ac supply.

5. Loss of power.

6. Low battery.

7. Abnormal test signal.

8. Communication bus failure.

E. Secondary Power: Integral rechargeable battery and automatic charger.

F. Self-Test: Conducted automatically every 24 hours with report transmitted to central station.

2.15 RADIO ALARM TRANSMITTER

A. Transmitter shall comply with NFPA 1221 and 47 CFR 90.

B. Description: Manufacturer's standard commercial product; factory assembled, wired, and tested; ready for installation and operation.

1. Packaging: A single, modular, NEMA 250, Type 1 metal enclosure with a tamper-resistant flush tumbler lock.

2. Signal Transmission Mode and Frequency: VHF or UHF 2-W power output, coordinated with operating characteristics of the established remote alarm receiving station designated by Owner.

3. Normal Power Input: 120-V ac.

4. Secondary Power: Integral-sealed, rechargeable, 12-V battery and charger. Comply with NFPA 72 requirements for battery capacity; submit calculations.



5. Antenna: Omnidirectional, coaxial half-wave, dipole type with driving point impedance matched to transmitter and antenna cable output impedance. Wind-load strength of antenna and mounting hardware and supports shall withstand 100 mph with a gust factor of 1.3 without failure.

6. Antenna Cable: Coaxial cable with impedance matched to the transmitter output impedance.

7. Antenna-Cable Connectors: Weatherproof.

8. Alarm Interface Devices: Circuit boards, modules, and other auxiliary devices, integral to the transmitter, matching fire-alarm and other system outputs to message-generating inputs of the transmitter that produce required message transmissions.

C. Functional Performance: Unit shall receive alarm, supervisory, or trouble signal from fire-alarm control unit or from its own internal sensors or controls and shall automatically transmit signal along with a unique code that identifies the transmitting station to the remote alarm receiving station. Transmitted messages shall correspond to standard designations for fire-reporting system to which the signal is being transmitted and shall include separately designated messages in response to the following events or conditions:

1. Transmitter Low-Battery Condition: Sent when battery voltage is below 85 percent of rated value.

2. System Test Message: Initiated manually by a test switch within the transmitter cabinet, or automatically at an optionally preselected time, once every 24 hours, with transmission time controlled by a programmed timing device integral to transmitter controls.

3. Transmitter Trouble Message: Actuated by failure, in excess of one-minute duration, of the transmitter normal power source, derangement of the wiring of the transmitter, or any alarm input interface circuit or device connected to it.

4. Local Fire-Alarm-System Trouble Message: Initiated by events or conditions that cause a trouble signal to be indicated on the building system.

5. Local Fire-Alarm-System Alarm Message: Actuated when the building system goes into an alarm state. Identifies device that initiated the alarm.

6. Local Fire-Alarm-System, Supervisory-Alarm Message: Actuated when the building alarm system indicates a supervisory alarm.

2.16 NETWORK COMMUNICATIONS

A. Provide network communications for fire-alarm system according to fire-alarm manufacturer's written requirements.

B. Provide network communications pathway per manufacturer's written requirements and requirements in NFPA 72 and NFPA 70.

PART 3 - EXECUTION



3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and conditions for compliance with requirements for ventilation, temperature, humidity, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

1. Verify that manufacturer's written instructions for environmental conditions have been permanently established in spaces where equipment and wiring are installed, before installation begins.

B. Examine roughing-in for electrical connections to verify actual locations of connections before installation.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NFPA 72, NFPA 101, and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for installation and testing of fire-alarm equipment. Install all electrical wiring to comply with requirements in NFPA 70 including, but not limited to, Article 760, "Fire Alarm Systems."

1. Devices placed in service before all other trades have completed cleanup shall be replaced.

2. Devices installed but not yet placed in service shall be protected from construction dust, debris, dirt, moisture, and damage according to manufacturer's written storage instructions.

B. Connecting to Existing Equipment: Verify that existing fire-alarm system is operational before making changes or connections.

1. Connect new equipment to existing control panel in existing part of the building.

2. Connect new equipment to existing monitoring equipment at the supervising station.

3. Expand, modify, and supplement existing monitoring equipment as necessary to extend existing monitoring functions to the new points. New components shall be capable of merging with existing configuration without degrading the performance of either system.

4. Install seismic bracing. Comply with requirements in Section 270548.16 "Seismic Controls for Communications Systems."

5. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated, install dowel rods on 18-inch centers around the full perimeter of concrete base.

6. For supported equipment, install epoxy-coated anchor bolts that extend through concrete base and anchor into structural concrete floor.

7. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.

8. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment.

C. Equipment Mounting: Install fire-alarm control unit on finished floor.



1. Comply with requirements for seismic-restraint devices specified in Section 270548.16 "Seismic Controls for Communications Systems."

D. Install wall-mounted equipment, with tops of cabinets not more than 78 inches above the finished floor.

1. Comply with requirements for seismic-restraint devices specified in Section 270548.16 "Seismic Controls for Communications Systems."

E. Manual Fire-Alarm Boxes:

1. Install manual fire-alarm box in the normal path of egress within 60 inches of the exit doorway.

2. Mount manual fire-alarm box on a background of a contrasting color.

3. The operable part of manual fire-alarm box shall be between 42 inches and 48 inches above floor level. All devices shall be mounted at the same height unless otherwise indicated.

F. Smoke- or Heat-Detector Spacing:

1. Comply with the "Smoke-Sensing Fire Detectors" section in the "Initiating Devices" chapter in NFPA 72, for smoke-detector spacing.

2. Comply with the "Heat-Sensing Fire Detectors" section in the "Initiating Devices" chapter in NFPA 72, for heat-detector spacing.

3. Smooth ceiling spacing shall not exceed 30 feet.

4. Spacing of detectors for irregular areas, for irregular ceiling construction, and for high ceiling areas shall be determined according to Annex Ain NFPA 72.

5. HVAC: Locate detectors not closer than 36 inches from air-supply diffuser or return-air opening.

6. Lighting Fixtures: Locate detectors not closer than 12 inches from any part of a lighting fixture and not directly above pendant mounted or indirect lighting.

G. Install a cover on each smoke detector that is not placed in service during construction. Cover shall remain in place except during system testing. Remove cover prior to system turnover.

H. Duct Smoke Detectors: Comply with NFPA 72 and NFPA 90A. Install sampling tubes so they extend the full width of duct. Tubes more than 36 inches long shall be supported at both ends.

1. Do not install smoke detector in duct smoke-detector housing during construction. Install detector only during system testing and prior to system turnover.

I. Air-Sampling Smoke Detectors: If using multiple pipe runs, the runs shall be pneumatically balanced.



J. Single-Station Smoke Detectors: Where more than one smoke alarm is installed within a dwelling or suite, they shall be connected so that the operation of any smoke alarm causes the alarm in all smoke alarms to sound.

K. Remote Status and Alarm Indicators: Install in a visible location near each smoke detector, sprinkler water-flow switch, and valve-tamper switch that is not readily visible from normal viewing position.

L. Audible Alarm-Indicating Devices: Install not less than 6 inches below the ceiling. Install bells and horns on flush-mounted back boxes with the device-operating mechanism concealed behind a grille. Install all devices at the same height unless otherwise indicated.

M. Visible Alarm-Indicating Devices: Install adjacent to each alarm bell or alarm horn and at least 6 inches below the ceiling. Install all devices at the same height unless otherwise indicated.

N. Device Location-Indicating Lights: Locate in public space near the device they monitor.

O. Antenna for Radio Alarm Transmitter: Mount to building structure where indicated. Use mounting arrangement and substrate connection that resists 100-mph wind load with a gust factor of 1.3 without damage.

3.3 PATHWAYS

A. Pathways above recessed ceilings and in non-accessible locations may be routed exposed.

1. Exposed pathways located less than 96 inches above the floor shall be installed in EMT.

B. Exposed EMT shall be painted red enamel.

3.4 CONNECTIONS

A. For fire-protection systems related to doors in fire-rated walls and partitions and to doors in smoke partitions, comply with requirements in Section 087100 "Door Hardware." Connect hardware and devices to fire-alarm system.

1. Verify that hardware and devices are listed for use with installed fire-alarm system before making connections.

B. Make addressable connections with a supervised interface device to the following devices and systems. Install the interface device less than 36 inches from the device controlled. Make an addressable confirmation connection when such feedback is available at the device or system being controlled.

1. Alarm-initiating connection to smoke-control system (smoke management) at firefighters' smoke-control system panel.

2. Smoke dampers in air ducts of designated HVAC duct systems.

3. Magnetically held-open doors.

4. Electronically locked doors and access gates.



5. Alarm-initiating connection to activate emergency lighting control.

6. Alarm-initiating connection to activate emergency shutoffs for gas and fuel supplies.

7. Supervisory connections at valve supervisory switches.

8. Supervisory connections at low-air-pressure switch of each dry-pipe sprinkler system.

9. Data communication circuits for connection to building management system.

10. Data communication circuits for connection to mass notification system.

11. Supervisory connections at fire-extinguisher locations.

12. Supervisory connections at fire-pump power failure including a dead-phase or phase-reversal condition.

13. Supervisory connections at fire-pump engine control panel.

14. Fire alarm system shall provide relay to override AV equipment during an alarm.

3.5 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 270553 "Identification for Communications Systems."

B. Install framed instructions in a location visible from fire-alarm control unit.

3.6 GROUNDING

A. Ground fire-alarm control unit and associated circuits; comply with IEEE 1100. Install a ground wire from main service ground to fire-alarm control unit.

B. Ground shielded cables at the control panel location only. Insulate shield at device location.


A. Field tests shall be witnessed by authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test and inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.

C. Perform tests and inspections.

1. Visual Inspection: Conduct visual inspection prior to testing.

a. Inspection shall be based on completed record Drawings and system documentation that is required by the "Completion Documents, Preparation" table in the "Documentation" section of the "Fundamentals" chapter in NFPA 72.



b. Comply with the "Visual Inspection Frequencies" table in the "Inspection" section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" chapter in NFPA 72; retain the "Initial/Reacceptance" column and list only the installed components.

2. System Testing: Comply with the "Test Methods" table in the "Testing" section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" chapter in NFPA 72.

3. Factory-authorized service representative shall prepare the "Fire Alarm System Record of Completion" in the "Documentation" section of the "Fundamentals" chapter in NFPA 72 and the "Inspection and Testing Form" in the "Records" section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" chapter in NFPA 72.

D. Reacceptance Testing: Perform reacceptance testing to verify the proper operation of added or replaced devices and appliances.

E. Fire-alarm system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

F. Prepare test and inspection reports.

G. Maintenance Test and Inspection: Perform tests and inspections listed for weekly, monthly, quarterly, and semiannual periods. Use forms developed for initial tests and inspections.

H. Annual Test and Inspection: One year after date of Substantial Completion, test fire-alarm system complying with visual and testing inspection requirements in NFPA 72. Use forms developed for initial tests and inspections.

3.8 SOFTWARE SERVICE AGREEMENT

A. Comply with UL 864.

B. Technical Support: Beginning at Substantial Completion, service agreement shall include software support for two years.

C. Upgrade Service: At Substantial Completion, update software to latest version. Install and program software upgrades that become available within two years from date of Substantial Completion. Upgrading software shall include operating system and new or revised licenses for using software.

1. Upgrade Notice: At least 30 days to allow Owner to schedule access to system and to upgrade computer equipment if necessary.

3.9 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain fire-alarm system.

END OF SECTION


EARVIN MAGIC JOHNSON PARK – PHASE 1A CLEARING AND GRUBBING LOS ANGELES, CA 31 11 00-1 COUNTY OF LOS ANGELES COMMUNITY DEVELOPMENT COMMISSION AHBE PROJECT NO. 116030.01 CWE

SECTION 31 11 00

CLEARING AND GRUBBING

PART 1- GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Site clearing of designated site improvements and landscaping

B. Tagging of vegetation and items to remain after site clearing.

C. Site clearing shall consist of removing all vegetable growth such as trees, roots, stumps, shrubs, brush, limbs; and stone, boulders, clods, wood and other vegetative growth from the growth surface. Clearing shall also include the removal and disposal of trash piles, rubbish, etc.

D. Grubbing shall consist of the removal and disposal of wood roots, stumps, shrubs, brush, stone, boulders, clods, vegetable growth, etc. below the ground or subgrade surface.

E. CONTRACTOR shall furnish all tools, equipment materials and supplies and shall perform all labor to complete the work associated with removal of all natural and artificial objectionable material from the designated areas of work as indicated in the Contract Documents.

F. This work shall also include the protection from injury and preservation of existing improvements, adjacent property, utility vegetation and existing objects designated to remain.

G. Prior to commencing the work, obtain acceptance from the ENGINEER regarding methods to be used and disposal of removed materials.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 31 20 00 - Earthwork

B. Section 02 41 13 Selective Site Demolition

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Clearing Plan: Submit list of proposed operations, and identify site improvements

and features to remain. Include proposed location for stockpiles.


A. Site clearing and grubbing shall conform to Section 300-1 - CLEARING AND GRUBBING of SSPWC and applicable requirements of the Project Manual.

B. Labor: Use adequate numbers of skilled laborers thoroughly trained in site-clearing operations and experienced in the necessary crafts and completely familiar with the



specified requirements and methods needed for the proper performance of the work of this Section with minimum 2 year experience performing similar operations.

C. Codes and Regulations: Perform all work of this Section in strict accordance with applicable Government Codes and Regulations especially meeting all safety standards and requirements of CAL/OSHA.

D. Miscellaneous Requirements: 1. Erection and maintenance of protections 2. Dust Control 3. Repair of Damages 4. Cleaning and Removal of Rubbish

E. Permits and Licenses: Procure all City, County and State Permits and Licenses, including Municipal Business License and pay all charges and fees for the same.

F. Contractor Submittals - Submit schedule of clearing, grubbing, and erosion control measures to be put in place for all work scheduled during the rainy season (October - April).

1.5 PRE-CONSTRUCTION MEETING

A. Convene minimum two weeks prior to starting work of this section.

1.6 SEQUENCING

A. Ensure that work of this section is performed in time to prevent interruption of

construction progress.

PART 2- PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Site Clearing Materials Suitable for Site Conditions:

1. Tree protection

2. Erosion control

3. Siltation control

4. Dust control materials

PART 3- EXECUTION

3.1 SITE CLEARING OPERATIONS

A. Protection of existing trees, vegetation, landscaping, and site improvements not scheduled for clearing which might be damaged by construction activities.

B. Trimming of existing trees and vegetation as recommended by arborist for protection during construction activities.



C. Clearing and grubbing of stumps and vegetation, and removal and disposal of debris, rubbish, designated trees, and site improvements.

D. Topsoil stripping and stockpiling.

E. Temporary erosion control, siltation control, and dust control.

F. Temporary protection of adjacent property, structures, benchmarks, and monuments.

G. Temporary relocation of play structures, fencing, and site improvements scheduled for reuse.

H. Watering of trees and vegetation during construction activities.

I. Removal and legal disposal of cleared materials.

3.2 CLEARING

A. Prevent damage to existing improvements indicated to remain, including improvements on and off site. Protect existing trees and vegetation indicated to remain. Do not stockpile materials and restrict traffic within drip line of existing trees to remain. Provide and maintain temporary guards to encircle trees or groups of trees to remain; obtain approval before beginning work.

B. Water vegetation as required to maintain health. Cover temporarily exposed roots with wet burlap and backfill as soon as possible. Coat cut plant surfaces with approved emulsified asphalt plant coating.

C. Repair or replace vegetation, which has been damaged, or pay damages. Remove heavy growths of grass before stripping. Stockpile satisfactory topsoil containing no large stones, foreign matter and weeds on site for reuse.

D. Completely remove all improvements including stumps and debris except for those indicated to remain. Remove below grade improvements at least 12" below finish grade and to the extent necessary so as not to interfere with new construction. Remove abandoned mechanical and electrical work as required.

E. Prevent erosion and siltation of streets, catch basins and piping. Control windblown dust. Remove waste materials and unsuitable soil from site and dispose of in a legal manner.



EARVIN MAGIC JOHNSON PARK – PHASE 1A EARTHWORK LOS ANGELES, CA 31 20 00-1 COUNTY OF LOS ANGELES COMMUNITY DEVELOPMENT COMMISSION AHBE PROJECT NO. 116030.01 CWE

SECTION 31 20 00

EARTHWORK

PART 1 GENERAL


A. This Section includes all earthwork required for construction of the WORK. Such earthwork shall include, but not be limited to, the loosening, removing, loading, transporting, depositing, and compacting in its final location of all materials wet and dry, as required for the purposes of completing the work specified in the Contract Documents, including:

1. Excavation, filling, compacting and grading operations both inside and outside building limits as required for below-grade improvements and to achieve grades and elevations indicated.

2. Furnishing, placing, and removing of sheeting and bracing necessary to safely support the sides of all excavation and fill for lake edging improvements.

3. Trenching and backfill for mechanical and electrical work and utilities. 4. Subbase materials, drainage fill, common fill, and structural fill materials for

slabs, pavements, and improvements. 5. Borrow of materials to make up deficiencies for fills; and all other incidental

earthwork. 6. Suitable fill from off-site if on-site quantities are insufficient or unacceptable, and

legal disposal of excess excavated materials.

B. Earthwork quantities to be estimated based on topographic survey referenced in Contract Drawings.


A. Section 02 41 13 - Selective Site Demolition

B. Section 31 11 00 – Clearing and Grubbing

C. Section 31 22 00 – Grading

D. Section 31 23 13 – Subgrade Preparation

E. Section 32 11 23 – Aggregate Base Course

1.3 REFERENCE

A. ASTM: ASTM International (formerly American Society for Testing and Materials):

1. ASTM D422-63 (2007) Particle Size Analysis of Soils

2. ASTM D1557-09 Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort (56,000 ft-lb f/ft (2,700 kN-m/m))

3. ASTM D4254-00 (2006) Minimum Index Density of Soils and Calculation of Relative Density



4. ASTM D4318-10 Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and Plasticity Index of Soils

B. Standard Specifications:

1. SSPWC Sections 203-1, 203-2, 203-3 - Bituminous Materials SSPWC Section 211 - Soil and Aggregate Tests

2. SSPWC Section 300 - Earthwork

3. SSPWC Section 306-1- Open Trench Operations


A. Before performing mechanical excavation, use hand excavation to expose below ground utilities and services in vicinity of proposed Work.

B. Where soil material is required to be compacted to a percentage of maximum dry density, the maximum dry density at optimum moisture content will be determined in accordance with the latest version of ASTM D 1557. In-place field density tests will be performed in accordance with ASTM D 1556, (sand cone) and/or ASTM D 2922 and ASTM D 3017 (nuclear gauge). The number and location of field density tests will be determined by the ENGINEER. At least one sand-cone test (ASTM D 1556) will be taken for every four nuclear tests (ASTM D 2922 and 3017).

C. In case the tests of the fill or backfill show non-compliance with the required density, the CONTRACTOR shall accomplish such remedy as may be required to insure compliance. Subsequent testing to show compliance shall be by a testing laboratory selected by the ENGINEER and shall be at the CONTRACTOR's expense. All imported fill material not specified in the contract shall be tested at the CONTRACTOR’S expense and approved by the ENGINEER.

D. Where imported fill material is required to possess certain gradation, strength, and settlement properties, the grain size distribution of soils will be determined using ASTM D 422, the gradation of concrete aggregate and base materials will be determined using ASTM C 136, the sand equivalent of soils will be determined using ASTM D 2419, the consolidation of soils will be determined using ASTM D 2435, the unconfined compressive strength of soils will be determined using ASTM D 2166, and the expansion index of soils will be determined using UBC No. 29-2.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including: 1. Preparation instructions and recommendations. 2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 3. Installation methods.

B. Test Reports: Submit for approval test reports, list of materials and gradations proposed for use.

C. Certificates: 1. Certification of proper disposal of demolition materials. 2. Certified laboratory test reports for fill and backfill material documenting:



ASTM D422, Sieve Analysis.

ASTM D1557 or ASTM D4254, Moisture Density Results.

ASTM D4318, liquid limit, plastic limit and plasticity index.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. General: Fill, backfill, and embankment materials shall be suitable selected or processed clean, granular materials with a low expansion potential, corresponding to an index of 50 or less as evaluated in accordance with ASTM D4829. The material shall be free from grass, roots, brush, or other vegetation; contamination; or deleterious material.

B. Suitable materials may be obtained from onsite excavations, may be processed onsite materials, or may be imported provided these materials meet all the requirements in the contract documents. If imported materials are required to meet the requirements of this Section or to meet the quantity requirements of the project, the CONTRACTOR shall provide the imported fill materials and the required reports of test results at no additional expense to the County, unless a unit price item is included for imported materials in the bidding schedule.

Unclassified fill shall consist of all fill unless separately designated.

Unclassified fill shall conform to the requirements of SSPWC Section

300-4.

The following types of suitable materials are designated and defined as follows:

1. Crushed Aggregate Base (CAB) shall conform to the requirements of

SSPWC Section 200-2.2.

2. Crushed Miscellaneous Base (CMB) shall conform to the

requirements of SSPWC Section 200-2.4.

Imported granular backfill shall be crushed rock or gravel, durable and

free from slaking or decomposition under the action of alternate wetting

or drying. The material shall be uniformly graded and shall meet the

following gradation requirements:

Sieve Size Percentage Passing

1-inch 100 3/4-inch 90 -

100 3/8-inch 40 - 100 No. 4 25 - 40

No. 8 18 - 33



No. 30 5 - 15 No. 50 0 - 7 No. 200 0 - 3

The granular backfill shall have a sand equivalent value not less than

75. The finish graded surface of the granular backfill immediately

beneath hydraulic structures shall be stabilized to provide a firm, smooth

surface upon which to construct reinforced concrete floor slabs.

Primary Structural Fill shall conform to the requirements stated in the

recommendations of the Geotechnical Report.

Structure Backfill material shall conform to the requirements of

SSPWC Section 300-3.5.1 and the requirements stated in the

recommendations of the Geotechnical Reports.

Type A Bedding material shall conform to the requirements for 3/4-inch Crushed Rock, ½-inch Crushed Rock, No. 3 Concrete Aggregate, No. 4 Concrete Aggregate, or Portland Cement Concrete Sand in SSPWC Section 200-1 for pipes larger than 24 inches in diameter. Type A Bedding material shall conform to the requirements for Type B Bedding material or the requirements for Portland Cement Concrete Sand in SSPWC Section 200-1 for pipes 24 inches or smaller in diameter.

Type B Bedding material shall conform to the requirements for ½-inch

Crushed Rock or No. 4 Concrete Aggregate in SSPWC Section 200-1.

Concrete Pipe Bedding material shall conform to the requirements of

SSPWC Section 201-1.

Sand-Cement Slurry material shall conform to the requirements of

SSPWC Section 201-1 for Trench Backfill Slurry.

Soil Cement material shall conform to the requirements of SSPWC

Section 301-3.1.

Topsoil material shall conform to the requirements of SSPWC Section

212-1.1.

2.2 USE OF FILL, BACKFILL, AND EMBANKMENT MATERIAL TYPES

A. The CONTRACTOR shall use the types of materials as designated herein for all required fill, backfill, and embankment construction hereunder.

B. Where these Specifications conflict with the requirements of any local agency having jurisdiction, or with the requirements of a material manufacturer, the ENGINEER shall be immediately notified. In case of conflict therewith, the CONTRACTOR shall use the most stringent requirement, as determined by the



ENGINEER.

C. Fill and backfill types shall be used in accordance with the following provisions:

1. Embankment fills shall be constructed of material conforming to the requirements recommended in the Geotechnical Report.

2. Pipe zone backfill, as defined under "Pipe and Utility Trench Backfill" herein, shall

consist of the following materials for each pipe material listed below

a. Mortar coated pipe, concrete pipe, and uncoated ductile iron pipe shall be provided Type A Bedding, Type B Bedding, or Concrete Pipe Bedding materials as defined herein for pipe zone backfill material.

b. Coal tar enamel coated pipe, polyethylene encased pipe, tape

wrapped pipe, and other non-mortar coated pipe shall be backfilled with Portland Cement Concrete sand conforming to SSPWC Section 200-1 or Concrete Pipe Bedding material as defined herein for pipe zone backfill material.

c. Plastic pipe and vitrified clay pipe shall be backfilled with 3/4-inch

Crushed Rock conforming to SSPWC Section 200-1 or Concrete Pipe Bedding material as defined herein for pipe zone backfill material.

3. Trench zone backfill for pipelines as defined under "Pipe and Utility Trench

Backfill" shall be 3/4” minus compacted to 90 percent relative compaction per ASTM D 1557. Bedding installation shall be per SSPWC S-251-1, Case 2,

4. Final backfill material for pipelines under paved areas, as defined under "Pipe and Utility Trench Backfill" shall be Crushed Miscellaneous Base (CMB) material as defined herein.

5. Trench backfill and final backfill for pipelines under structures shall be the same material as used in the pipe zone, except where concrete encasement is required by the Contract Documents.

6. Aggregate base materials under pavements shall be Crushed Miscellaneous Base (CMB) material constructed to the thicknesses shown or specified.

7. Backfill around or behind structures shall consist of Structure Backfill as defined herein unless indicated otherwise in the Contract Documents.

8. Fill materials beneath structures shall be as follows:

a. Fill beneath hydraulic structures or other water retaining structures with underdrain systems shall be imported granular backfill material, as defined herein, constructed to the limits and thicknesses shown or specified.



b. Fill beneath structures without underdrain systems shall be Primary

Structural Fill as defined herein.

c. Fill beneath structures where groundwater must be removed to allow placement of concrete shall be Primary Structural Fill as defined herein.



PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 CLEARING, GRUBBING, AND STRIPPING

A. Clearing and grubbing shall be performed in accordance with Section 33 11 00.

3.2 STRUCTURE, ROADWAY, AND EMBANKMENT EXCAVATION

A. General: Except when specifically provided to the contrary, excavation shall

include the removal of all materials of whatever nature encountered, including

all obstructions of any nature that would interfere with the proper execution

and completion of the work. The removal of said materials shall conform to the

lines and grades shown or ordered. Work shall conform to Section 02110 –

Cleaning, Grubbing and Stripping.

B. Excavation Beneath Structures and Embankments: Except where otherwise

specified for a particular structure or ordered by the ENGINEER, areas

beneath structures shall be over- excavated to 2 feet below the bottoms of the

structures and the over excavated area filled with ¾ inch crushed miscellaneous

base. Filter fabric shall be placed between the bottom and sides of the fill and

the crushed base before placement of the base. The subgrade areas beneath

embankments shall be excavated to remove not less than the top 12 inches of

native material and where such subgrade is sloped, the native material shall be

benched. When such over-excavation is shown or specified, both over-

excavation and subsequent backfill to the required grade shall be performed by

the CONTRACTOR. When such over-excavation is not shown on the plan and

not specified but is ordered by the ENGINEER, such over- excavation and any

resulting backfill will be paid for under a separate unit price bid item if such bid

item has been established and approved by the ENGINEER prior to commencing

the work; otherwise payment will be made in accordance with a negotiated

price. After the required excavation or over-excavation has been completed, the

exposed surface shall be scarified to a depth of 8 inches, brought to optimum

moisture content, and rolled with heavy compaction equipment to obtain the

required relative compaction.

C. Excavation Beneath Paved Areas: Excavation under areas to be paved shall

extend to the bottom of the aggregate base. A minimum 2 foot layer of granular

base is required under all paved areas unless otherwise noted on the drawings.

After the required excavation has been completed, the exposed surface shall be

scarified to a depth of at least 12 inches, brought to optimum moisture content,

and rolled with heavy compaction equipment to obtain 95 percent of maximum

dry density.

D. Excavation Subgrade and Below Subgrade:

1. Excavate and shape subgrade to line, grade, and cross-section shown on



Drawings. Following receipt of written acceptance for the subgrade by the

ENGINEER and local building official, compact the subgrade with

approved equipment until the top 6-inches is compacted to 90 percent of

maximum dry density at optimum moisture content as determined by

ASTM D 1557. Remove all soft, loose, or otherwise unsuitable material

and replace with suitable sandy material. The finished subgrade shall be

firm, hard and unyielding. The subgrade shall be considered to extend over

the full width of the base course. Compaction shall extend 18 inches

beyond the edge of paving, curb, or form.

2. Where the ENGINEER deems subgrade material to be unsatisfactory,

excavation below subgrade will be required to such depths as necessary

to remove the unsatisfactory material. Excavation below grade shall be of

the same classification as that above it provided it is removed in the same

operation as the normal excavation. Special equipment or hand

excavation may be required because of the presence of shallow utilities or

other unforeseen conditions.

3.3 PIPELINE AND UTILITY TRENCH EXCAVATION

A. General: Unless otherwise shown or ordered, excavation for pipelines and

utilities shall be open-cut trenches conforming to SSPWC Section 306-1.1.

Trench widths shall be kept as narrow as is practical for the method of pipe

zone densification selected by the CONTRACTOR, but shall have a minimum

width at the bottom of the trench equal to the outside diameter of the pipe plus

18 inches. The maximum width at the top of the pipe shall be in accordance

with Table A of Standard Plan S-251. If the maximum trench width is

exceeded, the Contractor shall provide substitute installation in accordance

with Table B of Standard Plan S-251.

B. Trench Bottom: Except when pipe bedding is required, the bottom of the

trench shall be excavated uniformly to the grade of the bottom of the pipe. The

trench bottom shall be given a final trim, using a string line for establishing grade,

such that each pipe section when first laid will be continually in contact with the

ground along the extreme bottom of the pipe. Rounding out the trench to form a

cradle for the pipe will not be allowed.

C. Open Trench: All trenches shall be fully backfilled at the end of each day or, in

lieu thereof, shall be covered by heavy steel plates adequately braced and

capable of supporting vehicular traffic in those locations where it is impractical

to backfill at the end of each day. The above requirements for backfilling or

use of steel plate will be waived in cases where the trench is located further than

100 feet from any traveled roadway or occupied structure. In such cases,

however, barricades and warning lights meeting OSHA requirements shall be

provided and maintained.



D. Where pipelines are to be installed in embankment or structure fills, the fill

shall be constructed to a level at least one foot above the top of the pipe

before the trench is excavated.

3.4 EXCAVATION IN LAWN AREAS

A. Where excavation occurs in lawn areas, the sod shall be carefully removed and

stockpiled to preserve it for replacement. Excavated material may be placed on

the lawn; provided, that a drop cloth or other suitable method is employed to

protect the lawn from damage. The lawn shall not remain covered for more than

72 hours. Immediately after completion of backfilling and testing of the pipeline,

the sod shall be replaced in a manner so as to restore the lawn as near as

possible to its original condition and to the satisfaction of the ENGINEER.

CONTRACTOR shall provide new sod if stockpiled sod has remained so for

more than 72 hours within the scope of the contract.

3.5 EXCAVATION IN VICINITY OF TREES

A. Except where trees are shown to be removed, trees shall be protected from

injury during construction operations. No tree roots over 2 inches in diameter

shall be cut without express permission of the ENGINEER. Trees shall be

supported during excavation by any means previously reviewed by the

ENGINEER. CONTRACTOR to refer to and follow Department of Recreation

and Parks tree protection guidelines.

3.6 DISPOSAL OF EXCESS EXCAVATED MATERIAL

A. The CONTRACTOR shall remove and dispose of all excess excavated

material at a site selected by the CONTRACTOR and reviewed by the

ENGINEER. Excavated material shall not be removed from the site unless it is

sampled, analyzed, and can be classified as non- hazardous. All incurred

expenses shall be borne by the CONTRACTOR.

3.7 PROTECTION OF SUBGRADE

A. After preparing the subgrade as specified, all traffic on the subgrade shall be

avoided. Should it be necessary to haul over the prepared subgrade, the

CONTRACTOR shall drag and roll the traveled way as frequently as may be

necessary to remove ruts, cuts, and breaks in the surface. All cuts, ruts, and

breaks in the surface of the subgrade that are not removed by the above

operations shall be raked and hand tamped. All equipment used for transporting

materials over the prepared subgrade shall be equipped with pneumatic tires.

B. Continued use of sections of prepared subgrade for hauling, so as to cut up or

deform it from the true cross-section, will not be permitted. The CONTRACTOR

shall protect the prepared subgrade from all traffic.



C. The CONTRACTOR will be required to plank the subgrade before hauling

materials or equipment over it.

D. The subgrade shall be maintained in the finished condition until the first

succeeding course or steel or concrete is placed.

E. The ENGINEER has the right to test the reworked subgrade and approve or

disapprove the subgrade depending on its condition.

3.8 BACKFILL - GENERAL

A. Backfill shall be as defined in Part 2 of this specification. Backfill shall not be

dropped directly upon any structure or pipe. Backfill shall not be placed around

or upon any structure until the concrete has attained specified strength to

withstand the loads imposed. Backfill around water retaining structures shall not

be placed until the structures have been tested, and the structures shall be full

of water while backfill is being placed.

B. Except for imported granular materials being placed in over-excavated areas

or trenches, backfill shall be placed after all water is removed from the

excavation.

3.9 COMPACTION OF FILL, BACKFILL, AND EMBANKMENT MATERIALS

A. Each layer of fill shall be mechanically compacted using proper compaction

equipment (not rubber tire or wheel rolling) to the specified percentage of

maximum dry density. Equipment that is consistently capable of achieving the

required degree of compaction shall be used and each layer shall be compacted

over its entire area while the material is at the required moisture content.

B. Flooding, ponding, or jetting shall not be used to densify any fill materials.

C. Equipment weighing more than 10,000 pounds shall not be used closer to

walls than a horizontal distance equal to the depth of the fill at that time, but

not less than 5 feet. Hand operated power compaction equipment shall be

used where use of heavier equipment is impractical or restricted due to weight

limitations.

D. Compaction Requirements: The following compaction test requirements shall

be in accordance with ASTM D 1557. Where agency or utility company

requirements govern, the highest compaction standards shall apply.

Percentage of

Location or Use of Fill Maximum Density

Pipe zone backfill portion above bedding



for flexible pipe. 95

Pipe zone backfill bedding and

over- excavated zones under

bedding/pipe for

flexible pipe. 95

Pipe zone backfill portion above bedding

for rigid pipe. 95

Pipe zone backfill bedding and

over- excavated zones under

bedding/pipe

for rigid pipe. 95

Final backfill, beneath paved areas or

structures. 95

Final backfill, not beneath paved areas

or structures. 90

Trench zone backfill. 90; 95 beneath paved

areas Embankments and berms. 95

Embankments, beneath paved areas or

structures. 95

Backfill beneath structures, hydraulic

structures. 90; 95 beneath paved areas

Backfill around structures, 90

Topsoil 85

Aggregate base 95

E. Trench Backfill Requirements: The pipe has been structurally designed based

upon the trench configuration specified herein.

F. The CONTRACTOR shall maintain the indicated trench cross section up to a

horizontal plane lying 6 inches above the top of the pipe.

3.10 PIPE AND UTILITY TRENCH BACKFILL

A. Pipe Zone Backfill: The pipe zone is defined as that portion of the vertical trench

cross-section lying between a plane 6 inches below the bottom surface of the

pipe, i.e., the trench subgrade, and a plane at a point 6 inches above the top



surface of the pipe. The bedding for flexible pipe is defined as that portion of pipe

zone backfill material between the trench subgrade and the bottom of the pipe.

The bedding for rigid pipe is defined as that portion of the pipe zone backfill

material between the trench subgrade and a level line which varies from the

bottom of the pipe to the spring line as shown.

B. Bedding shall be provided for all pressure pipes, sewers, drainage pipelines, and

other gravity flow pipelines. Unless otherwise specified or shown, pipes crossing

the lake bottom the pipe trench shall be over excavated 2 feet below the pipe

bottom and filled with crushed base wrapped in filter fabric. For pipe outside the

lake, the pipe shall be supported on a minimum of 6 inches of aggregate base or

as noted on the drawings.

C. Where bedding is required, after compacting the bedding the CONTRACTOR

shall perform a final trim using a string line for establishing grade, such that each

pipe section when first laid will be continually in contact with the bedding along

the extreme bottom of the pipe.

D. The pipe zone shall be backfilled with the specified backfill material. The

CONTRACTOR shall exercise care to prevent damage to the pipeline coating,

cathodic bonds, or the pipe itself during the installation and backfill operations.

E. Trench Zone Backfill: After the pipe zone backfill has been placed as specified

above, and after all excess water has completely drained from the trench,

backfilling of the trench zone may proceed. The trench zone is defined as that

portion of the vertical trench cross-section lying between a plane 6 inches

above the top surface of the pipe and a plane at a point 18 inches below the

finished surface grade, or if the trench is under pavement, 18 inches below the

roadway subgrade. If concrete or sand-cement slurry backfill are used, the pipe

shall be filled with water to prevent flotation.

F. Final Backfill: Final backfill is all backfill in the trench cross-sectional area within

18 inches of finished grade, or if the trench is under pavement, all backfill within

18 inches of the roadway subgrade.



EARVIN MAGIC JOHNSON PARK – PHASE 1A GRADING LOS ANGELES, CA 31 22 00-1 COUNTY OF LOS ANGELES COMMUNITY DEVELOPMENT COMMISSION AHBE PROJECT NO. 116030.01 CWE

SECTION 31 22 00

GRADING

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Perform grading work within limits, elevations and grades indicated in the drawings and as specified herein.

B. General grading, cutting and filling, grading for paving, and areas for planting, playground activity, picnic, wedding, building, restrooms, and all areas within grading limits.


A. Section 31 00 00 Earthwork

B. Section 31 11 00 Clearing and Grubbing

C. Section 31 23 33 Trenching and Backfilling.

1.3 PRE-CONSTRUCTION MEETINGS

A. Convene minimum two weeks prior to starting work of this section.

1.4 SEQUENCING

A. Ensure that products of this section are supplied to affected trades in time to prevent interruption of construction progress.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Materials shall conform to requirements specified in this and related sections.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Protect and maintain installed stakes until their removal is required for the Work. Provide replacement grade or location stakes lost or disturbed.

B. Install grade stakes and compare to indicated grades. If discrepancies are found between existing grades and grades indicated on Drawings, do not proceed until discrepancies are resolved. Repair surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions.

3.2 ROUGH GRADING



A. Remove topsoil from areas to be further excavated, re-landscaped, or re-graded, without mixing with foreign materials.

B. Do not remove topsoil when wet.

C. Remove subsoil from areas to be further excavated.

D. Do not remove wet subsoil, unless it is subsequently processed to obtain optimum moisture content.

E. When excavating through roots, perform work by hand and cut roots with sharp axe.

F. Stability: Replace damaged or displaced subsoil to same requirements as for specified fill.

3.3 FINISH GRADING

A. Before Finish Grading verify building and trench backfilling have been inspected, and verify subgrade has been contoured and compacted.

B. Where topsoil is to be placed, scarify surface to depth of 6 inches (150 mm).

C. In areas where vehicles or equipment have compacted soil, scarify surface to depth of 6 inches (150 mm).

D. Place topsoil in areas indicated.

E. Place topsoil to thickness as scheduled.

F. Place topsoil during dry weather.

G. Remove roots, weeds, rocks, and foreign material while spreading.

H. Near plants spread topsoil manually to prevent damage.

I. Fine grade topsoil to eliminate uneven areas and low spots. Maintain profiles and contour of subgrade.

3.4 REPAIR AND RESTORATION

A. Existing Facilities, Utilities, and Site Features to Remain: If damaged due to this work, repair or replace to original condition.

B. Trees to Remain: If damaged due to this work, trim broken branches and repair bark wounds; if root damage has occurred, obtain instructions from Architect as to remedy.

C. Other Existing Vegetation to Remain: If damaged due to this work, replace with vegetation of equivalent species and size.

3.5 CLEANING

A. Remove unused stockpiled topsoil. Grade stockpile area to prevent standing water.



B. Leave site clean and raked, ready to receive landscaping.



EARVIN MAGIC JOHNSON PARK – PHASE 1a SUBGRADE PREPARATION LOS ANGELES, CA 31 23 13-1 COUNTY OF LOS ANGELES COMMUNITY DEVELOPMENT COMMISSION AHBE PROJECT NO. 116030.01 CWE

SECTION 31 23 13

SUBGRADE PREPARATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1. SECTION INCLUDES:

A. The Contractor shall furnish all tools, equipment, materials, and supplies necessary to complete the work of preparation of subgrade.

B. The subgrade will be considered as those areas and surfaces, new or existing, upon which subbase or base material, pavement, or curbs are to be placed. The subgrade is also referred to as “native” on the Contract Drawings.

1.2. RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 02 41 00: Demolition

B. Section 31 20 00: Earthwork

C. Section 32 12 16: Asphalt Concrete Pavement

D. Section 32 13 43: Permeable Concrete Pavement

1.3. REFERENCES

A. Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction (SSPWC) Section 301-1, Latest Edition.

1.4. QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Comply with Project Quality Program Requirements (see 1.02 above).

B. Quality assurance shall be as specified in Section 31 20 00 Earthwork.

1.5. SUBMITTALS

A. Refer to Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures, for submittal requirements and procedures.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1. EXCAVATION

A. The excavation is unclassified and shall include removal of materials which are encountered in excavating to the required grades, including existing pavement, or other deleterious materials as required to accomplish the construction.

B. Unsuitable material below the processing depth for subgrade shall be excavated and disposed of as directed by Metro or its designee.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1. SUBGRADE

A. Excavate and shape subgrade to line, grade, and cross-section shown on Construction Drawings. Except for areas paved with permeable concrete pavement, or bioretention areas, obtain a relative compaction of at least 90 percent. For areas paved with permeable concrete pavement or bioretention area, obtain a relative compaction of at least 85 percent and not more than 95 percent. Remove and re-compact over-compacted areas in 6-inch lifts. A maximum of 18 inch depth may be removed. In lieu of re-compacting the native soil, you may place and compact aggregate base per Section 32 11 23. If soils are dried and impervious to the penetration of water, scarify the subgrade. When base material, and/or curbs are to be placed on the subgrade material, compact to at least 90 percent of the maximum dry density attainable as determined by ASTM D 1557, otherwise, compact to 95 percent. The finished subgrade shall be firm, hard, and unyielding. The subgrade shall be considered to extend over the full width of the base course. Compaction shall extend at least 18 inches beyond the edge of paving, curb, or form.

3.2. EXCAVATION BELOW SUBGRADE

A. Where Metro or its designee determines the subgrade material to be unsuitable, excavation below subgrade will be required to such depths as necessary to remove the unsuitable material. Excavation below subgrade shall be of the same classification as that above it provided it is removed in the same operation as the normal excavation. Special equipment may be required because of the presence of shallow utilities or other unforeseen conditions.

A. The over excavated unsuitable subgrade shall be replaced with suitable material per Section 31 20 00 Earthwork.

B. When over-excavation is not shown on the Contract Drawings and not specified, but is ordered by Metro or its designee, such over-excavation and any resulting backfill will be paid for under a separate unit price bid item if such bid item has been established and approved by Metro or its designee prior to commencing the work; otherwise payment will be made in accordance with a negotiated price.

3.3. PROTECTION OF SUBGRADE

A. After preparing the subgrade as specified, all traffic on the subgrade shall be avoided. Should it be necessary to haul over the prepared subgrade, the Contractor shall drag and roll the traveled way as frequently as may be necessary to remove ruts, cuts, and breaks in the surface. All cuts, ruts, and breaks in the surface of the subgrade that are not removed by the above operations shall be raked and hand tamped. All equipment used for transporting materials over the prepared subgrade shall be equipped with pneumatic tires.

B. Subgrade for subbase or base material shall not vary more than 1/2 inch from the specified grade and section.



C. Continued use of sections of prepared subgrade for hauling, so as to cut up or deform it from the true cross-section, will not be permitted. The Contractor shall protect the prepared subgrade from all traffic.

D. The Contractor will be required to plank the subgrade before hauling materials or equipment over it.

E. The subgrade shall be maintained in the finished condition as required by Section 3.01 A above, until the first succeeding course is placed.

F. In the case of permeable concrete pavement, utility covers shall be set to finish grade before paving. Repaving required as a result of reconstruction or utility vault frames and covers to grade shall be the responsibility of the Contractor and the cost thereof shall be included in the bid item for pavement.

PART 4 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

A. The subgrade preparation is included in the item of work for which the subgrade is prepared. No separate payment will be made for subgrade preparation.



EARVIN MAGIC JOHNSON PARK – PHASE 1A TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING LOS ANGELES, CA 31 23 33-1 COUNTY OF LOS ANGELES COMMUNITY DEVELOPMENT COMMISSION AHBE PROJECT NO. 116030.01 CWE

SECTION 31 23 33

TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING

PART 1 GENERAL


This Section includes all excavating, trenching and backfilling required for construction the Work: excavate trenches for utilities, compacted bedding, backfilling and compaction to required elevations, backfill authorized types of fill, apply slurry concrete, and installing thrust blocks.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. ASTM C150 - Portland Cement.

B. ASTM C494 - Chemical Admixtures for Concrete.

C. ASTM 01557 - Laboratory compaction characteristics of soil using modified effort.

D. SSPWC - Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction, Latest Edition.

E. California Code of Regulations, Title 8, Industrial Relations, Construction Safety Orders, Division 01, Chapter 4, Sub-Chapter 4, Article 6 Excavations.

F. California Public Contract Code, Section 7104 - Public Works Contracts for Digging Trenches or Excavations; Notice on Discovery of Hazardous Waste or Other Unusual Conditions; Investigations; Change Orders; Effect on Contract.

G. California Labor Code, Section 6705 - Public Works Contracts requiring detailed plans for shoring, bracing, sloping, indicating protection from caving ground for trenching work in excess of 5' deep and contract amounts stipulated therein.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. The Contractor shall submit in advance of excavation, for acceptance by the Owner's civil or structural engineer, detailed plan(s) showing the design of shoring, bracing, sloping, or other provisions to be made for worker protection from the hazard of caving ground during the excavation of trenches more than 5 feet in depth. If such plan(s) varies from the shoring system standards, the plan shall be prepared by a registered civil or structural engineer.

B. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results for compliance of the following with requirements indicated:

1. Classification according to ASTM D 2487 of each on-site and borrow soil material proposed for fill and backfill.

2. Laboratory compaction curve according to ASTM D 1557 for each on-site and borrow soil material proposed for fill and backfill.

Pre-excavation photographs or videotape: Show existing conditions of adjoining construction and site improvements, including finish surfaces, that might be misconstrued as damage caused by earthwork operations. Submit before earthwork begins.




A. Verify survey benchmark and intended elevations for Work.

B. Borrow. Fill, backfill, aggregate base, and other soil materials obtained from off-site sources shall be sampled and tested in compliance with CA EPA Department of Toxic Substances Control recommendations to prevent the importation of contaminated materials to the Site.· 1. Testing Frequency:

a. For borrow up to 1,000-cu.yd, conduct 1 test for each 250-cu.yrds. b. For borrow between 1,001- and 5,000-cu.yrd; conduct 4 tests for first 1,000- cu.yd, if

material tests acceptable, conduct 1 test for each additional 500-cu.yrds. c. For borrow over 5,000-cu.yrds, conduct 12 tests during import of first 5,000-cu.yrd, if

material tests acceptable, conduct 1 test for each additional 1,000-cu.yrds. 2. Owner's Testing Laboratory shall take samples at source, conduct testing and evaluate

test results prior to delivery. 3. Conduct tests for lead and other heavy metals, asbestos, PCB's, pesticides, herbicides,

VOCs, and semi-VOCs. 4. When detectable quantities of hazardous materials are found, determine the risk to

human health, the environment, or both using the DTSC Preliminary Endangerment Assessment Guidance Manual.

5. Do not import soils, that exhibit a known risk to human health, the environment,or both. Ensure that products of this section are supplied to affected trades in time to prevent interruption of construction progress.

1.5 SOILS INFORMATION

A. Geotechnical Investigation has been prepared under direction of Owner. Investigation is hereby referenced as information for Work of this Section. Architect assumes no responsibility for conclusions Contractor may draw from information provided. The Contract Documents take precedence over recommendations that may be contained in the Investigation and the contractor must obtain approval for any and all deviations from the Contract Documents.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 FILL AND BEDDING MATERIALS

A. This Section establishes standards of quality for backfill materials to be used as approved by Geotechnical Engineer in accordance with Chapter 18A CBC, Section 1803A.2 and Appendix J Section J107, California Building Code, and as scheduled in other Sections of this specification.

B. Sand: Sand shall consist of natural or manufactured granular material, or a combination thereof, free of deleterious amounts of organic material, mica, loam, clay and other substances not suitable for the purpose intended. Conform to Subsection 200-1.5.5, SSPWC, for gradation as required for Portland Cement Concrete, sand must achieve compaction of a minimum 90 percent.

C. Pea Gravel: Natural stone; washed, free of clay, shale, organic matter; graded to the following: 1. Minimum Size: 1/4 inch. 2. Maximum Size: 5/8 inch.

D. Slurry Concrete: 1. Slump: Between 4 inches and 6 inches.



2. Aggregate: 40 percent sand by weight, 60 percent pea gravel, minimum ¼ inch, maximum 5/8 inch.

3. Portland Cement: ASTM C150, 2-sack mix (2 sacks of cement per cubic yard). 4. Admixture: Calcium Chloride free, in proportions not to exceed the manufacturer's

recommendations. 5. Sufficient water shall be added to produce a fluid, workable mix that Will flow and·can be

pumped without segregation of aggregate. Material shall be mechanically mixed until the cement and water are thoroughly dispersed.

E. Stockpiled Fill: Onsite soils, stored separately on the site, approved for re-use by the Engineer.

2.2 ACCESSORIES

A. Underground Warning Tape: Metallic Detection Tape, aluminum core, 6 inches wide AASHTO specification colors, by Safety Sign Company, Cleveland, OH, or equal.

B. Color Coding and Lettering: as required for type of underground utility.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify fill material to be reused is acceptable to the Geotechnical Engineer

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Identify required lines, levels, contours and datum.

B. Backfill with approved fill and compact to density equal to or greater than requirements for subsequent backfill material.

C. Prior to commencement of trenching operations, notify Underground Service Alert of Southern California (800) 422-4133, Monday through Friday, 7:00 A.M. to 5:00 P.M.

3.3 EXCAVATION

A. Conform to Construction Safety Orders, Title 8, CCR, For Sloping, Benching, Shoring, Bracing, Protective Systems, and Shafts.

B. Conform to Section 7104, Public Contract Code. Promptly notify Owner of any contact with hazardous materials or differing conditions.

C. Conform to Section 6705, Labor Code. Provide shoring and bracing plan or other provisions intended to prevent caving ground.

D. Excavate subsoil required for utilities. Trenches shall be level or parallel to finish grade unless designated on drawings to be installed to specific gradient.

E. Cut trenches sufficiently wide to enable installation of utilities and allow inspection.

F. Water, storm drainage piping located in the same trench shall be separated by 12 inches horizontally and vertically, and water line shall be placed on a solid shelf excavated on one side of the common trench. Cross-over water lines shall also be separated 12 inches vertically from storm drainage pipe.



G. Water and sewer piping shall not be located in the same trench and they shall be separated by 12 inches horizontally and 12 inches vertically.

H. Excavation shall not interfere with normal 45 degree bearing splay of foundations. Parallel trenches, no closer than 18 inches from building foundations.

I. Hand trim excavation. Hand trim for bell and spigot pipe joints. Remove loose matter.

J. Remove lumped subsoil, boulders and rock.

K. Correct unauthorized excavation.

L. Stockpile approved excavated material in area designated on site and remove excess material not being used from site.

3.4 BEDDING

A. Support pipe and conduit during placement and compaction of bedding fill. Provide uniform bearing along entire length. Conform to Section 306, SSPWC.

B. Bedding: Place and compact materials in continuous layers not exceeding 6 inches compacted depth, ASTM D1557.

3.5 BACKFILLING

A. Backfill trenches to contours and elevations with unfrozen materials.

B. Fill areas will be inspected, tested and approved by Geotechnical Engineer.

C. Soil Fill over Bedding: Place and compact material in continuous layers as scheduled, compacted to ASTM D1557.

D. Employ placement method that does not disturb. or damage conduit, ducts or piping in trench.

E. Maintain optimum moisture content of backfill materials to attain required compaction density. When operations are interrupted by rain, do not resume Work until field tests indicate that moisture content and density of fill are as previously specified.

F. Remove surplus backfill materials from site and dispose legally.

G. Leave fill material stockpile areas completely free of excess fill materials.

H. Minimum Cover Over Piping, Conduits or Duct Banks: 24 inches.

I. Lay out and install or otherwise confirm invert elevations of all gravity flow systems to avoid conflict with other sub-surface structures or utilities of any kind. Adjust elevations or layout of pipes, conduits or duct banks to permit the required gravity flow.

J. Jetting for utility trenching compaction may be used outside building perimeter and only when recommended by Geotechnical Engineer, in accordance with Section 306 SSPWC.

K. Pressurized piping shall be installed level, or shall be installed parallel to finish grades unless designated on the Drawings to be installed to specific gradients.

3.6 THRUST BLOCKS



A. Install at turns of water lines and as indicated in drawings.

3.7 TOLERANCES

A. Top Surface of Backfilling Under Paved Areas: 0.2 ft from required elevations.

B. Top Surface of General Backfilling: Plus or minus 0.2 ft from required elevations.


A. Backfill materials and operations will be inspected and approved by Geotechnical Engineer including earth bank slopes (cut or fill).

B. Tests, analysis and compaction of fill material will be performed in accordance with ASTM D1557.

C. If tests indicate Work does not meet specified requirements, remove Work, replace and retest at no cost to Owner.

D. Frequency of Tests: Geotechnical Engineer may make as many tests as are necessary to ensure specified results.

3.9 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK

A. A. Protect finished Work.

B. Recompact fills subjected to vehicular traffic.

3.10 TEMPORARY PROTECTION OF UNFINISHED WORK

A. Trenching for placement of underground utilities shall be covered and protected with steel trench plates during non-work hours [and during school session hours]. Adequate warnings and protection indication of open trenches during work hours must be provided for project safety.

3.11 SCHEDULE

A. Storm and Sanitary Piping: 1. Bedding Fill: Sand, minimum thickness below piping 0.4 times outside diameter of pipe

but no less than 4 inches. Minimum thickness above top of piping, 12 inches, compacted to 90 percent.

2. Cover with stockpiled fill in 8-inch lifts to specified subgrade elevations, compact to 90 percent or to 95 percent under vehicle traffic-supporting paved areas.

3. Fill: Slurry concrete, 6" cover at top, bottom and sides of pipes at exterior paved areas (at vehicle traffic) where minimum fill cover is less than 12" below finished elevation of paving.

4. Bury warning tape marked "Caution Sewer Line" 12 inches above all trenching. Align tape parallel to and within 3 inches of the centerline of the piping.

B. Power Ducts: Concrete Encased 1. Fill: Slurry concrete, 3 inches cover at top, bottom, between conduits and sides of duct

bank. 2. Fill: Slurry concrete, 6 inches cover at top, bottom and sides of duct bank conduit at

exterior paved areas where minimum fill cover is less than 24" below finished elevation of paving, less than 12" below finished elevations of interior floor slabs and at building



footings where conduit is in the footing structural splay. 3. Install two No. 4 bars in· slurry concrete at top of bank under paved areas, minimum 3

inch concrete cover. 4. Cover with stockpiled fill in 6-inch lifts to specified subgrade elevation, compact to 90

percent, or to 95 percent under traffic-supporting paved areas. 5. Bury warning tape marked "Caution Buried High Voltage Line" 12 inches above all

concrete-encased duct banks. Align tape parallel to and within 3 inches of the centerline of the duct bank.

C. Water Piping and Gas Piping: 1. Bedding Fill: Sand, minimum thickness below piping 0.4 times outside diameter of pipe

but not less than 4". Minimum thickness above top of piping, 6 inches, compacted to 90 percent.

2. Fill: Slurry concrete, 6 inches cover at top, bottom and sides of pipes at exterior paved areas where minimum fill cover is less than 24" below finished elevation of paving, and less than 12" below finished elevations of interior floor slabs and at building footings where piping is in the footing structural splay.

3. Cover with stockpiled fill in 6-inch lifts to specified subgrade elevation, compact to 90 percent, or 95 percent under traffic-supporting paved areas.

4. Observe joints at pressure tests. 5. Bury warning tape marked "Caution Buried Gas (or "Pipeline") Line" 12 inches above all

trenching. Align tape parallel to and within 3 inches of the centerline of trench.

D. Fire Lines: 1. Bedding Fill: Manufactured Sand, minimum 6" thickness under piping, minimum thickness

above top of piping and sides, 6", compact to 90 percent. 2. Fill: Slurry concrete, 6" cover at top pipes at exterior paved areas where minimum fill

cover is less than 24" below finished elevation of paving. 3. Cover with stockpiled fill in 6-inch lifts to specified subgrade elevation, compact to 90

percent, or 95 percent under traffic-supporting paved areas. 4. Bury warning tape marked "Caution Buried Pipeline" 12 inches above all trenching. Align

tape parallel to and within 3 inches of the centerline of trench.



EARVIN MAGIC JOHNSON PARK – PHASE 1A OP. & MAINT. OF LNDSCP SITE IMPROVEMENTS LOS ANGELES, CA 32 01 30-1 COUNTY OF LOS ANGELES COMMUNITY DEVELOPMENT COMMISSION AHBE PROJECT NO. 116030.01 AHBE

SECTION 32 01 30 OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE OF LANDSCAPE SITE IMPROVMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Work Specified in this Section: Furnish all labor, material, equipment, and services required to maintain and establish the landscape in an attractive and thriving condition as specified herein for a period of 360 calendar days.

B. Related Work Specified in Other Sections: 1. Section 32 15 00: Aggregate Surfacing 2. Section 32 80 00: Landscape Irrigation 3. Section 32 90 00: Landscape Planting 4. Section 32 92 19: Seeding


A. The Contractor's representatives and employees shall be experienced in landscape maintenance.

1.3 365 CALENDAR DAY MAINTENANCE AND ESTABLISHMENT PERIOD

A. The Contractor shall continuously maintain all areas involved in this Contract during the progress of work. Maintenance period shall not start until all elements of construction, planting, and irrigation for the entire project are in accordance with Plans and specifications. 1. A prime requirement is that all lawn and groundcover areas shall have been planted and

that all lawn areas shall show an even, healthy stand of grass seedlings or sod, either of which shall have been mowed twice. Maintenance period will not be shortened when these criteria are met, but may be lengthened if not met.

2. The Contractor’s maintenance period will be extended if the provisions required within the Plans and specifications are not fulfilled. Project may not be segmented into maintenance phases.

3. The Contractor shall request a Pre-Maintenance inspection by the Owner and Landscape Architect at the completion of the installation process.

4. The Maintenance Period shall begin upon successful completion of the Pre-Maintenance walk-through punch list and acceptance of the landscape installation by the Owner.

5. If such criteria are met to the satisfaction of the Owner, a field notification will be issued to the Contractor to establish the effective beginning date of the maintenance period.

B. The Maintenance Period continues for 365 calendar days until final acceptance of the work by the Owner. Improper maintenance or poor condition of planting at the termination of the scheduled maintenance period may cause postponement of the final completion date of the Contract.

C. Any day when the Contractor fails to adequately maintain planting, replace unsuitable plants or do weed control or other work, as determined necessary by the Owner, will not be credited as one of the maintenance period working days.



1.4 GUARANTEE AND REPLACEMENT

A. Guarantee: All plant material installed under the contract shall be guaranteed for a period of one year from the Start of the Maintenance Period. Plants found to be dead or in poor condition due to faulty materials or workmanship, as determined solely by the Landscape Architect, shall be replaced by the Contractor at his expense. 1. Replacement: Materials found to be dead, missing, or in poor condition during the

Maintenance period shall be replaced immediately. 2. The Landscape Architect shall be the sole judge as to the condition of material. 3. The Contractor shall replace material rejected during the Guarantee period within fifteen

(15) days of written notification by the Owner.

1.5 OBSERVATION VISITS

A. The Contractor shall request progress visits from the Landscape Architect at least 72 hours in advance of anticipated visits. Normal observation visits are as follows: 1. Immediately prior to the commencement of the work in this section. 2. Completion of first 365 days of maintenance. 3. Final acceptance.

1.6 FINAL ACCEPTANCE OF THE PROJECT

A. Prior to the date of the final observation visit, the Contractor shall acquire from the Landscape Architect -approved reproducible Plans and record (from the job record set) all changes made during construction, label these Plans "Record Drawings", and deliver to the Landscape Architect for review and approval.

B. Prior to the date of final inspection, the Contractor shall deliver to the Landscape Architect a written "Landscape and Irrigation Guarantee" as required herein.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. All materials used shall either conform to landscape specifications in other sections or shall otherwise be acceptable to the Owner.

B. The Owner shall be given a monthly record of all herbicides, insecticides, and disease control chemicals used. Failure to provide such a record will continue maintenance period until compliance occurs.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 MAINTENANCE

A. Maintenance shall be performed according to the following standards: 1. All areas shall be weeded and cultivated at intervals of not more than ten (10) days.



2. Watering, mowing, rolling, edging, trimming, fertilization, spraying, and pest and rodent control, as may be required, shall be included in the maintenance period.

3. Street gutters shall be cleaned as part of the maintenance program. 4. The Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining adequate protection of the area. 5. Damaged areas shall be repaired at the Contractor's expense. 6. Between the 15th day and the 20th day of the maintenance period, the Contractor shall

reseed and re-sod all spots or areas within the lawn where normal turf growth is not evident.

B. The Contractor shall be responsible for reporting to the Owner conditions beyond his control that prevent or have negative impact on the work required herein.

3.2 TREE AND SHRUB CARE

A. Watering 1. Apply enough irrigation water so that moisture penetrates throughout root zone and only

as frequently as necessary to maintain healthy growth. a. Do not maintain soils in a constantly wet condition. b. Contractor shall be responsible for familiarizing himself with the particular water

requirements for the various plantings and shall be responsible for setting and maintaining the automatic controller to optimum minimum levels.

c. Damage to the plantings caused by over-watering or under-watering shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to replace at no cost to Owner.

2. Maintain a water basin around newly planted plants so that water can be applied to moisturize throughout the root zone. At the end of the maintenance period these basins shall be flattened out to match surrounding grades.

3. If hand-watering, use a fan spray nozzle to break the water force.

B. Tree Pruning 1. Nursery grown trees will not normally require pruning for the first year. Prune trees only if

directed by Landscape Architect or Owner, and only for these purposes: a. selection and development of permanent scaffold branches that have a vertical

spacing of from 18" to 48" and radial orientation so as not to cross each other, b. elimination of diseased or damaged growth, c. elimination of narrow V-shaped branch forks that lack strength, d. reduction of toppling and wind damage by thinning out crowns, e. maintenance of growth within space limitations, f. maintenance of natural appearance, g. Balancing of crown-to-root ratio.

2. Under no circumstances will stripping of lower branches ("rising up") of young trees be permitted. a. Lower branches shall be retained in a “tipped-back" or pinched condition with as

much foliage as possible to promote caliper trunk growth (tapered trunk). b. Lower branches can be cut flush with trunk only after the tree is able to stand erect

without staking or other support. 3. Evergreen trees shall be thinned out and shaped when necessary to prevent wind and

storm damage. The primary pruning of deciduous trees shall be done during the dormant season. Damaged trees or those that constitute health or safety hazards shall be pruned at any time of the year as required.



C. Shrub Pruning 1. The objectives of shrub pruning are the same as for trees. Shrubs shall not be clipped

into balled or boxed forms unless such is required by the design. 2. All pruning cuts shall be made to lateral branches or buds or flush with the trunk.

"Stubbing" will not be permitted.

D. Staking and Guying: Stakes and guys shall remain in place until final acceptance and are to be continuously inspected and adjusted to prevent girdling of trunks or branches and to prevent rubbing that causes bark wounds and to allow trees to sway freely. Stakes and guys are to be removed when trees become sufficiently well rooted or after one year. When stakes or guys are removed, tree heads may be thinned to reduce wind load.

E. Weed Control: Keep all areas, including basins and areas between plants, free of weeds. 1. Use mulches to help prevent weed seed germination. 2. Avoid frequent soil cultivation next to trees or shrubs that destroys shallow roots. 3. The preferred method of weed control is mechanical removal of the weed from the roots,

or non-toxic treatment, such as herbicidal soaps. 4. If mechanical and non-toxic weed treatments are unsuccessful, use non-selective,

systemic contact herbicide recommended by an approved licensed landscape Pest Control Advisor and applied by a licensed Pest Control Operator. Leave sprayed plants intact to allow systemic kill as directed by Advisor. Requests for herbicide applications shall be submitted to the Landscape Architect for review and approval prior to application.

F. Pest and Disease Control: Maintain control of insect and rodent infestations. The preferred method of control shall be biological control, or with non-toxic, biodegradable, organic materials. If the use of stronger control measures are needed, submit request for Insecticide or Chemical applications to Landscape Architect for approval. Only materials that are recommended by a licensed Pest Control Advisor and are EPA approved and regulated shall be used. Insecticide or Chemical applications shall only be provided or applied by a registered and licensed Pest Control Operators. Notify Owner a minimum of five (5) working days before chemical applications.

G. Fertilization 1. Fertilize planting areas at 30-day intervals as needed, with fertilizer and at rate as

recommended by Soils Report. a. Avoid applying fertilizer to root balls and bases of main stems b. Spread fertilizer evenly around plants to drip line. c. Distribute fertilizer evenly over turf or groundcover areas to avoid patchy

coloration. d. California native shrubs and ground cover do not require fertilizer. See plans for

details.

H. Replacement of Plants: Replace dead, dying, and missing plants with plants of a size, condition, and variety acceptable to Landscape Architect or Owner at Contractor's expense.

3.3 GROUND COVER CARE

A. Weed Control: See 3.2.E.



B. Watering: Water enough so that moisture penetrates throughout root zone and only as frequently as necessary to maintain healthy growth. 1. Do not maintain soils in a constantly wet condition. 2. Contractor shall familiarize himself with the particular water requirements for the planting

and shall be responsible for setting and maintaining the automatic controller to optimum minimum levels.

3. Damage to the planting caused by over-watering or under-watering shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to replace.

C. Trash: Remove trash weekly. Remove debris, clippings or branches produced by maintenance activities within 8 hours.

D. Soil Compaction: Foot traffic in planted areas shall be minimized, and soil compaction shall be loosened immediately.

E. Edging and Trimming: Edge ground cover to keep in bounds and trim top growth as necessary to achieve an overall even appearance.

F. Replacement: Replace dead and missing plants at Contractor's expense.

3.4 LAWN AND TURF CARE

A. Mowing and Edging: 1. Mowing of turf will commence when the grass has reached a recommended height for

the specified species. Mowing will be at least twice a week after the first cut. Turf must be well-established and free of bare spots and weeds to the satisfaction of the Architect prior to final acceptance.

2. Clippings from mowing shall be left in the lawn (“grasscycling”) to decompose and return nutrients back into the soil.

3. Edges shall be trimmed at least weekly or as needed for neat appearance.

B. Watering: Lawns shall be watered at such frequency as weather conditions require to replenish soil moisture below root zone and maintain healthy growth.

C. Fertilizing: 1. Fertilize all on-grade lawn areas as follows or as recommended by soils report:

a. At the end of the first 30 calendar days and at 30 to 90 calendar day intervals thereafter - 5 lbs. per 1,000 square feet of maintenance fertilizer.

b. After application, irrigate thoroughly.

D. Weed Control: Remove broad leaf weeds manually or control with selective herbicides. Turf areas shall be kept weed-free.

E. Renovating: 1. If required, remove thatch by verticutting, preferably in the fall but otherwise in the

spring. At this time, fertilize with maintenance fertilizer and over-seed if needed. 2. Aerify compacted areas to improve water penetration whenever needed.



3.5 IRRIGATION SYSTEM

A. System Inspection: Contractor shall continuously check all systems for proper operation. Lateral lines shall be flushed out after removing the last sprinkler head or two at each of the lateral. All heads are to be continuously adjusted as necessary for proper coverage and to eliminate over-spray on buildings or paving. Contractors regular maintenance personnel shall test, observe, and adjust each sprinkler system no less than once per month.

END OF SECTION

BID SET SUBMITTAL

July 26, 2018

EARVIN MAGIC JOHNSON PARK – PHASE 1A AGGREGATE BASE COURSES LOS ANGELES, CA 32 11 23-1 COUNTY OF LOS ANGELES COMMUNITY DEVELOPMENT COMMISSION AHBE PROJECT NO. 116030.01 CWE

SECTION 32 11 23

AGGREGATE BASE COURSES

PART 1 GENERAL


A. The Work to be performed includes the preparation of the aggregate base course foundation; and the production, stockpiling, hauling, placing, and compacting of aggregate base course.


A. Section 31 22 00 Grading.

B. Section 31 23 33 Trenching and Backfilling

C. Section 32 12 16 Asphalt Paving

D. Section 32 16 13 Curbs and Gutters

E. Section 32 16 23 Sidewalks

F. Section 32 16 33 Driveways

1.3 REFERENCES

A. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO): 1. M147, Standard Specification for Materials for Aggregate and Soil-Aggregate

Subbase, Base, and Surface Courses. 2. T11, Standard Method of Test for Materials Finer Than 75 μm (No. 200) Sieve in

Mineral Aggregates by Washing. 3. T27, Standard Method of Test for Sieve analysis of fine and coarse aggregate. 4. T89, Standard Specification for Determining the Liquid Limit of Soils 5. T90, Standard Specification for Determining the Plastic Limit and Plasticity Index of

Soils 6. T96, Standard Specification for Resistance to Degradation of Small-Size Coarse

Aggregate by Abrasion and Impact in the Los Angeles Machine. 7. T99, Standard Specification for the Moisture-Density Relations of Soils using a 2.5 kg

(5.5 pound) rammer and a 305 mm (12 in) Drop. 8. T180, Standard Specification for Moisture-Density Relations of Soils using a 4.54 kg

(10-lb) rammer and a 457 mm (18-in) Drop. 9. T190, Standard Specification for Resistance R-Value and Expansion Pressure of

Compacted Soils. 10. T265, Standard Method of Test for Laboratory Determination of Moisture Content of

Soils. 11. T310, Standard Specification for In-Place Density and Moisture Content of Soil and

Soil 12. Aggregate by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth).

B. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. C88, Test Method for Soundness of Aggregates by Use of Sodium Sulfate or

Magnesium Sulfate.

BID SET SUBMITTAL

July 26, 2018


2. D698, Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort (12 400 ft-lbf/ft

3 (600 kN-m/m

3)).

3. D1557, Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort (56,000 ft-lbf/ft

3 (2,700 kN-m/m

3)).

4. D1883, Test Method for CBR (California Bearing Ratio) of Laboratory Compacted Soils.

5. D2419, Test Method for Sand Equivalent Value of Soils and Fine Aggregate. 6. D4791, Test Method for Flat Particles, Elongated Particles, or Flat and Elongated

Particles in Coarse Aggregate.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. The Contractor shall cooperate with the Engineer in obtaining and providing samples of all specified materials.

B. The Contractor shall submit certified laboratory test certificates for all items required in this section.

C. The Contractor shall submit tickets for each load of aggregate

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Aggregates: Aggregates for bases shall be crushed stone, crushed slag, crushed gravel or natural gravel that conforms to the quality requirements of AASHTO M147, except that the requirements for the ratio for the minus No. 200 sieve fraction to the minus No. 40 sieve fraction shall not apply. The requirements for the Los Angeles wear test shall not apply to Class 1, 2, and 3. Aggregates for bases shall meet the grading requirements as called out in the DRAWINGS. The liquid limit shall be as shown in the table and the plasticity index shall be ≤6.

B. Gradations:

BID SET SUBMITTAL

July 26, 2018


Standard US Sieve Size

Percentage by Weight Passing Square-Mesh Sieves

LL < 35 LL < 30

Class 1 Class 2 Class 3 Class 4 Class 5 Class 6 Class 7

4 inches -- 100 -- -- -- -- --

3 inches -- 95-100 -- -- -- -- --

2½ inches 100 -- -- -- -- -- --

2 inches 95-100 -- -- 100 -- -- --

1½ inches -- -- -- 90-100 -- -- --

1 inch -- -- -- -- 95-100 -- 100

¾ inch -- -- -- 50-90 -- 100 --

No. 4 30-65 -- -- 30-50 30-70 30-65 --

No. 8 -- -- -- -- -- 25-55 20-85

No. 200 3-15 3-15 20 max. 3-12 3-15 3-15 5-15

Note: Class 3 materials shall consist of bank or pit run material.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

A. Equipment: 1. Equipment shall be capable of performing the WORK as described in this

SPECIFICATION. Equipment that is inadequate to obtain the results specified shall be replaced or supplemented as required to meet the requirements of this SPECIFICATION. Any equipment that is used in an improper manner may be cause for rejection of the WORK if in the opinion of ENGINEER the WORK fails to meet the requirements of this SPECIFICATION.

2. Equipment used for compaction shall be the rolling type, vibratory type, or combination of both types, and shall be of sufficient capacity to meet the compaction requirements herein.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Roads and Parking Areas: Roads and Parking Areas: For aggregate base course roads and parking areas, the top six (6) inches of topsoil shall be stripped within the area to be aggregate surfaced. Following stripping of the topsoil, the upper twelve (12) inches of the subgrade shall be scarified and compacted to a minimum of ninety-five percent (95%) of the Maximum Standard Proctor Density (ASTM D698). Onsite material may be used as accepted by ENGINEER, for compacted fill for the aggregate base course. Fill shall be placed within two percent (2%) of optimum moisture content and compacted to a minimum of

BID SET SUBMITTAL

July 26, 2018


ninety five percent (95%) of the Maximum Standard Proctor Density (ASTM D698).

B. Pavements: Aggregate base course used as a foundation for pavements shall be placed on the subgrade within two percent (2%) of optimum moisture and compacted to a minimum of one hundred percent (100%) of the Maximum Modified Proctor Density (ASTM D1557). The top six (6) inches of topsoil shall be stripped within the area to be aggregate surfaced. Following stripping of the topsoil, the upper twelve (12) inches of the subgrade shall be scarified and compacted to a minimum of ninety-five percent (95%) of the Maximum Standard Proctor Density (ASTM D698). Onsite material may be used, as accepted by ENGINEER, for compacted fill for the aggregate base course. Fill shall be placed within two percent (2%) of optimum moisture content and compacted to a minimum of ninety five percent (95%) of the Maximum Standard Proctor Density (ASTM D698). Deviations in aggregate base course under pavements of more than one-quarter (1/4) inch in ten (10) feet, measured with a ten-foot (10') straight edge, shall be corrected prior to pavement construction.

C. Earth Subgrade: When the foundation is an earth subgrade it shall be prepared by removing all vegetation, excavating and removing materials, filling depressions, scarifying, shaping, smoothing and compacting to meet the required grade, section and density. Stones over six (6) inches in greatest dimension shall be removed.

3.3 PLACEMENT

A. The aggregate base course shall be constructed to the width and section shown in the DRAWINGS. If the required compacted depth of base course exceeds six (6) inches, the base shall be constructed in two (2) or more layers of approximate equal thickness. The maximum compacted thickness of any one (1) layer shall not exceed six (6) inches.

B. Each layer shall be constructed as far in advance of the succeeding layer as ENGINEER may direct. The WORK shall, in general, proceed from the point on the PROJECT nearest the point of supply of the aggregate in order that the hauling equipment may travel over the previously placed material, and the hauling equipment shall be routed as uniformly as possible over all portions of the previously constructed courses or layers of the base course.

C. The material shall be deposited on the soil foundation, or previously placed layer, in a manner to minimize segregation and to facilitate spreading to a uniform layer of the required section. In the event that blending of materials is necessary to provide required gradation and properties of the material, and is done in the roadway, the same shall be accomplished by mixing the aggregate and blending material by means of blade graders, discs, harrows, or other equipment to effect a uniform distribution and gradation throughout the finished mixture. Excessive mixing and grading that will cause segregation between the coarse and fine materials is prohibited.

3.4 COMPACTION

A. After a layer or course has been placed and spread to the required thickness, width and contour, it shall be compacted. If the material is too dry to readily attain the required density, it shall be uniformly moistened to the degree necessary during compaction operations for proper compaction.

B. B. Compaction of each layer shall continue until the required density specified in Article Preparation of Foundation is reached. The surface of each layer shall be maintained during compaction operations in such a manner that a uniform texture is produced and aggregates firmly keyed.

BID SET SUBMITTAL

July 26, 2018


C. All areas where proper compaction is not obtainable due to segregation of materials, excess fines, or other deficiencies in the aggregate shall be reworked as necessary or the material removed and replaced with aggregates that will meet this SPECIFICATION.

D. The surface of each layer shall be kept true and smooth at all times.

3.5 MIXING

A. A. Unless otherwise specified, CONTRACTOR shall mix the aggregate by any one of the three following methods: 1. Stationary Plant Method: Aggregate base course and water shall be mixed in an

approved mixer. After mixing, the aggregate shall be transported to the PROJECT site while it contains the proper moisture content and shall be placed on the roadbed by means of an approved spreader.

2. Travel Plant Method: After the material for each layer has been placed through an aggregate spreader or windrow-sizing device, it shall be uniformly mixed by a traveling mixing plant.

3. Road Mix Method: After material for each layer has been placed, the materials shall be mixed while at optimum moisture content by motor graders or other approved equipment until the mixture is uniform throughout.

3.6 SHOULDER CONSTRUCTION

A. Shoulders shall be constructed with base course material to conform to the elevation and section shown in the DRAWINGS. No equipment shall be used which by its design or through its manner of operation will damage the pavement or curbs. Insofar as practicable, the base course material shall be placed directly on the shoulder area. Materials that are deposited outside the shoulder area, if not contaminated, shall be recovered and placed within the required limits. CONTRACTOR shall not be compensated for materials not recovered as determined by ENGINEER.

B. Materials shall not be deposited on the pavement or surfacing during placing unless specifically permitted by ENGINEER.

C. The base course material as placed shall be spread and compacted to the required density in layers not exceeding six (6) inches in compacted thickness. Any material inadvertently placed on the pavement shall be broomed from the pavement. The result shall not effect a change in the gradation of the shoulder material.



EARVIN MAGIC JOHNSON PARK – PHASE 1A ASPHALT CONCRETE PAVEMENT LOS ANGELES, CA 32 12 16-1 COUNTY OF LOS ANGELES COMMUNITY DEVELOPMENT COMMISSION AHBE PROJECT NO. 116030.01 CWE

SECTION 32 12 16

ASPHALT CONCRETE PAVEMENT

PART 1 GENERAL


A. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish all tools, equipment, materials, and supplies and shall perform all labor required to complete the work as indicated in the Contract Documents and specified herein.

B. This section covers the work necessary to reconstruct asphalt concrete pavement removed from the parking lot, including asphaltic concrete paving and surface sealer, sub-base preparation, aggregate base course, slurry sealing, and patching and repair of asphaltic concrete paving.


A. Section 31 00 00 - Earthwork

B. Section 32 11 23 - Aggregate Base Course

C. Section 32 17 23 – Pavement Marking

D. Portland cement concrete curbs and gutters are specified in Section 32 16 21 - Concrete Curbs, Gutters, and Walks.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction (SSPWC), Latest Edition, with Special Provisions, Performance Grade Paving Asphalt.

B. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO):

AASHTO T245 Resistance to Plastic Flow of Bituminous Mixtures Using Marshall Apparatus

C. ASTM D3910 - Design, Testing, and Construction of Slurry Seal.


A. Perform Work in accordance with SSPWC Sections 200, 203 and 302.

B. Obtain materials from same source throughout, using batch plant method for proportioning and mixing.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Mix Design: Submit proposed mix design for each asphaltic concrete mixture and



seal coat to be used in the work, covering the specific materials to be used in the mixes. Include test data in support of each proposed mix design.

B. The CONTRACTOR shall formulate a job-mix formula using the Marshall Method in accordance with SSPWC Section 203-6.3.2 and submit it to the ENGINEER for approval. The resultant mixture shall have Marshall properties conforming to SSPWC Section 203-6.3.2.

C. Test Reports: Submit test results of sampling and testing, and inspection records within 24 hours of asphaltic concrete placement.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Base Course Material: Class 2 Aggregate Base as specified in Section 32 11 23 0 Aggregate Base Course, of these Specifications.

B. Asphalt Binder: SSPWC 203-1 or MSHTO MP1, Performance Grade 64-10 South and Central Coast, Inland Valleys regions, and shall conform to the testing requirements of Table 203-1.2 (B), Section 203 SSPWC.

C. Asphalt Aggregate: Uniformly graded in accordance with Section 203-6.4, SSPWC.

D. Prime Coat: Asphalt to be used for a prime coat shall be liquid asphalt SC-250 and shall conform to the requirements of SSPWC Section 203-2 LIQUID ASPHALT.

E. Tack Coat: Asphalt emulsion shall be CSS-1 or CSS-1h and shall conform to the requirements of SSPWC Section 203-3 EMULSIFIED ASPHALT.

F. Seal Coat: Conform to Section 203-9, SSPWC. 1. GUARDTOP by Industrial Asphalt/Vulcan Material Co,, Inc., Irwindale, CA. 2. SATIN SEAL by Blue Diamond Co., Long Beach, CA. 3. Or equal, as approved in accordance with Division 01, General Requirements

for Substitutions.

G. Soil Sterilizer: Spike 80DF. Non-selective weed and grass killer, by Dow-AgroSciences, Indianapolis, IN, EPA Reg. No. 62719-107, or equal, as approved in accordance with Division 01, General Requirements for Substitutions. 1. Active Ingredients:

a. Tebuthiuron 80 percent b. Inert Ingredients 20 percent Total 100 Percent

H. Parking Bumpers: 1. Precast concrete type, 2500 psi, bars No. 3 minimum size. Bars shall extend

to within 1-1/2 inches of ends of bumpers. Minimum bumper size: 6 inches high, 8 inches wide, 5 feet long unless otherwise indicated on drawings.

I. Headers: Foundation grade redwood, minimum 2 x 4 inch. Stakes shall be minimum 2 x 3 inch in accordance with Section 302-5.5 SSPWC.



J. Raised Pavement Markers: per Section 32 17 23.

2.2 ASPHALT PAVING MIX

A. Use dry material to avoid foaming. Mix uniformly.

B. Mix: Section 203-6.4 SSPWC, 1 /2 inch maximum aggregate size, medium gradation curve, as required by outside temperatures at time of laying. 1. Single Course: C2 (Dense Medium) [or D2 Dense Fine] aggregate,

Performance Grade 64-10 asphalt. a. Areas where hand spreading is required: Use 3/8 inch mix. b. Playground areas: "Playground Mix", 3/8" mix D2 Dense Fine, SSPWC

Table 203-6.4.3 (A).

C. Mix: Section 203-6.4 SSPWC, 3/4 inch asphalt base course, 1/2 inch asphalt surface course aggregate size. 1. Asphalt Base Course: B (Dense Medium Coarse), Performance Grade 64-10 2. Asphalt Surface Course: C2 (Dense Medium), Performance Grade 64-10

a. Areas where hand spreading is required: Use 3/8 inch mix. b. Playground areas: "Playground Mix", 3/8" mix D2 Dense Fine, SSPWC

Table 203-6.4.3 (A) for Surface Course.

D. D. Recycled Asphalt Concrete (RAC), C2-PG 64-10 RAC: Reclaimed Asphalt Pavement (RAP) maximum 15% unless noted otherwise on drawings, aggregate and asphalt per SSPWC Section 203-7.

E. Slurry Mix Design: ISSA Type II (General), 1/4" thick.

2.3 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. A. The Contractor shall perform sampling and tests of materials in accordance with the following requirements: 1. Aggregate Grading: The combined aggregate, prior to addition of asphalt

binder (paving asphalt), shall conform with the "Operating Range" requirements specified in Section 39 of the Caltrans Standard Specifications for the type of aggregate specified herein. Conformance with grading requirements shall be determined by California Test 202.

2. Frequency of Tests: Minimum testing frequency shall be one test for every 500 tons, or fraction thereof, for each graded aggregate placed each day.

3. Asphalt Content: Asphalt content shall be within plus or minus 0.50 percent of the mix design content. Conformance with asphalt content requirements shall be determined by California Test 382 or 379 from samples taken from the mat behind the paving machine. Minimum testing frequency shall be one test for every 500 tons, or fraction thereof, for each asphaltic paving mix placed each day.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 SUBGRADE

A. Bring areas to be surfaced to required subgrades by cutting and filling with suitable



equipment.

B. Scarify subgrade to minimum depth of 6 inches. Bring to optimum moisture content and compact to minimum 90 percent density in accordance with ASTM D1557 by rolling with power roller. Provide hard, even surface to receive subsequent base and paving.

C. Finish subgrade to required grades with allowance for compression and for thickness of base course and finish paving thickness.

3.2 SOIL STERILIZATION

A. After subgrade has been compacted and approved by Geotechnical Engineer, treat areas to be paved with specified soil sterilizer. Conform to following: 1. Apply 7 .5 lbs. of solution per acre for each 15 gallons of water, spray apply

per manufacturer's instructions.

B. Exercise caution during storage of material and during application. Prevent injury to humans, animal life, adjacent plant life and property. Keep soil sterilization materials minimum three feet from tree wells or any plant life.

C. Legally dispose of containers

3.3 BASE COURSE

A. Place and compact aggregate base upon finished subgrade in conformance with Section 301-2 SSPWC. Compaction: 95 percent.

B. Thickness of Base After Compaction: As indicated on Drawings but not less than 4 inches if not indicated.

3.4 PREPARATION - PRIMER AND TACK COATS

A. Apply primer coat on base course surfaces in conformance with Section 302-5.3, SSPWC, at rate of 0.10 to 0.25 gallons per sq. yd. Allow to cure prior to application of asphalt course.

B. Apply tack coat to contact surfaces of cold joints, curbs, gutters, manholes and adjacent materials, and over existing asphalt surfaces in conformance with Section 302-5.4, SSPWC.

C. Coat surfaces of catch basin frames with oil to prevent bond with asphalt pavement. Do not tack coat these surfaces.

3.5 PLACING ASPHALT PAVEMENT

A. Install redwood headers.

B. Place asphalt in conformance with Section 302-5, SSPWC. Conform to temperature maximums and minimums specified therein. Materials shall not be applied which have cooled below lower limit allowable. 1. Install 3/8" mix for single course asphalt payment.



C. Place to thickness as indicated on drawings but not less than 2 inches if not indicated.

D. Install drainage grilles and frames in correct position and elevation.

E. Compact pavement by rolling with equipment specified in Section 302-5.6, SSPWC. Do not displace or extrude pavement from position.

F. Develop rolling with consecutive passes to achieve even and smooth finish, without roller marks, rock pockets, ridges or depressions.

3.6 SEAL COAT

A. Apply seal coat 30 days or more after surface course application, in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

B. Apply seal coat to surface course in accordance with Section 302-8.2, SSPWC. ·

C. Add water to specified seal coat material. When air temperatures of 90 degrees F or more are encountered during application, consult manufacturer for recommendations.

D. If pavement surface exhibits imperfections noted Placing Asphalt Pavement above, as determined by the Engineer, the addition of sand aggregate to seal coat, and amounts thereof, shall be as recommended by the manufacturer.

E. A second application shall be made after first coat has dried to the touch. When sand is added to the first seal coat, two additional coats without extra sand shall be applied.

F. Allow seal coat to dry before permitting traffic or striping.

3.7 SLURRY SEALING

A. Prior to slurry application, repair areas and major depressions, wide cracks filled, remove dust, dirt and other foreign material from the surface.

B. Apply a tack coat of diluted emulsified asphalt of same type and grade specified for the slurry.

C. Apply slurry in accordance with [ASTM D-391 O], the Asphalt Institute Standards and the International Slurry Seal Association. Minimum thickness of 1/4".

3.8 PARKING BUMPERS

A. A. Securely attach precast concrete parking bumpers into pavement with two 5/8 inch diameter galvanized solid rod anchors. Extend anchors 24 inches into ground. Apply adhesive to underside of concrete bumpers, as recommended by the manufacturer.

3.9 PATCHING AND REPAIRS



A. Patching: Saw cut perimeter of patch and excavate existing pavement section to sound base. Scarify and recompact the upper 12 inches of subgrade to 95% of maximum density. Excavate rectangular or trapezoidal patches, extending 12 inches into adjacent sound pavement, unless otherwise indicated. Cut excavation faces vertically. 1. Tack coat faces of excavation and allow to cure before paving. 2. Fill excavation with dense-graded, hot-mix asphalt base mix and, while still

hot, compact flush with adjacent surface. 3. Partially fill excavation with dense-graded, hot-mix asphalt base mix and

compact while still hot. Cover asphalt base course with compacted, hot-mix surface layer finished flush with adjacent surfaces.

B. Tack Coat: Apply uniformly to existing surfaces of previously constructed asphalt or portland cement concrete paving to surfaces abutting or projecting into new, hot-mix asphalt pavement. Apply at a uniform rate of 0.05 to 0.15 gal./sq. yd. of surface. 1. Allow tack coat to cure undisturbed before paving. 2. Avoid smearing or staining adjoining surfaces, appurtenances, and

surroundings. Remove spilages and clean affected surfaces.

C. Preparation 1. Subgrade Preparation: Scarify earth subgrade to a depth of not less than 6

inches, and compact to 95 percent of maximum density. 2. Moisten with water to approximate optimum moisture content, and while moist,

roll until the surface is unyielding, with a power roller of such weight as to develop a pressure of not less than 200 pounds per linear inch of roller width.

3. Correct irregularities by dressing down or filling as may be required, to bring areas to true subgrade elevations.

4. Where filling is required, scarify the subgrade to bond the new material to the in-place material; use additional material as required, subject to the approval of the Engineer, and provided by the Contractor.

5. Remove excess material from the site to a legal disposal area.

D. Compaction: Repairs: Remove paved areas that are defective or contaminated with foreign materials. Remove paving course over area affected and replace with fresh, hot-mix asphalt. Compact by rolling to specified density and surface smoothness.

E. Surface Treatments: Slurry Seal: Apply slurry coat in a uniform thickness according to ASTM D 3910 and allow to cure. 1. Roll slurry seal to smooth ridges and provide a uniform, smooth surface.

F. Application General 1. Finish elevations, extent of asphalt paving and locations of type of asphalt and

class of base shall be as indicated and specified. Bring subgrade elevations sufficiently below the finish elevations of the paving so as to accommodate the thickness of paving and base.

2. Compaction expressed in percentages in this section refers to the maximum dry density determined by Test Method No. 216-F as described in the Caltrans "Manual of Tests".



G. Application of Base Course 1. Placing Aggregate Subbase Course: Place subbase course on the compacted

subgrade and compact in accordance with CAL TRANS "Standard Specifications," Article 25-1.04. Finished surface of the subbase at any point shall not vary more than 0.08 foot above or below the grade indicated.

2. Placing Aggregate Base Course: Place base course on the compacted aggregate subbase course and compact in accordance with applicable provisions of CAL TRANS "Standard Specifications," Sections 25 and 26. Use compacting equipment adequate for the size of the installation and capable of achieving the compaction specified.

3. Compact each layer to a relative compaction not less than 95 percent of that determined by Test Method No. Calif. 216.

4. Apply finished base course to a thickness which does not vary more than 0.05 foot from the planned thickness at any point. Reshape or rework, water, and thoroughly re-compact base that does not conform to the specified requirements.

H. Sterilant Application: Place herbicide below asphalt paving. Meet the applicable environmental control requirements. Apply as directed by the manufacturer's printed instructions just before application of the paving. Take special care to insure that herbicide is not applied to any areas which are to be planted.

I. Placing Asphalt Concrete Surfacing: 1. Prime Coat: Before the surface course is laid, apply liquid asphalt primer to

the base course surface at rate of 0.20 to 0.50 gallons per square yard. Apply material to penetrate and seal, but not flood, the surface.

2. Paint Binder: Before the surface course is laid, paint all vertical surfaces of curbs, gutters, and drainage structures and all cold or existing pavement joints with a paint binder at an approximate rate of 0.05 to 0.10 gallon per square yard.

3. Placing Asphaltic Concrete Surface Course: Place and compact asphaltic concrete in accordance with Standard Specifications, CalTrans Section 39-5, 39-6 and 39-7.

4. Placing Asphaltic Concrete Surface Course: Spread asphaltic concrete mixture at a temperature of not less than 250 degrees F. Place by use of a self-propelled asphalt paving machine, except on small areas where inaccessibility precludes their use. On these small areas spread by means of a spreader box, or by hand methods. a. Spread mixture in a single layer (two layers at Contractor's option) to such

a thickness that, after receiving the final compaction, the finish paving shall have a minimum thickness as indicated.

5. Berms, curbs, and slow down strips shall be placed with an extrusion machine or other equipment capable of shaping and compacting the material to the required cross section.

J. Seal Coat 1. Apply to all new asphaltic concrete paving, in accordance with SSPWC

Standard Specifications, Section 302-8. Apply to all existing asphaltic concrete paving where indicated, in accordance with SSPWC Standard Specifications,



Section 302-8. Dilute emulsion as directed with water not to exceed 20% of the total volume.

2. Thoroughly clean foreign matter off pavement before application. No emulsion shall be spread when the atmospheric temperature is less than 60 degrees F., or when weather conditions are unsuitable for drying.

3. Apply, just prior to "line" work, at rate of 0.10 gallon per square yard, at temperature between 100 and 140 degrees. If tackiness prevails, lightly dust affected areas with rock dust or fine sand.

K. Header Board Installation: Install header boards at perimeter of pavement with stakes spaced not over 24 inches on center unless otherwise indicated. Do not install header boards where asphaltic concrete paving abuts buildings, concrete walks or curbs, or other pavements.

L. Pavement Painting 1. Allow seal coats to cure for ten days before applying paint. 2. Cleaning: Sweep and clean surface to eliminate loose material and dust. 3. Apply paint with mechanical equipment to produce uniform straight edges.

Using painting equipment and templates specifically designed for this purpose. Protect adjoining work from damage.

4. Make lines 4" wide unless otherwise indicated. 5. Layout markings to exact requirements of Owner. Verify layout line widths,

and colors prior to painting.

M. Field Quality Control 1. Before seal coating, flood the paved areas with water to check drainage and

surface irregularities. Replace, or overlay high and low spots in an acceptable manner and water test the paving again after corrections have been made.

2. Replace or repair deficient and damaged asphalt paving. 3. All paving shall drain properly before being accepted. There shall be no

variation greater than 1/4 inch plus or minus from a 10 foot straight-edge, except at grade changes.

3.10 TOLERANCES

A. Flatness: Maximum variation of 1/4 inch measured with 10-foot straight edge.

B. Scheduled Compacted Thickness: Within 1/4 inch.

C. Variation From True Elevation: Within 1/2 inch.


A. The Contractor shall control the quality of the Work and shall provide adequate testing to assure compliance with these Specifications.

B. After completion of paving work, all paving shall be flooded with water, and any resulting "ponds" shall be ringed with chalk. Such hollows shall be corrected with addition of asphalt paving materials and re-rolling until all paving is completely level and free from hollows and high spots.



C. The Contractor shall perform in-place density and compaction tests of the completed pavement in accordance with California Test Method No. 375 to determine compliance with specified requirements. Relative compaction shall be 96 percent.

3.12 MAINTENANCE OF PAVEMENT

A. Upon completion of final rolling, traffic shall not be permitted on the finished pavement for at least six hours, and until the asphalt concrete has cooled sufficiently to withstand traffic without being deformed.

B. Finished pavement shall be maintained in finished clean condition until the Work is accepted by the Engineer.

END OF SECTION


EARVIN MAGIC JOHNSON PARK – PHASE 1A DECORATIVE CONCRETE PAVING LOS ANGELES, CA 32 13 16-1 COUNTY OF LOS ANGELES COMMUNITY DEVELOPMENT COMMISSION AHBE PROJECT NO. 116030.01 AHBE

SECTION 32 13 16 DECORATIVE CONCRETE PAVING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes colored and natural gray retardant finish concrete paving, concrete stairs, ramps, curbs and gutter and concrete bands, headers and finish for concrete site walls.

B. Related Sections: 1. Section 03 30 00: Cast-in-Place Concrete” for general building applications of concrete. 2. Section 07 92 00: Joint Sealants" for joint sealants in expansion and contraction joints

within decorative concrete paving and in joints between decorative concrete paving and asphalt paving or adjacent construction.

1.3 LEED REQUIREMENTS

A. Owner has established that the project will achieve LEED Certification per the requirements outlined in Section 01 35 15.

B. Following LEED requirements are mandatory for Work included in this Section in order to achieve LEED certification.

1.4 ‘SITES’ REQUIREMENTS

A. Owner has established that the project will achieve SITES Certification. Included in this section are requirement(s) which are important to meet in order to achieve certification. Material meeting this requirement must be as approved by Landscape Architect: 1. Source concrete and concrete products which meet the following requirement: material is

extracted, harvested and manufactured within 50 miles of the project site.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. See section 01 30 00 – Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.

B. Product Data: Provide data on specified products, describing physical and performance characteristics; sizes, patterns, colors available, and method of installation.

C. Product Data: 1. For each type of product indicated submit manufacturer’s product data, specifications,

typical installation details and other data to demonstrate compliance with the specified requirements for all manufacturer products.



2. Statement of Mix Design: Submit (3) copies of Statement of Mix Design prepared by batch plant servicing Project for each load delivered to Project. Statement of Mix Design to contain following information: a. Name, address, and telephone number of batch plant preparing statement of mix

design. b. Date of mix design. c. Project location. d. Contractor requesting load delivery. e. Mix design number. f. Integral color used. g. Gradations for sand and aggregate. h. Material weights, specific gravity, and absolute volumes. i. Basis of testing, i.e. UBC 2605 D4 and Title 24 2604 D4. j. Water/cement ratio. k. PSI rating. l. Signature of testing laboratory manager. m. Signed stamp from registered Project structural engineer or architect

D. Samples for Verification: To be determined by the mock-ups.

E. Shop Drawings: 1. Submit shop drawings for reinforcing steel and accessories in accordance with ACI

standards. 2. Paving Jointing and Pour Sequence Plan - submit three full size bond prints of each

paving sheet indicating the following: a. Proposed layout of contraction, construction and isolation joints. Clearly delineate

the three different joint types. b. Layout of paving types as indicated on Drawing Paving Schedule. Give overall

dimensions of each paving type. c. Concrete pour sequence. Indicated sequence of paving pour installation.

1.6 DEFINITIONS

A. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of blended hydraulic cement, fly ash and other pozzolans, and ground granulated blast-furnace slag.


A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.

B. Material Certificates: For the following, from manufacturer: 1. Cementitious materials. 2. Steel reinforcement and reinforcement accessories. 3. Fiber reinforcement. 4. Admixtures. 5. Curing compounds. 6. Applied finish materials. 7. Bonding agent or epoxy adhesive. 8. Joint fillers.




A. Installer Qualifications: A firm and individuals trained and approved by manufacturer of decorative concrete paving systems with a minimum of fifteen consecutive years’ experience. Provide written evidence to indicate successful experience in installing Intecrete or equivalent architectural concrete paving, or similar, on at least (5) projects with a combined installed square footage of at least 75,000 SF with (3) projects located within a 100-mile radius of Project site.

B. ACI Certified Personnel: 1. Concrete Flatwork Finisher:

a. Minimum of 1,500 hours of field experience having installed at least (5) projects containing Intecrete® architectural concrete paving.

b. Must be present during important stages of concrete production such as layout, formwork, or concrete placement and finishing.

c. Project must have a minimum of (1) ACI certified Concrete Flatwork Finisher at important phases of production.

d. Submit verification of current ACI certification. 2. Concrete Flatwork Technician:

a. Minimum of (1) ACI certified Concrete Flatwork Technician able to render technical assistance on project, if requested.

b. Submit verification of current ACI certification.

C. Ready-Mix-Concrete Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete products and that complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production facilities and equipment. 1. Manufacturer certified according to NRMCA's "Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete

Production Facilities" (Quality Control Manual - Section 3, "Plant Certification Checklist").

D. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM C 1077 and ASTM E 329 for testing indicated. 1. Personnel conducting field tests shall be qualified as ACI Concrete Field Testing

Technician, Grade 1, according to ACI CP-1 or an equivalent certification program.

E. Source Limitations: Obtain decorative concrete paving products and each type or class of cementitious material of the same brand from same manufacturer's plant and obtain each aggregate from single source.

F. Concrete Testing Service: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform material evaluation tests and to design concrete mixtures.

G. ACI Publications: Comply with ACI 301 (ACI 301M) unless otherwise indicated.

H. Mock-ups: 1. Prepare on-site paving and stair mock-ups as follows:

a. Prepare a minimum 8-foot square mock-up of each different paving type specified on Drawings. Label mock-ups (preferably on vertical side of mock-up) with specified paving type to facilitate mock-up review.

b. Construct mock-ups using identical concrete mix design, products, jointing, and methods of overall workmanship that will be employed during production.

c. Ensure that same crew preparing mock-ups will be responsible for production work.



d. Construct mock-ups in a protected location approved by Owner. Ideally mock-ups should be located as close to production work as possible to facilitate comparison review and be located in a sunny location.

e. Approved mock-ups will be used as standard for future production work review and assessment. Owner should be prepared to physically sign mock-up using a permanent black marker to attest Owner’s approval of mock-up. Rejected mock-ups can remain on-site until removal of approved mock-ups is required.

f. Original 6-inch or 12-inch concrete samples, if they were prepared for this project, will not be used in future production paving review once mock-ups have been approved.

g. Owner will incur costs to redo mock-ups if Owner requires design changes during mock-up review. Contractor will incur costs to redo mock-ups if Owner rejects mock-ups due to Contractor error such as incorrect concrete mix design or unacceptable appearance.

h. Protect approved mock-ups from damage during course of Work. i. Clean mock-ups prior to Final Walkthrough for Acceptance to facilitate

unencumbered comparison review by Owner between approved mock-ups and production work.

j. Remove mock-ups from site when directed by Owner. 2. Prepare site wall mock-ups as follows:

a. Minimum 5-foot long mock-up of each specific Wall type indicated on Drawings. b. Construct mock-ups using products, materials and workmanship methods identical

to those that will be employed during production. Workmanship to exhibit finish, jointing, and edging.

c. Use same concrete mix that will be used during production. d. Ensure that same personnel that prepared mock-ups will also install production

work. e. Construct mock-ups in a location approved by General Contractor. f. Approved wall mock-ups will be standard for assessment for future production

work. g. Construct additional mock-ups at Contractor’s expense if workmanship is

responsible for mock-up rejection by Owner, however, Owner will incur costs to redo mock-up if Owner requests design changes during mock-up preparation.

h. Protect approved mock-ups during course of Work. i. Remove mock-ups from site when directed by General Contractor.

I. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1. At least three weeks prior to ordering specified materials or the start of concrete work, 2. Arrange a pre-installation meeting between the Contractor, Architect, Project

superintendent, concrete supplier, and concrete finisher to review finishing techniques of 3. Concrete, use of additives, application of curing compounds and coordination with other 4. trades.


A. Traffic Control: Maintain access for vehicular and pedestrian traffic as required for other construction activities.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FLAT WORK FORMS

A. Form Materials: Plywood, metal, metal-framed plywood, or other approved panel-type materials to provide full-depth, continuous, straight, and smooth exposed surfaces. 1. Use flexible or uniformly curved forms for curves of a radius of 100 feet (30.5 m) or less.

Do not use notched and bent forms.

B. Forms for Textured Finish Concrete: Units of face design, size, arrangement, and configuration indicated. Provide solid backing and form supports to ensure stability of textured form liners.

C. Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent that will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and that will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces.

2.2 FORM MATERIALS

A. Plywood: 1. Exterior grade plywood panels, non-absorptive, providing a continuous, true, and

smooth surface such as medium-density overlay (MDO), Class 1, or better, with mill-applied release agent and sealed edges.

2. Form Joint Tape: Pressure-sensitive compressible foam tape. 3. Form-Release Agent: Colorless form-release agent that will not bond with concrete

surface or impair subsequent treatments of those surfaces.

B. Structural: 1. #2 Construction Grade S4S Douglas Fir minimum 1-1/2-inches thick, free of warping,

loose knots, cupping, checks, bows, cracks, and other imperfections that would produce objectionable defects in finished work.

2. Depth of forms to be same depth as concrete being placed.

2.3 STEEL REINFORCEMENT

A. Reinforcing Bars: Grade 60 steel conforming to AS A615 and free of rust, dirt, grease or oils.

B. Steel Tie Wire: 16-gauge plain cold-drawn steel conforming to AS A1064/A1064M and free of rust, dirt, grease or oils.

C. Speed Dowels: Pre-manufactured slip dowel installation system to ensure proper dowel alignment, provide construction joint stability, eliminate tripping hazards, positive load transfer, maintain continuity of surface profile, reduce joint spalling, and reduce “checkerboard” pours, without prohibiting horizontal slab movement. 1. Speed Dowel ® by Sika Greenstreak, www.Greenstreak.com. 2. Speed Dowel ™,by Canzac, www.canzac.com.

D. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars, welded wire reinforcement, and dowels in place. Manufacture bar supports according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete of greater compressive strength than concrete specified.

http://www.greenstreak.com/



E. Steel Bar Mats: 1. Grade 60 deformed steel bars assembled with clips conforming to AS A184 and free of

rust, dirt, grease or oils.

2.4 CONCRETE MATERIALS

A. Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of the same type, brand, and source, throughout Project: 1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, gray portland cement Type III or Type V. Supplement

with the following: a. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class C or F. Fly Ash content not to exceed 25% total

concrete weight. b. Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag: ASTM C 989, Grade 100 or 120.

B. Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33, Class 4S uniformly graded. Provide aggregates from a single source. 1. Maximum Aggregate Size: 1 inch (25 mm) nominal. 2. Fine Aggregate: Free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement.

C. Water: Potable and complying with ASTM C 94/C 94M.

D. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260.

E. Chemical Admixtures: Admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and to contain no more than 0.1 percent water-soluble chloride ions by mass of cementitious material. 1. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A. 2. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type D. 3. Water-Reducing and Accelerating Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type E.

F. Liquid Color Pigment: ASTM C 979, synthetic mineral-oxide pigments or colored water-reducing admixtures; color stable, nonfading, and resistant to lime and other alkalis. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following: a. Davis Colors. b. Admixtures Inc. c. Scofield, L. M. Company. d. Solomon Colors, Inc.

2.5 CURING AND SEALING MATERIALS

A. Amber, Aliphatic, Membrane-Forming Curing and Sealing Compound; manufactured for use with colored concrete. 1. Admixtures Inc; Colorful Clear Curing Compound. 2. 1100-Clear by WR Meadows; www.wrmeadows.com.

2.6 RELATED MATERIALS

A. Fine and Coarse Aggregate: Clean, hard, and durable washed concrete sand conforming to ASTM C33. Use same fine aggregate from single source throughout duration of Project. Refer

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?ulid=5184&mf=04&src=wd

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?uid=123456790712&mf=04&src=wd




http://www.wrmeadows.com/



to Paving Schedule on Drawings for sizing of coarse aggregate. Some paving types may require different coarse aggregate sizes

B. Joint Fillers: ASTM D 5249, Type 2, flexible foam expansion joint in preformed strips. 1. Products: W.R. Meadows; Seal Tight Cermar.

C. Chemical Surface Retarder: Water-soluble, liquid, set retarder with color dye, for horizontal concrete surface application, capable of temporarily delaying final hardening of concrete to a depth of 1/8 to 1/4 inch (3 to 6 mm). 1. ACC; Optimus. 2. Grace, Topcast.

2.7 JOINT MATERIALS

A. Construction Joints: 1. Steel Slip Dowels: 5/8-inch-diameter smooth steel bars, free of dirt, grease, and oils.

2. Plastic Dowel Sleeves: Encase 50 percent of each dowel in a Speed Dowel plastic alignment sleeve to allow parallel lateral movement of each dowel. a. Acceptable Manufacturers:

1) Speed Dowel by Greenstreak Group; www.greenstreak.com.

2.8 CONCRETE SEALER

A. Low sheen, low VOC, penetrating sealer that exhibits superior resistance to stains, spills, and other contaminates.

B. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Repello® by Scofield; www.scofield.com. 2. Siloxene PD® by Prosoco; www.prosoco.com. 3. 511 Impregnator by Miracle Sealants; www.miraclesealants.com.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

2.9 CONCRETE MIXTURES

A. Prepare design mixtures, proportioned according to ACI 301 (ACI 301M), for each type and strength of normal-weight concrete, and as determined by either laboratory trial mixtures or field experience. 1. Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed

concrete design mixtures for the trial batch method.

B. Proportion mixtures to provide normal-weight concrete with the following properties: 1. Compressive Strength (28 Days): 2800 psi. 2. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio at Point of Placement: 0.50. 3. Slump Limit: 5 inches (125 mm). plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm).

C. Add air-entraining admixture at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in normal-weight concrete at point of placement having an air content as follows: 1. Air Content: 5 percent plus or minus 1.5 percent for 3/4-inch (19-mm) nominal maximum

aggregate size.

http://www.greenstreak.com/

http://www.scofield.com/

http://www.prosoco.com/

http://www.miraclesealants.com/



D. Chemical Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Use water-reducing and retarding admixture in concrete as required for placement and

workability.

E. Synthetic Fiber: Uniformly disperse in concrete mixture at manufacturer's recommended rate, but not less than 1.0 lb/cu. yd. (0.60 kg/cu. M)

F. Color Pigment: Add color pigment to concrete mixture according to manufacturer's written instructions and to result in hardened concrete color consistent with approved mockup.

2.10 CONCRETE MIXING

A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, and mix concrete materials and concrete according to ASTM C 94/C 94M. Furnish batch certificates for each batch discharged and used in the Work. 1. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F (30 and 32 deg C), reduce mixing

and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F (32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.

2.11 SUBGRADE 1. Subgrade to meet requirements of project’s Geotechnical report. 2. Water condition subgrade and compact to 90 percent relative compaction is placed over

prior to placing concrete. a. Screed subgrade to a smooth plane. b. Ensure that utilities, including irrigation lines are buried and compacted. c. Keep subgrade damp prior to placing concrete.

2.12 EXAMINATION

A. Examine exposed subgrades and subbase surfaces for compliance with requirements for dimensional, grading, and elevation tolerances.

B. Proof-roll prepared subbase surface below decorative concrete work to identify soft pockets and areas of excess yielding.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

2.13 PREPARATION

A. Remove loose material from compacted subbase surface immediately before placing concrete.

B. Protect adjacent construction from discoloration and spillage during application of color hardeners, release agents, stains, curing compounds, and sealers.

FORMWORK

C. General: 1. Construct forms accurately to dimensions, plumb and true to line and grade. 2. Use forms that are strong, mortar tight, braced and tied so as to maintain position and

shape during placing of reinforcing and concrete.



3. Wavy surfaces and bulged walls or slab surfaces resulting from settlement or springing of formwork will be rejected.

4. Carefully verify and check forms for alignment and level as the Work proceeds. 5. Make needed adjustments or add additional bracing prior to pouring concrete.

D. Formwork Material at Exposed Surfaces: Smooth metal, resin-coated plywood, or high-density overlay plywood which will provide an ultra-smooth surface.

E. Tolerances for Exposed Concrete: 1. Top of form units shall not vary more than 1/8 inch from a 10 feet long straight edge. 2. Vertical faces shall not vary more than 1/8 inch from a 10 feet long straight edge.

F. Joints: 1. Construct forms and assemble them in such a manner so that joints occur at accepted

locations. 2. Seal joints to prevent leakage and provide exposed finish surfaces free of joint marks or

any indication of where the form joints occurred.

G. Corners: 1. Form intersecting planes to provide true, clean-cut corners, with edge grain of plywood

not exposed to face of concrete. 2. Form exposed corners to produce square smooth, solid unbroken lines, unless indicated

otherwise.

H. Other Trade Requirements: 1. Construct chases, slots and recesses as required. 2. Locate inserts, anchor plates and other items to be embedded in concrete where

required, properly place and securely anchor.

I. Recesses and Openings: Provide as shown on the Drawings.

J. Prior to Pouring Concrete: 1. Thoroughly clean out forms to be used. 2. Thoroughly wet wood forms where form coatings are not used.

K. Removal of Forms: 1. Do not remove supporting forms or shoring until concrete has sufficient strength to carry

its own weight and other loads upon it. 2. Remove forms only after concrete has attained at least 50% of its design compressive

strength.

L. Re-use of Forms: 1. Do not reuse if there is any evidence of surface wear or tear which would impair quality

of exposed finishes. 2. Store formwork and form materials in such a manner as to prevent damage or distortion. 3. Clean forms after each use, and coat with form release agent as often as required to

ensure separation from concrete without damage to concrete finish.



1.7 REINFORCEMENT

M. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for fabricating, placing, and supporting reinforcement.

N. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, or other bond-reducing materials.

O. Arrange, space, and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold reinforcement in position during concrete placement. Maintain minimum cover to reinforcement.

P. Install fabricated bar mats in lengths as long as practicable. Handle units to keep them flat and free of distortions. Straighten bends, kinks, and other irregularities, or replace units as required before placement. Set mats for a minimum 2-inch (50-mm) overlap to adjacent mats.

2.14 FORM TIES

A. Exposed form ties will not be visible once the concrete wall is architecturally finished, however, form ties will still be required to construct wall.

B. Internally disconnecting or removable ties designed to resist lateral pressure of fresh concrete on forms and to prevent spalling of concrete upon removal. Furnish internally disconnecting ties that will leave no metal closer than 1-1/2-inches from the architectural concrete surface.

C. Form ties to have a minimum working strength when fully assembled of at least 3,000 lbs.

D. Adjust form ties in length so as to permit complete tightening of forms and of such type as to lean no metal closer than 1-inch to an exterior surface or closer than ½-inch to an interior surface.

E. Do not fit form ties with lugs, cones, washers, or other device so as to act as a spreader within forms, or for other purposes that will leave a hole or depression larger than 7/8-inch in diameter back of exposed surface of concrete.

F. Do not use wire or wood ties.

G. Coat ties that are to be pulled from walls with cup grease or other approved material to facilitate efficient removal.

H. Loosen tie rods that are to be entirely removed from walls 24 hours after concrete is poured. Remove all but a sufficient number of ties to hold forms in place.

2.15 JOINTS

A. General: Form construction, isolation, and contraction joints and tool edges true to line, with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete. Construct transverse joints at right angles to centerline unless otherwise indicated. 1. When joining existing paving, place transverse joints to align with previously placed

joints unless otherwise indicated.



B. Construction Joints: Set construction joints at side and end terminations of paving and at locations where paving operations are stopped for more than one-half hour unless paving terminates at isolation joints. 1. Continue steel reinforcement across construction joints unless otherwise indicated. Do

not continue reinforcement through sides of paving strips unless otherwise indicated. 2. Dowelled Joints: Install dowel bars and support assemblies at joints where indicated.

Lubricate or coat with asphalt one-half of dowel length to prevent concrete bonding to one side of joint.

C. Expansion Joints: Form isolation joints of preformed joint-filler strips abutting concrete curbs, catch basins, manholes, inlets, structures, walks, other fixed objects, and where indicated. 1. Locate expansion as indicated. 2. Extend joint fillers full width and depth of joint. 3. Terminate joint filler not less than 1/2 inch (13 mm) or more than 1 inch (25 mm) below

finished surface if joint sealant is indicated. 4. Place top of joint filler flush with finished concrete surface if joint sealant is not indicated. 5. Furnish joint fillers in one-piece lengths. Where more than one length is required, lace or

clip joint-filler sections together. 6. During concrete placement, protect top edge of joint filler with metal, plastic, or other

temporary preformed cap. Remove protective cap after concrete has been placed on both sides of joint.

D. Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut 3/16-inch- (5-mm-) wide joints into concrete when cutting action will not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before developing random contraction cracks. 1. Perform jointing with a new diamond tip circular saw. 2. Joint Width: Per Drawings. Do not exceed 3/16-inch in width. 3. Depth of sawcuts: 1/4th depth of slab. 4. Sawcut joints in a straight line complete with no overcutting. 5. Use a hand tool to sawcut up to vertical edges such as walls, steps, curbs and columns.

No over cutting into vertical surfaces will be allowed.

E. Edging: After initial floating, tool edges of paving, gutters, curbs, and joints in concrete with an edging tool to a 1/4-inch (6-mm) radius. Repeat tooling of edges after applying surface finishes. Eliminate edging tool marks on concrete surfaces.

2.16 CONCRETE PLACEMENT

A. Before placing concrete, inspect and complete formwork installation, steel reinforcement, and items to be embedded or cast-in.

B. Moisten subbase to provide a uniform dampened condition at time concrete is placed. Do not place concrete around manholes or other structures until they are at required finish elevation and alignment.

C. Comply with ACI 301 (ACI 301M) requirements for measuring, mixing, transporting, and placing concrete.

D. Do not add water to concrete during delivery or at Project site. Do not add water to fresh concrete after testing.



E. Deposit and spread concrete in a continuous operation between transverse joints. Do not push or drag concrete into place or use vibrators to move concrete into place.

F. Consolidate concrete according to ACI 301 (ACI 301M) by mechanical vibrating equipment supplemented by hand spading, rodding, or tamping. 1. Consolidate concrete along face of forms and adjacent to transverse joints with an

internal vibrator. Keep vibrator away from joint assemblies, reinforcement, or side forms. Use only square-faced shovels for hand spreading and consolidation. Consolidate with care to prevent dislocating reinforcement dowels and joint devices.

G. Screed paving surface with a straightedge and strike off.

H. Commence initial floating using bull floats or darbies to impart an open-textured and uniform surface plane before excess moisture or bleed water appears on the surface. Do not further disturb concrete surfaces before beginning finishing operations or spreading surface treatments.

I. Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301 (ACI 301M)and as follows when hot-weather conditions exist: 1. Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg F (32

deg C) at time of placement. Chilled mixing water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated in total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option.

2. Fog-spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep subgrade moisture uniform without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas.

2.17 FLOAT FINISHING

A. General: Do not add water to concrete surfaces during finishing operations.

B. Float Finish: Begin the second floating operation when bleed-water sheen has disappeared and concrete surface has stiffened sufficiently to permit operations. Float surface with power-driven floats or by hand floating if area is small or inaccessible to power units. Finish surfaces to true planes. Cut down high spots and fill low spots. Refloat surface immediately to uniform granular texture.

C. Broom Finish: 1. Prior to brooming, provide a floated finish. 2. While the surface is still plastic, provide a uniform, broom-texture finish by pulling a fiber-

bristle broom uniformly over the surface. 3. Broom sidewalk paving along street in direction 90 degrees to street curb. 4. Broom Service Area paving in direction 90 degrees to building walls. 5. Provide texture to match the accepted mock-up finish.

2.18 RETARDANT CONCRETE FINISH

A. Concrete Finish; after final floating: 1. Retardant Finish: Roll with roller tamper and then immediately bullfloat in both directions.

Immediately after initial floating, towel smooth with no indentions, apply retardant when surface has sufficient moisture in the surface.



2. Spray-apply chemical surface retarder to paving according to manufacturer's written instructions.

3. Provide texture to match the accepted mock-up finish.

2.19 HAND SEEDED AGGREGATE FINISH

A. Conrete Finish; after screeding or floating: 1. Immediately after screeding or floating, hand cast (or seed) aggregate onto the surface,

using an application method that achieves a consistently uniform and tight matrix of aggregate placement.

2. Following seeding and evaporation of bleedwater, bullfloat aggregate into the surface, using an application method to achieve uniform distribution of aggregate.

3. Fully embed aggregate into the surface with repeated use of wood floats and tamping.

2.20 CONCRETE PROTECTION AND CURING

A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures.

B. Begin curing after finishing concrete but not before and applying retardant finish.

C. Curing and Sealing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Repeat process 24 hours later and apply a second coat. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period.

2.21 TOLERANCES

A. Comply with tolerances in ACI 117 and as follows: 1. Elevation: 3/4 inch (19 mm). 2. Thickness: Plus 3/8 inch (10 mm), minus 1/4 inch (6 mm). 3. Surface: Gap below 10-foot- (3-m-) long, unleveled straightedge not to exceed 1/8 inch

(3 mm). 4. Lateral Alignment and Spacing of Dowels: 1 inch (25 mm). 5. Vertical Alignment of Dowels: 1/4 inch (6 mm). 6. Alignment of Dowel-Bar End Relative to Line Perpendicular to Paving Edge: 1/4 inch per

12 inches (6 mm per 300 mm) of dowel. 7. Joint Spacing: 1/8 inches (3 mm). 8. Contraction Joint Depth: Plus 1/4 inch (6 mm), no minus. 9. Joint Width: 1/16 inches (1.5 mm).


A. Strength of each concrete mixture will be satisfactory if average of any three consecutive compressive-strength tests equals or exceeds specified compressive strength and no compressive-strength test value falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi (3.4 MPa).

B. Test results shall be reported in writing to Architect, concrete manufacturer, and Contractor within 48 hours of testing. Reports of compressive-strength tests shall contain Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing and



inspecting agency, location of concrete batch in Work, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mixture proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both 7- and 28-day tests.

C. Decorative concrete paving will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

D. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.

2.23 STAINING AND SEALING

A. Allow Stratified or Sedimentary ™ to dry sufficiently before applying specified stain or sealer.

B. Do not apply sealer if air temperatures are below 50 degree F or above 90 degrees F.

C. Once the concrete surface has been sealed, protect surface until fully dried.

D. Follow manufacturer’s directions for stain or sealer application.

2.24 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION

A. Remove and replace decorative concrete paving that is broken or damaged or does not comply with requirements in this Section. Remove work in complete sections from joint to joint unless otherwise approved by Landscape Architect.

B. Protect decorative concrete paving from damage. Exclude traffic from paving for at least 14 days after placement. When construction traffic is permitted, maintain paving as clean as possible by removing surface stains and spillage of materials as they occur.

C. Maintain decorative concrete paving free of stains, discoloration, dirt, and other foreign material. Sweep paving not more than two days before date scheduled for Substantial Completion inspections.

END OF SECTION


EARVIN MAGIC JOHNSON PARK – PHASE 1A AGGREGATE SURFACING LOS ANGELES, CA 32 15 00-1 COUNTY OF LOS ANGELES COMMUNITY DEVELOPMENT COMMISSION AHBE PROJECT NO. 116030.01 AHBE

SECTION 32 15 00 AGGREGATE SURFACING

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. Section includes: Aggregate surfacing.

B. Related work: 1. Section 32 91 19: Landscape Grading. 2. Section 32 13 16: Decorative Concrete Paving. 3. Section 32 84 00: Landscape Irrigation

1.2 REFERENCES

A. ASTM F-1632: Standard Test Method for Particle Size Analysis

B. ASTM D- 422: Standard Test Method for Fine Particle Size Analysis.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Acceptance, Acceptable, or Accepted: Acceptance by the Landscape Architect in writing.

B. Landscape Architect: Landscape Architect employed by the Owner to provide professional landscape architectural services for the Project.


A. Owner has established that the project will achieve SITES Certification. Included in this section are requirement(s) which are important to meet in order to achieve certification: 1. Excluding boulders, source aggregate surfacing material which is extracted, harvested

and manufactured within 50 miles of the project site. Material shall be as approved by Landscape Architect.

1.5 PROJECT REQUIREMENTS

A. Sub base material shall be uniformly graded and compacted and shall mirror finish grade contours to ensure an even depth of material.

B. Survey subgrade elevations prior to placement of material.

1.6 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.

B. Product Data: Provide data on specified products, describing physical and performance characteristics; sizes, patterns, colors available, and method of installation.



C. Landscape Architect to select boulders at supplier location.

D. Submit sample of steel edging.

E. Submit a one-pound sample and sieve analysis per ASTM C136, F-1632 for all decomposed granite aggregate surfacing.

F. Submit product data for decompose granite stabilizer.

G. Submit (3) images of available boulders with supplier and material location. Note different sizes on drawings.

H. Submit (3) stone as representative samples with supplier and material location.

I. Manufacturer’s product data sheet and installation instructions for each product to be used.

J. MOCKUPS: Prepare on-site paving and stair mock-ups as follows: 1. Prepare a minimum 4-foot square mock-up of each different decomposed granite

surfacing type specified on Drawings. Label mock-ups (preferably on vertical side of mock-up) with specified paving type to facilitate mock-up review.

2. Construct mock-ups using identical products, edging, depth and methods of overall workmanship that will be employed during production.

3. Ensure that same crew preparing mock-ups will be responsible for production work. 4. Construct mock-ups in a protected location approved by Owner. Ideally mock-ups

should be located as close to production work as possible to facilitate comparison review and be located in a sunny location.

5. Approved mock-ups will be used as standard for future production work review and assessment. Owner should be prepared to physically sign mock-up using a permanent black marker to attest Owner’s approval of mock-up. Rejected mock-ups can remain on-site until removal of approved mock-ups is required.

6. Owner will incur costs to redo mock-ups if Owner requires design changes during mock-up review. Contractor will incur costs to redo mock-ups if Owner rejects mock-ups due to Contractor error such as incorrect concrete mix design or unacceptable appearance.

7. Protect approved mock-ups from damage during course of Work. 8. Clean mock-ups prior to Final Walkthrough for Acceptance to facilitate unencumbered

comparison review by Owner between approved mock-ups and production work. 9. Remove mock-ups from site when directed by Owner.


A. Comply with the Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction, current edition, except as modified herein.

B. Provide evidence of successful experience by the installer in the Work of this section.

1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Do not install aggregate surfacing during rainy conditions.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 STABILIZED DECOMPOSED GRANITE PAVING

A. Acceptable Manufacturer: 1. Gail Materials, Corona, CA; phone 951- 667-6106; fax 951-667-6102;

www.gailmaterials.net. 2. or approved equal: Southwest Boulder & Stone, 5002 2nd Street, Fallbrook, CA; (760)

451-3333; www.southwestboulder.com 3. or approved equal: Decorative Stone Solutions, 306 West El Norte Parkway, #434,

Escondido, CA 92026; (800) 699-1878; www.decorativestonesolutions.com

B. Stabilized Decomposed Granite: 1. Produce from naturally friable granite. Blends of coarse sand and rock dust are not

acceptable. 2. Gradation, in accordance with ASTM C136:

Sieve Size Percent Passing 1/2” 100 3/8” 90 - 100 No. 4 50 - 100 No. 30 25 - 55 No. 100 10 - 20 No. 200 5 - 18

3. Sand Equivalent: 30 minimum in accordance with ASTM D2419. 4. Color: See Drawings.

C. Binder: Provide Natracil by Gail Materials and complying with following requirements: 1. Swell Volume: 35 ml/gm minimum in accordance with USP procedures. 2. 90% minimum

shall pass a No. 40 mesh screen. D. Factory Blending: 2. Mix decomposed granite and Natracil™ with a pug mill that includes a weigh-belt feeder.

2. Pedestrian Paths and Dog Park: Mix 12 lbs. of binder per 2000 lbs. of aggregate.

D. Steel Edging: 1. Dimensions: 3/16” thick by 6-inch deep, with overlapping joints. 2. Stakes: 3/16” x 16” long x 1-3/4” wide at top tapering to point at bottom; located 36” o.c.

maximum. 3. Color: Black.

2.2 BOULDERS

A. Boulders: 2’-4’ and miscellaneous sizes, see drawings.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION OF SUBGRADE

A. The sub-grade shall be graded to an elevation 3 inches lower than the finish grades indicated on the Drawings. After the areas are graded to the required elevations, they shall be



compacted and/or rolled as required by Section 31 22 00 - Grading. Sub-grade shall then be dragged or floated to provide a uniform surface, free from any irregularities.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF AGGREGATE SURFACING

A. Stabilized Decomposed Granite: 1. 4 inch layer of aggregate surfacing shall then be spread evenly over the entire areas to

finish grades. Grade and smooth as desired. Thoroughly water entire area so that the entire depth of the material is moist and to activate the Natracil. After a period of +/- 6 hours compact the finale lift with a 1000 – 3000 lb static drum roller. Allow for a sufficient curing period of +/- 4 days prior to use. Surface shall be filled as required and again rolled to produce a 4 inch thick uniform plane with proper drainage and slopes.

B. Boulders: 1. Excavate area to receive boulders to depths indicated on the drawings. Over excavate

to allow field adjustment. Boulders are to be planted at 1/3 the dimension of the boulder and stabile. Adjust until accepted by the landscape architect.

3.3 PROTECTION

A. Protect the Work of this section until Substantial Completion.

3.4 CLEANUP

A. Remove rubbish, debris, and waste materials and legally dispose of off the Project site.

END OF SECTION


EARVIN MAGIC JOHNSON PARK – PHASE 1A TACTILE WARNING SURFACING LOS ANGELES, CA 32 1726-1 COUNTY OF LOS ANGELES COMMUNITY DEVELOPMENT COMMISSION AHBE PROJECT NO. 116030.00

SECTION 32 1726 TACTILE WARNING SURFACING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes:

1. Precast concrete pavers with tactile warning truncated domes.

2. Setting bed materials.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Data: Manufacturer product data for the pavers and sealer.

B. Samples: 4 full-size squares of pavers with correct color and finish.

C. Achievement of LEED-NC v2009 requires specific forms of documentation as part of the materials submittals to document certain product properties. Review the LEED Requirements Section 01 8113 of this Specifications Manual. Supply submittals as required in Section 01 8113 for all relevant materials in this Section.


A. California Building Code

1. Detectable warnings surfaces shall comply with CBC Section 11B-705.1.

2. Detectable warning surfaces shall be yellow conforming to FS 33538 of Federal Standard 5958, except for locations at curb ramps, islands, or cut-through medians where color used shall contract visually with that of adjacent walking surfaces, either light-on-dark, or dark on-light. CBC Sections 11B-705.1.1.3 and 11B-705.1.1.5.

3. Detectable warning surfaces shall differ from adjoining surfaces in resiliency or sound-on cane contact. CBC Section 11B-705.1.1.4.

B. Installer’s qualifications: Experienced firm who has successfully completed installations similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for the Project for at least 3 years.

C. Mockup:

1. Following approval of samples submitted, construct a 4-foot square mockup at the job site, in location acceptable to the Architect

2. Seal 1/2 of the panel; identify the coated side.

3. Approved mockup shall remain in place until its removal is directed.



4. Approved mockup may remain a portion of the completed work if approved in writing by the Architect.

1.4 HANDLING

1. Transport: Palletize and shrink-wrap units and deliver in original unopened packaging with legible manufacturer identification, including size, piece number, quantities, manufacturer’s date and inspector initials

2. Storage and protection: Store materials indoors, sheltered from moisture in original packaging. Protect from damage.

1.5 WARRANTY

A. Cast-in-place tactile tiles shall be warranted for a period of 5 years from date of final completion. The warranty includes defective work, breakage, deformation, and loosening of tiles.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURER

A. One of the following 12 in. x 12 in. pavers:

1. Stepstone Inc. (basis of design).

2. Wausau Tile

3. Tile Tech Industries.

4. Equal.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Pavers: Integrally-colored precast concrete pavers with truncated domes, 12 in. x 12 in. x 2 in. thick.

B. Description:

1. Minimum compressive strength: 5,000 psi when tested in compliance with ASTM C 140.

2. Maximum absorption: Not greater than 5 percent.

3. Materials:

a. Portland cement: ASTM C 150, Type III, high early strength.

b. Aggregate: ASTM C 33.

c. Color admixture: Davis Colors or equal, as required to achieve color selected.



d. Aggregate for exposed aggregate surface: As selected.

4. Color: To be selected by Architect.

5. Finish: Sandblast.

6. Coefficient of friction: Not less than 0.60 dry or 0.50 wet per ASTM C 1028.

C. Setting bed materials:

1. Portland cement: ASTM C 150, Type 1.

2. Sand: ASTM C 144.

3. Water: Potable, fresh.

4. Setting bed reinforcing mesh: 2 by 2-inches by 16/16, 3 by 3 inches by 13/13 or 1-1/2 inches by 2 inches by 16/13 wire complying with ASTM A 82 or A 185.

D. Sealer: ProSoCo XL 100, supply in quart size containers.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify conditions and measurements affecting the work of this Section at site.

B. Correct conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of this work before proceeding with installation.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Where required for fit, cut pavers with masonry saw to obtain clean, straight, sharp, unbroken edges.

B. Setting bed:

1. Mix one bag of cement to 3 cubic foot of sand (measured in a damp, loose condition).

2. Use only enough water to produce a moist surface when setting bed is ready for setting pavers.

3. Spread and screed to a uniform thickness, except for minor variations required to produce a true surface, level in plane or uniformly sloped for drainage as shown.

4. Reinforce setting bed at midpoint with reinforcing mesh lapped one mesh at joints. Discontinue reinforcement at expansion joints.

5. Mix and place only the amount that can be covered with pavers prior to initial set of bed.



6. Cut back, bevel edge, remove and discard setting bed material that has reached initial set prior to placing pavers.

C. Set pavers before initial set of setting bed occurs; do not set pavers on dry bed.

1. After leveling the paver on the plastic setting bed, apply a thin layer of neat cement paste 1/32 inch to 1/16-inch-thick by brushing or troweling over setting bed, or apply 1/32-inch-thick to bottom of paver.

2. Tamp and beat paver for a complete contact between paver and setting bed.

3. Set and level each paver immediately. Do not set large areas and later level. Set pavers in pattern shown with joints of uniform width.

D. Completed paving shall be level or sloped as indicated, and true to line and grade within a tolerance of 1/8-inch from theoretical lines and shall properly coincide and align with adjacent work without lippage.

3.3 SEALING/CLEANING

A. After cleaning pavers, apply sealer in compliance with the sealer manufacturer’s instructions leaving no bare spots or sealer residue.

B. When the installation is completed, conduct a water test to verify that all pavers have been sealed (as evidenced by darker color where water is absorbed), and then wash the paving clean.

3.4 PROTECTION

A. Protect completed installations until acceptance by the County. Protect pavers during the construction period to prevent damage and stains.

B. Leave finished installation clean and free of cracked, chipped, broken, unbonded, or otherwise defective pavers.

C. Replace pavers damaged before acceptance.

END OF SECTION

BID SET SUBMITTAL

July 26, 2018

EARVIN MAGIC JOHNSON PARK – PHASE 1A DECOMPOSED GRANITE SURFACING LOS ANGELES, CA 32 15 40 COUNTY OF LOS ANGELES COMMUNITY DEVELOPMENT COMMISSION AHBE PROJECT NO. 116030.01 CWE

SECTION 32 15 40

DECOMPOSED GRANITE SURFACING

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Naturally occurring decomposed granite and crushed stone surfacing as shown on Drawings and specified herein. Include sub-grade, edging and related accessories.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. ASTM C136 – Standard Test Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates.

B. ASTM D448 – Standard Classification for Sizes of Aggregate for Road and Bridge Construction.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Manufacturer’s literature completely describing all components of the decomposed granite surfacing system, including:

1. Preparation instructions and recommendations.

2. Installation methods and application procedures.


A. Bagged Materials: Accept delivery of materials only in unopened and undamaged containers bearing the brand name and manufacturer’s identification.

B. Bulk Materials: Each load of decomposed granite surfacing material arriving at the job site in bulk shall be accompanied by a delivery ticket containing the following minimum information: 1. Quarry of origin. 2. Amount, weight, and type of material. 3. Brand name and manufacturer’s identification. 4. Protect decomposed granite surfacing materials from contamination until ready

for installation. 5. Store under cover.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 DECOMPOSED GRANITE SURFACING MATERIAL

A. Decomposed Granite and Crushed Stone Aggregate: Provide high quality materials consisting of sound, angular, durable stone particles, free from clay lumps, organic materials, frozen materials, or other deleterious substances.

BID SET SUBMITTAL

July 26, 2018


B. Gradation: Manufacturer’s standard mix of well-graded materials in accordance with ASTM C136. Blends of coarse sand and rock dust are not acceptable. The decomposed granite walkway shall be free of any stones over ¼ inch in any dimension with the sieve analysis as follows:

Size Percent Passing

#4 100.0

#10 89.5

#20 85.9

#40 79.6

#60 64.2

#100 45.4

#200 38.4

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Excavation: Excavate to depth required so edges of decomposed granite surfacing will match adjacent grades and have a maximum cross-slope of 2 percent. Ensure edges and bottom of excavation are in a smooth and even line.

B. Subgrade Preparation: Mix the entire surface of the in-place subgrade to a depth of at least 6-inches. After the material has been thoroughly mixed, the subgrade shall be brought to line and grade and compacted to 95% of the maximum laboratory dry density as determined by the Standard Proctor test.

C. Herbicide: Apply herbicide per manufacturer’s written instructions. Limit the application to the area to receive decomposed granite surfacing.

D. Subbase Course Preparation: Place the subbase coarse aggregate free from ridges, depressions or hollows. Rake and compact to 95% Standard Proctor Density.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Edging: Install edging flush with the top of the decomposed granite surfacing. Provide sufficient stakes to secure edging in place during and after decomposed granite surfacing material installation.

B. Subgrade: Proof-roll the subgrade with heavy pneumatic-tired equipment to locate unstable areas and to identify soft pockets and areas of excess yielding. Do not proof-roll wet or saturated subgrades. 1. Excavate soft spots, unsatisfactory soils, and areas of excessive pumping or

rutting, as determined by Landscape Architect, and replace with compacted backfill or fill as directed.

2. The surface of the completed subgrade shall be bladed to a smooth and uniform texture.

BID SET SUBMITTAL

July 26, 2018


3. The finished subgrade shall be uniform and free from deleterious debris such as organic materials, nails, stones and loose soil.

C. Subbase: Install aggregate subbase to a compacted depth of 4 to 6-inches minimum for pedestrian traffic, and 8 to 12-inches minimum for vehicular traffic in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. Install the subbase in multiple 3 to 4-inch lifts, and compact to a minimum 95% density.

D. Compaction: Compact each lift of the subgrade, subbase and final finish decomposed granite surfacing materials with a one to three-ton roller or compactor. In small areas that are difficult to access with compaction equipment, hand tamping may be performed with multiple passes to achieve the required density. 1. Lightly spray surface area following compaction. Do not disturb aggregate

surface with spray

3.3 INSTALLATION OF DECOMPOSED GRANITE SURFACING

A. Spread decomposed granite surfacing material in 3 to 4-inch lifts. Spread the pathway mix evenly and smoothly before compacting. Allow for 20-25% compaction. Screed if possible.

B. Wet the mix to ensure water has penetrated the full depth of the decomposed granite surfacing material, and roll each lift to form a uniform, smooth surface with a cross slope of 2% maximum. Compact each lift to a minimum 95% density.

C. Grade and smooth to the required elevation; compact final lift with 1-3 ton drum roller or compactor.

D. Minimum Compacted Thickness: 1. Pedestrian Paths: 3-inches. 2. Vehicular Drives and Roadways: 4-inches.

E. Surface shall follow grades per plans. Remove crown, allow 1-2% cross pitch.

F. Completed surface shall be of consistent quality and shall not have depressions or humps greater than1/4-inch in 10-feet.

3.4 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES

A. Decomposed Granite Surfacing Thickness: Allow for 20-25% compaction. 1. Subbase Course: Plus or minus 1/2-inch. 2. Surface Course: Plus 1/4-inch, no minus.

B. Decomposed Granite Surfacing Smoothness: Produce a surface smoothness within 1/4-inch tolerance when measured with a 10-foot straightedge. 1. Crowned Surfaces: Test with crowned template centered and at right angle to

crown. Maximum allowed variance from template is 1/4-inch.

3.5 CLEAN-UP AND PROTECTION

A. Thoroughly clean all areas where work has occurred. Remove from site excess

BID SET SUBMITTAL

July 26, 2018


material, debris and rubbish.

B. Take all precautions necessary to protect completed work until Substantial Completion of project.


BID SET SUBMITTAL

July 26, 2018

EARVIN MAGIC JOHNSON PARK – PHASE 1A CURB AND GUTTERS LOS ANGELES, CA 32 16 13-1 COUNTY OF LOS ANGELES COMMUNITY DEVELOPMENT COMMISSION AHBE PROJECT NO. 116030.01 CWE

SECTION 32 16 13

CURBS AND GUTTERS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Materials and accessories.

B. Preparation of sub grade.

C. Construction.

D. Joints.

E. Form removal.

F. Finishing.

G. Curing.


A. Preparation of sub grade to proper grade for concrete, including compaction, is specified in Section 32 11 23 – Aggregate Base Courses.

B. Portland cement concrete, and various materials, services, and incidentals pertaining thereto shall conform with SSPWC Section 201-1 Portland Cement Concrete.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. SSPWC - Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction, Latest Edition.

B. American Concrete Institute (ACI): 1. ACI 117 Standard Specification for Tolerances for Concrete Construction

Materials

C. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. ASTM C260 Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete. 2. ASTM C309 Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for

Curing Concrete. 3. ASTM C881 Specification for Epoxy-Resin-Base Bonding Systems for

Concrete

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS AND ACCESSORIES

A. Portland Cement Concrete: Refer to SSPWC Section 201-1 – Portland Cement

BID SET SUBMITTAL

July 26, 2018


Concrete, for requirements. Concrete shall develop a minimum ultimate compressive strength of 2,500 psi, unless otherwise noted on the drawings.

B. Expansion Joint Fill and Joint Sealants: Refer to SSPWC Section 201-3 for requirements.

C. Concrete Curing Compound: Refer to SSPWC Section 201-4 for requirements.

PART 3 EXECUTION


A. Excavate for and prepare the sub grade as specified in Section 32 11 23 – Aggregate Base Course, true to the indicated grade and cross section.

B. Test completed sub grade for correct grade and cross section by means of template supported on side forms.

C. Dampen sub grade and forms just before placing concrete.

3.2 CONSTRUCTION

A. Provide cast-in-place concrete construction, plain or reinforced as indicated. Curbs and gutters shall be formed accurately to indicated section profile with template screed.

3.3 JOINTS

A. Expansion Joints: 1. Construct 3/8-inch to 1/2-inch thick expansion joints in the following locations:

a. In curb and combination curb and gutter at the locations of expansion joints in the concrete roadway.

b. In curb or combination curb and gutter, at points where curved and tangent sections join.

c. Between curb or combination curb and gutter, and any drain inlet, or similar structure occurring within the limits of the curb or combination curb and gutter.

d. At corners in sidewalks, following the projections of the building lines from the corner of the building to the curb.

e. Between sidewalks and any permanent structure. f. Between sidewalk and curb. g. Through sidewalks at intervals not greater than 15 feet. h. In sidewalks, encircling fixtures more than 12 inches in diameter.

B. Tooling: Finish joints with an edging tool having 1/4-inch to 3/8-inch radius, leaving joints free of mortar and concrete. In preformed type joints, leave joint filler material exposed for full length of joint with clean and true edges.

C. Joint Sealing: 1. Seal to within 1/8 inch of pavement surface joints in curbs and gutters,

including gutter surfaces of combination curb and gutter sections; all joints

BID SET SUBMITTAL

July 26, 2018


between curbs and vehicular pavement; all joints between gutters and vehicular pavement; and all other expansion joints. Do not seal other joints unless so indicated.

2. Do not seal joints until concrete curing is complete. Prior to installation of the joint sealing compound, clean the joints of dirt and other foreign material. Joints may be cleaned with compressed air jets provided that the air in such jets is free of oil or water. Do not fill joints when there is any free water in or adjacent to the joints. Joint walls and all surfaces to which the sealing material is to adhere shall be surface dry for at least three hours prior to sealing.

3. Apply with approved pressurized equipment. Perform sealing of joints to make them impervious to water and to prevent the sealing compound from spreading over the surface of the pavement.

3.4 FORM REMOVAL

A. Remove front curb forms not less than two nor more than six hours after placing concrete, but in no case while the concrete is still plastic enough to slump.

B. Remove other forms not less than twelve hours after finishing is completed.

3.5 FINISHING

A. Curb and gutter: 1. Trowel the face of curb smooth to a depth of not less than 2 inches below the

flow line, or to the flow line of integral curb and gutter, and finish with a steel trowel, all immediately after removal of front curb forms.

2. Finish all curb edges with a radius of 1/2-inch. 3. Provide a final fine brush finish to both top and face of curb with brush strokes

parallel to the line of the curb, so that both top and front face present the same uniform appearance.

4. Keep the curb face wet during above finishing operations. 5. Allow no coarse aggregate to show on the finished curb surface.

B. Joints and Edges: As soon as the condition of the work permits, perform joint work, edging, and marking. Finish all edges with a radius of 1/4 inch to 3/8 inch.

3.6 CURING

A. Comply with the applicable requirements of SSPWC Section 201-4. Do not permit traffic on new concrete pavement until the concrete has cured a minimum period of ten days.



EARVIN MAGIC JOHNSON PARK – PHASE 1A SIDEWALKS LOS ANGELES, CA 32 16 23-1 COUNTY OF LOS ANGELES COMMUNITY DEVELOPMENT COMMISSION AHBE PROJECT NO. 116030.01 CWE

SECTION 32 16 23

SIDEWALKS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Materials and accessories.

B. Preparation of sub grade.

C. Construction.

D. Joints.

E. Form removal.

F. Finishing.

G. Curing.


A. Preparation of sub grade to proper grade for concrete, including compaction, is specified in Section 32 11 23 – Aggregate Base Courses.

B. Portland cement concrete, and various materials, services, and incidentals pertaining thereto shall conform with SSPWC Section 201-1 Portland Cement Concrete, SSPWC Section 201-2 Reinforcement for Concrete,

1.3 REFERENCES


B. American Concrete Institute (ACI): 1. ACI 117 Standard Specification for Tolerances for Concrete Construction

Materials

C. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. ASTM A615 Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for

Concrete Reinforcement 2. ASTM A663 Specification for Steel Bars, Carbon, Merchant Quality,

Mechanical Properties. 3. ASTM C260 Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete. 4. ASTM C309 Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for

Curing Concrete. 5. ASTM C881 Specification for Epoxy-Resin-Base Bonding Systems for

Concrete

1.4 SUBMITTALS



A. General: Refer to SSPWC Section 2-5.3 - Submittals, and Section 2-5.3.3 - Shop Drawings, for submittal requirements and procedures.

B. Shop Drawings: Submit drawings of reinforcing steel, tie bars, and connecting dowels. Comply with SSPWC Section 201-2 – Reinforcement for Concrete.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS AND ACCESSORIES

A. Concrete Reinforcement: Refer to SSPWC Section 201-2 - Concrete Reinforcing, for requirements.

B. Portland Cement Concrete: Refer to SSPWC Section 201-1 – Portland Cement Concrete, for requirements. Provide Class of Concrete indicted on the Drawings. Concrete shall develop a minimum ultimate compressive strength of 2,500 psi, unless otherwise noted on the drawings.

C. Tie Bars: ASTM A615, Grade 60, of type and size indicated.

D. Dowels: Plain round bars meeting requirements of ASTM A615, Grade 60, or ASTM A663, Grade 80, epoxy-coated bars, furnished with approved snug-fitting ASTM A53 galvanized pipe sleeve. Provide sleeve with one end closed.

E. Expansion Joint Fill and Joint Sealants: Refer to SSPWC Section 201-3 for requirements.

F. Surfacing Material for Nonskid Surfaces: Refer to SSPWC Section 311-1.7 – Non-Skid Surfaces, for requirements.

G. Concrete Curing Compound: Refer to SSPWC Section 201-4 for requirements.

PART 3 EXECUTION


A. Excavate for and prepare the sub grade as specified in Section 32 11 23 – Aggregate Base Course, true to the indicated grade and cross section.

B. Test completed sub grade for correct grade and cross section by means of template supported on side forms.

C. Dampen sub grade and forms just before placing concrete.

3.2 CONSTRUCTION

A. Provide cast-in-place concrete construction, plain or reinforced as indicated. Curbs and gutters shall be formed accurately to indicated section profile with template screed.

3.3 JOINTS



A. Expansion Joints: 1. Construct 3/8-inch to 1/2-inch thick expansion joints in the following locations:

a. At corners in sidewalks, following the projections of the building lines from the corner of the building to the curb.

b. Between sidewalks and any permanent structure. c. Between sidewalk and curb. d. Through sidewalks at intervals not greater than 15 feet. e. In sidewalks, encircling fixtures more than 12 inches in diameter.

B. Contraction Joints: In sidewalks, provide contraction joints as indicated in uniform intervals not greater than 6 feet, with the edges rounded to a 1/4-inch to 3/8-inch radius.

C. Tooling: Finish joints with an edging tool having 1/4-inch to 3/8-inch radius, leaving joints free of mortar and concrete. In preformed type joints, leave joint filler material exposed for full length of joint with clean and true edges.

D. Joint Sealing: 1. Seal to within 1/8 inch of pavement surface joints in curbs and gutters,

including gutter surfaces of combination curb and gutter sections; all joints between curbs and vehicular pavement; all joints between gutters and vehicular pavement; and all other expansion joints. Do not seal other joints unless so indicated.

2. Do not seal joints until concrete curing is complete. Prior to installation of the joint sealing compound, clean the joints of dirt and other foreign material. Joints may be cleaned with compressed air jets provided that the air in such jets is free of oil or water. Do not fill joints when there is any free water in or adjacent to the joints. Joint walls and all surfaces to which the sealing material is to adhere shall be surface dry for at least three hours prior to sealing.

3. Apply with approved pressurized equipment. Perform sealing of joints to make them impervious to water and to prevent the sealing compound from spreading over the surface of the pavement.

3.4 FORM REMOVAL

A. Remove forms not less than twelve hours after finishing is completed.

3.5 FINISHING

A. Sidewalk: 1. After the concrete has been placed, consolidated, struck off, leveled, grooved

and edged, do not work the concrete further until ready for floating. 2. Provide "floated finish" or light "broom finish" as indicated in accordance with

the 3. requirements of ACI 301. 4. For pedestrian and wheelchair ramps, and all other surfaces where the

Contract Drawings require a non-skid finish, provide a "nonskid finish" in combination with a "floated finish" or "broom finish" in accordance with the requirements of ACI 301.

5. Broom finish shall be applied perpendicular to the direction of traffic flow.



B. Joints and Edges: As soon as the condition of the work permits, perform joint work, edging, and marking. Finish all edges with a radius of 1/4 inch to 3/8 inch.

3.6 CURING

A. Comply with the applicable requirements of SSPWC Section 201-4. Do not permit traffic on new concrete pavement until the concrete has cured a minimum period of ten days.


BID SET SUBMITTAL

July 26, 2018

EARVIN MAGIC JOHNSON PARK – PHASE 1A PARKING BUMPERS LOS ANGELES, CA 32 17 13 COUNTY OF LOS ANGELES COMMUNITY DEVELOPMENT COMMISSION AHBE PROJECT NO. 116030.01 CWE

SECTION 32 17 13

PARKING BUMPERS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Precast concrete parking bumpers and anchorage.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. ASTM A615/A615M – Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement.

B. ASTM C150/C260M – Standard Specification for Portland Cement.

C. ASTM C260/C260M – Standard Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete.

D. ASTM C330/C330M – Standard Specification for Lightweight Aggregates for Structural Concrete.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Parking Bumpers: Precast concrete, conforming to the following: 1. Nominal Size: 8 inches high, 8 inches wide, 6 feet long. 2. Profile: Manufacturer’s standard. 3. Cement: ASTM C150/C150M Portland Type I – Normal, white color. 4. Concrete Materials: ASTM C330/C330M aggregate, water, and sand. 5. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A615/A615M, deformed steel bars; unfinished,

strength and size commensurate with precast unit design. 6. Air Entrainment Admixture: ASTM C260/C260M. 7. Concrete Mix: Minimum 5,000 psi compressive strength after 28 days, air

entrained to 5 to 7 percent. 8. Use rigid molds, constructed to maintain precast units uniform in shape, size

and finish. Maintain consistent quality during manufacture. 9. Embed reinforcing steel, and drill or sleeve for two dowels. 10. Cure ujits to develop concrete quality, and to minimize appearance blemishes

such as non-uniformity, staining, or surface cracking. 11. Minor patching in plant is acceptable, providing appearance of units is not

impaired.

B. Dowels: Cut reinforcing steel, ½ inch diameter, 24 inch long, pointed tip.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

BID SET SUBMITTAL

July 26, 2018

EARVIN MAGIC JOHNSON PARK – PHASE 1A PARKING BUMPERS LOS ANGELES, CA 32 17 13 COUNTY OF LOS ANGELES COMMUNITY DEVELOPMENT COMMISSION AHBE PROJECT NO. 116030.01 CWE

A. Install units without damage to shape or finish.

B. Install units in alignment with adjacent work.

C. Fasten units in polace with 2 dowels per unit.


BID SET SUBMITTAL

July 26, 2018

EARVIN MAGIC JOHNSON PARK – PHASE 1A PAVEMENT MARKING LOS ANGELES, CA 32 17 23-1 COUNTY OF LOS ANGELES COMMUNITY DEVELOPMENT COMMISSION AHBE PROJECT NO. 116030.01 CWE

SECTION 32 17 23

PAVEMENT MARKING

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Parking-stall line and curb painting.

B. Traffic symbols, directional arrows, lettering and safety zones, loading zone.

C. Accessibility signage.

D. Fire lane markings.

1.2 REFERENCES


B. AQMD – Air Quality Management District

C. Fed. Std 595B – Colors Listed in Government Procurement

D. CACRM - California Access Compliance Reference Manual, updated based on 2010 California Building Code.

E. MUTCD - Department of Transportation, Manual for Uniform Traffic Control Devices.

F. CSS - Caltrans Standard Specifications, Latest Edition.

G. IR 11 B-7 - Requirements for Accessible Pprking Spaces.

H. California Fire Code 2010, Chapter 5 and Appendix D.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product data.

B. Shop drawing layout of complete parking lot, indicating stalls, lettering, safety zones,


A. Product Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing quality traffic line paint products with ten years of experience.

B. Applicator: Company specializing in commercial pavement painting with five years of experience.

C. Regulatory Requirements 1. Conform to Federal Regulations concerning lead content of paints. 2. Conform to AQMD, Local Regulations. Copy of regulation is on file at

Engineer's office.

BID SET SUBMITTAL

July 26, 2018


D. Field Samples 1. Provide field sample in form of one parking lot stall, illustrating coating color,

width of stroke, thickness of application and dimensioning. 2. Locate where approved. 3. Accepted sample may remain as part of Work. 4. Do not proceed with pavement marking until sample markings has been

approved.


A. Deliver products to site in sealed and labeled containers.

B. Container labeling to include manufacturer's name, type of paint, brand name, brand code, coverage, surface preparation, drying time, cleanup, color designation and instructions for mixing and reducing.

C. Store paint materials at minimum ambient temperature of 45 degrees F and a maximum of 90 degrees F, unless otherwise recommended by manufacturer.

1.6 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. Paint products shall produce a coated finish as slip resistant as surrounding pavement.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Products of following manufacturers form basis for design and quality intended. 1. Dunn-Edwards Corporation, Los Angeles, CA. 2. Frazee Paint and Wallcovering, Inc., Anaheim, CA.

B. Or equal as approved in accordance with Division 01, General Requirements for Substitutions.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Traffic Line Paint: Waterbourne emulsion type, lead and chromate free, ready mixed, complying with Fed. Spec. TT-P-1952D drying time less than 45 minutes. Color as shown. Paint shall be in containers of at least 18 L (5 gallons). A certificate shall accompany each. 1. Dunn-Edwards: VIN-L-STRIPE TRAFFIC PAINT, VINYL EPOXY EMULSION,

W801. 2. Frazee: No. 506 TRAFFIC LINE PAINT. 3. Pervo Paint Company: Pervo Stipe Series 6000

B. Striping, pavement markings, and curb markings in accordance with Sections 210-1.6 and 310-5.6 SSPWC.

C. Substrate: Asphalt.

BID SET SUBMITTAL

July 26, 2018


2.3 COLORS

A. Accessible Stalls and Signage: Blue, conforming to No. 15090 Fed. Std 5958 and California Building Code Section 1129B.4.

B. Parking stalls, lettering, arrows, passenger loading zones and traffic signage: White. 1. Accessible Parking spaces: Border (perimeter) shall be blue, hatching shall be

blue. Markings and lettering according to CBC Section 1129B.4 and IR 11 B-7.

C. Stalls: Single line, 4 inches wide unless double lines are noted on drawings.

D. Fire Lanes: Red; paint curbs or paint 6 inch red strip if no curb. Paint 4-inch high stenciled white letters on curbs and strip indicating, "NO PARKING - FIRE LANE" at 20 feet on center.

E. Temporary Parking: Green painted curbs, with 4-inch high stenciled white letters, indicating, "Temporary Parking 20 Minutes", at designated stalls.

F. Loading Zone: White, paint curbs, with 4-inch high stenciled black letters, indicating, "Loading Zone - No Parking", at 30 feet on center.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION

A. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive Work as instructed by product manufacturer.

3.2 APPLICATION

A. Surfaces to be painted shall be clean and free of dust, dirt, grease, oil, water or other contaminates. 1. Existing lines to be removed shall be sandblasted clean.

B. Traffic paint shall not be applied until seal coat has been in place minimum of 10 days.

C. Apply material by machine spray, airless sprayer, roller or brush to provide a minimum thickness of 15 mils average. Precise edges required, no overspray allowed.

D. Perform Work in accordance with approved Shop Drawings. Conform to Section 310-5.6.8, SSPWC and CACRM

E. Mark parking spaces for disabled according to CBC. Section 11298.3 and 11298.4.

F. Painted lines and markings on pavement shall be 4 inches minimum wide and blue In color equal to color No. 15090 per Federal Standard 5958.

G. Paint Fire Lane lettering on curbs.

BID SET SUBMITTAL

July 26, 2018


3.3 DEFECTIVE WORK

A. Remove any paint that demonstrates evidence of checking, cracking, peeling, discoloration, lack of bonding or poor coverage. Misplaced lines shall be completely removed by paint remover or wet sandblasting per Section 310.5.6.3, SSPWC. Painting over misplaced lines will not be permitted.



EARVIN MAGIC JOHNSON PARK – PHASE 1a PLASTIC PAVEMENT MARKINGS LOS ANGELES, CA 32 17 23.33-1 COUNTY OF LOS ANGELES COMMUNITY DEVELOPMENT COMMISSION AHBE PROJECT NO. 116030.01 AHBE

SECTION 32 17 23.33 PLASTIC PAVEMENT MARKINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. A Plastic Pavement Marking System specifically formulated for application to asphalt pavements confirmed by certified testing facilities to possess a balance of performance properties for a durable and color-fast finish.

B. Coating Colors – as specified on Drawings.

C. Qualifications. Only a qualified applicator may bid for and perform the imprinted portion of this work. See Section 1.3 DEFINITIONS.

D. Related work: 1. 32 91 19: Finish Grading 2. 32 90 00: Landscape Planting 3. 32 12 16: Asphalt Concrete Paving

E. Definitions: The word Architect as used herein shall refer to the Landscape Architect or the Owner's authorized representative.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. ASTM D4541 - Standard Test Method for Pull-Off Strength of Coatings Using Portable Adhesion Tester.

B. ASTM D4060 - Test Method for Abrasion Resistance of Organic Coatings by the Taber Abraser.

C. ASTM D2697 - Standard Test Method for Volume of Nonvolatile Matter in Clear or Pigmented Coatings.

D. ASTM D522-93A - Standard Test Method for Mandrel Bend Test of Attached Organic Coatings.

E. ASTM D1653 - Standard Test Method for water vapor transmission through organic film coatings.

F. ASTM G154 - QUV Accelerated Weathering Environment. Standard Practice for Operating Fluorescent Light Apparatus for UV Exposure of Nonmetallic Materials.

G. ASTM D2369 - Weight Solids Standard test method for Volatile Content of Coatings.

H. ASTM D1475 - Standard Test Method for Density of Paint, Varnish, Lacquer, Other related products Weight Solids Standard test method for Volatile Content of Coatings.



I. ASTM D2240 (2000) - Standard Test Method for Rubber property – Durometer hardness.

J. ASTM D5895 - Standard Test Method of drying or curing during film formation of organic coatings using mechanical recorders.

K. ASTM D570 - Standard Test Method for water absorption of plastic.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. ” Stamped asphalt pavement” is asphalt pavement that has been subjected to imprinting or texturing in a specific pattern.

B. “Non - Stamped asphalt pavement” is asphalt pavement that is unstamped and is sometimes referred to as “flatwork.”

C. “Scuffing” - a “tear” of the asphalt pavement caused by an external force – for example turning the steering wheel of a stationary vehicle. Scuffing is generally the result of poorly designed or improperly installed asphalt.

D. Layer - a signal thin pass of coating, applied with a texture spray gun, which is allowed to dry before the next layer is applied.

E. ‘Plastic Pavement Coating System’ - a two-part epoxy - modified, acrylic, waterborne coating specifically designed for application on asphalt pavements. Pavement Coating system shall have a balance of properties to ensure good adhesion and movement on flexible pavement, while providing good durability in both dry and wet environments.

F. “Colorant” – a concentrated, high quality, UV stable pigment blend designed to add color to coating system.

G. “Qualified Applicator”- Installer who submits verification of the following requirements: 50 projects and 10 years work experience installing 2-part epoxy Plastic Pavement Coating Systems.

1.4 SUBMITTALS:

A. A copy of the Accreditation Certificate, available from the Applicator, is required with submittal. Independent product test results available upon request.

B. Submit 5-gallon sample of Plastic Pavement Marking system for approval by Landscape Architect prior to application. Sample shall consist of 2-part epoxy system and colorant.

C. Submit shop drawing of Cross Walk Paving Pattern with dimensions, and color, to Landscape Architect for approval.


A. Mockup: 1. Prepare On-Site Pavement Marking as follows:



a. Prepare a minimum 10-foot square mock-up of each Cross Walk Paving Pattern specified on Drawings.

b. Construct mock-ups using identical pavement coating system, colorants, equipment, and surfaces to which coating system will be applied that will be employed during production.

c. Ensure that same crew preparing mock-ups will be responsible for production work.

d. Construct mock-ups in a protected location approved by County. Ideally, mock-ups should be located as close to production work as possible to facilitate comparison review and be located in a sunny location.

e. Approved mock-ups will be used as standard for future production work review and assessment. County should be prepared to physically sign mock-up using a permanent black marker to attest County’s approval of mock-up. Rejected mock-ups can remain on-site until removal of approved mock-ups is required.

f. County will incur costs to redo mock-ups if County requires design changes during mock-up review. Contractor will incur costs to redo mock-ups if County rejects mock-ups due to Contractor error, such as incorrect color or production work.

g. Protect approved mock-ups from damage during course of Work. h. Clean mock-ups from prior to Final Walkthrough for Acceptance to facilitate

unencumbered comparison review by County between approved mock-ups and production work.

i. Remove mock-ups from site when directed by County.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS AND SUPPLIERS

A. GAF; www.gaf.com

B. Thermo-Plastic; (480) – 446-9000; www.decorativepavingsolutions.com

C. Sealer and Adhesion Promoter Concentrate: StreetBond 150

D. Or approved equal.

2.2 MATERIALS - COATINGS

A. Coatings shall be formulated to provide an optimal balance of performance properties to provide a durable, long - lasting color and textured finish to asphalt pavement surfaces. Key properties include wear and crack resistance, color retention, adhesion, minimal water absorption and increased friction properties.

B. Coatings shall be environmentally safe and meet EPA requirements for Volatile Organic Compounds (VOC).



C. Coating system shall be a two part epoxy-modified, acrylic, waterborne coating specifically designed for application on asphalt pavements. It has a balance of properties to ensure good adhesion and movement on flexible pavement, while providing good durability in both dry and wet environments.

D. Colorant - a high quality, highly concentrated, UV stable pigment blend that adds color to pavement coating system. One unit of colorant shall be used with one pail of coating material.

E. Coating System Performance Properties:

Characteristic Test Specification SB150

Solids by Volume ASTM D2697 59.14%

Solids by Weight ASTM D2369 71.60%

Density ASTM D1475 13.27 lbs./gal ( 1.59kg/l)

2.3 EQUIPMENT

A. A sprayer shall be used to apply coatings to the asphalt pavement surface in thin, controlled films to optimize the drying and curing time of the coating.

B. A motorized mixing device shall be used to ensure efficient and thorough blending of pavement coating system components.

Characteristic Test Specification SB150

Dry time (To re-coat)

ASTM D5895 23°C; 37% RH

35 min

Taber Wear Abrasion Dry H-10 wheel

ASTM D4060 1 day cure

0.33g/1000 cycles

Taber Wear Abrasion Wet H-10 wheel

ASTM D4060 7 days cure

0.15g/1000 cycles

QUV Accelerate Weathering Environment

ASTM G - 151 ∆E 1,500hrs. 0.53 (Brick)

Hydrophobicity Water Absorption

ASTM D570 7.89%

Shore A Hardness ASTM D2240 80.8

Mandrel Bend ASTM D522 - 93A 1/8” @ 23 C

Permeance ASTM D1653 5.6 perm

VOC per MSDS 19 g/l

Adhesion ASTM D4541 >300psi (692psi)

Friction Wet

ASTM E303 British Pendulum Tester

Wet=77.3 Dry=81.3



C. For larger application areas, an electric powered broom may also be utilized in the application of coatings to improve productivity.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

A. Plastic pavement markings shall be applied on non- textured asphalt surface by an approved installer, in accordance with the plans and specifications.

3.2 PRE-INSTALLATION CONDITIONS

A. The condition of the asphalt substrate will impact the performance of the plastic pavement marking. Therefore, a highly stable asphalt pavement free of defects is recommended.

B. Asphalt pavement mix design should be installed according to best practices over a properly prepared and stable substrate.

C. The asphalt pavement surface shall be dry and free from all foreign matter, including but not limited to dirt, dust, and chemical residue.

3.3 APPLICATION

A. Coating Application Guidelines: 1. The asphalt pavement surface shall be completely dry and thoroughly cleaned prior to

application of the coatings. 2. A texture coatings sprayer shall be used to apply the pavement marking coatings. . 3. The coating application shall proceed as soon as practical upon completion of the

imprinting of the asphalt pavement where applicable. 4. For polished asphalt, an adhesion promoter should be applied directly to the asphalt and

allowed to dry completely prior to the first layers of coating. 5. For concrete surfaces, a concrete primer should be applied and allowed to cure prior to

the first layers of coating. Consult concrete primer technical data sheets for more details on applications.

6. The first layer of coating shall be spray applied then broomed to work the coating material into the pavement surface. Subsequent applications shall be sprayed then broomed or rolled. Each application of coating material shall be allowed to dry to the touch before applying the next layer.

7. Pavement marking coatings shall only be applied when the air temperature is 50°F / (10°C) and rising and when the air temperature will not drop below 50°F / (10°C) within 24 hours. No precipitation should be expected within 24 hours.

8. See manufacturer recommendations for coating system drying times. 9. Pavement Coating System must be 100% dry and sufficient curing time must be allowed

before traffic is permitted on the surface.

3.4 COATING COVERAGE AND THICKNESS

A. Typical coating coverage and thickness is as outlined in Table below. Actual coverage may be affected by the texture of the asphalt pavement substrate and the imprint pattern selected.



COVERAGE (approx.) THICKNESS (approx.)

# OF

LAYERS

NON - TEXTURED WET DRY

sqft/unit* sqm/unit* mm mil mm mil

3 200 18.6 0.84 33 0.48 19

4 150 13.9 1.12 44 0.66 26

5 120 11.2 1.40 55 0.81 32

6 100 9.3 1.68 66 0.97 38

*1 unit based on nominal 5 gallon pail comprising Part A, Part B and Colorant (approximately 4.12 gallons). When sprayed as a single layer, I unit covers approximately 600sqft (55.7 sqm), with an approximate thickness of 6.3mil (0.16mm) dry.

3.5 COATING COVERAGE RATES

A. See table below for coverage rates:

Hot Dry Climate

Application

Pedestrian only 3 layers at 600 ft2 (56m2) per 5 gallon (20 Litre) unit for a net coverage of 200 ft2 (18.6m2) per 5 gallon (20 Litre) unit

Residential driveway 3 layers at 600 ft2 (56m2) per 5 gallon (20 Litre) unit for a net coverage of 200 ft2 (18.6m2) per 5 gallon (20 Litre) unit

Vehicular traffic

Up to 500 cars per day per lane

4 layers at 600 ft2 (56m2) per 5 gallon (20 Litre) unit for a net coverage of 150 ft2 (13.9m2) per 5 gallon (20 Litre) unit

500 to 1000 cars per day per lane

4 layers at 600 ft2 (56m2) per 5 gallon (20 Litre) unit for a net coverage of 150 ft2 (13.9m2) per 5 gallon (20 Litre) unit


4 layers at 600 ft2 (56m2) per 5 gallon (20 Litre) unit for a net coverage of 150 ft2 (13.9m2) per 5 gallon (20 Litre) unit, plus one additional layer in the wheel paths


4 passes at 600 ft2 (56m2) per 5 gallon (20 Litre) unit for a net coverage of 150 ft2 (13.9m2) per 5



gallon (20 Litre) unit, plus two additional layers in the wheel paths

No warranty is provided for traffic levels above 3000 cars per day per lane

B. Additional layers of coatings can be provided to build thickness in high wear areas such as vehicle wheel paths and turning areas.

3.6 PAVEMENT MARKING REMOVAL

A. Pavement markings may be removed by sandblasting, water - blasting, grinding, or other approved mechanical methods. The removal methods should, to the fullest extent possible, cause no significant damage to the pavement surface.

END OF SECTION


EARVIN MAGIC JOHNSON PARK – PHASE 1A SYNTHETIC RESILIENT SURFACING LOS ANGELES, CA 32 18 16-1 COUNTY OF LOS ANGELES COMMUNITY DEVELOPMENT COMMISSION AHBE PROJECT NO. 116030.01 AHBE

SECTION 32 18 16 SYNTHETIC RESILIENT SURFACING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RUBBER PLAYGROUND SURFACING

A. Section includes: Resilient playground surfacing poured-in-place system.

B. Related work: 1. 11 68 13: Playground equipment 2. Resilient playground surfacing subbase.

C. Description: Provide all necessary materials, labor, tools and equipment to perform the work included in the section for the installation of the poured-in-place resilient playground surfacing.

D. Definition: The word Architect as used herein shall refer to the Landscape Architect or the Owner's authorized representative.

E. Quality Assurance - Manufacturer shall have manufactured and installed playground poured-in-place surfacing systems for a minimum of 10 years and meet current ASTM F-1292-09 Test Criteria and CPSC Publication 325.

F. The installation of the poured-in-place product shall be completed by Manufacturer Certified Contractors or by direct employees of the Manufacturer's Installation Division. Manufacturer's detailed installation procedures shall be submitted to the Architect and made a part of the Bid Specifications.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Manufacturer's Product Literature and Specification Data: 1. ASTM F1292-09 Impact Attenuation Test Certification for the poured-in-place system to

be installed in compliance with the Critical Fall Height as determined by the Playground Equipment to be installed in conjunction with the poured-in-place surfacing system.

2. ASTM C518 Thermal Resistance 3. ASTM C1028 Dry Static Coefficient of Friction test 4. ASTM C1371-04a Determination of Emittance of materials 5. ASTM C1549-04 Solar Reflectance Index near Ambient Temperatures test 6. ASTM D395 Compression set 7. ASTM D412 Tensile Strength and Elongation 8. ASTM D624 Tear Strength 9. ASTM D2047 Static Coefficient of friction 10. ASTM D2895 Flammability Test 11. ASTM D3389 Taber Abrasion test 12. ASTM E108 Class “A” Fire Resistance 13. ASTM E303-93 (2008) Skid resistance 14. ASTM E1980-01 Solar Reflective Index / Low Slope opaque 15. ASTM F1292 Head Impact Attenuation 16. ASTM F1292 Head Impact Attenuation (Over play system wiring conduit) 17. ASTM F1951 Wheelchair Accessibility 18. ASTM E303 Skid Resistant Test



19. ASTM F1951-99 Wheelchair Accessibility Test

B. IPEMA Certification is Mandatory. Submit IPEMA Certificate at time of bid.

C. Statement of Warranty for a minimum five year period with detailed Warranty Claim requirements of the owner and specific procedures to be followed by the manufacturer in terms of response and repair of warranty claims.

1.3 INSURANCE REQUIREMENT

A. Manufacturer will submit insurance certificate for General Liability and Excess liability for a total of $15,000,000 (Fifteen Million dollars). Submit this insurance document at time of bid. Lesser amounts of coverage shall automatically disqualify bid.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION

A. A dual durometer poured-in-place safety surface system with an upper wearing layer and an underlying impact attenuation cushion layer. The finished surface shall be porous and capable of being installed at varying thickness to comply with Critical Fall Height requirements of playground equipment installed in conjunction with the surface.

B. The Poured-In-Place Safety Surface System shall be installed at a thickness sufficient to provide a critical fall height of no less than 96” across the entire surface application.

2.2 PRODUCT MANUFACTURER

A. SpectraPour® Safety Surfacing, 555 South Promenade Avenue, Suite 103, Corona, CA 92879; (800) 875–5788; or approved equal.

B. GameTime; 150 PlayCore Drive SE Fort Payne, Alabama, 35967; (800) 235-2440; www.gametime.com.

C. MRC; (800) 922-0070; mrcrec.com.

2.3 MATERIALS

A. The Resilient Play Surface shall be manufactured from a precise blend of an EPDM upper wearing course mixed with 100% aromatic polyurethane. Polyurethane containing any TDI shall not be allowed due to environmental regulations.

B. The cushion course (bottom layer) shall be a precise blend of SBR rubber particles of heterogeneous distribution bonded by a polyurethane binder applied to 100% of the rubber and installed to a designated thickness as required by the Consumer Product Safety's Commission's Guidelines and ASTM F1292-09 Test Criteria.

C. The wearing surface (top layer) shall be a mixture of black EPDM or colored EPDM 1-4 mm granules bonded by a polyurethane binder applied to 100% of the granules and applied to a



minimum thickness of 1/2" over the cushion layer. Color choice and blend ratios to be of color selected by the owner.

D. Geotextile Fabric shall be used on Resilient Play Surface systems installed directly over type 2 road base similar sub-base materials. Geotextile Fabric shall be as recommended by Resilient Surfacing Manufacturer.

2.4 FINISH TEXTURE

A. As indicated on drawings.

2.5 COLOR

A. As indicated on drawings.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. The sub-base of the entire area to be surfaced shall be cleared of any foreign materials and treated to eliminate growth of grass, weeds, shrubbery, trees, etc.

B. The native sub-base shall be graded to allow for proper water drainage that will prevent sub-base erosion.

C. The native sub-base shall be compacted to a 90% rating.

D. Curbing shall be installed at the perimeter of the area to be installed and may be concrete or other acceptable system that will not deteriorate over the anticipated life of the system. Curbing shall be set at an acceptable grade level to permit proper drainage and contain the area.

E. Asphalt cure shall be a minimum of six (6) weeks prior to application of surfacing.

3.2 AGGREGATE BASE

A. Installation of a minimum four (4) inch layer of aggregate crushed rock or road base shall be completed and compacted to a 90% rating and a + ¼" level when measured with a ten foot straight edge in any direction. The compaction shall be completed in two (2) inch lifts after the area has been water sprayed. The entire area shall be graded at a minimum of 1.5 - 2% for drainage in compliance with existing site conditions. Aggregate base other than type 2 road base must be submitted to Resilient Surfacing Manufacturer for approval.

3.3 COMPACTED AGGREGATE BASE

A. Geotextile Fabric shall be applied over the compacted and graded stone sub-base. The application of the poured in-place system shall be applied over the Geotextile Fabric.



3.4 RESILIENT SURFACING

A. The poured in-place system shall be installed to provide a critical fall height of no less than 96”.

B. applied over the Geotextile fabric and shall be supplied at a depth that must provide a critical to a depth sufficient t

3.5 CORRECTIONS

A. All portions of the above stated work shall be inspected by the Resilient Surfacing Manufacturer prior to application of the safety surfacing materials.

B. Any corrections deemed necessary by Resilient Surfacing Manufacturer shall be completed by the parties responsible for the appropriate portion of the work prior to the installation of the Safety Surfacing system.

C. Prior to the Punch Walk, Contractor shall engage the services of a duly qualified independent third party CPSI playground safety inspector. The playground safety inspector shall conduct a playground safety audit that includes surfacing drop test to verify the critical fall height of the synthetic resilient surfacing. See 11 68 13 – Playground Equipment.

3.6 CLEANING

A. Remove debris and excess materials from site. Clean out adjacent drainage inlet structures. Sweep and wash down paved and finish surfaces soiled as a result of work under this section, and in accordance with any direction given by Owner’s Representative.

3.7 PROTECTION

A. Provide and install temporary fencing and barriers as required and as directed by Owner’s Representative to protect completed areas against damage from pedestrian and vehicular traffic until acceptable by Owner.

END OF SECTION


EARVIN MAGIC JOHNSON PARK – PHASE 1A CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES LOS ANGELES, CA 01 56 39-1 COUNTY OF LOS ANGELES COMMUNITY DEVELOPMENT COMMISSION AHBE PROJECT NO. 116030.01 AHBE

SECTION 32 31 13 CHAIN-LINK FENCES AND GATES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Chain-link fences and gates.

B. Related Sections: 1. Section 32 13 13: Cast-in-Place Concrete Paving

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: 1. Submit plans and details indicating extent of fences, locations of gates, and details of

attachment and footings. Indicate means and methods for surface preparation and finishing.


A. Comply with Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction, current edition.

1.4 REQUIREMENTS

A. Gates in path of travel must comply with exit door requirements (CBC Section 1003.3.2)

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONCRETE

A. Class 500-C-2500 concrete furnished as prescribed in Section 201-1 "Concrete, Mortar and Related Materials" of the Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction or may be provided in the following volumetric proportions: 1. Portland cement: 1 part 2. Fine aggregate: 2 parts 3. Coarse aggregate (1/4 inch to 1-1/2 inches): 4 parts 4. Water: 7-1/2 gallons, maximum per sack of cement

2.2 CHAIN-LINK FENCE FABRIC

A. Conforming to ASTM A 392, Class C2 zinc coating, 2.00 ounces minimum per square foot of uncoated wire surface, hot-dipped galvanized after weaving, and top and bottom edges knuckled. 1. Fabric for interior fencing shall be 9-gauge woven wire with 2 inch mesh, unless

otherwise specified. Fences 12 feet high or less shall be furnished with single width fabric.

2. Fabric for perimeter fencing shall be 9-gauge woven wire with 1 inch mesh, unless otherwise specified. Fences 12 feet high or less shall be furnished with single width fabric.



3. Installed fence fabric shall be free from barbs, icicles, or other projections and installed fence fabric with such defects will be deemed defective Work.

2.3 POSTS, TOP RAILS, BOTTOM RAILS, BRACE RAILS AND GATE FRAMES

A. Posts: Standard weight, galvanized, welded or seamless steel pipe conforming to ASTM A 53, with a minimum yield strength of 35,000 psi.

1. Embed posts into footing 6 inches less than the depth of the footing. Deviations from

footing schedule will require soil test and Architect review.

B. Post Caps: Galvanized iron, ASTM A 47, Grade 32510, designed to fit snugly over posts with a minimum projection of 1-1/2 inches below top of posts. Post caps shall be manufactured with a curved top.

C. Eye Tops: Galvanized iron, ASTM A 47, Grade 32510, designed to fit over line posts, and for through passage of top rail.

D. Expansion Sleeve Couplings for Top Rails: Galvanized, 6 inches long, designed to fit tightly on inside of rail, fitted with raised center.

E. Rail Ends for Top Rails and Brace Rails: Galvanized iron, ASTM A 47, Grade 32510, with holes to receive 3/8-inch bolts for securing to rail end bands.

F. Tension Bands and Bands for Securing Rail Ends: Mild steel flats, at least 1/8-inch x one inch, except tension bands in gates shall be 1/8-inch x 3/4 inch. Bolts for use with tension bands and rail end bands shall be 3/8-inch x 1-1/2 inches.

G. Tension Bars: Mild steel flats at least 3/16-inch x 3/4 inch.

H. Tie Wire: Galvanized ties 6 gauge for fastening fabric to posts, top rails and brace rails. At bottom tension wire 9-gauge galvanized hog rings shall be installed.

I. Finish of Metal Parts: Post caps, couplings, rail ends, tension bands, tension bars, turnbuckles, rivets, bolts, and other metal parts and fittings shall be hot-dipped galvanized after fabrication, except bolts, which may be galvanized or cadmium-plated. Galvanizing shall conform to ASTM A 569, 0.15 percent maximum, and ASTM A 47.

2.4 PANIC HARDWARE

A. Panic exit hardware with 24” tall mounting plate, adjustable receiver bracket for 3” OC post, stainless steel tek-screws and fasteners, and exit bar. 1. Hardware shall not require pinching, grasping or twisting motion to operate. 2. Exit bar: painted aluminum finish, 8-pound touch pressure release, reversible, with dead

latch.

B. Manufacturer: DAC Industries, Inc, (800) 888-9768, Model # 6030-S (silver)

2.5 KICKPLATE

A. Kick plate shall be solid, 10” minimum high.



2.6 SIGNAGE

A. Construct per Section 10 14 00.

B. Text of signs shall be: “This gate is to remain locked in the open position during business/school hours or during any public functions.”

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install fences to heights indicated on Drawings.

B. Space fence posts at equal intervals between terminal, angle, corner, and gate posts, and not more than 10 feet apart measured from center to center of posts. In curved fence sections having a radius of 50 feet or less, space posts not more than 5 feet - 6 inches apart. Install posts so that top of eye of post caps are level with top of fabric.

C. Install angle or corner posts at each change in direction of 15 degrees or more, at change of 5 percent or more in grade of fencing, and at the beginning and end of curved fence sections.

D. Install terminal posts at ends of runs of fencing. Install gateposts on both sides of driveway and pedestrian gates. For double-leaf gates, net opening between gate posts shall be gate size as indicated on Drawings, plus 3-1/2 inches; for single leaf gates, net opening shall be gate size plus 2-1/2 inches.

E. Where a fence is to be installed on a curb, construct footings with top of footing level with the lower finish grade. Align posts, set plumb and true before placing footings. Remove splattered concrete from exposed pipe surfaces while concrete is still soft. In bituminous surfaced areas, install seal coat on top of concrete footings.

F. Install fences with top and bottom rails. Top and bottom rails shall pass through eye tops and be secured at ends with rail-end fittings and bands.

G. Install fences over 10 feet in height, in addition to top and bottom rails, with a horizontal mid-rail set at mid-height of fence.

H. In fences higher than 10 feet, install brace rails at angles, corners, and terminals at 1/4 and 3/4 of fence height. Provide one horizontal brace rail in panels adjacent to terminal, angle, corner, and gateposts, install at mid-height of fence and rigidly secured to posts with rail end fittings and bands. Provide horizontal brace rails, as specified, in panels of curved sections having a radius of 50 feet or less. Brace rails are not required in fencing 4 feet or less in height.

I. Provide a transom rail and fabric at top of pedestrian gate openings. Install transom rail 6 feet - 8 inches above high point of grade at gate opening. Ends of transom rails shall be pinned or riveted to rail end fittings with 1/4 inch mild steel rivets. Pin or rivet must go through rail and peen. Welding on rail ends is not permitted.



J. Install fence fabric on outward facing side of posts, except for tennis courts. Install fence fabric with top edge projecting above top rail of fence.

K. Install bottom of fence fabric to clear finish grades, except on bituminous surface install 3/4 inch above such surface. Locally shape and trench ground surfaces where necessary to provide uniform top and bottom alignment of fence.

L. Tightly stretch fabric and at terminal, pull corner, angle, and gateposts, secure with tension bars extending full height of fence. Secure tension bars to posts with bolted tension bands spaced not more than 14 inches apart.

M. Bands and Ties: Install bands and ties in accordance with following schedule: 1. 15 bands on 16 feet fence - 6 ties on 16 feet fence 2. 11 bands on 12 feet fence - 2 ties on 12 feet fence 3. 7 bands on 8 feet fence - 7 ties on 8 feet fence 4. 6 bands on 6 feet fence - 6 ties on 6 feet fence 5. 4 bands on 4 feet fence - 4 ties on 4 feet fence

N. Fasten fabric to line posts with wire ties spaced not more than 16 inches apart. Where 6-gauge aluminum ties are furnished, hook the tie at both ends. Installation of hooked ties with links is not permitted.

O. Fasten fabric to top rails, mid-rails, bottom rails, brace rails, with wire ties spaced not more than 18 inches apart. Bend back ends of tie wires so as not to be a hazard. Where 2 fabrics are furnished, lap the fabrics one mesh at mid-rail and tie both fabrics with 9-gauge wire or 6 gauge aluminum ties to midrails.

P. Field welds shall be cleaned of flux and spatter, damaged galvanizing removed, burrs and projections ground off, properly prepared, then heavily coated with “Galviz” or "Galvabar,” or equal. Install coating in accordance with written recommendations of manufacturer.

Q. Fabrication of Gates: 1. Frames: Fabricate gate frames from steel pipe of size specified, with joints at corners

miter cut and continuously welded to sides. 2. Fabric: Install fence fabric to side members with tension bars and tension bands as

specified, spaced not more than 14 inches apart. Tension bars shall extend full height of gate. Install fence fabric to top and bottom members and to brace rail with wire ties as specified for top rails, spaced not more than 12 inches apart.

3. Latches: Gate latches, except for panic hardware, and strikes will be furnished by the Owner. Weld gate latches and strikes to gate posts and frames. Welding shall be performed before gate frames are galvanized, or welds shall be finished as specified for field welds.

4. Hinges: Install and adjust hinges; burr or center punch threads of gate hinge bolts to prevent removal of nuts. Install 3 hinges on each post for swing gates more than 16 feet wide. Grind welds flush and smooth. Hot-dip galvanize fabricated parts after welding, or finish weld as specified for field welds.

5. Gates in path of travel must comply with exit door requirements (CBC Section 1003.3.2) and are to be furnished with panic hardware and kick plates. a. Panic hardware: install per Drawings. b. Kick plates: install per Drawings, at a 3” maximum from paving, on both sides of

gate.



c. Sign (2.06, this Section) shall be mounted on or adjacent to gate at a height of 60” above grade.

3.2 FENCING ADJUSTMENTS

A. Where the finish grade is raised 6 inches or less, cut and re-knuckle the existing fence fabric. Adjust tension wire and tie to fabric. Bottom of fence fabric shall be installed ¾” above finish grade.

B. Where the finish pavement is lowered 6 inches or less, demolish the fence footing flush with the finish grade and adjust the fabric and its attachments. Bottom of fence fabric shall be installed ¾” above finish grade.

C. Post footings and fabrics that require readjustment after installation shall be entirely replaced.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF GATES

A. Provide gates of the sizes indicated on Drawings. Allow clearance on gates of 1-1/2 inches at bottom and one inch at top. Construct gates installed in sloping areas to conform to the grade. Provide an opening in each gate for access to locking device or padlock. Knuckle ends of fabric cut for opening to eliminate hazards.

B. Sliding Gates and Swing Barricade Gates: Fabricate and install as indicated on Drawings.

3.4 COMPLETION

A. Completed fencing shall form continuous units between points indicated with required parts, accessories, and fittings provided and installed. Clean exposed metal surfaces of cement, grout and other foreign substances.

B. Fill in holes left by removal of existing fence footings, except in areas where grading Work is indicated or specified, to existing grade with clean earth thoroughly compacted to at least same density as adjoining soil.

3.5 PROTECTION

A. Protect the Work of this section until Substantial Completion.

3.6 CLEANUP

A. Remove rubbish, debris and waste materials and legally dispose of off the Project site.

END OF SECTION

BID SET SUBMITTAL

July 26, 2018

EARVIN MAGIC JOHNSON PARK – PHASE 1A DECORATIVE METAL FENCES AND GATES LOS ANGELES, CA 32 31 19-1 COUNTY OF LOS ANGELES COMMUNITY DEVELOPMENT COMMISSION AHBE PROJECT NO. 116030.01 AHBE

SECTION 32 31 19

DECORATIVE METAL FENCES AND GATES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. Work Includes: Mesh Panel Fence System.

B. REFERENCES:

1. ASTM — ASTM International: D 1557 — Test Method for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort.

1.2 DEFINITIONS


B. Excessive Compaction: Planting area soil compaction greater than 75 percent of maximum dry density as determined by ASTM D 1557.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. General Requirements: Refer to Division 1.

B. Product Data: Material descriptions, construction details, dimension of individual components and profiles, and finishes for the following:

1. Fence and gate posts, rails, and fittings.

2. Gates and hardware.

3. Color chips for final color selection.

C. SHOP DRAWINGS

1. Show locations of fence, each gate, posts, footings, embeds, rails, and details of gate swing, or other operation, hardware, and accessories.

2. Indicate materials, dimensions, sizes, weights, and finishes of components.

3. Include plans, elevations, sections, gate swing and other required installation and operational clearances, and details of post anchorage, attachment and bracing.

4. Installation procedures and instructions by manufacturer describing all details for a typical fence and gates.

BID SET SUBMITTAL

July 26, 2018



A. Qualifications:

1. Workmanship shall be best standard practice of trades and shall be performed by mechanics skilled in type of Work required.

2. Regulatory Requirements: Meet requirements applicable laws, codes, and regulations required by authorities having jurisdiction over Work.


A. Protective Pads: Use protective pads to prevent damage to finishes when lifting, handling and shipping.

B. Handling: Provide adequate support and attachments during handling to prevent damage.

1.6 SITE CONDITIONS

A. Field Measurements: Secure field measurements required for adequate fabrication and installation of the Work covered by this Section.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. General Description: In addition to manufacturer’s warranties, work shall be warranted for a period of one year from the date of Substantial Completion of entire Project against defects in materials and workmanship.

B. Additional Items Covered: Warranty shall also cover repair of damage to other materials and workmanship resulting from defects in materials and workmanship.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Fence System Mesh Panels, Gates, Posts, and Hardware: Metaltech Omega II Fence Systems, Laval, Quebec, Canada (800) 836-6342.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Fence Mesh Panels: The wire mesh fence panels , XX“ (XX mm) wide, are welded by resistance using 6 gauge - 0.192" (4.88 mm) pre-galvanized steel wire, welded at each crossing to form rectangles of 2 in. x 6 in. (50 mm x 150 mm). The cold rolled wire shall have a tensile strength of at least 75,000 psi (515 Mpa) and a 2 172 pounds (985 Kg) break strength as per ASTM A185 & A853. One end of the vertical wires of the panel shall exceed 1inch (25 mm) from the last or the first horizontal wire thereby creating a spiked top or bottom depending of its position when installed. The other end is cut flush. Panels shall have a number of folds according to the table below depending on the respective height of the panel.

BID SET SUBMITTAL

July 26, 2018


B. Fence Posts: The X inch (XX mm ) Square posts are to be installed in-ground and/or a flanged application. The size and the gauge of the posts shall be as shown in table 2 for the various height dimensions: Unlike chain link there is no need for larger end or corner posts because the panels are self-supporting. The posts are cold rolled from 1008 grade steel and meet ASTM 500 and ASTM A787-01.

C. Pedestrian Gate: Gate frames: Omega swing gates shall be made in accordance with ASTM F900 (1984) using galvanized square steel tube 16 ga (1.6 mm). The frame is made from two vertical tubes of 1 1/2 in. X 1 1/2 in. (38 mm X 38 mm) (and from two horizontal tubes of 2 in. x 2 in. (50 mm X 50 mm) welded at intersections to create a rigid frame. If the gate is over 8 ft. (2440 mm) high or 8 ft. (2440 mm) wide, a supplementary vertical support of 1 1/2 in. X 1 1/2 in. (38 mm X 38 mm) is needed

D. Fence System Hardware: Various hot-dip galvanized and polyester-coated attachment hardware shall be supplied per the manufacturer’s recommendations.

E. Fence System Materials Finish: Unless otherwise indicated, parts shall be hot-dip galvanized after fabrication with minimum layer of 0.9 oz./sq. ft. zinc. Polyester coating to be minimum 4 mils applied by an electrostatic method. Coating shall cover all surfaces of the wire and post sections. Matching liquid paint shall be provided for field touch-up. Bolts and nuts shall be hot-dip galvanized or stainless steel only, for field painting.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 VERIFICATION OF CONDITIONS:

A. Examine site and verify that conditions are suitable to receive Work and that no defects or errors are present which would cause defective installation of products or cause latent defects in workmanship and function.

B. Notification: Before proceeding with Work, notify the Owner’s Representative in writing of unsuitable conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Protection:

1. Use every possible precaution to prevent damage to existing conditions to remain such as structures, utilities, irrigation systems, plant materials and paving on or adjacent to the site of the Work.

2. Provide barricades, fences or other barriers to protect existing conditions to remain from damage during construction.

3. Do not store materials or equipment, permit burning, or operate or park equipment under the branches of existing plants to remain.

BID SET SUBMITTAL

July 26, 2018


4. Submit written notification of conditions damaged during construction to the Owner’s Representative immediately.

5. Embedded Items: Supply items required to be cast into concrete or embedded in masonry with setting templates to appropriate trades.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Fence System Assembly: Assemble and install fence components and hardware per manufacturer’s current printed instructions and shop drawings, unless indicated otherwise.

B. Automated Openers: Assemble and install gate opener components and hardware per manufacturer’s current printed instructions and shop drawings, unless indicated otherwise.

C. Attachment:

1. Coordinate hardware with adjoining work for details of attachment, fittings, etc.

2. Do cutting, drilling, threading, tapping, etc., required for attachment to adjacent Work.

3. Install anchors, bolts, washers, or other fasteners required for installation, completion of Work, as indicated on Drawings, details and schedules, at time scheduled for Work.

D. Field Assembly and Installation:

1. Install hardware per applicable manufacturer’s current printed installation instructions.

2. Prepare posts to receive hardware using manufacturer templates.

3. Install items, accurately fitted, free from distortion or defects.

4. Brace and carefully handle shop fabricated items subject to damage to prevent distortions or other damage.

5. After assembly, align and adjust the various members forming parts of a completed assembly accurately before being fastened.

6. Obtain acceptance prior to site cutting or making adjustments not scheduled.

E. Fastening:

1. Provide miscellaneous fastenings necessary for the complete assembly and installation.

2. Install fasteners as specified.

F. CLEANING:

1. Installed Fence System Surfaces: Remove soil and foreign matter from finished surfaces and keep clean until the Owner accepts maintenance.

G. PROTECTION

BID SET SUBMITTAL

July 26, 2018


1. Fence System Finishes: Apply protective coverings to prevent damage until date of Final Completion.

END OF SECTION


EARVIN MAGIC JOHNSON PARK – PHASE 1A CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE RETAINING WALLS LOS ANGELES, CA 32 32 13-1 COUNTY OF LOS ANGELES COMMUNITY DEVELOPMENT COMMISSION AHBE PROJECT NO. 116030.01 AHBE

SECTION 32 32 13 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE RETAINING WALLS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 GENERAL CONDITIONS

A. Requirements of "General Conditions of the Contract" and of Division 1, "General Requirements," apply to work in this Section with same force and effect as though repeated in full herein.

1.2 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Furnish materials, labor, transportation, services, and equipment necessary to furnish and install sedimentary wall system as indicated on Drawings and as specified herein.

B. Work related in other Sections: 1. Section 07 92 00 – Joint Sealants.

1.3 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES

A. Federal, state and local laws and regulations governing this work are hereby incorporated into and made part of this section. When this section calls for certain materials, workmanship, or a level of construction that exceeds the level of Federal, State, or local requirements, provisions of this section take precedence.

1.4 APPLICABLE STANDARDS

A. Specifications and recommended practices of American Concrete Institute (ACI), American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM), The Uniform Building Code, referred to in this Specification with their individual designations are to be considered part of this Specification.

B. Design and Control of Concrete Mixtures – Thirteenth Edition; Portland Cement Association.

1.5 QUALITY CONTROL

A. Subcontractor Qualifications: 1. Provide evidence to indicate successful experience in providing similar to that specified

herein and demonstrate successful experience. 2. Demonstration of experience: Provide a minimum of 1 local project within a 100-mile

radius of project site of an installed sedimentary wall system with contact information for the Owner’s Representative for each project.

1.6 SITE INSPECTION

A. Verify conditions at site that affect work of this Section.

B. Take field measurements as required.



C. Report major discrepancies between drawings and field dimensions to Owner's Authorized Representative prior to commencing work.

1.7 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit no later than 10 days after contract award a typed list of products specified in this Section.

B. Shop Drawings: 1. Submit shop drawings for reinforcing steel and accessories in accordance with ACI

standards. 2. Paving Jointing and Pour Sequence Plan: Submit six blueprints indicating the following:

a. List of each material to be used and clearly indicated on elevation shop drawing. b. Concrete pour sequence: Indicated sequence of pour installation.

C. Statement of Mix Design: Submit (1) copy of Statement of Mix Design prepared by batch plant servicing Project for each load delivered to Project. Statement of Mix Design to contain following information: 1. Name, address, and telephone number of batch plant preparing statement of mix

design. 2. Date of mix design. 3. Project location. 4. Contractor requesting load delivery. 5. Mix design number. 6. Integral color used. 7. Gradations for sand and aggregate. 8. Material weights, specific gravity, and absolute volumes. 9. Basis of testing, i.e. UBC 2605 D4 and Title 24 2604 D4. 10. Water/cement ratio. 11. PSI rating. 12. Signature of testing laboratory manager. 13. Signed stamp from registered project structural engineer or architect.

D. Washed Concrete Sand (extra stock): 1. One 50-pound sealed bag of washed concrete sand similar to type used during

installation.

1.8 SUBSTITUTIONS

A. None allowed unless approved in writing by Owner’s Authorized Representative.

1.9 TESTING

A. A testing agency may be designated by Owner or Owner's Authorized Representative. Testing personnel to meet ASTM E329 requirements.

1.10 MOCK-UPS

A. Prior to construction, provide eight (2) 4-foot long x required height x 12-inch wide sample of wall system specified on Drawings.



B. Locate mock-ups in a conveniently accessible and protected place. Approved mock-ups will be standard for future installation review.

C. Remove mock-ups from site upon completion of work and approval by Owner’s Authorized Representative.


A. Keep work area clean, and in a safe and workman-like condition so that rubbish, waste and debris do not interfere with work of other trades.

1.12 PRODUCT HANDLING

A. Store materials in a dry and protected location. Protect reinforcing steel and dowels from rusting, deformation, staining, and moisture damage.

B. Keep aggregate dry at all times prior to installation.

1.13 COORDINATION

A. Notify Owner’s Authorized Representative and contractors performing work related to installation of Contractor’s Work in ample time, so as to allow sufficient time for them to perform their portion of work.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PORTLAND CEMENT

A. Type I, IA, II, IIA, III, IIIA, IV, and V cements, to conform to ASTM C150.

B. Use same brand of cement from single source throughout entire project. Refer to Drawings for cement type specified.

C. Special colors and textures are achieved per sedimentary wall systems with consent of the design intent of the project.

2.2 WASHED CONCRETE SAND

A. Clean, hard, and durable washed concrete sand, conforming to ASTM C33.

B. Use same sand from single source throughout entire project.

2.3 COARSE AGGREGATE

A. Clean, hard, and durable coarse aggregate, conforming to ASTM C33.

B. Use same aggregate from single source throughout entire project.



2.4 WATER

A. Free from deleterious materials such as oils, acids, and organic matter.

2.5 ADMIXTURES

A. Integral Concrete Coloring Admixture: Refer to project Shop Drawings for color type. All Lithocrete sedimentary wall system’s incorporate project specific color systems and shall be referenced in the project submittal package after contract and verified in the close out package to ownership.

B. Air Entrainment Admixtures: Conforming to ASTM C260. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers:

a. Grace Construction Products; Daravair, (800) 433-0020 or www.graceconstruction.com/concrete/air_entraining.html#daravair.

b. Master Builders, Inc.; Micro-Air, (800) 628-9990 or www.masterbuilders.com/MB/pub/Product.asp?TypeCat=2&ParentID=78&ProductID=22.

C. Water Reducing Admixtures: Conforming to ASTM C494, Type A. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers:

a. Grace Construction Products; WRDA® (800) 433-0020 www.graceconstruction.com/concrete/water_reducers.html#wrda.

b. Master Builders, Inc.; Micro-Air (800) 628-9990 or www.masterbuilders.com.

D. Shrinkage Reducing Admixtures: Conforming to ASTM C157. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers:

a. Grace Construction Products; Eclipse® (800) 433-0020 or www.graceconstruction.com/concrete/shrinkage_reducers.html#eclipse.

b. Eclipse® Shrinkage Reducing Admixture is a liquid admixture which dramatically reduces concrete shrinkage and curling due to drying.

2.6 SURFACE RETARDANT

A. Lithocrete Etch Retarder.

B. Eurotard by Grace form retarder

C. LithosealTM sealer.

2.7 READY MIXED CONCRETE

A. Batched mixed and transported in accordance with ASTM C94 - "Specifications for Ready Mixed Concrete."

2.8 REINFORCING

A. Reinforcing Steel: Conforming to ASTM A615, clean and free of rust, dirt, grease or oils.

B. Tie Wire: 16-gauge plain cold-drawn steel conforming to ASTM A82, clean, and free of rust, dirt, grease or oils.

http://www.graceconstruction.com/concrete/air_entraining.html

http://www.masterbuilders.com/MB/pub/Product.asp?TypeCat=2&ParentID=78&ProductID=22

http://www.masterbuilders.com/MB/pub/Product.asp?TypeCat=2&ParentID=78&ProductID=22

http://www.graceconstruction.com/concrete/water_reducers.html

http://www.masterbuilders.com/

http://www.graceconstruction.com/concrete/shrinkage_reducers.html



C. Supports for Reinforcement: 1. Provide supports for reinforcement including bolsters, chairs, spacers and other devices

for spacing, supporting and fastening reinforcing bars in place.

D. Polypropylene Fiber Reinforcement: 100% virgin multifilament polypropylene fibers, complying with ASTM C 1116 - Type III. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers:

2. Fibermesh; Fibermix Stealth – 1/4” long (423) 892-8080 or www.fibermesh.com/family/stealth.htm.

3. Grace Construction Products; MicroFiberTM (800) 433-0020 or www.graceconstruction.com/concrete/fibers.html

4. Application Rate: 1/2 lb. /cy of mix.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 FORMING: FORM MATERIALS FOR STRUCTURAL COMPONENTS

A. Forms for Exposed Finish Concrete: Unless otherwise indicated, construct formwork with plywood, panel type materials to provide continuous, straight, smooth, exposed surfaces.

B. 1. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints and to conform to joint

system shown on Contract Drawings. 2. Provide form material with sufficient thickness to withstand pressure of newly placed

concrete without bow or deflection. 3. Provide forms that comply with US Product Standard PS 1 and the following: 4. ¾” Medium Density Overlaid exterior Class I mill oiled and edge sealed, with each piece

bearing legible inspection trademark.

C. Forms for Unexposed Finish Concrete: Provide forms of plywood. Provide lumber dressed on at least two (2) edges and one (1) side for tight fit.

D. Forms for Textured Finish Concrete: Provide forms with face design, size, arrangement and configuration as shown on Contract Drawings, or as required to match control sample. Provide solid backing and form supports to ensure stability of textured form liners.

E. Use 1.5 lb foam for course effect and shape with Sureform planes.

F. Laminate all radius forms with 2 layers of 3/8” A.C.X and 1 finish layer of M.D.O. fully gun nailed at 6” o.c. to studs and wallers at 18” O.C.E.W.

3.2 DESIGN OF MIXES AND PROPORTIONING

A. Proportion and mix of cement, aggregate, admixture and water to attain required plasticity and strength in accordance with current edition of ACI Manual of Concrete Practice and PCA "Design and Control of Concrete Mixtures."

B. Concrete mixtures to be designed by an approved commercial testing laboratory, using approved materials to obtain specified minimum compressive strength, by owner.

http://www.fibermesh.com/family/stealth.htm

http://www.graceconstruction.com/concrete/fibers.html



C. Concrete Mix Criteria: 1. Slump: 5-inch, with a 1/2-inch slump differential between successive batches. Obtain

approval from Owner’s Authorized Representative if slump is outside these parameters. 2. Minimum PSI Rating at 28 days: 2,500. 3. Cement quantity per yard of mix:

a. Minimum: 6 sacks. b. Maximum: 7 sacks.

4. Water/cement ratio: 0.65 – 0.67. 5. Sand: 70% of total mix. 6. Pea gravel: 30% of total mix. 7. Admixtures:

a. Air entrainment: Do not exceed 2%. b. Shrinkage Reducing: Do not exceed 2% by weight of cement.

8. Fly ash: Use only when seeding reactive aggregates such as glass and seashells. 9. Non-Chloride Accelerators: Do not use corrosive accelerators such as calcium chloride. 10. Concrete Delivery: Use of concrete loads exceeding 90 minutes from time of batch plant

must be approved by Owner’s Authorized Representative. 11. Ensure that batch plant guarantees single source supply for cement, sand, and

aggregate for the entire project.

3.3 JOINTING

A. Refer to ACI 302 “Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction” for work under this section.

B. Construction and Contraction Joints: 1. Sawcut construction and contraction joints in locations indicated on Drawings. 2. Perform jointing with a new diamond tip circular saw. 3. Joint Width: Per Drawings. Do not exceed 3/16-inch in width. 4. Depth of sawcuts: 1/4th depth of slab. 5. Decorative Sawcut Joints: Per Drawings. 6. Sawcut joints in a straight line with no overcutting. 7. Use a hand tool to sawcut up to vertical edges such as walls, steps, curbs and columns.

No cutting into vertical surfaces will be allowed.

3.4 CURING

A. After initial concrete installation, sprinkle or fog with water for minimum 7 days.

3.5 SEALING

A. Seal surface of wall surface.

B. Follow Sealer directions when applying this product (sealer must be applied in 3 to 6 coats).

END OF SECTION


EARVIN MAGIC JOHNSON PARK – PHASE 1A GABION RETAINING WALLS LOS ANGELES, CA 32 22 36-1 COUNTY OF LOS ANGELES COMMUNITY DEVELOPMENT COMMISSION AHBE PROJECT NO. 116030.01 AHBE

SECTION 32 32 36 GABION RETAINING WALLS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. This work shall consist of Hilfiker ArtWeld Gabions (welded wire mesh) and filling the gabions with rock in accordance with the details shown on project plans and special provisions.

B. These specifications are in accordance with ASTM A185, A370, A641, and A90 and include gabions as manufactured by Hilfiker Retaining Walls, Inc (800) 762-8962, or equal.

C. Submit shop drawings of all gabion structures outlining materials and construction methods.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Gabion rock: Submit samples to Landscape Architect for approval.

PART 2 - MATERIALS

2.1 GABION

A. Manufacturer 1. Hilfiker Retaining Walls, Inc. (800) 762-8962, or approved equal. 2. Maccaferri Inc. 301-223-6910, www.maccaferri.com

B. Gabions shall be of a single unit construction. The base, ends, sides, and lid shall be either welded into a single unit or shall be connected in such a manner that strength and flexibility at the connection are at least equal to that of the wire mesh. The gabions shall be fabricated in such a manner that they can be assembled at the construction site with Spiral Binders and pre-formed stiffeners into rectangular baskets of the specified size.

C. The height, length, and width of the gabions shall not vary more than 5 percent from the dimensions shown on the plans.

D. Gabions shall be divided into cells of equal length, not more than 3 feet long, by diaphragms made of the same wire mesh as used for the gabion body. Each gabion shall be fabricated with the necessary diaphragm or diaphragms secured in proper position on the base in such a manner that no additional tying at the base will be necessary.

E. Wire for the manufacture and assembly of gabions shall meet or exceed any combination of the following requirements: 1. 3"x 3" (7.62 cm x 7.62 cm), 9 Ga. - 0.144 in. min. (3.66 mm) Non-Galvanized Welded

Wire Fabric ASTM A185, A370 2. Exception: Weld Shear at 800 lbf min. 3. 9 Ga. Non-Galvanized Pre-Formed Stiffener N/A 4. 9 Ga. Non-Galvanized Spiral Binder - min. 0.144 in. (3.66 mm) ASTM A641, A90 5. 13.5 Ga. Tie Wire - min. 0.086 in. (2.2 mm) Galvanized 0.70 oz/SF ASTM A641, A90



F. Gabions shall be manufactured with all components mechanically connected at the production facility. 1. The ends and diaphragm(s) shall be factory connected to the base. 2. The lid may be a separate piece made of the same type mesh as the basket.

G. The gabion is divided into cells by means of diaphragms positioned at approximately 3 ft. centers. The diaphragms shall be secured in position to the base so that no additional lacing is necessary at the jobsite.

2.2 ROCK

A. The rock for gabions shall be hard, angular to round, durable and of such quality that they shall not disintegrate on exposure to water or weathering during the life of the structure. Rock shall be as identified on plan Schedules.

B. Gabion rocks shall range between 4 inches to 8 inches. 1. The range in sizes may allow for a variation of 5% oversize and/or 5% undersize rock,

provided it is not placed on the gabion exposed surface. 2. The size shall be such that a minimum of three layers of rock must be achieved when

filling the gabions.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 ASSEMBLY

A. Gabions shall first be assembled individually as empty units. Each gabion shall be manufactured with the necessary panels, properly spaced and secured, so they can be rotated into position at the construction site with no additional tying of the rotation joint. The panels and diaphragms shall be rotated into position and joined along vertical edges.

B. When 13.5-gauge tie wire is used as the joint material, all vertical edges of each gabion panel shall first be constructed to form individual empty gabions. Simple spiraling (looping without locking) of 13.5-gauge tie wire is not permitted. For welded-mesh, the joint shall be constructed using alternating single and double half hitches (locked loops) in every mesh opening along the joint.

C. When 9-gauge spiral binders are used, the spiral shall be screwed into position such that it passes through each mesh opening along the joint. Both ends of all 9-gauge spiral binders shall be crimped to secure the spiral in place.

D. Temporary fasteners may be used to hold panels wherever gabions-to-gabion joints will be constructed. Temporary fasteners may remain in place.

3.2 ASSEMBLY OF SUCCESSIVE GABIONS (GABION TO GABION JOINTS)

A. Empty gabions shall be set in place. Individually constructed empty gabions shall be joined successively to the next empty gabion with 13.5-gauge tie wire or 9-gauge spirals, before filling with rock begins. The 13.5- gauge tie wire or 9-gauge spiral binders shall secure, in one pass, all selvage or end wires of panels of all the adjacent gabions along the joint.



3.3 ASSEMBLY OF SINGLE-LAYERED GABIONS

A. Single-layered gabion configurations shall be staggered and joined along the front, back, and ends as shown on the plans, including tops and bottoms of adjacent gabions.

3.4 MODIFIED GEOMETRY

A. To match the geometry of the planned gabion configuration, or to meet specific conditions panels shall be folded, cut, and/or re-tied to dimensions shown on the plans or as approved by the Owner’s Authorized Representative.

3.5 FILLING WITH ROCK

A. Rock shall be placed in gabions to insure proper alignment, avoid bulges, and provide a minimum of voids. All exposed rock surfaces shall have a smooth and neat appearance. No sharp edges shall project through the wire mesh.

B. When constructing with 1.5-foot high or 3-foot high gabions, pre-formed stiffeners shall be used to produce a flat, smooth external surface.

C. Pre-formed Stiffeners shall be installed on the exposed face of the gabion prior to rock placement, two rows at1/3 points on 3' high gabions.

D. When filling 3-foot high gabions, rock shall be placed in 3 nominal 12-inch layers; when filling 1.5-foot high gabions, rock shall be placed in two 9-inch layers.

E. The last layer of rock shall slightly overfill the gabions such that the lid will rest on rock when it is closed.

3.6 LID CLOSING

A. Lids shall be tied along the front, ends, and diaphragms of individual gabions and to successive gabions with 9-gauge spiral binders in the same manner as specified elsewhere in this specification.

3.7 MESH CUTTING AND FOLDING

A. Where shown on the drawings or otherwise directed by the engineer, the basket mesh shall be cut, folded and fastened together to suit existing site conditions. The mesh must be cleanly cut and surplus mesh either folded back or overlapped so that it can be securely fastened together with lacing wire or fasteners in the manner described in Section 3.1. Any reshaped gabions shall be assembled, installed, filled and closed as specified in the previous sections.

3.8 METHOD OF MEASUREMENT

A. The payment quantities for excavation shall be determined by the outside limits of the gabion structure. Quantities will be determined from cross sections and the linear distance, and paid for under the appropriate excavation bid items.



B. The quantity to be paid for "In place gabions" shall be the number of cubic meters or cubic yards of gabions measured in their final position. Project conditions and material availability will determine the actual size of gabions to be used.

C. This bid price shall include the installed in place cost of all materials, equipment, and labor, including gabions, rock, and backfill material.

3.9 BACKFILL

A. Excavated material beyond the limits of the gabions shall be backfilled with gravel, crushed rock or other material approved by the engineer.

END OF SECTION


EARVIN MAGIC JOHNSON PARK – PHASE 1A SITE FURNISHINGS LOS ANGELES, CA 32 33 00-1 COUNTY OF LOS ANGELES COMMUNITY DEVELOPMENT COMMISSION AHBE PROJECT NO. 116030.01 AHBE

SECTION 32 33 00 SITE FURNISHINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. The requirements of the “General Conditions of the Contract” and of Division 1, “General Requirements”, shall apply to all work of this Section with the same force and effect as though repeated in full herein.

1.2 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Furnish all labor, material, equipment and services necessary to provide site furnishings, complete in place, as shown on the Drawings or in this Specification.

B. Related work: 1. Site Concrete 2. Concrete Pavers 3. Decomposed Granite 4. Planting 5. Plumbing 6. Electrical


A. Owner has established that the project will achieve SITES Certification. Included in this section are requirement(s) which are important to meet in order to achieve certification. Material meeting this requirement must be as approved by Landscape Architect: 1. Source site furnishings whose products meet the following requirement: material is

extracted, harvested and manufactured within 500 miles of the project site.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit Manufacturers’ catalogue cuts and shop drawings indicating size, materials, finishes and quantities of items being supplied.

B. Submit one color sample for each product. Color sample shall be of final material.

C. Submit concrete mix for each Custom Concrete Bench and Custom Concrete Table.

D. Shop Drawings: Detail fabrication and installation of Precast Architectural Concrete Custom products.

E. Product Data: 1. Trash and Recycle Receptacles 2. Hot Coal Receptacle 3. Bike Rack 4. Benches 5. Park Bench - Custom 6. Picnic Table – Custom



7. Picnic Benches - Custom 8. BBQ Grill 9. Drinking Fountain 10. Viewing Tubes

1.5 COORDINATION

A. The Contractor shall coordinate his work with other trades.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 TRASH, RECYCLING, AND HOT COAL RECEPTACLES

A. Trash receptacle: 1. California Round Concrete, Acid Etched Trash Receptacle, Funnel Lid 2. Color: Natural 3. Model number: QR-CAL 2436W 4. Manufacturer: QCP, or approved equal. 5. 23 Gal. Plastic Liner bag.

B. Recycling receptacle: 1. California Round Concrete, Acid Etched Litter Receptacle, Recycle Lid 2. Color and finish: Natural 3. Model number: QR-CAL 2436WM19 4. Manufacturer: QCP, or approved equal. 5. Liner bag.

C. Hot Coal Receptacle 1. Concrete, Steel Grate and Access Door 2. Color and finish: 3. Model number: QCP Q-PSHA-2842 with Ash Door 4. Manufacturer: QCP, or approved equal. 5. Silica sand

2.2 PARK BENCH - CUSTOM

A. Precast Architectural Concrete. Finish: T-Craftsman Etch, Sealer

B. Color: C-Natural

C. WO #: 136261 Item 1

D. Manufacturer: QCP, or approved equal.

2.3 PICNIC TABLE - CUSTOM


B. Color: C-Natural



C. WO #: 136261 Item 2


2.4 PICNIC BENCH – CUSTOM


B. Color: C-Natural

C. WO #: 136261 Item 3


2.5 PICNIC BENCH – CUSTOM


B. Color: C-Natural

C. WO #: 136261 Item 4


2.6 CONCRETE BENCH


B. Color: A30 Stella

C. WS-5061

D. Manufacturer: Wausau Tectura Designs, or approved equal.

2.7 BBQ GRILL

A. Steel Rotating Grill

B. Color and Finish: Black Enamel

C. Model number: 22

D. Manufacturer: DuMor, or approved equal.

2.8 BIKE RACK

A. Flo, Stainless Steel

B. Manufacturer: Landscape Forms, or approved equal.



C. Surface Mounted

2.9 BIKE LOCKER

A. Double Sided, Keyed Lock

B. Color and Finish: TBD, Powdercoat

C. Manufacturer: Dero or approved equal.

D. Model number: 40

2.10 DRINKING FOUNTAIN

A. Barrier-Free Stainless-Steel Pedestal Fountain

B. Color and Finish: Green, Powdercoat

C. Model number: HAWS 3500D

D. Manufacturer: Haws or approved equal.

2.11 VIEWING TUBES

A. Mark II Steel Binoculars with Full Base

B. Color: Hammer Grey

C. Manufacturer: SeeCoast, or approved equal.

2.12 FOOTINGS AND HARDWARE

A. Footings and hardware for secured installation.

B. Submit shop drawings for review.

2.13 MISCELLANEOUS

A. Anchors and adhesives required for installing and attaching the furnishings.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 DIMENSIONS

A. Dimensions shall be certified at the job site to insure proper placement, and fit of the equipment in the allotted areas.



3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Furnishings shall be installed per Manufacturer’s recommendations, unless otherwise noted on Drawings or Specification.

B. Work shall be set plumb and level, true to line and shall present a neat and finished appearance.

C. Set each item in its correct place, fastening it, connecting it, or incorporating it into other portions of the work.

D. Test and operate equipment to assure proper function.

3.3 PROTECTION

A. Adequately protect all work from damage by subsequent construction operations. Damaged work shall be replaced.

3.4 CLEAN-UP

A. The Contractor shall at all times keep the premises free from accumulation of waste materials and rubbish caused by his employees.

B. Upon completion of work, rubbish and excess materials are to be removed from the site, leaving the areas acceptably clean.

END OF SECTION


EARVIN MAGIC JOHNSON PARK – PHASE 1A LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION LOS ANGELES, CA 32 8400-1 COUNTY OF LOS ANGELES COMMUNITY DEVELOPMENT COMMISSION AHBE PROJECT NO. 116030.01 SWEENEY & ASSOCIATES, INC.

SECTION 32 8400 LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. It is the intent of the specifications and drawings that the finished system is complete in every respect and shall be ready for operation satisfactory to the Owner.

B. The work shall include all materials, labor, services, transportation, and equipment necessary to perform the work as indicated on the drawings, in these specifications, and as necessary to complete the contract.

1.2 CONSTRUCTION DRAWINGS

A. Due to the scale of the drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fittings, sleeves, etc. which may be required. The Contractor shall carefully investigate the structural and finished conditions affecting all of his work and plan his work accordingly, furnishing such fittings, etc. as may be required to meet such conditions. Drawings are generally diagrammatic and indicative of the work to be installed. The work shall be installed in such a manner as to avoid conflicts between irrigation systems, planting, and architectural features.

B. All work called for on the drawings by notes or details shall be furnished and installed whether or not specifically mentioned in the specifications. When an item is shown on the plans but not shown on the specifications or vice versa, it shall be deemed to be as shown on both. The Landscape Architect shall have final authority for clarification.

C. The Contractor shall not willfully install the irrigation system as shown on the drawings when it is obvious in the field that obstructions, grade differences or discrepancies in area dimensions exist that might not have been considered in engineering. Such obstructions or differences should be brought to the attention of the Landscape Architect as soon as detected. In the event this notification is not performed, the Irrigation Contractor shall assume full responsibility for any revision necessary.


A. Provide at least one English speaking person who shall be present at all times during execution of this portion of the work and who shall be thoroughly familiar with the type of materials being installed and the manufacturer's recommended methods of installation and who shall direct all work performed under this section.

B. Manufacturer's directions and detailed drawings shall be followed in all cases where the manufacturer of articles used in this contract furnish directions covering points not shown in the drawings and specifications.

C. All local, municipal, and state laws, rules and regulations governing or relating to any portion of this work are hereby incorporated into and made a part of these specifications, and their provisions shall be carried out by the Contractor. Anything contained in these specifications shall not be construed to conflict with any of the above rules and regulations of the same. However, when these specifications and drawings call for or describe materials, workmanship, or construction of a better quality, higher standard, or larger size than is required by the above



rules and regulations, the provisions of these specifications and drawings shall take precedence.

D. All materials supplied for this project shall be new and free from any defects. All defective materials shall be replaced immediately at no additional cost to Owner.

E. The Contractor shall secure the required licenses and permits including payments of charges and fees, give required notices to public authorities, verify permits secured or arrangements made by others affecting the work of this section.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Water Pressure Test 1. After award of contract and before any irrigation system materials are ordered from

suppliers or delivered to the job site, submit to the Owner a written verification of the existing water pressure on the project at each of the points of connection shown.

2. The water pressure test shall be performed to measure the dynamic water pressure at the point of connection at the maximum flow rate of the proposed irrigation system as shown on the point of connection note. Dynamic water pressure is when water is flowing through the point of connection. Static water pressure readings, water is not flowing, are not acceptable.

3. Written dynamic water pressure test confirmation shall be made on the contractor’s letterhead and include the flow rate during the test, the recorded water pressure, the date of the test and the time of the test.

B. Material List: 1. After award of contract and before any irrigation system materials are ordered from

suppliers or delivered to the job site, submit to the Owner a complete list of all irrigation system materials, or processes proposed to be furnished and installed as part of this contract.

2. The submittals materials list shall include the following information: a. A title sheet with the job name, the contractor’s name, contractor’s address and

telephone number, submittal date and submittal number. b. An index sheet showing the item number (i.e. 1,2,3, etc.); an item description (i.e.

sprinkler head); the manufacturer’s name (i.e. Hunter Industries); the item model number (i.e. I-40-ADV/36V); and the page(s) in the submittal set that contain the catalog cuts.

c. The catalog cuts shall be one or two pages copied from the most recent manufacturer’s catalog that indicate the product submitted. Do not submit parts lists, exploded diagrams, price lists or other extra information.

d. The catalog cuts shall clearly indicate the manufacturer’s name and the item model number. The item model number, all specified options and specified sizes shall be circled on the catalog cuts.

e. Submittals for equipment indicated on the legend without manufacturer names, or “as approved”, shall contain the manufacturer, Class or Schedule, ASTM numbers and/or other certifications as indicated in these specifications.

3. Submittal materials list format requirements: a. Submittals shall be provided as one complete package for the project. Multiple

partial submittals will not be reviewed. b. Submittal package shall be stapled or bound in such a way as to allow for

disassembly for review processing. Submittals shall not have tabs, tab sheets,



spiral binding, or any other type of binding that will interfere with automated copying of submittals.

c. Submittal package shall have all pages numbered in the lower right hand corner. Page numbers shall correspond with submittal index.

d. Re-submitted packages must be revised to include only the equipment being re-submitted. Equipment previously reviewed and accepted shall not be re-submitted in the materials list/index sheet or in the catalog cut sheet package.

C. Substitutions: If the Irrigation Contractor wishes to substitute any equipment or materials for those equipment or materials listed on the irrigation drawings and specifications, he may do so by providing the following information to the Landscape Architect or Owner's authorized representative for approval. 1. Provide a written statement indicating the reason for making the substitution. 2. Provide catalog cut sheets, technical data, and performance information for each

substitute item. 3. Provide in writing the difference in installed price if the item is accepted.

D. The Landscape Architect or Owner’s authorized representative will allow no substitutions without prior written acceptance

E. No substitutions of pump manufacturers, distributors or assemblies will be accepted.

F. Manufacturer's warranties shall not relieve the Contractor of his liability under the guarantee. Such warranties shall only supplement the guarantee.

G. The Landscape Architect or Owner’s authorized representative will not review the submittal package unless provided in the format described above.

1.5 EXISTING CONDITIONS

A. The Contractor shall verify and be familiar with the locations, size and detail of points of connection provided as the source of water, and electrical supply connection to the irrigation system.

B. Irrigation design is based on the available static water pressure shown on the drawings. Contractor shall verify static water on the project prior to the start of construction. Should a discrepancy exist, notify the Landscape Architect and Owner's authorized representative prior to beginning construction.

C. Prior to cutting into the soil, the Contractor shall locate all cables, conduits, sewer septic tanks, and other utilities as are commonly encountered underground and he shall take proper precautions not to damage or disturb such improvements. If a conflict exists between such obstacles and the proposed work, the Contractor shall promptly notify the Landscape Architect and Owner who will arrange for relocations. The Contractor will proceed in the same manner if a rock layer or any other such conditions are encountered.

D. The Contractor shall protect all existing utilities and features to remain on and adjacent to the project site during construction. Contractor shall repair, at his own cost; all damage resulting from his operations or negligence.

E. The Irrigation Contractor shall coordinate with the General Contractor for installation of required sleeving as shown on the plans prior to paving operations.



F. The Contractor shall verify and be familiar with the existing irrigation systems in areas adjacent to and within the Project area of work.

G. The Contractor shall protect all existing irrigation systems, in areas adjacent to and within the project area of work, from damage due to his operations.

H. Contractor shall notify Owner’s Representative if any existing system is temporarily shut off, capped or modified. Provide 48-hour notice, prior to turning off or modifying any existing irrigation system.

I. The Contractor shall repair or replace all existing irrigation systems, in areas adjacent to and within the project area of work, damaged by the construction of this project. Adjacent irrigation systems shall be made completely operational and provide complete coverage of the existing landscaped areas. All repairs shall be complete to the satisfaction of the Owner’s Representative.

J. The contractor shall provide bore holes under any existing pavement or paving encountered for the required lateral, mainline and low voltage control wire sleeving. Bore holes under 2 inches in diameter and smaller shall be made with a BulletMole® underground boring tool as manufactured by Dimension Tools, LLC (Contact telephone number (888)-650-5554 or at www.bulletmole.com). Bore holes larger than 2 inches in diameter shall be made with an approved mechanical boring tool. No air jacking or hydraulic boring of any kind shall be allowed.

1.6 INSPECTIONS

A. The Contractor shall permit the Landscape Architect and Owner's authorized representative to visit and inspect at all times any part of the work and shall provide safe access for such visits.

B. Where the specifications require work to be tested by the Contractor, it shall not be covered over until accepted by the Landscape Architect, Owner's authorized representative, and/or governing agencies. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for notifying the Landscape Architect, Owner, and governing agencies, a minimum of 48 hours in advance, where and when the work is ready for testing. Should any work be covered without testing or acceptance, it shall be, if so ordered, uncovered at the Contractor's expense.

C. Inspections will be required for the following at a minimum: 1. Pre-construction meeting. 2. System layout. 3. Pressure test of irrigation mainline (Four hours at 125 PSI or 120% of static water

pressure, whichever is greater.) Mainline pressure loss during test shall not exceed 2 PSI.

4. Coverage test of irrigation system. Test shall be performed prior to any planting. 5. Final inspection prior to start of maintenance period. 6. Final acceptance prior to turnover.

D. Site observations and testing will not commence without the field record drawings as prepared by the Irrigation Contractor. Record drawings must be complete and up to date for each site visit.

E. Work that fails testing and is not accepted will be retested. Hourly rates and expenses of the Landscape Architect, Owner's authorized representative, and governing agencies for re-



inspection or retesting will be paid by the Irrigation Contractor at no additional expense to Owner.

1.7 STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Use all means necessary to protect irrigation system materials before, during, and after installation and to protect the installation work and materials of all other trades. In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements necessary to the acceptance of the Landscape Architect and Owner and at no additional cost to the Owner.

B. Exercise care in handling, loading, unloading, and storing plastic pipe and fittings under cover until ready to install. Transport plastic pipe only on a vehicle with a bed long enough to allow the pipe to lay flat to avoid undue bending and concentrated external load.

1.8 CLEANUP AND DISPOSAL

A. Dispose of waste, trash, and debris in accordance with applicable laws and ordinances and as prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction. Bury no such waste material and debris on the site. Burning of trash and debris will not be permitted. The Contractor shall remove and dispose of rubbish and debris generated by his work and workmen at frequent intervals or when ordered to do so by the Owner's authorized representative.

B. At the time of completion the entire site will be cleared of tools, equipment, rubbish and debris which shall be disposed of off-site in a legal disposal area.

1.9 TURNOVER ITEMS

A. Record Drawings: 1. Record accurately on one set of drawings all changes in the work constituting

departures from the original contract drawings and the actual final installed locations of all required components as shown below.

2. The record drawings shall be prepared to the satisfaction of the Owner. Prior to final inspection of work, submit record drawings to the Landscape Architect or Owner's authorized representative.

3. All record drawings shall be prepared using AutoCAD 2018 drafting software and the original irrigation drawings as a base. No manual drafted record drawings shall be acceptable. The Contractor may obtain digital base files from the Landscape Architect or Owner's authorized representative.

4. If the Contractor is unable to provide the AutoCAD drafting necessary for the record drawings the irrigation designer does provide record drawing drafting as a separate service.

5. Prior to final inspection of work, submit record drawings plotted onto vellum sheets for review by the Landscape Architect or Owner's authorized representative. After acceptance by the Landscape Architect, City Inspector or Owner’s authorized representative re-plot the record drawings onto reproducible Mylar sheets. The Contractor shall also provide record drawing information on a digital AutoCAD Release 2018 drawing file. All digital files shall be provided on a compact disc (CD) clearly marked with the project name, file descriptions and date. a. Record drawing information and dimensions shall be collected on a day-to-day

basis during the installation of the pressure mainline to fully indicate all routing locations and pipe depths. Locations for all other irrigation equipment shall be collected prior to the final inspection of the work.



b. Two dimensions from two permanent points of reference such as buildings, sidewalks, curbs, streetlights, hydrants, etc. shall be shown for each piece of irrigation equipment shown below. Where multiple components are installed with no reasonable reference point between the components, dimensioning may be made to the irrigation equipment. All irrigation symbols shall be clearly shown matching the irrigation legend for the drawings. All lettering on the record drawings shall be minimum 1/8 inch in size.

6. Show locations and depths of the following items: a. Point of connection (including water POC, backflow devices, master control valves,

flow sensors, etc.) b. Routing of sprinkler pressure main lines (dimensions shown at a maximum of 100

feet along routing) c. Isolation valves d. Automatic remote control valves (indicate station number and size) e. Quick coupling valves f. Drip air relief and flush valves g. Routing of control wires where separate from irrigation mainline h. Irrigation controllers (indicate controller number and station count) i. Related equipment (as may be directed)

B. Controller Charts: 1. Provide two (2) controller chart for each automatic controller. Charts shall show the

area covered by the particular controller. The areas covered by the individual control valves shall be indicated using colored highlighter pens. A minimum of six individual colors shall be used for the controller chart unless less than six control valves are indicated.

2. Landscape Architect or Owner's authorized representative must approve record drawings before controller charts are prepared.

3. The charts are to be a reduced copy of the actual "record" drawing. In the event the controller sequence is not legible when the drawing is reduced, it shall be enlarged to a readable size.

4. When completed and approved, the charts shall be hermetically sealed between two pieces of plastic, each piece being a minimum 20 mils in thickness.

C. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: 1. Two individually bound copies of operation and maintenance manuals shall be delivered

to the Landscape Architect or Owner's authorized representative at least 10 calendar days prior to final inspection. The manuals shall describe the material installed and the proper operation of the system.

2. Each complete, bound manual shall include the following information: 3. Index sheet stating Contractor's address and telephone number, duration of guarantee

period, list of equipment including names and addresses of local manufacturer representatives. a. Operating and maintenance instructions for all equipment. b. Spare parts lists and related manufacturer information for all equipment.

D. Equipment: 1. Supply as a part of this contract the following items:

a. Two (2) wrenches for disassembly and adjustment of each type of sprinkler head used in the irrigation system.

b. Three 30-inch sprinkler keys for manual operation of control valves. c. Two keys for each automatic controller.



d. Two quick coupler keys with a 1" bronze hose bib, bent nose type with hand wheel and two coupler lid keys.

e. One valve box cover key or wrench. f. Six extra sprinkler heads of each size and type.

2. The above equipment shall be turned over to Owner's authorized representative at the final inspection.

1.10 COMPLETION

A. At the time of the pre-maintenance period inspection, the Landscape Architect, Owner's authorized representative, and governing agencies will inspect the work, and if not accepted, will prepare a list of items to be completed by the Contractor. Punch list to be checked off by contractor and submitted to Landscape Architect or Owner’s authorized representative prior to any follow-up meeting. This checked off list to indicate that all punch list items have been completed. At the time of the post-maintenance period or final inspection the work will be re-inspected and final acceptance will be in writing by the Landscape Architect, Owner's authorized representative, and governing agencies.

B. The Owner's authorized representative shall have final authority on all portions of the work.

C. After the system has been completed, the Contractor shall instruct Owner's authorized representative in the operation and maintenance of the irrigation system and shall furnish a complete set of operating and maintenance instructions.

D. Any settling of trenches which may occur during the one-year period following acceptance shall be repaired to the Owner's satisfaction by the Contractor without any additional expense to the Owner. Repairs shall include the complete restoration of all damage to planting, paving or other improvements of any kind as a result of the work.

1.11 GUARANTEE

A. The entire sprinkler system, including all work done under this contract, shall be unconditionally guaranteed against all defects and fault of material and workmanship, including settling of backfilled areas below grade, for a period of one (1) year following the filing of the Notice of Completion.

B. Should any problem with the irrigation system be discovered within the guarantee period, it shall be corrected by the Contractor at no additional expense to Owner within ten (10) calendar days of receipt of written notice from Owner. When the nature of the repairs as determined by the Owner constitute an emergency (i.e. broken pressure line) the Owner may proceed to make repairs at the Contractor's expense. Any and all damages to existing improvement resulting either from faulty materials or workmanship, or from the necessary repairs to correct same, shall be repaired to the satisfaction of the Owner by the Contractor, all at no additional cost to the Owner.

C. Guarantee shall be submitted on Contractors own letterhead as follows: GUARANTEE FOR SPRINKLER IRRIGATION SYSTEM We hereby guarantee that the sprinkler irrigation system we have furnished and installed is free from defects in materials and workmanship, and the work has been completed in accordance with the drawings and specifications, ordinary wear and tear and unusual



abuse, or neglect excepted. We agree to repair or replace any defective material during the period of one year from date of filing of the Notice of Completion and also to repair or replace any damage resulting from the repairing or replacing of such defects at no additional cost to the Owner. We shall make such repairs or replacements within 10 calendar days following written notification by the Owner. In the event of our failure to make such repairs or replacements within the time specified after receipt of written notice from Owner, we authorize the Owner to proceed to have said repairs or replacements made at our expense and we will pay the costs and charges therefore upon demand. PROJECT NAME: PROJECT LOCATION: CONTRACTOR NAME: ADDRESS: TELEPHONE: SIGNED: DATE:

PART 2 - MATERIALS

2.1 SUMMARY

Use only new materials of the manufacturer, size and type shown on the drawings and specifications. Materials or equipment installed or furnished that do not meet Landscape Architect's, Owner's, or governing agencies standards will be rejected and shall be removed from the site at no expense to the Owner.

2.2 PIPE

A. Pressure supply lines 3 inches in diameter up to 4 inches in diameter downstream of backflow prevention unit shall be Schedule 80 solvent weld PVC. Piping shall conform to ASTM D2122.

B. Non-pressure lines 3/4 inch in diameter up to 11/2 inch in diamater downstream of the remote control valve shall be Schedule 40 solvent weld PVC conforming to ASTM D1785.

C. Non-pressure lines 2 inch in diameter and larger downstream of the remote control valve shall be Class 315 solvent weld PVC conforming to ASTM D2241.

D. Pressure supply lines 6 inches in diameter and larger downstream of the backflow unit shall be Class 200 bell and gasket PVC conforming to ASTM 2672.

E. Recycled water PVC pipe to be color-coded purple in color marked on two sides with recycled water warning statements “Caution-Recycled Water”. Recycled water piping must be accepted by the local recycled water governing agencies.



2.3 METAL PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Brass pipe shall be 85 percent red brass, ANSI, IPS Standard 125 pounds, Schedule 40 screwed pipe.

B. Fittings shall be medium brass, screwed 125-pound class.

C. Copper pipe and fittings shall be Type "K" sweat soldered, or brazed as indicated on the drawings.

2.4 PLASTIC PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Pipe shall be marked continuously with manufacturer's name, nominal pipe size, schedule or class, PVC type and grade, National Sanitation Foundation approval, Commercial Standards designation, and date of extrusion.

B. All plastic pipe shall be extruded of an improved PVC virgin pipe compound in accordance with ASTM D2672, ASTM D2241 or ASTM D1785.

C. All solvent weld PVC fittings shall be standard weight Schedule 80 and shall be injection molded of an improved virgin PVC fitting compound. Slip PVC fittings shall be the "deep socket" bracketed type. Threaded plastic fittings shall be injection molded. All tees and ells shall be side gated. All fittings shall conform to ASTM D2464 and ASTM D2466.

D. All threaded nipples shall be standard weight Schedule 80 with molded threads and shall conform to ASTM D1785.

E. All solvent cementing of plastic pipe and fittings shall be a two-step process, using primer and solvent cement applied per the manufacturer's recommendations. Cement shall be of a fluid consistency, not gel-like or ropy. Solvent cementing shall be in conformance with ASTM D2564 and ASTM D2855.

F. When connection is plastic to metal, female adapters shall be hand tightened, plus one turn with a strap wrench. Joint compound shall be non-lead base Teflon paste, tape, or equal.

G. All pressure mainlines installed with solvent weld PVC fittings shall be installed with concrete thrust blocking at all directional changes in the mainline routing. Concrete thrust blocking shall not be required when ductile iron fittings and mechanical restraints are specified.

2.5 BACKFLOW PREVENTION UNITS

A. The backflow prevention unit shall be of the manufacturer, size, and type indicated on the drawings.

B. The backflow prevention unit shall be installed in accordance with the requirements set forth by local codes.

C. The backflow enclosure shall be of the manufacturer, size, and type indicated on the drawings.



2.6 VALVES

A. Gate Valves: 1. Gate valves shall be of the manufacturer, size, and type indicated on the drawings. 2. All gate valves shall have a minimum working pressure of not less than 150 PSI and

shall conform to AWWA standards.

B. Quick Coupler Valves: 1. Quick coupler valves shall be of the manufacturer, size, and type indicated on the

drawings. 2. Quick coupler valves shall be brass with a wall thickness guaranteed to withstand

normal working pressure of 150 psi without leakage. Valves shall have 1” female threads opening at base, with two-piece body. Valves to be operated only with a coupler key, designed for that purpose. Coupler key is inserted into valve and a positive, watertight connection shall be made between the coupler key and valve.

3. Vinyl quick coupler cover to be purple in color with the words “Warning-Recycled Water-Do Not Drink” permanently marked on lid.

C. Automatic Control Valves: 1. Automatic control valves shall be of the manufacturer, size, and type indicated on the

drawings. 2. Automatic control valves shall be electrically operated. 3. Provide Christy's valve ID tags for each remote control valve with valve number.

2.7 VALVE BOXES

A. Valve boxes shall be fabricated from a durable, weather-resistant plastic material resistant to sunlight and chemical action of soils.

B. The valve box cover shall be purple in color and secured with a hidden latch mechanism or bolts.

C. Valve box extensions shall be by the same manufacturer as the valve box.

D. The plastic irrigation valve box cover shall be an overlapping type.

E. Automatic control valve, master valve, and flow sensor boxes shall be 17"x11"x12" ‘nominal’ rectangular size. Valve boxes for drip valve assemblies shall be Jumbo valve boxes size as required to fit assemblies. Valve box covers shall be marked "RCV" with the valve identification number, or “MV”, “FS” "heat branded" onto the cover in 1-1/4 inch high letters / numbers.

F. Quick coupler and gate valve boxes shall be 10" circular size. Valve box covers shall be marked with "QCV" or “GV” "heat branded" onto the cover in 1-1/4 inch high letters.

2.8 AUTOMATIC CONTROLLER

A. Automatic controller shall be of the manufacturer, size, and type indicated on the drawings.

B. Controller enclosure shall be of the manufacturer, size, and type indicated on the drawings.



C. Controller shall be grounded according to local codes using equipment of the manufacturer, size, and type indicated on the drawings; or as required by local codes and ordinances.

2.9 ELECTRICAL

A. All electrical equipment shall be NEMA Type 3, waterproofed for exterior installations.

B. All electrical work shall conform to local codes and ordinances.

2.10 LOW VOLTAGE CONTROL WIRING

A. Remote control wire shall be direct-burial AWG-UF type, size as indicated on the drawings, and in no case smaller than 14 gauge.

B. Connections shall of the manufacturer, size, and type indicated on the drawings.

C. Common wires shall be white in color. Control wires shall be red (where two or more controllers are used, the control wires shall be a different color for each controller. These colors shall be noted on the "Record Drawings" plans located on controller door).

D. Ground wires shall be green in color or bare copper and in no case smaller than 6 gauge.

2.11 IRRIGATION HEADS, DRIP EMITTERS, AND INLINE DRIP TUBING

A. Irrigation heads, drip emitters, and inline drip tubing shall be of the manufacturer, size, type, with radius of throw, operating pressure, and discharge rate indicated on the drawings.

B. Irrigation heads, drip emitters, and inline drip tubing shall be used as indicated on the drawings.

2.12 DRIP IRRIGATION EQUIPMENT

Drip tubing equipment such as flush valves, wye strainers, and pressure regulators shall be of the manufacturer, size, and type indicated on the drawings.

2.13 MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT

A. Landscape Fabric: 1. Landscape fabric for valve box assemblies shall be 5.0- oz. weight woven polypropylene

weed barrier. Landscape fabric shall have a burst strength of 225 PSI, a puncture strength of 60 lbs. and capable of water flow of 12 gallons per minute per square foot.

2. Type: DeWitt Pro 5 Weed Barrier or approved equal.

B. Equipment such as flow sensors, rain sensors, flush valves, wye strainers, and master valves shall be of the manufacturer, size and type indicated on the drawings.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SITE CONDITIONS

A. Inspections:



1. Prior to all work of this section, carefully inspect the installed work of all other trades and verify that all such work is complete to the point where this installation may properly commence.

2. Verify that irrigation system may be installed in strict accordance with all pertinent codes and regulations, the original design, the referenced standards, and the manufacturer's recommendations.

B. Discrepancies: 1. In the event of discrepancy, immediately notify the Landscape Architect or Owner's

authorized representative. 2. Do not proceed with installation in areas of discrepancy until all discrepancies have

been resolved.

C. Grades: 1. Before starting work, carefully check all grades to determine that work may safely

proceed, keeping within the specified material depths with respect to finish grade. 2. Final grades shall be accepted by the Engineer before work on this section will be

allowed to begin.

D. Field Measurements: 1. Make all necessary measurements in the field to ensure precise fit of items in

accordance with the original design. Contractor shall coordinate the installation of all irrigation materials with all other work.

2. All scaled dimensions are approximate. The Contractor shall check and verify all size dimensions prior to proceeding with work under this section.

3. Exercise extreme care in excavating and working near existing utilities. Contractor shall be responsible for damages to utilities, which are caused by his operations or neglect.

E. Diagrammatic Intent: The drawings are essentially diagrammatic. The size and location of equipment and fixtures are drawn to scale where possible. Provide offsets in piping and changes in equipment locations as necessary to conform with structures and to avoid obstructions or conflicts with other work at no additional expense to Owner.

F. Layout: 1. Prior to installation, the Contractor shall stake out all pressure supply lines, routing and

location of sprinkler heads, valves, backflow preventer, and automatic controller. 2. Layout irrigation system and make minor adjustments required due to differences

between site and drawings. Where piping is shown on drawings under paved areas, but running parallel and adjacent to planted areas, install the piping in the planted areas.

G. Water Supply: Connections to, or the installation of, the water supply shall be at the locations shown on the drawings. Minor changes caused by actual site conditions shall be made at no additional expense to Owner.

H. Electrical Service: 1. Connections to the electrical supply shall be at the locations shown on the drawings.

Minor changes caused by actual site conditions shall be made at no additional expense to Owner.

2. Contractor shall make electrical connections to the irrigation controller. Electrical power source to controller locations shall be provided by others.



3. Contractor shall make electrical connections to the irrigation controller.

3.2 TRENCHING

A. Excavations shall be straight with vertical sides, even grade, and support pipe continuously on bottom of trench. Trenching excavation shall follow layout indicated on drawings to the depths below finished grade and as noted. Where lines occur under paved area, these dimensions shall be considered below subgrade.

B. Provide minimum cover of 24 inches on pressure supply lines 2 ½ inches and smaller.

C. Provide minimum cover of 30 inches on pressure supply lines 3 inches and larger.

D. Provide minimum cover of 18 inches for control wires within planters.

E. Provide minimum cover of 24 inches for control wires within sleeves below paving.

F. Provide minimum cover of 30 inches on pressure supply lines under vehicular travel ways.

G. Provide minimum cover of 6 inches for non-pressure lines.

H. Pipes installed in a common trench shall have a 4-inch minimum space between pipes.

3.3 BACKFILLING

A. Backfill material on all lines shall be the same as adjacent soil free of debris, litter, and rocks over 1/2 inches in diameter.

B. Backfill shall be tamped in 4-inch layers under the pipe and uniformly on both sides for the full width of the trench and the full length of the pipe. Backfill materials shall be sufficiently damp to permit thorough compaction, free of voids. Backfill shall be compacted to dry density equal to adjacent undisturbed soil and shall conform to adjacent grades.

C. Flooding in lieu of tamping is not allowed.

D. Under no circumstances shall truck wheels be used to compact backfill.

E. Provide sand backfill a minimum of 4 inches over and under all piping under paved areas.

3.4 PIPING

A. Piping under existing pavement may be installed by jacking, boring, or hydraulic driving. No hydraulic driving is permitted under asphalt pavement.

B. Cutting or breaking of existing pavement is not permitted.

C. Carefully inspect all pipe and fittings before installation, removing dirt, scale, burrs, and reaming. Install pipe with all markings up for visual inspection and verification.

D. Remove all dented and damaged pipe sections.



E. All lines shall have a minimum clearance of 4 inches from each other and 12 inches from lines of other trades.

F. Parallel lines shall not be installed directly over each other.

G. In solvent welding, use only the specified primer and solvent cement and make all joints in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommended methods including wiping all excess solvent from each weld. Allow solvent welds at least 15 minutes setup time before moving or handling and 24 hours curing time before filling.

H. PVC pipe shall be installed in a manner, which will provide for expansion and contraction as recommended by the pipe manufacturer.

I. Center load all plastic pipe prior to pressure testing.

J. All threaded plastic-to-plastic connections shall be assembled using Teflon tape or Teflon paste.

K. For plastic-to-metal connections, work the metal connections first. Use a non-hardening pipe dope an all threaded plastic-to-metal connections, except where noted otherwise. All plastic-to-metal connections shall be made with plastic male adapters.

3.5 CONTROLLER

A. The exact location of the controller shall be approved by the Landscape Architect or Owner's authorized representative before installation. The electrical service shall be coordinated with this location.

B. The Irrigation Contractor shall be responsible for the final electrical hook up to the irrigation controller.

C. The irrigation system shall be programmed to operate during the periods of minimal use of the design area.

3.6 CONTROL WIRING

A. Low voltage control wiring shall occupy the same trench and shall be installed along the same route as the pressure supply lines whenever possible.

B. Where more than one wire is placed in a trench, the wiring shall be taped together in a bundle at intervals of 10 feet. Bundle shall be secured to the mainline with tape at intervals of 20 feet.

C. All connections shall be of an approved type and shall occur in a valve box. Provide an 18-inch service loop at each connection.

D. An expansion loop of 12 inches shall be provided at each wire connection and/or directional change, and one of 24 inches shall be provided at each remote control valve.

E. A continuous run of wire shall be used between a controller and each remote control valve. Under no circumstances shall splices be used without prior approval.



3.7 VALVES

A. Automatic control valves, quick coupler, and gate valves are to be installed in the approximate locations indicated on the drawings.

B. Valve shall be installed in shrub areas whenever possible.

C. Install all valves as indicated in the detail drawings.

D. Valves to be installed in valve boxes shall be installed one valve per box.

E. Provide valve ID tags for each remote control valve with valve number.

3.8 VALVE BOXES

A. Valve boxes shall be installed in shrub areas whenever possible.

B. Each valve box shall be installed on a foundation of 3/4 inch gravel backfill, 3 cubic feet minimum. Valve boxes shall be installed with their tops 1/2 inch above the surface of surrounding finish grade in lawn areas and 2 inches above finish grade in ground cover areas.

3.9 IRRIGATION HEADS, DRIP EMITTERS, AND INLINE DRIP TUBING

A. Irrigation heads, drip emitters, and inline drip tubing shall be installed as indicated on the drawings.

B. Spacing of heads and inline drip tubing shall not exceed maximum indicated on the drawings.

C. Riser nipples shall be of the same size as the riser opening in the sprinkler body.

3.10 BACKFLOW PREVENTION UNITS

A. Backflow Prevention Units shall be installed as indicated on the drawings. The backflow prevention unit shall be installed in accordance with the requirements set forth by local codes.

B. The exact location of the backflow device shall be approved by the Landscape Architect or owner's authorized representative before installation.

C. The contractor shall be responsible for the testing and certification of the backflow device for proper operation. Testing and certification shall be performed by a state qualified backflow tester.

3.11 MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT

A. Install all assemblies specified herein according to the respective detail drawings or specifications, using best standard practices.

B. Quick coupler valves shall be set approximately 18 inches from walks, curbs, header boards, or paved areas where applicable.



C. Install devices such as rain sensors, flush valves, master valves and flow sensors as indicated on the drawings and as recommended by the manufacturer.

3.12 FLUSHING THE SYSTEM

A. Prior to installation of irrigation heads, the valves shall be opened and a full head of water used to flush out the lines and risers.

B. Irrigation heads shall be installed after flushing the system has been completed.

3.13 ADJUSTING THE SYSTEM

A. Contractor shall adjust valves, align heads, and check the coverage of each system prior to coverage test.

B. If it is determined by the Landscape Architect or Owner's authorized representative that additional adjustments or nozzle changes will be required to provide proper coverage, all necessary changes or adjustments shall be made prior to any planting.

C. The entire system shall be operating properly before any planting operations commence.

D. Automatic control valves are to be adjusted so that the irrigation heads, drip emitters and inline drip tubing operate at the pressure recommended by the manufacturer.

3.14 TESTING AND OBSERVATION

A. Do not allow or cause any of the work of this section to be covered up or enclosed until it has been observed, tested and accepted by the Landscape Architect, Owner, and governing agencies.

B. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for notifying the Landscape Architect, Owner, and governing agencies, a minimum of 48 hours in advance, where and when the work is ready for testing.

C. When the sprinkler system is completed, the Contractor shall perform a coverage test of each system in its entirety to determine if the water coverage for the planted areas is complete and adequate in the presence of the Landscape Architect.

D. The Contractor shall furnish all materials and perform all work required to correct any inadequacies of coverage due to deviations from the plans, or where the system has been willfully installed as indicated on the drawings when it is obviously inadequate, without bringing this to the attention of the Landscape Architect. This test shall be accepted by the Landscape Architect and accomplished before starting any planting.

E. Areas to be maintained for the formal maintenance period shall start maintenance at the same time, as directed by the Landscape Architect, Owner, and governing agencies. Partial areas will not be released into maintenance prior to completion of items listed in the pre-maintenance review. The maintenance period may not be phased.

F. If, after the maintenance review, the irrigation systems are not accepted by the Landscape Architect, the contractor shall reimburse the Architect for additional site visits, or additional



time required to review work. All additional time will be billed at the Architect’s hourly rate and will be paid for by the contractor at no additional cost to the owner.

G. Final inspection will not commence without record drawings as prepared by the Irrigation Contractor.

3.15 MAINTENANCE

During the maintenance period the Contractor shall adjust and maintain the irrigation system in a fully operational condition providing complete irrigation coverage to all intended plantings.

3.16 COMPLETION CLEANING

Clean up shall be made as each portion of the work progresses. Refuse and excess dirt shall be removed from the site, all walks and paving shall be swept, and any damage sustained on the work of others shall be repaired to original conditions.

END OF SECTION


EARVIN MAGIC JOHNSON PARK – PHASE 1A SOIL PREPARATION LOS ANGELES, CA 32 91 13-1 COUNTY OF LOS ANGELES COMMUNITY DEVELOPMENT COMMISSION AHBE PROJECT NO. 116030.01 AHBE

SECTION 32 91 13 SOIL PREPARATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Plant Pit Backfill Mix. 2. In-Place Amendment of Planting Area Soil Surfaces around Trees to be Retained. 3. Stabilized Lawn Planting Mix. 4. Emergent and Inundation-Tolerant Wetland Soil Mix.

B. Related Sections: 1. Section 32 01 30: Operation and Maintenance of Landscape Site Improvements 2. Section 32 84 00: Landscape Irrigation 3. Section 32 91 19: Landscape Grading 4. Section 32 92 19: Seeding 5. Section 32 92 22: Hydroseeding 6. Section 32 92 23: Sodding 7. Section 32 93 00: Landscape Planting 8. Section 32 93 01: Temporary Landscape Planting 9. Section 32 93 50: Palm Planting

1.2 REFERENCES

A. ASTM — ASTM International: D 1557 — Test Method for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort.

B. USDA — United States Department of Agriculture: 1. Soil Texture Triangle Classification. 2. Handbook No. 60.

1.3 DEFINITIONS


B. Excessive Compaction: Planting area soil compaction greater than 75 percent of maximum dry density as determined by ASTM D 1557.

C. Horticultural Consultant: Horticultural consultant employed by Landscape Architect for Project.

D. Landscape Architect: Landscape Architect employed by the Owner to provide professional landscape architectural services for the Project.

E. Drip Line: Line straight down from outermost limit of tree canopy branching.




A. Backfill Mixes and Amended Planting Area Surface Soil: Uncompacted on-site soil with amendments incorporated uniformly to provide a well-draining, fertile medium for vigorous plant root growth.

B. Soil Mixes: Uncompacted, imported topsoil with amendment incorporated uniformly to provide a well-draining, fertile medium for vigorous plant root growth.

1.5 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: 1. Chemical Amendments. 2. Organic Soil Conditioner. 3. Fertilizers. 4. Polymeric Soil Conditioner. 5. Organic Amendment.

C. Test Reports: 1. Laboratory soil test reports indicating specified characteristics of soil, with test date no

more than 2 weeks old. 2. Laboratory soil test reports. 3. Laboratory test report of organic amendment indicating specified characteristics of

organic amendment, with test date no more than 2 weeks old. 4. Sieve analysis of sand for sodded lawn planting mix with test date no more than 2 weeks

old. 5. Sieve analysis of sand for palm tree plant pit backfill mix.

D. Purchase Documentation: 1. Fertilizer Purchase and Delivery Invoices. 2. Chemical Amendment Purchase and Delivery Invoices.


A. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies: 1. Meet requirements of applicable laws, codes, and regulations required by authorities

having jurisdiction over Work. 2. Provide for inspections and permits required by federal, state and local authorities in

furnishing, transporting, and installing materials.

B. Agronomic Testing Agency: 1. Send samples to Wallace Laboratories, 365 Coral Circle, El Segundo, CA 90245, and

employ the laboratory to test the soil mixes and import soils.

C. Ripping and Tillage Mock-Up: Prepare 1,000 square feet mock-up demonstrating methods and means to achieve acceptance by Landscape Architect.

1. Mock up implementation schedule: Weed eradication mock-ups shall be implemented a maximum of 10 days after award of contract.

D. Weed Eradication (‘Grow and Kill’) in Planting Areas Mock-Up:



1. Prepare 1,000 square feet mock-up demonstrating methods, means, and sufficient applications to produce eradication of weed coverage from planting area to the satisfaction and acceptance of Landscape Architect. Any spraying of non-selective systemic contact herbicides shall be approved by a licensed landscape Pest Control Advisor and applied by a licensed Pest Control Operator.

2. Use grow and kill observations in mock-up to help determine treatment material selection, methods, frequency, and duration as required by this Section and other Sections.


E. Settlement Mock-Up: 1. Mock-up areas of backfill mix at the specified depths and apply irrigation to induce

settlement, to help determine the amount of settlement which will be caused by irrigation and rain.

2. Use settlement observed in mock-up to help determine allowances to make for settlement as required by this Section and other Sections.


F. Observation: 1. Prior to installing planting soil fill in the Wetland and Coastal Sage Zones, Contractor

shall notify Landscape Architect to observe the fill soil.

G. Planting Mock-Up: See 32 93 01, Temporary Landscape Planting

1.7 SITE CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Requirements: 1. Do not work soil when moisture content is so great that excessive compaction will occur,

nor when it is so dry that dust will form in the air or that clods will not break readily. 2. Apply water, if necessary, to bring soil to an optimum moisture content for tilling. 3. Do not work soil when muddy or frozen. 4. Do not apply chemicals if wind conditions will cause hazardous drift to people or

property.

B. Existing Conditions: 1. Prior to Work commencement review and clearly mark in field horizontal and vertical

locations of existing public underground utilities and structures with respective utility companies.

2. Prior to Work commencement review and clearly mark in field horizontal and vertical locations of existing private underground utilities and structures with the Owner’s Designated Representative.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ACCEPTABLE CHEMICAL AMENDMENTS, MANUFACTURERS AND SUPPLIERS

A. Fertilizers: 1. Potassium sulfate (0-0-50) 2. Triple superphosphate (0-45-0)



3. Agricultural gypsum: See 2.1.C. 4. Organic Soil Amendment - See 2.1.B.

B. Organic Amendments: 1. Organic Topdressing, by Earthworks Soil Amendments Inc.; (951) 782-0260;

http://www.ewsa.com. 2. GPS-1 or Forest Floor Humus, by Aguinaga Green, Inc.; (949) 786-9558;

http://www.aguinagagreen.com. 3. Or approved equal.

C. Gypsum: 1. Western Mining, 5401 Business Park Dr., Suitre 222, Bakersfield, CA; (661) 327-4660. 2. H.M. Holloway, Inc., Lost Hills, CA; (800) 441-7887.

D. Pre-Emergent and Contact Herbicides 1. Round-Up; www.roundup.com 2. Dimension Pre-Emergent Herbicide; A.M Leonard, (800) 543-8955

E. Contact Herbicides: 1. Round-Up; www.roundup.com 2. Touchdown; Syngenta, www.syngenta-us.com 3. Rodeo; Dow AgroSciences, (317) 337-3000; www.dowagro.com

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Import Top Soil: Import top soil shall be classified as sandy loam, and must conform to the following: 1. Particle size

Class Particle Size Range Maximum % Minimum % Coarse sand 0.5 - 2.0mm 15 0 Silt plus clay <0.05mm 50 15 Other classes: Gravel 2-13mm 15 0 Rock 1/2 – 1 inch 5 percent by volume with none > 1 inch

2. Chemistry

a. Salinity: Saturation Extract Conductivity (ECe) - less than 3.0 sD/m @ 25° C b. Sodium: Sodium Absorption Ratio (SAR) - less than 6.0 c. Boron: Saturation Extract Concentration - Less than 1.0 ppm d. Reaction: pH of Saturated Paste - 5.5-7.8 without high lime content

3. Soil shall contain sufficient quantities of available nitrogen, phosphorus, potassium,

calcium and magnesium to support normal plant grown. In the event of nutrient inadequacies, provisions shall be made to add required material prior to planting.

4. In order to insure conformance, samples of the import soil shall be submitted to an approved laboratory for analysis prior to and following backfilling.

5. Obtain imported topsoil from approved local sources.

B. Organic Soil Amendment: 1. Humus material shall have an acid-soluble ash content of no less than 6% and no more

than 20%. Organic matter shall be at least 50% on a dry weight basis. 2. The pH of the material shall be between 6 and 7.5

http://www.ewsa.com/

http://www.aguinagagreen.com/

http://www.roundup.com/

http://www.syngenta-us.com/



3. The salt content shall be less than 10 millimho/cm @ 25° C. on a saturated paste extract.

4. Boron content of the saturated extract shall be less than 1.0 part per million. 5. Silicon content (acid-insoluble ash) shall be less than 50%. 6. Calcium carbonate shall not be present if to be applied on alkaline soils. 7. Types of acceptable products are composts, manures, mushroom composts, straw,

alfalfa, peat mosses, etc. low in salts, low in heavy metals, free from weed seeds, free of pathogens and other deleterious materials.

8. Composted wood products are conditionally acceptable (stable humus must be present). Wood based products are not acceptable which are based on red wood or cedar.

9. Sludge-based materials are not acceptable. 10. Carbon:nitrogen ratio is less than 25:1. 11. The compost shall be aerobic without malodorous presence of decomposition products. 12. The maxiumum particle size shall be 0.5 inch, 80% or more shall pass a No. 4 screen for

soil amending. 13. SAR (sodium adsorption ratio) less than 5. 14. Maturity and stability – Solvita 6 or higher. 15. Maximum total permissible pollutant concentrations in amendment in parts per million on

a dry weight basis:

Arsenic: 20 Cadmium: 15 Chromium: 300 Cobalt: 50 Copper: 150 Lead: 200 Mercury: 10 Molybdenum: 20 Nickel: 100 Selenium: 50 Silver: 10 Vanadium: 500 Zinc: 300

C. Potential Chemical Amendments Required by Accepted Amendment Program and Backfill Mix: 1. Gypsum: Agricultural grade product containing 80 percent minimum calcium sulfate.

D. Polymeric Soil Conditioner: Twenty to 25 percent anionic polyacrylamide, water-soluble, linear, 7,500,000-dalton, soil aggregating polymer containing a minimum of 20,000 soil binding sites proven to be efficacious.

E. Sand for Stabilized Lawn Mix: TLC USGA Greens Sand (909) 594-2696.

F. Soil Reinforcement Fiber for Stabilized Lawn Mix: Stalok Fiber G-400 as available from Stabilizer Solutions, Phoenix, AZ; (800) 336-2488; www.stabilizersolutions.com.

2.3 MIXES AND SOIL AMENDING

A. Prepare oversized planting pits, at least twice as wide as the rootballs for the full depth of the rootball height.

http://www.stabilizersolutions.com/



B. Plant Pit Backfill Planting Mix 1. For the preparation on a volume basis, homogeneously blend the following materials

into excavated soil. Rates are expressed per cubic yard. Remove clods, rocks, debris, and foreign materials larger than 1/2 inch in diameter: a. Potassium sulfate (0-0-50) b. Triple superphosphate (0-45-0) c. Agricultural gypsum d. Organic soil amendment – about 15% by volume, sufficient for 4% to 6% soil

organic matter on a dry weight basis.

2. Mixing: a. Blend materials uniformly with 50 percent dry existing soil excavated from plant

pits and 50 percent dry amended existing excavated soil in bulk by turning over materials with an end loader.

b. Blend materials in a clean area which will not contaminate mix. c. Do not mix in planting areas.

C. In-Place Amendment of Planting Area Surface Around Trees to be Retained

1. Deeply rip or otherwise cultivate densely compacted soils 1 foot deep outside the rooting zone of the trees which are to be retained. Cross rip on 12-inch centers. Make sure that there is adequate deep drainage. Remove construction debris and foreign materials from the site as they are unearthed.

2. General soil preparation on a square foot basis: a. Broadcast the following materials uniformly. The rates are per 1,000 square feet

for a 6-inch lift. Amending soils to a depth of 12 inches will provide for better plant vigor and growth than amending to a depth of 6 inches. Incorporate them homogeneously 6 inches deep. Remove clods, rocks, debris, foreign materials larger than 1 inch in diameter from the top 6 inches:

a) Potassium sulfate (0-0-50) – 8 pounds b) Triple superphosphate (0-45-0) – 4 pounds c) Agricultural gypsum – 25 pounds d) Organic soil amendment – 3 cubic yards, sufficient for 4% to 6% soil

organic matter on a dry weigh basis.

D. In-Place Amendment of Surface Area for Sodded Lawn and Lawn Patch and Repair. 1. Rip or scarify soils 3” deep within area to received sodded lawn. Cross rip on 12-inch

centers. Make sure that there is adequate deep drainage. Remove construction debris and foreign materials from the site as they are unearthed.

2. General soil preparation on a square foot basis: a. Broadcast the following materials uniformly. The rates are per 1,000 square feet

for a 6-inch lift. Amending soils to a depth of 12 inches will provide for better plant vigor and growth than amending to a depth of 6 inches. Incorporate them homogeneously 6 inched deep. Remove clods, rocks, debris, foreign materials larger than 1 inch in diameter from the top 6 inches: 1) Potassium sulfate (0-0-50) – 8 pounds 2) Triple superphosphate (0-45-0) – 4 pounds 3) Agricultural gypsum – 25 pounds 4) Organic soil amendment – 3 cubic yards, sufficient for 4% to 6% soil organic

matter on a dry weigh basis. 3. Sand with peat moss. See drawings for depth. 4. Ten pounds of nylon fibers per ton of sand.



E. Emergent and Inundation-Tolerant Wetland Planting Mixes 1. For the preparation on a volume basis, homogeneously blend the following materials

into excavated soil. Rates are expressed per cubic yard. Remove clods, rocks, debris, and foreign materials larger than 1/2 inch in diameter: a. Potassium sulfate (0-0-50) b. Triple superphosphate (0-45-0) c. Agricultural gypsum d. Organic soil amendment – about 15% by volume, sufficient for 4% to 6% soil

organic matter on a dry weight basis. 2. Mixing:

a. Blend materials uniformly with 50 percent dry existing soil excavated from plant pits and 50 percent dry imported topsoil in bulk by turning over materials with an end loader.

b. Blend materials in a clean area which will not contaminate mix. c. Do not mix in planting areas.

3. In-Place Amendment of Planting Area Surfaces: a. Deeply rip or otherwise cultivated densely compacted soils 1 foot deep outside the

rooting zone of the trees which are to be retained. Cross rip on 12-inch centers. Make sure that there is adequate deep drainage. Remove construction debris and foreign materials from the site as they are unearthed.

b. General soil preparation on a square foot basis: 1) Broadcast the following materials uniformly. The rates are per 1,000 square

feet for a 6-inch lift. Amend soils to a depth as shown on plans; incorporating materials homogeneously throughout amendment depth. Remove clods, rocks, debris, foreign materials larger than 1 inch in diameter from the top 6 inches: a) Potassium sulfate (0-0-50) – 8 pounds b) Triple superphosphate (0-45-0) – 4 pounds c) Agricultural gypsum – 25 pounds d) Organic soil amendment – about 3 cubic yards, sufficient for 4% to 6%

soil organic matter on a dry weigh basis.


A. Organic Amendment: Employ independent soil testing laboratory to test organic amendment for specified properties and submit test results.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. General: Examine site and verify that conditions are suitable to receive Work and that no defects or errors are present which would cause defective installation of products or cause latent defects in workmanship and function.

B. Subgrade: 1. Verify that the subgrade is at the correct elevation and slope. 2. Inspect soil surface for sticks, oils, chemicals, plaster, concrete, and other deleterious

materials. 3. Remove deleterious materials.



C. Underground Utilities and Structures: Verify that the locations of utilities, structures and other underground items have been clearly marked.

D. Notification of Unsuitable Conditions: Before proceeding with Work, notify the Owner’s Designated Representative in writing of unsuitable conditions and conflicts.

E. Soil Tests to Determine Conformance with Specifications, Planting Area Soil Surface Amendment Programs, and Maintenance Period Fertilization Programs: 1. Take fifteen 1-pound composite representative soil samples from locations determined

by the Architect/Engineer in the field. 2. Send samples to Wallace Laboratories, 365 Coral Circle, El Segundo, CA 90245, and

employ the laboratory to test the soil samples for the following: a. pH measurement in the saturation extract per USDA Handbook No. 60, Method

21. b. Electrical conductivity of the saturation extract per USDA Handbook No. 60,

Method 2. c. Sodium absorption ratio of the saturation extract per USDA Handbook No. 60,

Method 20b. d. Determination of boron, calcium, copper, iron, magnesium, manganese,

molybdenum, phosphorous, potassium, sodium, sulfur, and zinc, via the following test methods: Mehlich Number 3, Bray P1, Bray P2, Olsen P, DTPA, ammonium acetate, ammonium bicarbonate DTPA, and hot water extract from boron.

e. Analysis of saturation extract for calcium, magnesium, sodium, boron, chloride, phosphorous, nitrate, and sulfate.

f. Measurement of following trace metals by the DTPA extract: aluminum, arsenic, cadmium, chromium, cobalt, lead, lithium, nickel, selenium, silver, strontium, tin, and vanadium.

g. Presence of calcium carbonate and magnesium carbonate. h. Estimate of soil texture per commonly used methods. i. Estimate of organic matter content per commonly used methods. j. Exchangeable Ammonium Cation. k. Base Saturation. l. Cation Exchange Capacity. m. Carbonates Determination. n. Soil Bulk Density. o. Water Infiltration Rate per USDA Handbook No. 60, Method 34b.

3. At least 30 days prior to commencement of soil preparation Work, submit to the Architect/Engineer and Horticultural Consultant the laboratory’s written soil test report including the laboratory’s soil test data; the laboratory’s interpretation of nutritional deficiencies, excesses, and potential toxicities; the laboratory’s amendment recommendations; and the laboratory’s maintenance recommendations.

4. The Architect/Engineer and Horticultural Consultant will determine the final amendment and maintenance period fertilization programs based on the soil test report which may differ from the soil test report amendment recommendations.

F. Soil Tests for Parasitic Nematodes: 1. Test soils which have been used for agricultural purposes within the prior 12 months for

parasitic nematodes. 2. Soil will be acceptable if the parasitic nematode population is less than 200 per 50 cubic

centimeters of soil. 3. Do not artificially dry soil prior to testing. 4. Submit written test report to the Architect/Engineer and Horticultural Consultant.



G. Soil Tests for Herbicide Contamination: 1. Perform a radish/rye grass growth trial on soils suspected of herbicide contamination. 2. Submit written test report to the Landscape Architect.

3.2 WEED ERADICATION AT PLANTING AREAS

A. ‘Grow and Kill’ - If weeds exist on site at the beginning of work, pre-treat site by spraying with a non-selective systemic contact herbicide recommended by an approved licensed landscape Pest Control Advisor and applied by a licensed Pest Control Operator. Leave sprayed plants intact to allow systemic kill as directed by Advisor. After recommended kill period, water thoroughly to encourage new weed growth and re-apply systemic herbicide. Continue applications until weed coverage is eradicated from planting area. ‘Grow and Kill’ treatment shall utilize and meet Section 1.6.D. “Weed Eradication (‘Grow and Kill’) in Planting Areas Mock-Up” requirements.

B. Pre-Emergent: Treat non-seeded planting area and planting areas without perennials with pre-emergent herbicide recommended by an approved licensed landscape Pest Control Advisor and applied by a licensed Pest Control Operator and applied 30 days prior to installation.

3.3 PREPARATION OF SUBGRADE TO RECEIVE LAWN MIX AND AMENDED SOIL MIXES

A. Protection: 1. Use every possible precaution to prevent damage to existing conditions to remain such

as structures, utilities, irrigation systems, plant materials and paving on or adjacent to the site of the Work.

2. Use every possible precaution to prevent excessive compaction of planting area soil within or adjacent to the areas of Work.

3. Provide barricades, fences or other barriers to protect existing conditions to remain from damage and excessive compaction during construction.

4. Do not store materials or equipment, permit burning, or operate or park equipment under the branches of existing plants to remain.

5. Submit written notification of conditions damaged during construction to the Owner’s Designated Representative immediately.

B. Cross-Ripping Subgrade Soil: 1. Prior to placing topsoil, rip areas to receive topsoil on the same day topsoil is placed. 2. Rip subgrade twice to a depth of 6 inches unless indicated otherwise. 3. Space ripping tines at 24 inches on center. 4. Make second ripping pass in a direction 90 degrees to the direction of the first ripping

pass. 5. Do not rip closer than 2 feet horizontally and vertically to installed and existing utility

lines and structures.

C. Location and Depths: As indicated on the Drawings.

D. Mix Placement: 1. Place soil mixes same day that subgrade soil ripping occurs and prior to vehicle or

equipment traffic running over the ripped surface. 2. Place soil mixes with equipment of appropriate size for area and in a manner that avoids

excessive compaction of the topsoil. 3. Avoid repeatedly driving equipment in same tracks so that topsoil does not become

excessively compacted.



E. Allowances: Place topsoil to elevations that allow for settlement, addition of soil amendment, and finish grading tolerances.

F. Finished Grade: See Section 32 91 19.

G. Surface Drainage: Keep soil surface sloped so that surface drains.

H. Compaction and Contamination: 1. In handling materials and operating tools and equipment, protect the topsoil from

excessive compaction by laying down planks, plywood, or other accepted protective devices.

2. Do not store or stockpile materials on the topsoil. 3. Do not allow vehicles to park or drive on topsoil, except equipment which is preparing

and finish grading the soil. 4. If ruts are formed, blade rutted topsoil smooth. 5. Loosen excessively compacted soil to the full depth of the excessive compaction, rototill,

and grade surface smooth.

I. Excessively Compacted Topsoil: 1. Mechanically loosen excessively compacted topsoil to its full depth via a method

acceptable to the Landscape Architect and re-grade surface smooth. 2. Keep topsoil from being excessively compacted until date of Final Completion.

J. Erosion Repair: 1. Repair erosion that occurs between topsoil installation and plant or seed installation. 2. Fill eroded areas with topsoil and finish grade.

3.4 PREPARATION OF SURFACE OF PLANTING AREAS

A. Protection of Existing Conditions: Same as 3.3A

B. Surface Preparation: 1. Inspect soil surface for sticks, oils, chemicals, plaster, concrete, and other deleterious

materials. 2. Do Work required to remove and dispose of the deleterious materials.

C. Excessively Compacted Areas: 1. Where tilled planting soil or imported planting soils have become compacted more than

75-percent maximum dry density per ASTM D 1557 rip soil to 4 inches below the depth of the excessive compaction.

2. Deeply rip or otherwise cultivated densely compacted soils 1 foot deep outside the rooting zone of the trees which are to be retained. Cross rip on 12-inch centers. Make sure that there is adequate deep drainage. Remove construction debris and foreign materials from the site as they are unearthed.

3.5 AMENDMENT OF SOIL SURFACE OF PLANTING AREAS

A. Existing soil areas in Planting Areas: 1. General soil preparation on a square foot basis:

a. Broadcast the following materials uniformly. The rates are per 1,000 square feet for a 6-inch lift. Amending soils to a depth of 12 inches will provide for better plant



vigor and growth than amending to a depth of 6 inches. Incorporate them homogeneously 6 inched deep. Remove clods, rocks, debris, foreign materials larger than 1 inch in diameter from the top 6 inches: 1) 3 cubic yards of organic amendment per 1,000 square feet, 9 pounds of

Nitroform 38-0-0 per thousand square feet, and 2.5 pounds of Triple Superphosphate 0-45-0 per thousand square feet, 10 pounds of Potassium Sulfate 0-0-50 per 1,000 square feet, 20 pounds of polymeric soil conditioner per 1,000 square feet, 30 pounds of Gypsum per 1,000 square feet.

b. Amendment Incorporation: 1) Spread dry amendments evenly over surface of dry soil with a drop spreader. 2) Organic amendment and soil must be dry. 3) Incorporate amendments uniformly within top 6 to 8 inches of soil within a few

hours after amendment application, except at areas within drip lines of existing trees to remain.

4) At areas within drip lines of existing trees to remain, incorporate amendments uniformly to 1 to 2-inch depth within a few hours after application.

5) Mechanically incorporate the amendments into the soil via a method that will not excessively compact the soil below incorporated amendments.

6) To activate polymeric conditioner, irrigate soil very slowly so that soil surface will not form a crust and until water penetrates 6-inch depth.

7) Allow soil to dry until stringiness disappears. 8) Prior to planting, re-till soil to a 6-inch depth at areas outside of drip lines of

existing trees to remain and re-till soil to a 1 to 2-inch depth at areas within drip lines of existing trees to remain.


A. Soil Amendment Verification: 1. Schedule Agronomic Consultant to take up to 10 random composite samples of

amended soil surface areas and soil mixes for laboratory testing to verify amendment composition.

2. Submit composite samples collected by the Agronomic Consultant to the same soil testing laboratory used to test the soil as indicated in Article 3.1 E of this Section.

3. Employ the laboratory to test soil samples and submit test results to Horticultural Consultant and Architect/Engineer.

4. Perform corrective work as recommended by the laboratory soil test reports if directed to do so by the Architect/Engineer.

5. When a laboratory soil test indicates that the soil or soil mixes meet the requirements of the Specifications the Contractor will receive written notification of acceptance from the Architect/Engineer.

6. Installation of ground cover plants and seed may commence upon Contractor’s receipt of the written notification of acceptance.

END OF SECTION


EARVIN MAGIC JOHNSON PARK – PHASE 1a LANDSCAPE GRADING LOS ANGELES, CA 05 12 33-1 COUNTY OF LOS ANGELES COMMUNITY DEVELOPMENT COMMISSION AHBE PROJECT NO. 116030.01 AHBE

SECTION 32 91 19 LANDSCAPE GRADING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. Work includes: weeding and finish grading of lawn and planting areas.

B. Related work: 1. Section 32 01 30: Operation and Maintenance of Landscape Site Improvements 2. Section 32 13 16: Decorative Concrete Paving 3. Section 32 15 00: Aggregate Surfacing 4. Section 32 84 00: Landscape Irrigation 5. Section 32 92 19: Seeding 6. Section 32 92 22: Hydroseeding 7. Section 32 92 23: Sodding 8. Section 32 93 00: Landscape Planting 9. Section 32 93 01: Temporary Landscape Planting 10. Section 32 93 50: Palm Planting

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Finish grading: finish grading shall consist of adjusting and finishing soil surfaces with site or imported topsoil, raking grades to a smooth, even, uniform plane. Remove and legally dispose of all extraneous matter off site. Facilitate natural run-off water and establish grades and drainage indicated as part of the contract work.

B. The word Architect as used herein shall refer to the Landscape Architect or the Owner's authorized representative.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Import Top Soil: See Section 32 91 13, Soil Preparation

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verification of conditions: Prior to commencing the finish grading, review the installed work of other trades and verify that their work is complete. 1. Rough Grading: Grading in planting areas (except raised planter areas) shall be

established to within plus or minus 0.10 foot prior to beginning of finish grading. 2. Moving onto the site and/or commencing work shall be construed as acceptance of

rough grade conditions by the Contractor.



B. Import topsoil only when necessary to supplement site soil to achieve grades shown on Drawings, or if site soil is unsuitable for planting.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Weeding: Before finish grading, weeds and grasses shall be dug out by the root or sprayed with an herbicide and disposed of off-site. See 32 91 13, Soil Preparation.

B. Debris: Remove stones and debris 1 inch in diameter and greater and clumps of earth that do not break up. Dispose of off-site.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General: When rough grading and weeding have been completed, and the soil has dried sufficiently to be readily worked, lawn and planting areas shall be graded to the elevations indicated on the Drawings. 1. Grades indicated on Drawing are grades that will result after thorough settlement and

compaction of the soil. 2. Grades not otherwise indicated shall be uniform finish grades and, if required, shall be

made at the direction of the Architect. 3. Finish grades shall be smooth, even, and a uniform plane with no abrupt change of

surfaces. 4. Soil areas adjacent to buildings shall slope away from the building to allow a natural run-

off of water, and surface drainage shall be directed as indicated on the drawings by remodeling surfaces to facilitate the runoff water at 2% minimum grade.

5. Low spots and pockets shall be graded to drain properly.

B. Drainage: Finish grade with proper slope to drains. 1. Flow lines, designated or not, shall be graded and maintained to allow free flow of

surface water. 2. If any drainage problems arise during construction period due to Contractor's work (such

as, but not limited to, low spots, slides, gullies and general erosion), the Contractor shall be responsible for repairing these areas to a condition equal to their original condition, and in so doing shall prevent further drainage problems from occurring.

C. Toe of slope: To prevent soil creep or erosion across pavement, where pavement (walk, curb, etc.) is at the toe of a slope, finish grade is to level out or swale slightly at least 6” before reaching pavement

D. Moisture Content: The soil shall not be worked when the moisture content is so great that excessive compaction occurs, nor when it is so dry that dust may form in the air or that clods do not break readily. Water may be applied, if necessary, to provide moisture content for tilling and planting operations. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to control dust that is spread as a result of grading operations.

E. Grades: The finish grade shall be 1-1/2 inch below grade of adjacent pavement, walks, curbs, or headers except when drainage conditions require flush grades, as directed by the Owner's Representative, or if otherwise indicated on Drawings.

F. Compaction: Soils in planted areas shall be loose and friable, yet firm enough that no settling occurs from normal foot traffic or irrigation.



3.4 FIELD OBSERVATION

A. Contact the Landscape Architect 48 hours or two working days in advance of each agreed observation or conference.

B. Schedule for On-Site Reviews: At completion of finish grading and prior to any planting operations.

END OF SECTION


EARVIN MAGIC JOHNSON PARK – PHASE 1A SEEDING LOS ANGELES, CA 32 92 19-1 COUNTY OF LOS ANGELES COMMUNITY DEVELOPMENT COMMISSION AHBE PROJECT NO. 116030.01 AHBE

SECTION 32 92 19 SEEDING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDED:

A. Furnish all labor, material, equipment and services necessary to provide all hand seeding, complete and in place, as shown and specified.

B. Work includes: 1. Preparation 2. Hand –Broadcast Seeding 3. Cleanup


A. Section 32 01 30: Operation and Maintenance of Landscape Site Improvements

B. Section 32 15 00: Aggregate Surfacing

C. Section 32 84 00: Landscape Irrigation

D. Section 32 91 13: Soil Preparation

E. Section 32 91 19: Landscape Grading

F. Section 32 92 22: Hydroseeding

G. Section 32 92 23: Sodding

H. Section 32 93 00: Landscape Planting

I. Section 32 93 01: Temporary Landscape Planting

J. Section 32 93 50: Palm Planting

1.3 REFERENCES

A. Latest version of American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) standards: ASTM D 422. Standard Test Method for Particle-Size Analysis of Soils.

1.4 SUBMITTALS AND NOTIFICATIONS

A. Submit documentation to Architect within twenty-five (25) days after award of Contract that all required seed is available. No substitutions may be made without approval of the Architect. Requests for substitutions due to unavailability must be made in writing.

B. Materials List and Seed Certification:



1. A complete material list shall be submitted to Landscape Architect prior to performing any work. Material list shall include all seed, binders, etc.

C. Submit to the Landscape Architect a one-pound sample of each type of seed mix specified. 1. The sample shall be drawn from the same lots used for the seeding work. 2. See Section 1.7.

D. The Contractor shall notify the Landscape Architect in writing a minimum of 7 days prior to starting seeding work. The notice shall state the equipment to be used (including manufacturer's data sheets), the date and time that operations will start, and the name of the person in the field who will be in charge of the work.

1.5 SITE CONDITION

A. General: Do not perform work when climate and existing site conditions will not provide satisfactory results.

B. Vehicular accessibility on site shall be as directed by owner's representative. Repair damage to prepared ground and surfaces caused by vehicular movement during work under this section to original condition at no additional cost to Owner.

C. Perform soil preparation just prior to seeding operations and in accordance with final planting schedule. Coordinate with irrigation system installation to avoid damage to work of one by the other.

D. Utilities: Determine location of underground utilities and perform underground work in a manner which will avoid damage to existing and new improvements. Hand excavate, as required.

E. If work is interrupted for reasons other than inclement weather, the Contractor shall notify the Architect a minimum of 24 hours prior to the resumption of work

1.6 SOIL TEST:

A. See 32 91 13, Soil Preparation

1.7 STANDARDS AND QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Provide seed that meets or exceeds specifications of Federal, State, and County laws requiring inspection for plant disease or insect control.

B. Provide seed that is true to botanical name. In all cases, botanical names shall take precedence over common names.

C. Seed Mix Quality Assurance: 1. Individual seed lots (seed collected in one location and/or in different years) must be

tested for purity and germination. Seed test reports shall be made available to the Landscape Architect upon request, and submitted to the Landscape Architect to approve, at least one month prior to installation, in order to ensure that the specified pure live seed (PLS) rates are achieved. Based on the test results for purity and



germination, the bulk application rate (lbs per acre) shall be adjusted, as necessary, to the specified PLS rate.

2. Seed must be tested by an independent seed-testing laboratory according to Association of Official Seed Analysts (AOSA) Rules for Testing Seed by a Seed Technologist registered with the Society of Commercial Seed Technologists. Seed should be cleaned prior to testing.

3. Seed test reports will include the following information for each species: a. botanical name b. common name c. lot number d. collection location e. net weight PLS pounds (lbs) f. percent total viability g. percent by weight of inert matter h. percent by weight other seed species (not to exceed 1.5%) i. percent by weight weed seed (not to exceed 1.0%).

4. Collected seed shall not contain any weed species listed as noxious or restricted in the State of California. Documentation of collection location (GENETIC/GEOGRAPHIC CERTIFICATION) shall be provided to verify the origin of the seed as Commercial or Local Native Collection. Seed tests must be performed no greater than 12 months before seed application.

5. Seed tags from each bag of seed used for the Project shall be provided to the Landscape Architect and shall identify a. each plant species and seed lot b. total PLS of each species in the bag c. total PLS (lbs), and total bulk seed (lbs) in each bag such that the bulk application

rate (lbs per acre) can be determined for seeding.

D. Workmanship: Perform work in accordance with the best standards of practice for landscape work and under the continual supervision of a competent foreman capable of interpreting the drawings and specifications.

1.8 VERIFICATION OF DIMENSIONS AND QUANTITIES:

A. All scaled dimensions are approximate. Before proceeding with any work, carefully check and verify all dimensions and quantities and immediately inform the Landscape Architect of any discrepancy between the drawings and/or specifications and actual conditions. No work shall be done in any area where there is any such discrepancy until the Architect has given approval for the work.

1.9 OBSERVATION SCHEDULE

A. Contractor shall be responsible for notifying the Landscape Architect in advance for the following observations according to the time indicated: 1. Pre-seeding conference - 7 days 2. Seeding area layout review - 72 hours 3. Seeding operations - 48 hours 4. Completed seeding - 7 days

B. Contractor shall be responsible for scheduling site Observation visits with Landscape Architect as work progresses. Failure to schedule required Observations shall not relieve Contractor of



responsibility for obtaining approvals. Work that must be redone to satisfy these requirements shall be done by Contractor at no cost to Owner.

C. Observations may be waived or combined at the discretion of the Landscape Architect.

D. When someone other than the Landscape Architect conducts Observations, the Contractor shall show evidence in writing of when and by whom these observations were made.

E. No site visits shall commence without adequate preparation or all items noted in previous Observation Reports either completed or remedied unless the Landscape Architect has waived such compliance. Failure to adequately prepare or accomplish previous punch list items shall make the Contractor responsible for reimbursing the Landscape Architect for the site visit at his current billing rates per hour plus transportation costs. No further inspections will be scheduled until this charge has been paid and received.

1.10 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver all seed to the jobsite in unopened containers with legible identification labels. Each seed package shall have a complete seed test analysis attached, stating seed lot number, botanical species, dealer’s guarantee of percentage of Purity, Inert, Crop, and Weed, as well as Germination, test date, and certificate or stamp of release by a County Agriculture Commissioner.

B. Store seed material in shade and protect from weather or injury. Maintain in a dry condition, and at a consistent temperature. Architect may at any time reject seed not maintained in this condition.

C. Deliver non-seed products to site in original unopened containers bearing manufacturer's guaranteed chemical analysis, name, trademark, and conformance to state law. Protect material from damage or breakage. Immediately remove empty containers from site.

1.11 SAMPLES AND TESTS

A. Landscape Architect reserves the right to take and analyze samples of materials for conformity to specifications at any time.

B. Contractor shall furnish samples upon request by Landscape Architect.

C. Rejected materials shall be immediately removed from the site at the Contractor's expense.

D. Contractor shall pay cost of testing of materials that do not meet specifications.

1.12 WARRANTY AND REPLACEMENT

A. Contractor shall reseed any poorly or inadequately germinated areas until each area has germinated a full and healthy stand of the specified plant species.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Product: 1. Custom Blend. See Drawings. 2. Fresh, clean, new crop, pure live bulk seed for hand-seeding applications. 3. See drawings for Live Bulk Seed application rate.

B. Suppliers: 1. S&S Seeds, Inc., 6144 Carpinteria Avenue, Carpinteria, CA (805) 684-0436 93013, or

approved equal. 2. Stover Seed Company, 9180 San Fernando Rd, Sun Valley, CA (213) 626-9668;

www.stoverseed.com;

2.2 SOIL AMENDMENTS

A. Compost: 1. Material:

a. Compost shall be well decomposed, stable, weed –free and from an organic matter source.

b. It shall be derived from agricultural, food, or industrial residuals; biosolids; yard trimmings; source-seperated or mixed solid waste.

c. The product shall contain no substances toxic to plants and shall be reasonably free (<1% by dry weight) of man-made foreign matter.

d. The compost will posses no objectionable odors and shall nor resemble the raw material from which it was derived.

e. Compost shall be certified by the U.S. Composting Council 2. Manufacturers:

a. Greenwise Soil Technologies, Southgate, CA (562) 806-6366; www.uwscompany.com

b. Tierra Verde Industries, Irvine, CA (949) 551-0363; www.tierraverdeind.com c. Whittier Fertilizer Co., Rivera, CA (562) 699-3461; www.whiettierfertilizer.com

B. Soil amendments shall be as required by Soils Test.

C. Contractor shall provide all amendments recommended by Soils Report at no additional cost to Owner.

2.3 PORTABLE HAND-BROADCAST SEEDERS

A. Product Information: 1. Hand-broadcast seeder consisting of seed hopper, agitator, flow gauge, “on-off” lever,

seed dispersal hand crank, and shoulder harness. 2. Manufacturers:

a. EarthWay; (800)-294-0671; www.earthway.com b. Belly Grinder; Oesco, Inc., Conway, MA. (800)-634-5557. c. Ev-n-spred Handheld Broadcast Spreader; Grainger Industrial Supply. (800)-472-

4643. d. Or approved equal.

http://www.stoverseed.com/

http://www.uwscompany.com/

http://www.tierraverdeind.com/



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION AND ORGANIZATION

A. Site acceptance: 1. The Contractor shall be responsible for verifying grades and site conditions before

beginning work. 2. No change in Contract price will be allowed for actual or claimed discrepancy between

existing grade and those shown on the plan after Contractor has accepted existing grades and moved on the site.

3. The Contractor shall be responsible for any damage seedlings after installation prior to acceptance by Owner.

B. Scheduling: Perform seeding only when weather and soil conditions are suitable, as approved by Architect. 1. Finish grading shall be complete prior to seeding. 2. The irrigation system shall be operational and approved prior to seeding. 3. In areas where applicable, install trees and shrubs prior to seeding.

3.2 AREA PREPARATION

A. Topsoil shall not be stripped and shall remain in place.

B. Complete clearing and grubbing to the Architect’s satisfaction. At time of seeding, the surface of all areas to be seeded shall be free of large plant thatch, large stones, sticks, stumps, or other deleterious matter one inch in diameter or larger, and shall be free from all wire, plaster, construction debris of any kind, or similar objects that would be a hindrance to seeding or maintenance.

C. Stage the clearing work in areas small enough to ensure that seed application will take place before any significant soil erosion will occur. The Contractor shall be responsible for preventing and repairing any soil erosion that occurs during the area preparation.

D. Clearing and weed control: See 32 91 13: Soil Preparation.

E. Apply soil amendments specified in the Soils Report at the time of the final seedbed preparation at the rates specified.

F. Contractor shall be responsible for shaping all seeding areas as indicated on plans or as directed by Architect. Layout and preparation are to be approved by Architect before seed application begins.

G. Calibration of Hand-Broadcast Seeder: 1. Calibrate hand-broadcast seeder prior to seeding to insure uniform distribution of seed

mix. 2. Mark the beginning and end of an area 50 feet in length. 3. Calculate amount of specified seed mix (including wheat bran) to be applied to 1,000 sq.

ft. area. 4. Weigh and record weight of seed sufficient to fill the seeder at least half full. 5. Select an appropriate Setting Rate position on the seeder for the seed material. If

unsure, use the middle Setting Rate position.



6. Start far enough behind the beginning of the 50-foot test area to achieve the desired walking speed. Use a normal pace and crank the handle so that the crank makes one revolution for each step. Stop seeding at the end of the 50 feet.

7. Measure the entire spread width of the broad cast seed. 8. Record the weight of the remaining seed material in the seeder and calculate the

amount of seed applied. 9. Calculate the amount of seed mix required for test area.

a. Weight of seed mix per 1,000 square feet x (spread width feet x 50 feet)/1000 square feet = seed mix required for test area.

10. Compare the results in Step 8 with calculations in Step 9. If too little or too much seed was applied in the test area, adjust the rate setting accordingly and repeat the test again until the desired application rate is achieved.

3.3 HAND SEEDING INSTALLATION

A. Prior to seeding, make light applications of irrigation in order to achieve the optimum germination moisture level in the soil.

B. Prepare soil to receive seed by lightly hand-raking topsoil to maximum depth of 1/4" to facilitate seed contact.

C. Calibrate portable seeder for proper application rate. See Section 3.2 – Area Preparation.

D. Wheat bran at 1/4 the weight of the specified bulk seed shall be added to the specified seed mix bulk to facilitate seeding.

E. Broadcasting of Seed and Bran Mix: 1. Divide materials (seed mix and bran) into 2 equal parts. 2. Seed shall be broadcast seed at Pure Live Seed (PLS) rate specified on drawings.

Adjust seeding rate per seed testing results (see Section 1.7) as required to meet the specified Pure Live Seed (PLS) rate as specified on drawings.

3. Half of the seed should be hand-broadcast using portable seeder by walking across the entire area in a linear orientation appropriate for the site making sure of even coverage. The remaining half of the seed shall be hand-broadcast by walking across the site in a linear orientation perpendicular to the first application.

F. Following seeding, scarify the soil with hand-held rakes to aid in seed-soil contact and to provide thin soil covering over applied seed mix. Seeds should be incorporated into the topsoil less than 1/2 inch deep.

G. Top dress raked soil with compost.

H. Do not apply mulch to seeded area, as this will inhibit seed germination.

3.4 ESTABLISHMENT

A. Irrigation: 1. An overhead irrigation system can be used in the native plant area. 2. Operate as frequently as necessary to keep the soil moist but not soggy during the first

90 days of germination and to achieve proper germination of the seeds after application.



3. Once seeds have germinated, deep irrigation shall be implemented to force the developing roots to grow down. a. Allow soil to dry down to approximately 50-60 percent of field capacity in the top 6-

12 inches, before the next irrigation cycle. b. Depth of dry soil down between irrigation events will depend on development of

adjoining coastal sage container plants. c. A soil probe or shovel should be used to examine soil moisture and rotting depth

directly. 4. The irrigation system may be required for a maximum of two growing seasons to

establish the Coastal Sage planting and Wildflower Seed Mix, but may extend, depending on annual rainfall amounts.

5. Water used for irrigation must be of good quality, with total dissolved solids (salts) at no greater concentration than 500 parts per million (ppm). Individual chemical constituents should be evaluated against the site soil tests to avoid salt buildup in the soils.

B. Germination: 1. There shall be at least 75 % total absolute cover from Eschscholzia californica,

Lasthenia californica and Plantago isurlaris within the first 90 days after seeding. 2. The Contractor shall reapply seeds to bare spots failing to adequately germinate within

90 days. 3. The Architect shall be the sole judge of adequacy of coverage. 4. The Contractor shall remain responsible for reseeding until the Landscape Architect

approves seed application and germination establishment.

C. Weed control (Coastal Sage Area): 1. Removal of weed growth shall be hand or with use of hand-pick only. 2. Low-Nozzle spray applications of Round-Up (or comparable commercial herbicide) may

only be used to remove growth of Bermuda grass (Cynoden dactylon). 3. Perform ‘Grow and Kill’ cycles throughout minimum 6 month period to optimize proper

weed abatement. No more than 2 weeks should pass from the end of ‘kill’ cycle to start of next ‘grow’ cycle.

3.5 NOTIFICATION AND INSPECTION

A. Inspection: Provide notice to Owner's Representative requesting inspection at least 7 days prior to anticipated date of completion of root zone preparation, final grading and seed application.

B. Deficiencies: Owner's Representative will specify deficiencies to Contractor who shall make satisfactory adjustments and shall again notify Owner's Representative for inspection.

3.6 CLEANING

A. Remove debris and excess materials from site. Clean out drainage inlet structures. Sweep and wash down paved and finish surfaces soiled as a result of work under this section, and in accordance with any direction given by Owner's Representative.



3.7 PROTECTION

A. Provide and install temporary fencing and barriers as required and as directed by Owner's Representative to protect completed areas against damage from pedestrian and vehicular traffic until acceptance by Owner.

B. Restore planting areas to specified condition if eroded or otherwise disturbed after fine grading and/or seed application. 1. The contractor shall be responsible for reseeding until the Architect approves seed

application and germination.

3.8 CLEANUP

A. After all seeding operations have been completed, remove all trash, empty containers and rubbish from the property and dispose of legally. All scars, ruts, or other marks in the ground caused by this work shall be repaired and the ground left in a smooth condition throughout the site. The Contractor shall sweep the site and shall wash down all paved areas within the Contract area, leaving the premises in a clean condition.

END OF SECTION


EARVIN MAGIC JOHNSON PARK – PHASE 1A HYDROSEEDING LOS ANGELES, CA 32 92 21-1 COUNTY OF LOS ANGELES COMMUNITY DEVELOPMENT COMMISSION AHBE PROJECT NO. 116030.01 AHBE

SECTION 32 92 22 HYDROSEEDING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Hydroseeding of Seed Mixes. 2. Turf Patch and Repair.

B. Related Sections: 1. Section 32 01 30: Operation and Maintenance of Landscape Site Improvements 2. Section 32 84 00: Landscape Irrigation 3. Section 32 91 13: Soil Preparation. 4. Section 32 91 19: Landscape Grading. 5. Section 32 92 19: Seeding 6. Section 32 92 23: Sodding 7. Section 32 93 00: Landscape Planting. 8. Section 32 93 01: Temporary Landscape Planting 9. Section 32 93 50: Palm Planting

1.2 REFERENCES

A. AOSA — Association of Official Seed Analysis: USDA Rules for Testing Seeds, Current Edition.

B. FSA — Federal Seed Act.

C. ASTM — American Society for Testing Materials: D 1557-00 Test Method for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Acceptance, Accepted, or Acceptable: Acceptance by the Landscape Architect in writing.

B. PLS: Pure Live Seed.

C. Weeds: Plant species not listed in the seed mix.

D. Excessive Compaction of Soil: Planting area soil compaction greater than 80 percent maximum dry density as determined by ASTM D 1557.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: 1. Grower’s Literature and Analytical Data for Seed.



2. Wood Fiber Mulch. 3. Soil Stabilizing Agent. 4. Molate Red Fescue Seed Mix 5. Turf ‘Patch and Repair’ Seed Mix. 6. California Coastal Native Wildflower Mix. 7. Seed Analysis Tags and Seed Certification Submittals: as outlined in 1.5.B below.

1.5 STANDARDS AND QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Meet requirements of applicable laws, codes, and regulations required by authorities

having jurisdiction over Work, including the FSA. 2. Provide for inspections and permits required by Federal, State and local authorities in

furnishing, transporting, and installing materials. 3. Pre-installation Meeting: Prior to commencing Work, meet with Landscape Architect and

Horticulturalist to review requirements of this Section.

B. Seed Quality Assurance: 1. Provide seed that meets or exceeds specifications of Federal, State, and County laws

requiring inspection for plant disease or insect control. 2. Provide seed that is true to botanical name. In all cases, botanical names shall take

precedence over common names. 3. Individual seed lots must be tested for purity and germination. Seed test reports shall be

made available to the Landscape Architect upon request, and submitted to the Landscape Architect to approve, at least one month prior to installation, to ensure that the specified pure live seed (PLS) rates are achieved. Based on the test results for purity and germination, the bulk application rate (lbs. per acre) shall be adjusted, as necessary, to the specified PLS rate.

4. Seed must be tested by an independent seed-testing laboratory according to Association of Official Seed Analysts (AOSA) Rules for Testing Seed by a Seed Technologist registered with the Society of Commercial Seed Technologists. Seed should be cleaned prior to testing.

5. Seed test reports will include the following information for each species: a. botanical name b. common name c. lot number d. collection location e. net weight PLS pounds (lbs.) f. percent total viability g. percent by weight of inert matter h. percent by weight other seed species (not to exceed 1.5%) i. percent by weight weed seed (not to exceed 1.0%).

6. Collected seed shall not contain any weed species listed as noxious or restricted in the State of California. Documentation of collection location (GENETIC/GEOGRAPHIC CERTIFICATION) shall be provided to verify the origin of the seed as Commercial or Local Native Collection. Seed tests must be performed no greater than 12 months before seed application.

7. Seed tags from each bag of seed used for the Project shall be provided to the Landscape Architect and shall identify a. each plant species and seed lot b. total PLS of each species in the bag



c. total PLS (lbs), and total bulk seed (lbs) in each bag such that the bulk application rate (lbs per acre) can be determined for seeding.


A. Labeling: 1. Furnish standard products in unopened manufacturer’s standard containers. 2. Seed analysis meeting requirements of the AOSA USDA Rules for Testing Seeds shall

be attached to outside as well as inside container, showing species, certified net weight, PLS percentage, germination percentages, purity, inert seed, weed seed, other crop seed, name of certified testing agency, date of germination tests, and suppliers name.

3. No seed will be accepted unless germination test date is within 9 months of planting date.

B. Delivery and Storage: 1. Ship and store materials and products in unopened containers with protection from

weather or other conditions which would damage or impair the effectiveness of the product.

2. Items which have become wet, moldy, or otherwise damaged in transit or in storage, will be rejected.

1.7 SITE CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Requirements: 1. Apply hydroseed mixes when day and night temperatures are 40 degrees or above. 2. Do not apply hydroseed mixes if rain is expected within 24 hours.

1.8 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING

A. Hydroseeeding: Perform hydroseeding after tree installation. To maximize seed germination, perform hydroseeding between March 1 and October 30, if possible.

1.9 WARRANTY

A. Coverage for hydroseed Areas: Warrant growth and coverage to the effect that one year from date of notice of Final Completion a minimum of 95 percent of the areas seeded shall be covered with the specified plants in a live, healthy, vigorous condition with no bare soil areas.

B. Delays: Delays in completion of planting operations which extend the planting into more than one planting season shall extend the Warranty period correspondingly.

C. Replacement: 1. As soon as weather and soil conditions permit during the specified planting season,

reseed, at no additional cost to the Owner, seeded areas not meeting the Warranty requirements.

2. As soon as weather and soil conditions permit during the specified planting season, install replacement plants, at no additional cost to the Owner, at meadow areas planted with plugs and bulbs not meeting the Warranty requirements.

3. Requirements for Replacement Work: Apply requirements of this Section to replacement Work.



1.10 MAINTENANCE

A. Operation and Maintenance of Site Improvements: Refer to Section 32 01 30.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Manufacturers: 1. S&S Seeds, 6155 Carpinteria Avenue Rd., Carpinteria, CA; (805) 684-0436. 2. Stover Seed Company, 9180 San Fernando Rd, Sun Valley, CA (213) 626-9668;

www.stoverseed.com; 3. Soil Stabilizing Agent: Terra Novo, Bakersfield, CA; (888) 843-0129;

www.terranovo.com.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Seed Mixes 1. South Lake Island Mix (California Coastal Native Wildflower Mix) 2. Red Fescue 3. Turfgrass Species for Patch and Repair: Match existing.

B. Wood Fiber Mulch: Conwed Hydro Mulch 1000, or accepted substitute.

C. Soil Stabilizing Agent: Earthguard Fiber Matrix.

D. Water: Potable.

2.3 MIXES

A. South Lake Island (California Coastal Native Wildflower) Mix Application Rate: Seed at a rate of as shown on the drawings PLS per acre, and water at a rate recommended by the soil stabilizing agent manufacturer.

B. Red Fescue: Seed at rate as recommended by manufacturer and water at a rate recommended by the soil stabilizing agent manufacturer.

C. Turf – Patch and Repair: Seed at rate as recommended by manufacturer and water at a rate recommended by the soil stabilizing agent manufacturer.

D. Mixing Hydroseed Slurry Mix: 1. Perform slurry preparation at job site. 2. Add water and other ingredients except seed simultaneously so that the finished load is

a homogenous mix. 3. Meet wood fiber mulch manufacturer’s current printed requirements for mixing. 4. Add seed last. 5. Do not allow seed to remain more than 90 minutes in slurry. 6. When tank is fully loaded, agitate slurry for 3 to 5 minutes to mix uniformly. 7. Discharge slurry mix within 90 minutes of mixing.

http://www.stoverseed.com/

http://www.terranovo.com/



8. Commence spraying immediately when the tank is full and uniformly mixed.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. General: Examine site and verify that conditions are suitable to receive Work and that no conditions are present which would cause defective installation of products or cause latent defects in workmanship and function.

B. Finish Grade and Soil Preparation Verification: Verify that soil preparation Work is complete and that finish grading Work is complete and has been accepted by the Landscape Architect.

C. Notification of Unsuitable Conditions: Before proceeding with Work, notify Owner’s Representative in writing of unsuitable conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Protection of Existing Conditions: 1. Use adequate precautions to prevent damage to existing conditions to remain such as

structures, utilities, plant materials and walks on or adjacent to the site of the Work. 2. Provide barricades, fences or other barriers to protect existing conditions to remain from

damage during construction. 3. Use every possible precaution to prevent excessive compaction of planting area soil

within or adjacent to the areas of Work. 4. Do not store materials or equipment, permit burning, or operate or park equipment under

the branches of existing plants to remain. 5. Submit written notification of damaged plants and structures to Owner’s Representative

immediately.

B. Complete clearing and grubbing to the Landscape Architect’s satisfaction. At time of seeding, the surface of all areas to be seeded shall be free of large plant thatch, large stones, sticks, stumps, or other deleterious matter one inch in diameter or larger, and shall be free from all wire, plaster, construction debris of any kind, or similar objects that would be a hindrance to seeding or maintenance.

C. Stage the clearing work in areas small enough to ensure that seed application will take place before any significant soil erosion will occur. The Contractor shall be responsible for preventing and repairing any soil erosion that occurs during the area preparation.

D. Clearing and weed control: See 32 91 13: Soil Preparation.

E. Apply soil amendments specified in the Soils Report at the time of the final seedbed preparation at the rates specified.

F. Contractor shall be responsible for shaping all seeding areas as indicated on plans or as directed by Landscape Architect. Layout and preparation are to be approved by Landscape Architect before seed application begins.



3.3 HYDROSEEDING PLANTING AREAS

A. Application: 1. Apply specified slurry mix in a sweeping motion to form a uniform mat at the specified

rate on the surfaces of amended topsoil areas in a manner that will provide 100-percent coverage.

2. Spray from at least 2 opposite directions if required to remove shadow effects and achieve 100 percent coverage.

3. Keep hydroseeding within planting areas and keep from contact with other plant materials.

4. Thoroughly flush tank and hose with water after application, because bonded fiber matrix is fast to dry and, once dry, difficult to remove.

5. Hydroseed prior to planting shrub material but after trees.

B. Top of Tree Root Balls: Do not seed within mulch saucers over top of tree root balls.

C. Unused Mixes: 1. Do not use slurry mixture which has not been applied within 90 minutes of mixing. 2. Promptly remove from the site.

D. Clean-Up: Clean overspray from structures, furniture, paving and other non-planting areas immediately after completion of Work.

3.4 ESTABLISHMENT (SOUTH LAKE ISLAND WILDFLOWER SEED MIX)

A. Irrigation: 1. An overhead irrigation system can be used in the native plant area. 2. Operate as frequently as necessary to keep the soil moist but not soggy during the first

90 days of germination and to achieve proper germination of the seeds after application. 3. Water used for irrigation must be of good quality, with total dissolved solids (salts) at no

greater concentration than 500 parts per million (ppm). Individual chemical constituents should be evaluated against the site soil tests to avoid salt buildup in the soils.

B. Germination: 1. The Contractor shall reapply seeds to bare spots failing to adequately germinate within

90 days. 2. The Landscape Architect shall be the sole judge of adequacy of coverage. 3. The Contractor shall remain responsible for reseeding until the Landscape Architect

approves seed application and germination establishment.

C. Weed control (South Lake Island - California Coastal Native Wildflower Mix ): 1. Removal of weed growth shall be hand or with use of hand-pick only. 2. Low-Nozzle spray applications of Round-Up (or comparable commercial herbicide) may

only be used to remove growth of Bermuda grass (Cynoden dactylon).

3.5 LAWN PATCH AND REPAIR

A. Remove topsoil containing foreign materials resulting from Contractor's operations, including oil drippings, fuel spills, stone, gravel, and other construction materials, and replace with new topsoil.



B. Remove sod and vegetation from diseased or unsatisfactory lawn areas; do not bury in soil.

C. Mow, dethatch, core aerate, and rake existing lawn.

D. Remove weeds before seeding. Where weeds are extensive, apply selective herbicides as required. Do not use pre-emergence herbicides.

E. Till stripped, bare, and compacted areas thoroughly to a soil depth of 6 inches.

F. Apply soil amendments and initial fertilizers required for establishing new lawns and mix thoroughly into top 3 inches of existing soil per soil analysis. Provide new planting soil to fill low spots and meet finish grades.

G. Apply seed and protect with straw mulch as required for new turf patch and repair lawns.

H. Water newly planted areas and keep moist until new lawn is established.

3.6 PROTECTION

A. Traffic: 1. After application, do not operate equipment or vehicles, or allow any foot traffic over the

hydroseeded areas until plants are established enough to prevent soil from eroding. 2. Do not operate equipment or vehicles on meadow and pasture areas until ground if firm

enough that ruts will not occur. 3. Do not operate equipment or vehicles on meadow and pasture areas that will cause

excessive soil compaction.

B. Establishment Period: 1. Do not let soil in seeded flower and lawn areas dry out during the establishment period. 2. Coordinate three review periods between landscape Contractor, Landscape Landscape

Architect, and Owner’s Horticulturalist to review establishment and development of meadows.

END OF SECTION


EARVIN MAGIC JOHNSON PARK – PHASE 1A SODDING LOS ANGELES, CA 32 92 23-1 COUNTY OF LOS ANGELES COMMUNITY DEVELOPMENT COMMISSION AHBE PROJECT NO. 116030.01 AHBE

SECTION 32 92 23 SODDING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Sodding of Lawn Areas.

B. Related Sections: 1. Section 32 01 30: Operation and Maintenance of Landscape Site Improvements 2. Section 32 84 00: Landscape Irrigation 3. Section 32 91 13: Soil Preparation. 4. Section 32 91 19: Landscape Grading. 5. Section 32 92 19: Seeding 6. Section 32 92 21: Hydroseeding 7. Section 32 93 00: Landscape Planting. 8. Section 32 93 01: Temporary Landscape Planting 9. Section 32 93 50: Palm Planting

1.2 REFERENCES

A. ASTM — ASTM International: D 1557 — Test Method for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort.

1.3 DEFINITIONS


B. Excessive Compaction: Planting area soil compaction greater than 75 percent maximum dry density as determined by ASTM D 1557.

C. Landscape Architect: Landscape Architect employed by the Owner to provide professional landscape architectural services for the Project.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Sod.


A. Regulatory Requirements: Provide for inspections and permits required by federal, state and local authorities in furnishing, transporting, and installing materials.


A. Harvest and Delivery of Sod:



1. Harvest from the source and deliver to project site within 24 hours. 2. Deliver only as much sod as can be installed within 24 hours after harvest. 3. Sod not transplanted within 24 hours after harvest will be rejected.

B. Storage and Protection: Protect sod which cannot immediately be laid by storing in shade and keeping it fresh with moistened burlap.

1.7 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING

A. Sodding: Install sod after the temporary certificate of occupancy has been granted.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Warranty Period: Warrant that grasses shall be in a healthy and flourishing condition of active growth at the end of the next growing season after the date of Final Completion.

B. Condition: Free of dead or dying patches, and areas shall show foliage of normal density, size and color.

C. Delays: Delays in completion of planting operations which extend the planting into more than one planting season shall extend the Warranty period correspondingly.

D. Coverage: Warrant growth and coverage of sod to the effect that a minimum of 95 percent of the area sodded shall be covered with specified planting after one growing season with no bare spots greater than 1 square foot.

E. Replacement: As soon as weather conditions permit, resod, without additional cost to the Owner, areas of dead sod not in a vigorous, thriving condition, during and at the end of the Warranty Period.

F. Requirements for Replacements: Apply requirements of this Section to replacement Work.

1.9 MAINTENANCE

A. Maintenance Service: Refer to Section 32 01 30.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. PHC Turf Saver Fertilizer: 1. Mycorrhizal fungicide inoculant formulated for turf installation and maintenance. 2. Blend of mycorrhizal fungi and rhizosphere bacteria selected for beneficial activities in

plants. 3. Colonize is a proprietary stimulant to increase colonization rates of grass roots. 4. Increases feeder root absorption capacity. 5. Prevents sod loss due to heat and drought stress. 6. Prevents root system decline. 7. Helps recover from stress and root damage.



B. Sod Type 1. Dark green in color, relatively free of thatch, free from diseases, weeds and harmful

insects. 2. Reasonably free of objectionable grassy and broadleaf weeds. Sod will be considered

weed free if no more than ten such weeds are found per hundred square feet of sod. 3. Free of Bermuda grass, quackgrass, johnsongrass, poison ivy, nimbleweed, thistle,

bindweed, bentgrass, perennial sorrel, bromegrass. 4. Soil depth of 1/2-inch plus or minus 1/8-inch. 5. Strong enough that handling will not tear sod.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. General: Examine site and verify that conditions are suitable to receive Work and that no defects or errors are present which would cause defective installation of products or cause latent defects in workmanship and function. 1. Finish Grade and Soil Preparation Verification: All work specified in Section 32 91 19,

Landscape Grading, to be completed before commencement of work.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Protection of Existing Conditions: 1. Use adequate precautions to prevent damage to existing conditions to remain such as

structures, utilities, plant materials and walks on or adjacent to the site of the Work. 2. Use every possible precaution to prevent excessive compaction of planting area soil

within or adjacent to the areas of Work. 3. Provide barricades, fences, or other barriers to protect existing conditions to remain from

damage during construction. 4. Do not store materials or equipment, permit burning, or operate or park equipment under

the branches of existing plants to remain. 5. Submit written notification of damaged plants and structures to the Owner’s Designated

Representative immediately.

B. Soil Surface Preparation: Prior to installing sod, manually remove and dispose of rocks and clods larger than 1/2-inch diameter from soil surface using rakes and apply 22 pounds of PHC Turf Saver per 1,000 square feet.

3.3 SODDING

A. Timing: 1. Install sod within 24 hours of delivery. 2. Sod not transplanted within 24 hours of delivery will be rejected.

B. Rolling Sod Bed: 1. Roll amended soil in lawn areas with 200-pound water-ballast roller. 2. Tamp surfaces of lawn joint planting soil mix firm, to level indicated on the Drawings.

C. Moistening Sod Bed: After unevenness in the soil surface has been corrected, lightly moisten the soil immediately prior to laying the sod.



D. Handling Sod: 1. Handle sod gently enough to avoid stretching or tearing pieces. 2. Carry sod pieces rolled or folded. 3. Do not carry sod pieces by one end.

E. Laying Sod: 1. Lay the first row of sod in a straight line, with subsequent rows parallel to and tightly

against each other, with no spaces between strips. 2. Stagger joints so none of the adjacent pieces align. 3. Do not stretch or overlap sod. 4. Butt joints tightly to eliminate gaps without stretching sod. 5. Use a sharp knife to cut sod to fit angles and curves. 6. Avoid installing small sod strips at edges. 7. Water completed sections lightly during installation to keep moist before post installation

irrigation of entire area. 8. Do not repeatedly walk or kneel directly on sod during installation to avoid indentations

and air pockets. 9. When necessary to walk on sod during installation, lay down minimum 3/4-inch thick

plywood to protect areas to be walked on. 10. Remove protection plywood as soon as possible to avoid smothering sod.

F. Tamping and Rolling Sod: 1. Thoroughly tamp and roll sod with a 200-pound water-ballast roller to make contact with

sod bed. 2. Roll each entire section of completed sod.

G. Watering: Thoroughly water sod immediately after installation to wet the underside of the new sod pad and the soil immediately below to a depth of 6 inches.

3.4 PROTECTION

A. Sod Damage and Excessive Compaction: 1. Restrict vehicular and foot traffic from new sod for 4 weeks after installation. 2. After 4 weeks, do not allow equipment, vehicular, or foot traffic on sodded areas, except

for lawn mowers and landscape maintenance personnel.

END OF SECTION


EARVIN MAGIC JOHNSON PARK – PHASE 1A LANDSCAPE PLANTING LOS ANGELES, CA 32 90 00-1 COUNTY OF LOS ANGELES COMMUNITY DEVELOPMENT COMMISSION AHBE PROJECT NO. 116030.01 AHBE

SECTION 32 93 00 LANDSCAPE PLANTING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Trees. 2. Shrubs. 3. Ground Cover. 4. Mulch. 5. Tree Stakes. 6. Root Barrier.

B. Related Sections: 1. Section 32 01 30: Operation and Maintenance of Landscape Site Improvements. 2. Section 32 80 00: Landscape Irrigation. 3. Section 32 91 13: Soil Preparation. 4. Section 32 91 19: Landscape Grading 5. Section 32 92 19: Seeding 6. Section 32 92 22: Hydroseeding 7. Section 32 92 23: Sodding 8. Section 32 93 01: Temporary Landscape Planting 9. Section 32 93 50: Palm Planting

1.2 REFERENCES

A. ANSI — American National Standards Institute: Z60.1 — American Standard for Nursery Stock, Current Edition.

B. ICBN — International Code of Botanical Nomenclature.

C. ICNCP — International Code of Nomenclature of Cultivated Plants.

D. ASTM — American Society for Testing Materials: D 1557 — Test Method for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort.

E. The New Sunset Western Garden Book: The Ultimate Gardening Guide; 9th Edition.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Plant Height: Measurement of main body height, not measurement to top branch tip.

B. Plant Spread: Measurement of main body diameter, not measurement from branch tip to tip.

C. Caliper: Trunk diameter measured at a point 6 inches above natural ground surface for trees up to 4 inches in caliper, and measured at a point 12 inches above natural ground surface for trees over 4 inches in caliper.



D. Acceptance, Acceptable, or Accepted: Acceptance by the Landscape Architect in writing.

E. Excessive Compaction: Planting area soil compaction greater than 75 percent of maximum dry density as determined by ASTM D 1557.


A. Submit in accordance with General Conditions.

B. Product Data: 1. Tree Ties. 2. Root Barrier. 3. Wood Pole Tree Stakes.

C. Samples: 1. Mulch — 1/2-pound bag. 2. Tree Tie — 1 tie. 3. Bird Protection Netting - 36” X 36” min.


A. Plant Material Location Data: 1. At 60 days after award of contract submit of plant material location data. 2. Quantities and sizes of each plant material type at each nursery or other place of

growth. 3. Address, phone number, and contact person for each nursery or other place of growth.

B. Plant Material Photographs: 1. At 15 days after material location submittal data submit three color photographs each of

representative plants of each type of plant material. 2. Include a scale object in each photograph such as a tape measure or person.


A. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Meet requirements of applicable laws, codes, and regulations required by authorities

having jurisdiction over Work. 2. Provide for inspections and permits required by federal, state and local authorities in

furnishing, transporting, and installing materials.

B. Tree Staking System Mock-Up: 1. Prepare mock-up of wood pole staking system. 2. Construct mock-up using specified materials. 3. Accepted mock-up shall be project standard by which Work will be judged.


A. Handling Plants: 1. Do not lift or handle container plants by tops, stems or trunks. 2. Do not bind or handle plants with wire or rope. 3. Pad trunk and branches where hoisting cables or straps contact.



B. Digging Plants: Dig ball and burlap plants with firm, natural balls of earth of diameter meeting or exceeding requirements of ANSI Z60.1 and of sufficient depth as required to include the fibrous and feeding roots.

C. Plant Storage Prior to Installation: 1. Protect plant root balls from sun and drying winds. 2. Keep root balls moist and provide sufficient irrigation to maintain plant vigor and health. 3. Keep sun-sensitive plants shaded. 4. Anchor plants to prevent damage from strong winds.

D. Packaged Materials: 1. Deliver in original unopened factory containers with original labels intact and legible

indicating the guaranteed chemical analysis. 2. Meet manufacturer’s requirements for storage and protection of materials on-site.

E. Purchase Documentation: Fertilizer Purchase and Delivery Invoices.

1.8 SITE CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Requirements: Protect plant material being stored on site from sun and drying winds.

B. Existing Conditions: 1. Prior to Work commencement, review and clearly mark in field horizontal and vertical

locations of public existing underground utilities and structures with respective utility companies.

2. Prior to Work commencement, review and clearly mark in field horizontal and vertical locations of private underground utilities and structures with the Owner’s Representative.

1.9 WARRANTY

A. Warranty Period: Warrant that plant material will be healthy and in vigorous, flourishing condition of active growth one year from date of Final Completion.

B. Delays: Delays in completion of planting operations which extend the planting into more than one planting season shall extend the Warranty Period correspondingly.

C. Condition of Plants: Plants shall be free of dead or dying branches and branch tips, with foliage of a normal density, size and color.

D. Incorrect Materials: 1. During Warranty Period, replace at no additional cost to the Owner, plants revealed as

being untrue to name. 2. Provide replacements of a size and quality to match the planted materials at the time the

mistake is discovered.

1.10 REPLACEMENTS

A. Failed Materials:



1. As soon as weather and seasonal conditions permit, replace at no additional cost to the Owner, dead plants and plants not in a vigorous, thriving condition, as determined by the Owner’s Arborist during and at the end of Warranty Period.

2. Repair and/or replace at no cost to the Owner all plant materials exhibiting conditions which are determined as unacceptable to the Landscape Architect due to workmanship by the Contractor.

3. Closely match replacements to adjacent specimens of the same species. 4. Contractor shall be held responsible for a maximum of two (2) replacements for each

failed tree, shrub, and vine, and same area of groundcover planting after final acceptance during warranty period.

5. Apply requirements of this Section to replacements.

1.11 MAINTENANCE

A. Operation and Maintenance of Landscape Site Improvements: Refer to Section 32 01 30.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS AND SUPPLIERS

A. Mulch: 1. Forest Floor 0-2” by Aguinaga Fertilizer Company, (949) 786-9558 2. Or approved equal.

B. Soil Amendments: See Section 32 91 13: Soil Preparation.

C. Slow Release Plant Fertilizer Packets (non-native planting only): 1. Materials:

a. Each packet (10 grams weight) shall contain a blend of 16% total nitrogen, 6% available phosphoric acid, and 8% soluble potash plus minor nutrients.

b. The nitrogen, phosphorous, and potassium shall be coated with a polyurethane coating to provide 15.69% coated slow release nitrogen, 5.09% coated slow release available phosphate, and 6.8% slowly available soluble potash.

c. Slow release fertilizer planting packets shall be planted with container plants and shall be buried below the container plants so that their nutrients are available only to the plants and not weedy seedlings at the soil surface.

2. Manufacturers: 1) Reforestation Technologies Inc., 5355 Monterey Frontage Rd, Gilroy, CA

95020, (800) 784-4769 2) The Planting Tree, (855) 541-7526; www.theplantingtree.com 3) A.M. Leonard, 241 Fox Drive, Piqua, OH; (800) 543-8955

D. Compost – see Section 32 92 19 – Seeding.

E. Root Barrier: 1. Deep Root Partners, L.P., San Francisco, CA; (800) 458-7668; www.deeproot.com. 2. Century Products, Anaheim, CA; (714) 632-7083; www.centuryrootbarrier.com 3. Or approved equal.



2.2 SUBSTITUTIONS

A. Plant Material: 1. Accepted substitute plants shall be true to species and variety and shall meet

requirements of this Section, except that plants larger than specified may be used, if accepted by the Landscape Architect, and at no additional cost to the Owner.

2. All plant material substitution requests shall be made in writing for unavailable plant material. Contractor shall provide list of all vendors contacted in search for plant material that is unavailable.

2.3 SLOW RELEASE FERTILIZER (NON-NATIVE PLANTING ONLY)

A. Based on soil analysis need and following dispersal of Slow Release Plant Fertilizer Packets, a 90-day slow release fertilizer shall be added to planting areas. Blend 3 lbs. per cubic yard of site soil backfill. It should have a guaranteed analysis of 15-9-12 or as deemed appropriate by the Landscape Architect.

B. Longevity at 70 degrees Fahrenheit shall be between 3 and 4 months. Must meet or exceed the following:

1. Guaranteed Analysis

a. Total Nitrogen (N) – 15% b. Ammoniacal Nitrogen – 8.4% c. Nitrate Nitrogen – 6.6% d. Available Phosphate – 9% e. Solvable Potash – 12% f. Magnesium – 1.3% g. Water Soluble Magnesium Sulfur - .9% h. Combined Sulfur – 5.9% i. Boron - .02% j. Copper - .05% k. Iron - .46% l. Water Soluble Iron - .09% m. Cheated Iron - .01% n. Manganese (Total_ - .06% o. Molybdenum - .02% p. Zinc - .05% q. Water Soluble Zinc - .019%

2.4 PLANT MATERIALS

A. General Plant Requirements: 1. Growing Practices: Nursery grown in accordance with best horticultural industry

practices. 2. Nomenclature: Plant nomenclature shall meet requirements of ICBN and ICNCP. 3. Climatic Growing Conditions: Grown under climatic conditions similar to those of project

for at least two years unless otherwise accepted by the Landscape Architect. 4. Container Growth Limitations: Container stock excluding annuals shall have been

grown in the containers in which delivered for at least six months, but not over two years.

5. Root Ball Size: Meet or exceed requirements of ANSI Z60.1.



6. Branching: Structurally strong, able to stand upright without stakes or guys on a windless day; exceptionally heavy, symmetrical, tightly knit, so trained or favored in development and appearance as to be superior in form, number of branches, compactness and symmetry.

7. Vigor: Sound, healthy and vigorous, well branched and densely foliated when in leaf. 8. Disease and Pests: Free of disease, insect pests, eggs, or larvae. 9. Root System: Healthy well-developed root systems, free of kinked, circling, girdling and

center roots, root-bound condition and cracked or broken root balls. 10. Plant Size: Measure plants when branches are in their normal upright position. 11. Pruning: Do not prune, thin or shape plants before delivery without acceptance by the

Landscape Architect. 12. Unacceptable Conditions: Multiple leaders, unless specified, damaged or crooked

leaders, bark abrasions, sunscald, disfiguring knots, or fresh cuts of limbs over 3/4-inch diameter which have not completely callused.

2.5 ACCESSORIES

A. Water: Clean, fresh, potable and free of toxic elements.

B. Anti-Desiccant: Commercially available spray protective coating, designed to reduce plant transpiration loss, which produces a moisture retarding barrier not removable by rain or snow.

C. Wood Pole Tree Stakes: Pine round poles with 10-inch tapered driving point and chamfered top, un-treated pine or fir.

D. Tree Ties: 1. Original Treestrap Biodegradeable Cotton (800) 360-3584 2. Egmont Jolly Garden Tree Tie, www.egmontcommercial.co.nz, or approved equal.

E. Bolts, Lock Washers and Nuts: Hot-dip galvanized steel.

F. Bird Protection Netting: Nylon or Plastic, ¾” Mesh

2.6 MIXES

A. Plant Pit Backfill Mix: Refer to Section 32 91 13: Soil Preparation.


A. Advanced Tree Procurement: 1. Within 30 days of award of Contract, notify Landscape Architect in writing of the

availability or lack thereof of the specified plant material. 2. Procure trees and arrange for contract growing as required to ensure that plant material

is available in the quantities and sizes specified, and of the quality specified, at time of installation.

3. Verify plant branching requirements with Landscape Architect prior to contract growing. 4. Landscape Architect will review advanced procured trees prior to initial purchase and at

end of the first growing season. 5. Prior to delivery of advanced procured plant material to site, coordinate and schedule a

final review of the plant material at the place of growth.



6. Review and acceptance of the advance-procured plant material at the place of growth does not cancel the right of the Landscape Architect to reject plant material at the site, if damage or unacceptable conditions are found that were not detected at the place of growth.

B. Plant Material Review and Tagging: 1. Trees will be reviewed, photographed and tagged using irremovable tags by the

Landscape Architect at the nursery, or other place of growth prior to delivery of trees to site.

2. At the Landscape Architect’s discretion, shrubs may or may not be reviewed, photographed, and tagged by the Landscape Architect at the nursery or other place of growth.

3. Tagging of plant material at the nursery or place of growth does not affect the right of the Landscape Architect to reject plant material at the site, if damage or unacceptable conditions are found that were not detected at the nursery, place of growth, or in the submitted photographs.

4. All trees delivered that do not bear the Landscape Architect’s tags shall promptly be rejected and removed from the job site. Replacement for the material that is rejected shall be sourced from a different supplier.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. General: Examine site and verify that conditions are suitable to receive Work and that no defects or errors are present which would cause defective installation of products or cause latent defects in workmanship and function.

B. Fine Grading and Soil Preparation: Verify that fine grading and soil preparation Work is complete.

C. Verification Surface Drainage: Verify positive surface drainage of planted areas.

D. Notification: Before proceeding with Work, notify the Owner’s Representative in writing of unsuitable conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Protection of Existing Conditions: 1. Use every possible precaution to prevent damage to existing conditions to remain such

as structures, utilities, plant materials and walks on or adjacent to the site of the Work. 2. Provide barricades, fences or other barriers to protect existing conditions to remain from

damage during construction. 3. Use every possible precaution to prevent excessive compaction of planting area soil

within or adjacent to the areas of Work. 4. Do not store materials or equipment, permit burning, or operate or park equipment under

the branches of existing plants to remain. 5. Submit written notification of damaged plants and structures to the Owner’s

Representative immediately.



3.3 SUBSURFACE OBSTRUCTIONS

A. Plant Pit Excavation: 1. If rock, underground utilities, structures, tree roots or other obstructions are encountered

in the excavation of plant pits, alternate locations may be accepted by the Landscape Architect.

2. Submit written notification of encountered obstructions to the Landscape Architect immediately.

B. Irrigation Piping: Reroute around the plant root ball.

C. Irrigation Valves: Re install outside of hedge line and/or plant rootball.

3.4 DRAINAGE TEST OF PLANTING PITS

A. Testing: Immediately after completion of excavation, test drainage of plant pits by filling with water twice in succession. Give written notification of conditions permitting the retention of water in plant pits for more than twenty-four (24) hours.

B. Correction: Submit for acceptance a written proposal and cost estimate for the correction of poor drainage conditions before proceeding with planting.

C. Irrigation Valves: Re-install outside of hedge line and/or plant rootball.

3.5 PRE-PLANT WEED CONTROL

A. Refer to Section 32 91 13: Soil Preparation.

3.6 PLANT LAYOUT

A. Trees: 1. Stake location of trees where indicated on Drawings. 2. Scale tree locations where no dimensions are given. 3. Drive a 3-foot long wood lath stake at each tree location and mark each tree type with

different color survey tape. 4. Contact the Landscape Architect to review locations in field prior to excavating plant pits

and installing irrigation. 5. Do not excavate plant pits or install irrigation until the Landscape Architect has accepted

plant locations.

B. Planting Bed Limits for Each Type of Shrub: 1. Spray paint on the ground for the individual shrub mass bed type limits for review of the

planting bed line curvature. 2. Scale planting bed limits from planting Drawings where no dimensions are given. 3. Contact Landscape Architect to review bed outlines in field prior to excavating plant pits

and installing irrigation. 4. Do not excavate plant pits or install irrigation until the Landscape Architect has accepted

plant locations.



3.7 EXCAVATION OF TREE AND SHRUB PLANT PITS

A. Equipment: 1. Excavate square pits with a back-hoe or hand digging. 2. Do not use an auger.

B. Dimensions: 1. Where not indicated on the Drawings, excavate plant pits to a depth equal to the root

ball height minus the amount needed to allow for settlement and to install the root balls at the specified elevation relative to adjacent finished grade.

2. Install top of plant root balls 1 inch above adjacent finished grade, or higher if required to allow settlement, except where indicated otherwise.

3. Excavate pits to a diameter which is 2 times the root ball diameter, except where indicated otherwise on the Drawings, and except for Palm trees.

4. Center plant pits on plant locations where possible. 5. Where plant pits cannot be excavated to specified dimensions nor centered on plants

due to obstructions such as paving, walls, curbs, or other structures excavate pits in directions without obstructions until pit volume equals the specified plant pit volume, except where indicated otherwise.

6. Do not undercut adjacent obstructions unless accepted by the Landscape Architect. 7. Excavate plant pit sides along adjacent elements such as paving, walls, curbs, and other

structures at a 45 degree angle sloping away from the bottom surfaces of the adjacent elements, except where indicated otherwise.

3.8 PLANTING AND BACKFILL OPERATIONS FOR TREES, SHRUBS, AND GROUNDCOVERS

A. Protection of Plants Prior to Installation: 1. Protect plant root balls from sun or drying winds. 2. Keep root balls of plants that cannot be planted immediately upon delivery in the shade,

well-protected and well-watered.

B. Removal of Containers: 1. Remove canned stock carefully after cans have been cut on two sides with accepted

cutter. 2. Do not use spade to cut containers.

C. Root Ball Scarification: 1. After removing plant from container, scarify side of root ball to prevent root-bound

condition. 2. Loosen root ball soil surface to depth of 1/8-inch to 1/4-inch without damaging roots or

breaking root ball.

D. Cutting Circling Roots: 1. If circling roots are encountered at root ball sides, notify the Landscape Architect for field

review. 2. Upon the Landscape Architect’s acceptance, cut roots on 4 sides of root ball 90 degrees

apart at no additional cost to the Owner. 3. Use a 4-inch wide sharp straight blade. 4. Cut roots by pushing spade or knife down sides of root ball 90 degrees to root ball

surface and 2 inches into root ball. 5. Keep spade or knife sharp to cut roots cleanly.



E. Slow Release Plant Fertilizer Packet Application to Container Plants: 1. Add slow release fertilizer in planting packets with container plants to aid in

establishment. 2. Bury the packets below the container plant, then proceed and finish planting of container

plant.

F. Planting in Wetland Zone ‘A’ - Emergent and Wetland Zone ‘B’ - Inundation Tolerant Areas: 1. If areas are inundated prior to planting, water drawdown should be scheduled in order to

the plant the areas. 2. Areas where drawdown is not possible should be planted only on the edges of standing

water, out to a 6-8 inch depth. 3. Set plants in planting holes so that the crown of the root ball is at finish grade. 4. Allow for a minimum of a 90 day establishment period prior to allowing inundation for

stormwater. 5. Hand-water or provide temporary irrigation to keep plants moist during establishment

period prior to inundation by stormwater. 6. Do not apply mulch within and around Emergent and Inundation Tolerant Wetland

Areas.

G. Plant Placement Non-Wetland Areas: 1. Handling plant carefully, set plant root ball on pit bottom centered on accepted horizontal

location. 2. Install plant root ball vertically so that top of root ball is 1/2” -1” above adjacent finished

grade after settlement except where indicated otherwise.

H. Removal of Root Ball Wrapping Materials: Remove and dispose of burlap, nylon cord, wire baskets, twine and other materials prior to backfilling.

I. Soil Mix Placement: 1. Place mix carefully as not to damage the plant root ball, trunk, branches, or foliage. 2. Fill area or pit until top of backfill mix is even with top of root ball.

J. Backfill and Soil Mix Settlement: 1. After backfill mix has dried for 2 days, settle mix by watering evenly. 2. Fill settled backfill mix areas with additional backfill mix as required to bring it even with

top of root ball, drench added backfill mix with water and allow to dry for 2 days. 3. Continue filling settled areas and drenching with soil-conditioner water mix until

settlement stops. 4. Do not install backfill mix over conditioned backfill mix without drenching it with soil-

conditioner water mix.

K. Watering Basins: 1. A watering basin shall be provided around each plant from 18-24 inches in diameter. 2. Watering basins shall be filled with water after planting at least twice.

L. Settled Plant Adjustment: Raise plant root balls which settle so that top of root balls are at the specified elevation relative to adjacent finished grade.



3.9 GROUNDCOVER PLANTING (ROOTED CUTTINGS)

A. Top-dress Fertilizer: Immediately after completion of planting, apply fertilizer at the rate of 5 pounds per 1,000 square feet.

B. Watering: Immediately water groundcover areas after fertilizer application to wash fertilizers from leaves of plants.

3.10 WOOD POLE TREE STAKING SYSTEM

A. Orientation: 1. Locate stakes in a line with trunk of tree, as close to the main trunk as possible without

penetrating root ball. 2. Locate line of stakes and trunk perpendicular to the prevailing wind direction.

B. Stake Depth: 1. Drive stakes into soil to minimum 12 inches below the root-ball bottom. 2. Pre-drill pilot holes 1/2 diameter of stake if required to drive stakes in hard soil

conditions.

C. Tying Trees to Stakes Trees: 1. Refer to detail on Drawings. 2. Tie ends of ties with double-back locking configuration as recommended by the tie

manufacturer.

3.11 ROOT BALL ANCHOR SYSTEMS

A. Trees Requiring Root Ball Anchor System Kits: Install root ball anchor systems on the trees, in lieu of tree stake systems.

B. Root Ball Anchor Kit Manufacturer’s Requirements: Install in accordance with the manufacturer’s current printed installation instructions.

3.12 WOOD CHIP MULCH INSTALLATION

A. Depth: 1. Install a uniform 3-inch minimum depth mulch layer within plant watering basins and

shrub areas except where indicated otherwise. 2. Install uniform 2-inch depth mulch layer over ground cover areas, except at rooted

cuttings.

B. Surface: Rake mulch surface smooth.

C. Woody Plant Stems: 1. Slope mulch away 2” from woody plant stems so that mulch does not touch stems. 2. Within the Coastal Sage Area, the outside edge of mulch ring shall be 2’ maximum from

center of woody plant stems.



D. Mulch shall not be applied within Hand-Seeded Wildflower Mix (Coastal Sage Area), hydroseeded South Lake Island (California Coastal Native Wildflower Mix) or in Emergent or Inundated Wetland Areas.

3.13 BIRD PROTECTION NETTING

A. Install protection netting over Wetland Zones “A” and “B” plantings.

B. Coverage: Netting must cover all plants in designated area.

C. Support: Install temporary stakes in intervals that allow the netting to be have a minimum of 3” clearance above the top of the plants.

D. Protection shall be in place immediately after planting until after plant establishment.

END OF SECTION


EARVIN MAGIC JOHNSON PARK – PHASE 1A TEMPORARY LANDSCAPE PLANTING LOS ANGELES, CA 32 90 01-1 COUNTY OF LOS ANGELES COMMUNITY DEVELOPMENT COMMISSION AHBE PROJECT NO. 116030.01 AHBE

SECTION 32 93 01 TEMPORARY LANDSCAPE PLANTING

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. The requirements of the “General Conditions of the Contract” and of Division 1, “General Requirements”, shall apply to all work of this Section with the same force and effect as though repeated in full herein.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Shrubs. 2. Ground Cover.

B. Related Sections: 1. Section 32 01 30: Operation and Maintenance of Site Improvements. 2. Section 32 80 00: Landscape Irrigation. 3. Section 32 91 13: Soil Preparation. 4. Section 32 91 19: Landscape Grading 5. Section 32 92 19: Seeding 6. Section 32 92 22: Hydroseeding 7. Section 32 93 00: Landscape Planting

1.3 REFERENCES

A. ANSI — American National Standards Institute: Z60.1 — American Standard for Nursery Stock, Current Edition.

B. ICBN — International Code of Botanical Nomenclature.

C. ICNCP — International Code of Nomenclature of Cultivated Plants.

D. ASTM — American Society for Testing Materials: D 1557 — Test Method for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort.

E. The New Sunset Western Garden Book: The Ultimate Gardening Guide; 9th Edition.

1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. Plant Height: Measurement of main body height, not measurement to top branch tip.

B. Plant Spread: Measurement of main body diameter, not measurement from branch tip to tip.

C. Acceptance, Acceptable, or Accepted: Acceptance by the Landscape Architect in writing.



D. Excessive Compaction: Planting area soil compaction greater than 75 percent of maximum dry density as determined by ASTM D 1557.


A. Refer to Section 32 93 00 – Landscape Planting.


A. Plant Material Location Data: 1. At 10 days after award of contract submit plant material location data, quantities and

sizes of each plant material type at each nursery or other place of growth, address, phone number, and contact person for each nursery or other place of growth.

B. Plant Material Photographs: 1. At 5 days after material location submittal data submit one color photographs each of

representative plants of each type of plant material. 2. Include a scale object in each photograph such as a tape measure or person.





1.9 SITE CONDITIONS


1.10 REPLACEMENTS

A. Failed Materials: 1. As soon as plant failure is observed, replace at no additional cost to the Owner, dead

plants and plants not in a vigorous, thriving condition, as determined by the Landscape Architect during Temporary Landscape Planting Period.

2. Repair and/or replace at no cost to the Owner all plant materials exhibiting conditions which are determined as unacceptable to the Landscape Architect due to workmanship by the Contractor.

3. Replacement plant species to be determined and approved by the Landscape Architect. 4. Contractor shall be held responsible for a maximum of two (2) replacements for each

failed tree, shrub, and vine, and same area of groundcover planting after final acceptance during warranty period.

5. Apply requirements of this Section to replacements.

1.11 MAINTENANCE

A. Operation and Maintenance of Site Improvements: Refer to Section 32 01 30.



B. Scheduled Observations – Contractor to submit a schedule of observations with Landscape Architect and Owner representative for Temporary Landscape Planting within 15 days of award of contract. 1. Observations should be scheduled at a minimum of one visit per month.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.12 MANUFACTURERS AND SUPPLIERS


2.2 SUBSTITUTIONS

A. Plant Material: 1. Accepted substitute plants shall be true to species and variety and shall meet

requirements of this Section, except that plants larger than specified may be used, if accepted by the Landscape Architect, and at no additional cost to the Owner.

2. All plant material substitution requests shall be made in writing for unavailable plant material. Contractor shall provide list of all vendors contacted in search for plant material that is unavailable.

2.3 PLANT MATERIALS


2.4 ACCESSORIES


2.5 MIXES

A. Plant Pit Backfill Mix: Refer to Section 32 91 13: Soil Preparation.

B. Lake Shore Soil Mix: Refer to Section 32 91 13: Soil Preparation.


A. Plant Material Review: 1. At the Landscape Architect’s discretion, shrubs may or may not be reviewed,

photographed, and tagged by the Landscape Architect at the nursery or other place of growth.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION




3.2 PREPARATION


3.3 SUBSURFACE OBSTRUCTIONS


3.4 DRAINAGE TEST OF PLANTING PITS/OBSTRUCTIONS


3.5 PRE-PLANT WEED CONTROL

A. Refer to Section 32 91 13: Soil Preparation.

3.6 PLANT LAYOUT


3.7 EXCAVATION OF SHRUB PLANT PITS


3.8 PLANTING AND BACKFILL OPERATIONS FOR SHRUBS, AND GROUNDCOVERS


3.9 GROUNDCOVER PLANTING (ROOTED CUTTINGS)


END OF SECTION


EARVIN MAGIC JOHNSON PARK – PHASE 1A PALM PLANTING LOS ANGELES, CA 32 93 50-1 COUNTY OF LOS ANGELES COMMUNITY DEVELOPMENT COMMISSION AHBE PROJECT NO. 116030.01 AHBE

SECTION 32 93 50 PALM PLANTING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Furnish material, equipment, and services necessary to provide palm tree planting, relocation, or removal, as specified.

B. Definition: The word Architect as used herein shall refer to the Landscape Architect or the Owner's authorized representative.

1.2 UNIT PRICES

A. Submit unit prices for additions to or deductions from the work. These prices will be used in computing net additions and/or net deductions, and shall include charges for incidental expenses, supervisions, taxes, insurance, overhead and profit.

B. Failure to submit full schedule of unit prices at the time of submitting the base bid is understood to be a valid reason for the Owner to reject this bid.

1.3 GUARANTEE

A. Guarantee newly planted palm trees for a period of two years following planting and acceptance by Owner.

B. During the guarantee period, material found dead or not in a satisfactory growth condition shall be removed from the site. These trees and disturbed improvements shall be replaced at no expense to the Owner with the same variety and size as originally designated palms, and replacements shall be guaranteed for a period of two (2) years from time of planting to the satisfaction of the Owner.

1.4 INSPECTIONS AND PERMITS

A. Inspections: The Contractor shall contact palm tree expert and/or Architect a minimum of seven working days in advance to schedule required inspections. Inspections are required as follows: 1. Observation by Landscape Architect: Landscape Architect will check palms for height,

girth, and overall form in meeting design intent. a. This observation and approval does not constitute a review of the palm's health,

vigor, and required pest-free state, for which the Contractor is solely responsible. 2. Health Inspection for Date Palms by palm tree expert, for disease prior to their

preparation for removal from growing site. a. Contractor shall contact, schedule, and pay for inspection. b. The inspection will take place from ground level with field glasses. c. If disease is suspected, the Palm expert can request a man lift or close inspection

of palm crown. The Contractor will provide the man lift as required at no additional cost to Owner.

d. Contractor shall submit copy of the Palm report prior to shipping palms to site. Inspection of replacement palms shall be included at this time.



3. Inspection and approval of new tree locations prior to digging pits. 4. Inspection of palm planting operations. 5. Inspection for final acceptance and release from maintenance following completion of

the maintenance period.

B. Permits: Contractor is responsible for obtaining permits necessary to complete and install work as specified herein.

C. Observations may be waived or combined at the discretion of the Architect.

1.5 PROTECTION AND RESTORATION OF EXISTING IMPROVEMENTS

A. Exercise extreme care in excavating for planting or working near existing utilities or irrigation systems. Contractor shall be responsible for damage to utilities that are cause by his operations or neglect. Check existing utility drawings and as-built plans for existing utility and irrigation locations. Before excavating, call Underground Service Alert, (800) 422-4133

1.6 PROJECT SEQUENCE

A. Locate and tag palm trees for inspection and approval by Landscape Architect for design intent. 1. Date Palms: Locate and tag palm trees for inspection and approval by (1) palm tree

expert for disease and (2) by Architect for design intent.

B. Schedule delivery dates with Owner. See Part 3 of this Specification for acceptable planting dates.

C. Plant palm trees as specified.

D. Provide guarantee statements and final inspection approval.

1.7 JOB CONDITIONS

A. Plant only when weather and soil conditions are suitable in accordance with locally accepted practice.

1.8 SAMPLES AND TESTS

A. Landscape Architect reserves the right to take and analyze samples of materials for conformity to specifications at any time. Contractor shall furnish samples upon request by Landscape Architect. Immediately remove rejected materials from the site (at Contractor's expense). Contractor shall pay cost of testing of materials not meeting specifications.

1.9 TREE TAGS

A. Tree tags shall be as approved by the Owner's authorized representative.



PART 2 - MATERIALS

2.1 PALM TREES

A. Palms collected for planting shall be grown under climatic conditions similar to those in locality of project. 1. Submit documentation and permits (if required) that source of palm trees is approved. 2. It is the Contractor's responsibility to obtain palms from an approved source and to

replace or repair damage from palm tree removal.

B. Palms must be tagged, inspected, and approved per Section 1.04, above, prior to shipment. Contractor shall assume full responsibility for costs incurred for failure to follow these procedures.

2.2 PALM BACKFILL SAND

A. The backfill material shall consist of washed plaster sand. 1. Do not mix soil with the sand. 2. Do not use other types of sand such as fill sand.

2.3 PALM TREE VENT

A. 4” ID single-wall, corrugated, polyethylene, perforated (slots) drain pipe with soil separator sock. ADS-401 with sock, or equal.

B. 4” round PVC drain grate. Color: to be selected.

2.4 FERTILIZER

A. Palm specific, water-soluble fertilizer with NPK ratio of 3-1-2, or equal.

B. Fertilizer spikes: NPK of 6-0-6. Lutz Palm Maintenance Spikes # 30193. Lutz Corporation (800) 203-7740.

2.5 PEST CONTROL

A. Cleary’s 3336

B. Subdue

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 ACCEPTABLE PLANTING TIME

A. Plant date palms during the following months: 1. Optimal planting period: May through September. 2. Acceptable planting months, if soil is warm: March and April. Submit to Landscape

Architect for March/April planting approval. 3. Do not plant October through February, as roots will not grow when soil temperature is

cool.



3.2 PREPARATION FOR MOVING PALMS

A. Fronds: 1. Dead fronds shall be removed and the entire trunk skinned clean to the height of green

fronds. Care shall be taken to prevent injury to the trunk of the tree. Green fronds below a horizontal position shall be neatly cut off leaving a 4-inch stub.

2. Remaining fronds above horizontal shall be lifted up and tied together around the crown in an upright position.

3. Due caution shall be taken not to bind or injure the crown. 4. Use a lightweight rope or cord not less than 1/4 inch in diameter to tie up the fronds; wire

will not be permitted. 5. After tying, the tips of the fronds shall be hedged off above the crown approximately 1/3

to 1/2 of the frond length. 6. De-fronding and tying work shall be completed prior to digging the rootball.

B. Rootball: When digging out the rootball, no excavation shall be done closer than 24 inches to the trunk at ground level. The excavation shall extend below the major root system to a minimum depth of 6 feet. The bottom of the rootball shall be cut off square and perpendicular to the trunk below the major root system. Under no conditions shall the Contractor cut down the size of the rootball in width or depth.

C. Moving palm: 1. Do not freefall, roll, or abuse the tree or put a strain the crown. 2. Use protective device around the trunk of the tree while lifting and relocating so as not to

scar or skin the trunk. This device shall consist of either a rubber or leather sling made out of timbers sufficiently sized to withstand cable/choker pressure.

3. The rootball shall be kept moist and shaded. Do not ball out the trees and lay on the ground with rootball left exposed to direct sunlight and air.

4. Tree shall be planted within 24 hours of digging.

3.3 PLANTING OF PALMS

A. Protect planting areas from excessive compaction when trucking plants or other material to the planting site.

B. Excavated holes shall have vertical sides with roughened surfaces and shall be of a size that is at least 12-inches larger in diameter and 6-inches deeper than the rootball. 1. Soil from the planting holes that are not used on site as backfill or in establishing the

final grades shall be removed from the site.

C. Install sand-filled drainage sump, 12-inches in diameter by 6-feet deep, in each pit.

D. Center palms in pit or trench. Align palms per plans. Set palm plumb and hold rigidly in position until sand has been tamped firmly around rootball.

E. Plant at original grade. Do not bury trunk below grade unless specified in plans.

F. Install ventilation system for rootball, if specified.

G. Install linear root control barrier, 6-foot length, minimum, where palm rootball is within 12-inches of pavement.



H. Install aeration vent per Drawings.

I. Backfill with specified sand.

J. Phoenix palms: drench soil with 15-20 gallons of Cleary’s 336 and Subdue per tree. Application of chemicals is to be performed by a professional pesticide applicator.

K. Drive fertilizer spikes at rootball perimeter. Number of spikes per tree varies based on trunk diameter: follow manufacturer’s recommended quantity and spacing.

3.4 MAINTENANCE

A. The Contractor will be responsible for maintenance and guarantee of new palms. Maintenance includes fertilizing, water management and palm tree pruning. 1. Untie palm fronds after planting, if twine has not broken, according to the following

schedule: a. Date palms: 30 days

2. Fertilizer: a. Fertilize at ½ of the standard rate at time of planting. b. After six weeks in summer (in winter, wait until the soil warms), use a light

application of specified fertilizer. c. Repeat at 2-3 week intervals during summer maintenance period.

3. Pest control: a. Drench soil with Cleary’s 3336 and Subdue 30 days after planting, and again 45

days later. 4. Pruning

a. Prune with a reciprocal saw. Chain saws will not be allowed. b. Sterilize saw blades between each tree with 50% ho usehold bleach and 50%

water for 10 minutes. c. Pruning will be done to maintain a neat appearance as approved by the

Landscape Architect. d. Submit proposed pruning schedule to the Landscape Architect for approval.

3.5 CLEANUP

A. The Contractor shall legally dispose of (off site) excess soil and debris from the excavation and planting work. The site shall be left neat and clean to the satisfaction of the Owner.

END OF SECTION

BID SET SUBMITTAL

July 26, 2018

EARVIN MAGIC JOHNSON PARK – PHASE 1A WATER SYSTEM LOS ANGELES, CA 33 11 00-1 COUNTY OF LOS ANGELES COMMUNITY DEVELOPMENT COMMISSION AHBE PROJECT NO. 116030.01 CWE

SECTION 33 11 00

WATER SYSTEM

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Construction of on-site water service facilities and appurtenances, including the installation and testing of water system and services indicated for domestic water services. The Contractor shall furnish and install pressure reducing valves, double check detectors, reduced pressure backflow preventers, blowoffs, air release valves, gate valves and appurtenances, in accordance with the Governing Water District.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. Geotechnical Report: 1. Geotechnical investigation as been prepared under the direction of the Owner.

Investigation is hereby referenced as information for the work of this section. Engineer assumes no responsibility for conclusions the Contractor may draw, from information provided. The Contract Documents take precedence over recommendations that may be contained in the investigation and the contractor must obtain approval for any and all deviations from the Contract Documents. Copy of investigation is available at Engineer's office. Copy investigation is bound herein as a reference only.

B. Publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by the basic designation only. 1. Standard Specifications:

a. Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction (Latest Edition). b. CalTrans-Manual of Traffic Controls for Construction and Maintenance

Work Zones, Latest Edition. 2. Standard Drawings:

a. Standard Drawings, issued by Governing Water District, shall apply to the work to the extent referenced on plans.

b. Equivalent Materials List, Governing Water District Standard Specifications.

C. AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS (ASTM) 1. ASTM D1785 1999 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40, 80,

and 120 2. ASTM D2466 2001 (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fitting, Schedule 40 3. ASTM D2564 1996 Solvent Cements for Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Pipe

and Fittings 4. ASTM D2774 2001 Underground Installation of Thermoplastic Pressure Piping 5. ASTM D2855 1996 Making Solvent-Cemented Joints with Polyvinyl Chloride

(PVC) Pipe and Fittings 6. ASTM F402 1999 Safe Handling of Solvent Cements and Primers Used for

Joining Thermoplastic Pipe and Fittings

BID SET SUBMITTAL

July 26, 2018


D. AMERICAN WATER WORKS ASSOCIATION 1. AWWA C-900 1997 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe, and Fabricated

Fittings 4 in. through 12 in., for Water District 2. AWWA C-509 2001 Resilient-Seated Gate Valves for Water Supply Service 3. AWWA C-800 2001 Underground Services Line Valves and Fittings 4. AWWA M-23 2002 PVC Pipe-Design and Installation

E. UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES, INC. (UL) 1. UL 262 1994 Gate Valves for Fire Protection Service, Seventh Edition 2. UL 312 1993 Check Valves for Fire Protection Service Eight Edition 3. UL 789 1993 Indicator Posts for Fire Protection Service, Ninth Edition

F. UNI-BELL PLASTIC PIPE ASSOCIATION (UBPPA) 1. UBPPA UNl-B-8 1986 Direct Tapping of Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure

Water Pipe

1.3 SUBMIITTALS

A. Manufacturer's Catalog Data: 1. Pipe and Fittings. 2. Joints and Couplings. 3. Valves, including above-ground double check detector, post indicator valve

and gate valves, reduced pressure Back Flow Preventer. 4. Valve and Meter Boxes.

B. Manufacturer's standard drawings or catalog cuts.

C. Certificates of Compliance: 1. Pipe and Fittings. 2. Pipe Joint Materials. 3. Valves

D. Certificates shall attest that products meet the requirements of the Governing Water District and that tests set forth in each applicable referenced publication have been performed, whether specified in that publication to be mandatory or otherwise and that production control tests have been performed at the intervals or frequency specified in the publication. Other tests shall have been performed within 3 years of the date of submittal of certificates on the same type, class, grade, and size of material as is being provided for the project.


A. Delivery and Storage: 1. Inspect materials delivered to site for damage. Unload and store with

minimum handling. Store materials on site in enclosures or under protective covering. Store plastic piping, jointing materials under cover out of direct sunlight. Do not store materials directly on the ground. Keep inside of pipes and fittings free of dirt and debris.

B. Handling:

BID SET SUBMITTAL

July 26, 2018


1. Handle pipe, fittings, valves, hydrants, and other accessories in a manner to ensure delivery to the trench in sound undamaged condition. Carry, do not drag pipe to the trench. Store plastic piping, jointing materials that are not to be installed immediately, under cover out of direct sunlight.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 WATER SERVICE LINE MATERIALS

A. Piping Materials: 1. Plastic piping and fittings shall bear the seal of the National Sanitation

Foundation for potable water service. Plastic pipe and fittings shall be supplied from the same manufacturer and shall be in accordance with the Governing Water District's, "Equivalent Material List" contained in their standard specifications. a. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Piping Less Than Six Inches in

Diameter: SDR 14 with Class 200 pressure rating manufactured in accordance with AWWA Standard C900, unless otherwise noted. Rubber waterlock rings shall be supplies by pipe supplier.

b. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Piping Six to Twelve Inches in Diameter: SDR 18 with Class 150 pressure rating manufactured in accordance with AWWA standard C900, unless otherwise noted. Rubber water lockrings shall be supplied by pipe supplier.

2. Ductile Iron Piping (DIP): Ductile iron pipe shall be pressure Class 350 with Tyton joints unless otherwise noted on plans and manufactured in accordance with AWWA standard C151. Ductile iron pipe and fitting shall be supplied by the same manufacturer and shall be in accordance with the governing District's approved materials list contained in their standard specifications.

B. Valves and Valve Covers: 1. Gate Valves and Butterfly Valves:

a. Gate valves, including tapping valves, shall be resilient seat gate valves manufactured in accordance with AWWA standard C509.

b. Butterlly valves shall be manufactured in accordance with AWWA Standard C504. Both gate valves and butterfly valves shall be listed on Governing Water District's approved materials list.

2. Gate Valve Covers and Gate Cans: a. All gate valve covers shall be 8 inch diameter cast iron, having the letters

S.C.W. Co. and the word "Water" in raised letters on top. Gate material shall be 8 inch l.D. PVC pipe, schedule 40.

3. Post Indicator Valves, Double Detector Check Valves, Check Valves and reduced Pressure Backflow Preventers. Comply with the Governing Water District's approved material list.

C. Precast Meter Boxes and Vaults: 1. Comply with the Governing Water District's approved material list and the

standard drawings referenced on the plans.

D. Water Main Appurtenances:

BID SET SUBMITTAL

July 26, 2018


1. All water main appurtenances including, but riot limited to fire hydrants, water meters, fire department connection~. air and vacuum release valves, tapping sleeves, blow off assemblies, water services, brass fittings and iron fittings shall comply with the Governing Water District's approved materials list.

PART 3 EXECUTION ·

3.1 INSTALLATION OF PIPELINES

A. Installation of all water mains, appurtenances and water service shall conform to the Governing Water District's standard specifications.

B. The Contractor shall notify Underground Service Alert at 1-800-422-4133 at least two (2) days prior to starting work and shall coordinate all work with utility company representatives. The existence and locations of existing underground facilities indicated on the plans were obtained from a search of available records. The Contractor shall take precautionary measures to protect any existing facility indicated on the plans, and any other which is not of record or indicated on the plans.

C. Prior to commencing the work, the Contractor shall POTHOLE EXISTING UTILITIES at points of connection.

D. Contractor shall coordinate locations of stubouts from buildings with building plumbing Contractor.

E. Installation of Water Service Piping: 1. Location:

a. Connect water service piping to the building service where the building service has been installed. Where building service has not been installed, terminate water service lines approximately 5 feet from the building iine at the points indicated; such water service lines shall be closed with plugs or caps.

2. Service Line Connections to Water Mains: a. Domestic Service:

1) The Contractor shall be responsible to install the service lateral, 2" ball valve curb stop with PVC pack joint inlet and outlet per the Governing Water District's standard drawings set in a No. 3 Water meter box with extensions. The Contractor shall be responsible to continue water service piping from the 2" water stop to the building terminus as specified in Paragraph 3.1A. above.

b. Fire Sprinkler Service: 1) The Contractor shall be responsible to install fire service piping

from the connection at main to the building terminus as specified in Paragraph 3.1A. above, including installation of above-ground double check detector assembly, reduced pressure backflow preventer, post indicator valve, thrust blocks, and calculations, and fire department connection as indicated .

F. Special Requirements for Installation of Water Service Piping:

BID SET SUBMITTAL

July 26, 2018


1. Installation of Plastic Piping: a. Install pipe and fittings in accordance with Section 306-1.2, 306-1.2.13 of

the standard specifications and the applicable requirement of ASTM D2774 and ASTM D2855, unless otherwise specified. Handle solvent cements used to join plastic piping in accordance with ASTM F402.

1) Jointing: Make solvent-cemented joints for PVC plastic piping using the solvent cement previously specified for this material; assemble joints in accordance with ASTM D2855. Make plastic pipe joints to other pipe materials in accordance with the recommendations of the plastic pipe manufacturer. Make push-on joints in accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer.

2) Plastic Pipe Connections to Appurtenances: Connect plastic pipe service lines to corporation stops and gate valves in accordance with the recommendations of the plastic pipe manufacturer.

G. Pipe Anchorage: 1. Provide concrete thrust blocks for water mains and fire service laterals in

accordance with the Governing Water District's standards.

H. Trenching and Buried Warning Tape: 1. Perform earthwork operations in accordance with Section 31 23 17,

Trenching, including installation of buried warning tape.

I. Disinfection: 1. Flush and disinfect all new water lines including reclaimed water lines and

affected portions of existing potable water lines in accordance with AWWA C651.


A. Field Tests and Inspections: 1. The Contractor shall perform pipeline testing in accordance with Section 306-

1.4 of the standard specifications and the Governing Water District's. standard specifications.

2. The Contractor shall produce evidence, when required, that any item of work has been constructed in accordance with the drawings and specifications.

B. Testing Procedure: 1. Test water mains and water service lines in accordance with the applicable

specified standard. Test PVC plastic water service lines made with PVC plastic water main pipe in accordance with the requirements of UNI B3 for pressure and leakage tests. Test water service lines in accordance with applicable requirements of AWWA C600 for hydrostatic testing. No leakage will be allowed at plastic pipe joints.

C. Special Testing Requirements: 1. For pressure test, use a hydrostatic pressure 50 psi greater than the

maximum working pressure of the system, except that for those portions of the system having pipe size larger that 2 inches in diameter, hydrostatic test

BID SET SUBMITTAL

July 26, 2018


pressure shall be not less that 200 psi. Hold this pressure not less than 2 hours. Prior to the pressure test, fill that portion of the pipeline being tested with water for a soaking period of not less than 24 hours. For leakage test, use a hydrostatic pressure not less than the maximum pressure of the system. Leakage test may be performed at the same time and at the same test pressure as the pressure test.


BID SET SUBMITTAL

July 26, 2018

EARVIN MAGIC JOHNSON PARK – PHASE 1A FIRE FIGHTING WATER DISTRIBUTION LOS ANGELES, CA 33 12 19-1 COUNTY OF LOS ANGELES COMMUNITY DEVELOPMENT COMMISSION AHBE PROJECT NO. 116030.01 CWE

SECTION 33 12 19

FIRE FIGHTING WATER DISTRIBUTION

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Fire Hydrants

1.2 REFERENCES

A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) A536 - Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Casting.

B. American Water Works Association (AWWA) C503 - Wet-Barrel Fire Hydrants.

C. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 13 - Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems

D. NFPA 14 - Standard for the Installation of Standpipe and Hose Systems

E. NFPA 24 - Standard for the Installation of Private Fire Service Mains and Their Appurtenances

F. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc (UL) 246 - Hydrants for Fire Protection Service

G. SSPWC – Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 33 23 Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples for submittal procedures.

B. Product Data: Provide data acknowledging that products meet requirements of standards referenced.

C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures required to install Products specified.

D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.

E. Project Record Documents: 1. Record location of fire hydrants

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 FIRE HYDRANTS

A. Fire hydrants shall conform to AWWA C503 and shall be listed by Underwriters

BID SET SUBMITTAL

July 26, 2018

EARVIN MAGIC JOHNSON PARK – PHASE 1A FIRE FIGHTING WATER DISTRIBUTION LOS ANGELES, CA 33 12 19-2 COUNTY OF LOS ANGELES COMMUNITY DEVELOPMENT COMMISSION AHBE PROJECT NO. 116030.01 CWE

Laboratories, Inc. in accordance with UL 246.

B. Hydrants shall be wet barrel type, low silhouette, with two 2-1/2 inch outlets and one 4-1/2 inch outlet. All outlets shall have National Standard fire hose thread.

C. Hydrants shall be ductile cast iron conforming to ASTM A536.

D. Hydrants shall be Clow Corporation Model #92 (Slim Line), or approved equal.

E. Break away bolts or spool, and swivel adapter shall be provided.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Hydrants shall be installed per manufacturer recommendations and as detailed. Set hydrants plumb; locate pumper nozzle perpendicular to and facing roadway.

B. Hydrants shall be installed with the outlets facing the street, with 4-1/2 inch opening no less than 2 feet or more than 7 feet from the street curb or edge of pavement.

C. The center of the lowest outlet shall be no less than 18 inches above finished grade.

D. Street valve serving the hydrant shall be located at point of connection to the main and no less than 10 feet from the hydrant.

E. Hydrants to be painted by the Contractor in accordance with NFPA 24 requirements

F. Where subject to mechanical injury, hydrants shall be protected in accordance with the requirements of the applicable editions of NFPA 13, 14, and 24, and the appropriate editions of the California Building Code and the California Fire Code, so as not to interfere with connection to the outlets.

3.2 TESTING

A. Hydrant testing shall be conducted by the Contractor. Fire hydrants shall meet the factory and field test provisions of AWWA C503.

B. Perform field inspection and testing in accordance with Quality Assurance.


BID SET SUBMITTAL

July 26, 2018

EARVIN MAGIC JOHNSON PARK – PHASE 1A SANITARY SEWAGE SYSTEMS LOS ANGELES, CA 33 31 00-1 COUNTY OF LOS ANGELES COMMUNITY DEVELOPMENT COMMISSION AHBE PROJECT NO. 116030.01 CWE

SECTION 33 31 00

SANITARY SEWAGE SYSTEMS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Sanitary drainage piping, fittings and accessories.

B. Connection of building sanitary drainage system to site sewer systems.

C. Cleanout access.

D. Connection of site sewer system to campus sewer system unless indicated otherwise on Drawings.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. ASTM D2751 - Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS) Sewer Pipe and Fittings.

B. SSPWC - Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction, Latest Edition.

C. APWA - American Public Works Association.

D. ANSI/ASTM D3034-Type PSM Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings.


A. Conform to Section 306, Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction, for materials and installation of Work of this Section.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop drawings indicating dimensions, locations and elevations of manholes, cleanouts and sub-surface structures.

B. Product data for pipe and pipe accessories.

C. Project Record Documents 1. Accurately record location of pipe runs, connections, manholes, cleanouts and

invert elevations. 2. Identify and describe unexpected variations to subsoil conditions or discovery

of uncharted utilities.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 SEWER PIPE MATERIALS

A. Plastic Pipe: ASTM D2751, acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene (ABS) material; sizes; bell and spigot style solvent sealed end joints.

BID SET SUBMITTAL

July 26, 2018


B. PVC pipe is for outside conditions.

C. Hub and Spigot, Cast-Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A74, Service class, gray cast iron for gasketed joints. Include ASTM C564, rubber compression-type gaskets.

2.2 PIPE ACCESSORIES

A. Pipe Joints: Mechanical clamp ring type, stainless steel expanding and contracting sleeve, neoprene-ribbed gasket for positive seal.

B. Fittings: Same material as pipe, molded or formed to suit pipe size and end design, in required "T", bends, elbows, cleanouts, reducers, traps and other configurations required.

C. PVC Sewer Pipe and Fittings, NPS 15 and Smaller: ASTM D3034, SDR 35, for solvent-cemented or gasketed joints. 1. Gaskets: ASTM F4 77, Elastomeric seals.

2.3 CLEANOUTS

A. Lid and Frame: Cast iron construction, removable lid, closed checkerboard grill lid design; nominal lid and frame diameter as required for pipe sizes. (APWA 304-0

2.4 Manholes: Pre-cast concrete manhole per City of Pomona Standard No. B-11-83

A. Bedding and Fill: As specified in Section 31 23 17.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXECUTION

A. Verify that trench cut or excavation base is ready to receive work, excavations, dimensions and elevations are as indicated on Drawings.

B. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions.

C. Verify that existing invert elevations on site will allow proper tie in to new work with proper positive slope. Ascertain accuracy prior to trenching and installation of sanitary sewer system.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Hand trim excavations to required elevations. Correct over excavation with approved fill material.

B. Remove large stones or other hard matter that could damage sewer pipe or impede consistent backfilling or compaction.

3.3 INSTALLATION - PIPE

A. Prior to commencing Work, Contractor shall pothole existing utilities at points of connection. Notify Engineer in event of discrepancies.

BID SET SUBMITTAL

July 26, 2018


B. Install pipe, fittings and accessories in accordance with Section 306, SSPWC and manufacturer's instructions. Seal joints watertight.

C. Place pipe on bedding as specified in Section 31 23 17.

D. Lay pipe to slope gradient noted on Drawings with maximum variation from true slope of 1/8 inch in 10 feet.

E. Do not displace or damage pipe when compacting.

F. Connect to site sewer outlet system through installed sleeves.

G. Do not cover joints until lines have been tested and approved.

3.4 INSTALLATION - CLEANOUTS

A. Form bottom of excavation clean and smooth to correct elevation.

B. Establish elevations and pipe inverts.

C. Mount lid and frame level in grout secured to top cone section to elevation indicated.

3.5 PROTECTION

A. Protect pipe cover from damage or displacement until backfilling operation is in progress.


BID SET SUBMITTAL

July 26, 2018

EARVIN MAGIC JOHNSON PARK – PHASE 1A STORM DRAIN SYSTEMS LOS ANGELES, CA 33 41 00-1 COUNTY OF LOS ANGELES COMMUNITY DEVELOPMENT COMMISSION AHBE PROJECT NO. 116030.01 CWE

SECTION 33 41 00

STORM DRAIN SYSTEMS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Storm drainage piping, fittings, and accessories.

B. Connection of building storm water drainage system to site storm drains.

C. Catch basins, paved area drainage, manhole access and site surface drainage.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. ASTM A74 - Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings.

B. ASTM C76 - Reinforced Concrete Culvert, Storm Drain, and Sewer Pipe.

C. ANSl/ASTM C443 - Joints for Circular Concrete Sewer and Culvert Pipe, Using Rubber Gaskets.

D. ANSl/ASTM D2729 - Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings.

E. ANSl/ASTM D3034 - Type PSM Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings.

F. ANSI A21.11 - Rubber Gasket Joints for Cast Iron and Ductile-Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings.

G. SSPWC - Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction, Latest Edition.

H. APWA - American Public Works Association.


A. Conform to Section 306, Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction, for materials and installation of Work of this Section.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop drawings indicating dimensions, locations and elevations of manholes, cleanouts and sub-surface structures.

B. Product data for pipe and pipe accessories.

C. Project Record Documents 1. Accurately record location of pipe runs, connections, manholes, cleanouts and

invert elevations. 2. Identify and describe unexpected variations to subsoil conditions or discovery

BID SET SUBMITTAL

July 26, 2018


of uncharted utilities.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 STORM DRAIN PIPE MATERIALS

A. Reinforced Concrete Pipe: ASTM C76, with wall Type B; mesh or bar reinforcement; tongue and groove end joints.

B. Reinforced Concrete Pipe Joint Device: ASTM C443, rubber compression gasket joint.

C. Plastic Pipe: ASTM D2729, polyvinyl chloride (PVC) material; bell and spigot style solvent sealed end joints.

D. Plastic Pipe: ASTM D3034, Type PSM, polyvinyl chloride (PVC) material; bell and spigot style solvent sealed end joints.

2.2 CATCH BASINS

A. Basin Lid and Frame: Welded steel grating construction conforming to ADA spacing requirements, hinged lid, linear grill lid design. 1. Grid/Openings limited to 1/2 - Inch maximum with direction of grate slots

perpendicular to path of travel.

B. Base Pad: Cast-in-place concrete; leveled top surface to receive concrete shaft sections, sleeved to receive pipe sections.

C. Accessories: Joint Sealant for gasketing of concrete sections flexible butyl resin sealant, ASTM C990, Concrete Sealants CS-102 and CS-202 by ConSeal by Concrete Sealants Inc., New Carlisle, Ohio. Or equal.

D. Provide catch basin unless otherwise indicated on Drawings.

2.3 MANHOLES

A. Lid and Frame: Cast iron construction, removable lockable lid, closed lid design; nominal lid and frame diameter of 26 inches; manufactured by Brooks Products, or equal.

B. Shaft Construction and Cone Top Section: Reinforced precast concrete pipe sections, lipped male/female dry joints; cast steel ladder rungs into shaft sections at 12 inches; nominal shaft diameter of 48 inches; manufactured by Brooks Products, or equal.

C. Base Pad: Cast-in-place concrete; leveled top surface to receive concrete shaft sections, sleeved to receive storm drain pipe sections.

2.4 FILL MATERIAL

A. Bedding and Fill: As specified in Section 31 23 17.

BID SET SUBMITTAL

July 26, 2018


PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that trench cut or excavation base is ready to receive work.

B. Verify existing invert elevations for proper tie-in of new work prior to trenching and nstallation of storm drain system.

C. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Hand trim excavations to required elevations. Correct over excavation with approved fill material.

B. Remove large stones or other hard matter that could damage sewer pipe or impede consistent backfilling or compaction.

3.3 INSTALLATION - PIPE

A. Install pipe, fittings, and accessories in accordance with Section 306, SSPWC. Seal joints watertight.

B. Place pipe on bedding as specified in Section 31 23 17.

C. Lay pipe to slope gradients noted on drawings, with maximum variation for true slope of 1/8 inch in 10 feet.

D. Install bedding at sides and over top of pipe. Provide top cover to minimum compacted thickness of 12 inches.

E. Place bedding in maximum 8 inch lifts, consolidating each lift.

F. Do not displace or damage pipe when compacting.

G. Connect to storm drain municipal system through installed sleeves. Do not cover joints

3.4 INSTALLATION – CATCH BASINS, MANHOLES AND CLEANOUTS

A. Install per Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction.

B. Form bottom of excavation clean and smooth to correct elevation.

C. Form and place cast-in-place concrete base pad, with provision for storm drain pipe end sections.

D. Establish elevations and pipe inverts for inlets and outlets.

E. Mount lid and frame level in grout, secured to top cone section to elevation indicated.

BID SET SUBMITTAL

July 26, 2018


3.5 PROTECTION

A. Protect pipe and filter aggregate cover from damage or displacement until backfilling operation is in progress.

END OF SECTION